Sensor Esy Control Adores

Table of Contents
General Information
Product Selection Guide .................................3
Sensors.................................................................3 Controllers...........................................................11
Controllers
Output Comparison Guide..........................209 Integrated Multi-Function ...........................211
EZ-ZONE RM .........................................................213 EZ-ZONE ST ...........................................................231 EZ-ZONE PM ..........................................................238 EZ-ZONE PM Express .............................................247 SERIES EHG SL10 ................................................251 SERIES EHG ...........................................................255
Think Safety ........................................................18 Tolerances ...........................................................20 Lab Services .......................................................23
Sensors
Thermocouples..................................................33
General Information ...................................................35 General Applications Tube and Wire ..........................41 Mineral Insulated (MI) .................................................61 EXACTSENSE........................................................73 Base Metal ................................................................76 High Temperature ......................................................80 MICROCOIL...........................................................88 Radio Frequency .......................................................90 True Surface ..............................................................92 Multipoints .................................................................94
Temperature and Process ...........................257 EZ-ZONE RM ..........................................................259

EZ-ZONE ST ...........................................................260 SERIES F4 Ramping................................................261 SERIES F4 Process .................................................267 EZ-ZONE PM ..........................................................272 EZ-ZONE PM Express .............................................273 SERIES CV ..............................................................274 SERIES CF ..............................................................277 SERIES EHG SL10 ..................................................280 SERIES EHG ...........................................................281
Resistance Temperature Sensors .............97

Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).................98 Thermistors .............................................................109 ENVIROSEAL HD.................................................116
Limits and Scanners .....................................283

EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Limit .............................285 EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Scanner .......................287 EZ-ZONE PM Limit ..................................................289 EZ-ZONE PM Express Limit.....................................295 SERIES LV...............................................................299 SERIES LF...............................................................302
Accessories ......................................................119
Fittings.....................................................................121 Thermowells ............................................................125 Protection Tubes .....................................................130 Connectors..............................................................134 Connection Heads and Blocks ................................141 Transmitters.............................................................143
SERV-RITE Wire.............................................151
General Information .................................................152 Thermocouple and Extension Wire ..........................153 RTD Lead Wire ........................................................188
Mineral Insulated Cable ...............................191

XACTPAK Cable.....................................................193
Power Switching Devices ...........................305 Comparison Guide ..................................................306 EZ-ZONE ST ...........................................................307 DIN-A-MITE A ........................................................308 DIN-A-MITE B..........................................................311 DIN-A-MITE C .........................................................314 DIN-A-MITE D..........................................................320 POWER SERIES ..................................................323 QPAC ......................................................................328 E-SAFE II ...............................................................333 SERIES CZR............................................................336 Solid State Relays (SSR)..........................................339
WATLOW
Table of Contents
Controllers (Continued)
Operator Interfaces .......................................345 Silver Series Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) .........347
EZ-ZONE Remote User Interface (RUI) and Gateway ..353
Index
Part Number Index .........................................401 Product Category Index...............................409
Indicators ...........................................................357
EZ-ZONE PM ..........................................................359 EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway ....................................360
Terms and Conditions of Sale

Terms and Conditions of Sale ...................411
Data Loggers ....................................................361

EZ-ZONE RM System with Access Module .............363 SpecView Human Machine Interface (HMI) Software..364 Silver Series OIT ......................................................369
Software .............................................................371
EZware-5000...........................................................373 EZ-ZONE Configurator.............................................375 EZ-ZONE GSD Editor ..............................................377 EZ-ZONE LabVIEW Driver....................................378 SpecView HMI Software ..........................................379 EHG SL10 Software ................................................380
Accessories ......................................................381
EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway ....................................383 Serial Converters .....................................................384 Fuses and Fuse Holders..........................................386 Current Transformers ...............................................387 Panel Mount Adapter Plates ....................................388 Arc Suppression and EMI Filters ..............................388 Power Supplies .......................................................389
Control Panels .................................................393

Control Panels .........................................................395
Custom Designs..............................................399 Custom Designs ......................................................399
WATLOW
Product Selection Guide

Sensors
Thermocouples General Applications Tube and Wire
Style F Adjustable Spring
10, 11, 14, 15, 16 and 17 900
Maximum Temperature C
480
See page 43
Adjustable Armor
12
900
480
See page 44
Rigid Sheath
20, 21 and 22
900
480
See page 45
Rigid Sheath with Threaded Fitting
23 and 24
900
480
See page 46
Flange
25
900
480
See page 47
Rigid Sheath
30, 31 and 32
900
480
See page 48
Large Diameter Rigid Sheath
40, 41 and 42
900
480
See page 49
Flexible Extensions
60
900
480
See page 50
Insulated Wire
61 and 62
900
480
See page 5
PFA Encapsulated
65
900
480
See page 5
WATLOW

Sensors
Thermocouples General Applications Tube and Wire
Style F Ring Terminal
70 900
480
See page 53
Nozzle
71
900
480
See page 54
Pipe Clamp
72
900
480
See page 55
Grommet
73
900
480
See page 56
Brass Shim
74
500
260
See page 57
Stainless Steel Shim
75
900
480
See page 58
Polyimide Bracket
OK
400
200
See page 59
Low Profile Polyimide Peel and Stick
OK
400
200
See page 59
Melt Bolt
M1 and M3
500
260
See page 60
WATLOW

Sensors
Thermocouples Mineral Insulated
Style F Cut and Stripped
AB 2200
1200
See page 65
Mini Plug or Jack Termination

X
AC
2200
1200
See page 66
Standard Plug or Jack Termination
AC
2200
1200
See page 67
Metal Transitions with Spring Strain Relief
AF
2200
1200
See page 68
Miniature Transitions
AQ
2200
1200
See page 69
Connection Head
AR
2200
1200
See page 70
Wafer Head
AS
2200
1200
See page 7
For Use With Thermowells
AT
2200
1200
See page 7
WATLOW

Sensors
Thermocouples EXACTSENSE
Style F Integrated Signal Conditioning
EXACTSENSE 1832
1100
See page 75
Base Metal
Style F Bare Elements and Elements with Insulators
14_ _ and 15_ _
1200 2200
See page 77
Immersion Tips
1449
2200
1200
See page 78
Base Metal Standard Thermocouple with Protection
1409
2200
1200
See page 79
High Temperature
Style F Noble Metal
See page 8
1700 3100
211_
Noble Metal Thermocouple Assemblies
214_
3100
1700
See page 8
Exotic Metal Sheath Plug or Jack Termination
HC
4200
2315
See page 86
Exotic Metal Sheath Metal Transitions

See page 87
HF
4200
2315
WATLOW

Sensors
Thermocouples MICROCOIL
Style F Miniature Surface Probe
MC 1292
700
See page 89
Radio Frequency
Style F Thermocouple Probe
TR
500 932
See page 9
True Surface
Style F Insulated Surface Probe
TST
200 400
See page 93
Multipoint
Style F Multipoint
AW
1200 2200
See page 95
WATLOW

Sensors
Resistance Temperature Sensors Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs)
Style F Standard Industrial Insulated Leads
RB 500
260
See page 0
Plug or Jack Termination
RC
500
260
See page 03
Metal Transitions
RF
1200
650
See page 04
Connection Head/Optional Transmitter
RR
1200
650
See page 05
For Use With Thermowells
RT
1200
650
See page 06
Adjustable Spring
10 and 11
500
260
See page 07
WATLOW

Sensors
Resistance Temperature Sensors RTDs
Style F Adjustable Armor Style
12 500
260
See page 07
Cartridge with Flange
25
500
260
See page 07
Open Air
50
500
260
See page 07
Open Air with Flange
55
500
260
See page 07
Surface Mount
80
500
260
See page 07
WATLOW

Sensors
Resistance Temperature Sensors Thermistors
Style F Standard Industrial Thermistor with Insulated Leads
TB 500
260
See page 3
Adjustable Spring Style
10 and 11
500
260
See page 4
Adjustable Armor Style
12
500
260
See page 4
25
500
260
See page 4
Open Air
50
500
260
See page 4
55
500
260
See page 4
Surface Mount
80
500
260
See page 4
ENVIROSEAL HD
Style F
HD
200 392
See page 7
0
WATLOW

Controllers
Temperature and Process PID Controller Integrated Controller: PID, Power Output, Limit and Communications Multi-Loop Controller Communication Converter - Gateway
Over/Under Limit, Alarms
Profile - Ramping Controller
On-Off Controller
Power Switching
Operator Interface
Data Logging
Product EZ-ZONE RM EZ-ZONE PM EZ-ZONE ST EZ-ZONE PM Express SERIES F4 SERIES EHG SL0 SERIES EHG SERIES CV, CF SERIES LV, LF DIN-A-MITE A DIN-A-MITE B DIN-A-MITE C DIN-A-MITE D POWER SERIES QPAC E-SAFE II SERIES CZR SOLID STATE Relay (SSR) EZ-ZONE EZK RUI Silver Series SpecView EZ-ZONE Configurator
PC Software
Indicator
Page 3 38 3 47 6 5 55 74 99 308 3 34 30 33 38 333 336
339
353
347 364 375
WATLOW

Controllers
The specifications in the following tables are best available values in each category. Not all combinations of these values are available in a single model number.
Integrated Multi-Function
Communication Protocols Dimensions
Per module: 2.03 in. W x 4.41 in. H x 6.1 in. D (51.56 mm W x 44.45 mm H x 148 mm D) With 25 or 40A heat sink: 7.43 in. H x 2.5 in. W x 6.14 in. D (188.6 mm H x 63.5 mm W x 156 mm D) (See details for size with other options) Dimensions vary with DIN size Dimensions vary with DIN size 3.496 in. W x 2.196 in. H x 1.907 in. D (88.80 mm W x 55.78 mm H x 48.07 mm D) without optional module 3.75 in. L x 1.85 in. Diameter (95 mm L x 47 mm Diameter)
EZ-ZONE RM
152
192
256
Maximum Output (A)
Maximum Control Loops
Maximum Limit Loops
F
DIN-rail 15A 0 to 149
Ambient Operating Range C

-18 to 65
Maximum Monitor Channels
Mounting
Profiling
Standard bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard bus, Modbus RTU
See page 3
EZ-ZONE ST
DIN-rail
75A
0 to 158
-18 to 70
See page 3
EZ-ZONE PM
32, 116, 8, 14 DIN front panel

1
15A
0 to 149
-18 to 65
Standard bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU
See page 38
EZ-ZONE PM Express
32, 116 DIN front panel
15A
0 to 149
-18 to 65
Standard bus
See page 47
SERIES EHG SL0
In-line, sub panel
10A
32 to158
0 to 70
Modbus RTU
See page 5
SERIES EHG
In-line
10A
32 to 158
0 to 70
See page 55
WATLOW

Controllers
Temperature and Process
Per module: 2.03 in. W x 4.41 in. H x 6.1 in. D (51.56 mm W x 44.45 mm H x 148 mm D) With 25 or 40A heat sink: 7.43 in. H x 2.5 in. W x 6.14 in. D (188.6 mm H x 63.5 mm W x 156 mm D) (See details for size with other options 3.93 in. H x 3.93 in. W x 3.85 in. D (99 mm H x 99 mm W x 97 mm D) 3.93 in. H x 3.93 in. W x 3.85 in. D (99 mm H x 99 mm W x 97 mm D) Dimensions vary with DIN size Dimensions vary with DIN size
EZ-ZONE RM
152
192
256
Maximum Output (A)
Maximum Limit Loops
F
DIN-rail 15A 0 to 149

-18 to 65
Mounting
Profiling
Standard bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard bus, Modbus RTU
See page 59
EZ-ZONE ST
DIN-rail
75A
0 to 158
-18 to 70
See page 60
SERIES F4 Ramping
4 DIN front panel
0.5A
32 to 130
0 to 55
Modbus RTU
See page 6
SERIES F4 Process
1 4 DIN front panel
0.5A
32 to 149
0 to 65
Modbus RTU
See page 67
EZ-ZONE PM
32, 116, 18, 15A 4 DIN front panel

1
0 to 149
-18 to 65
See page 7
EZ-ZONE PM Express
15A
0 to 149
-18 to 65
Standard bus
See page 73
WATLOW
3

Controllers
Front panel mount: 2.85 in. W x 2.85 in. H x 2.04 in. D (72.4 mm W x 72.4 mm H x 51.7 mm D) Front panel mount: 2.85 in. W x 2.85 in. H x 2.04 in. D (72.4 mm W x 72.4 mm H x 51.7 mm D) Without optional module: 3.496 in. W x 2.196 in. H x 1.907 in. D (88.80 mm W x 55.78 mm H x 48.07 mm D) 3.75 in. L x 1.85 in. Diameter (95.25 mm L x 47 mm Diameter)
Maximum Output (A)
Maximum Limit Loops
F SERIES CV
1 DIN-rail, front panel 8A 32 to 158

0 to 70
Mounting
Profiling
See page 74
SERIES CF
DIN-rail, front panel
8A
32 to 158
0 to 70
See page 77
SERIES EHG SL0
In-line, sub panel
10A
32 to 158
0 to 70
Modbus RTU
See page 80
SERIES EHG
10A
32 to 158
0 to 70
See page 8
4
WATLOW

Controllers
Limits and Alarm Scanners
Per module: 2.03 in. W x 4.41 in. H x 6.1 in. D (51.56 mm W x 44.45 mm H x 148 mm D) Per module: 2.03 in. W x 4.41 in. H x 6.1 in. D (51.56 mm W x 44.45 mm H x 148 mm D) Dimensions vary with DIN size Dimensions vary with DIN size Front panel mount: 2.85 in. W x 2.85 in. H x 2.04 in. D (72.4 mm W x 72.4 mm H x 51.7 mm D) DIN-rail mount: 3.08 in. W x 4.42 in. H x 3.57 in. D (78.1 mm W x 122.3 mm H x 90.7 mm D)
Maximum Output (A)
F EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Limit

192 192 DIN-rail 5A 0 to 149

-18 to 65
Maximum Limit Loops
Mounting
See page 85
EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Scanner
256
DIN-rail
5A
0 to 149
-18 to 65
See page 87
EZ-ZONE PM Limit
5A
0 to 149
-18 to 65
See page 89
EZ-ZONE PM Express Limit
1 32, 116 DIN front panel
5A
0 to 149
-18 to 65
Standard bus
See page 95
SERIES LV
8A
32 to 158
0 to 70
See page 99
SERIES LF
8A
32 to 158
0 to 70
See page 30
WATLOW
5

Controllers
Power Switching Devices
Phase Configurations Dimensions C
-18 to 70 With 25 or 40A heat sink: 7.43 in. H x 2.5 in. W x 6.14 in. D (188.6 mm H x 63.5 mm W x 156 mm D) (See details for size with other options) 3.7 in. H x 1.8 in. W x 3.9 in. D (95 mm H x 45 mm W x 98 mm D) 3.7 in. H x 3.1 in. W x 4.9 in. D (95 mm H x 80 mm W x 124 mm D) DIN-rail mount, without fan: 5.45 in. H x 3.25 in. W x 5.89 in. D (138 mm H x 83 mm W x 150 mm D) 7.25 in. H x 2.5 in. W x 9.4 in. D (185 mm H x 65 mm W x 240 mm D) 14 in. H x 7.5 in. W x 7.9 in. D (354 mm H x 191 mm W x 200 mm D)
Maximum Current
F
Driven by on-board controller Zero-cross, DIN-rail phase angle 0 to 158
EZ-ZONE ST
75A
See page 307
DIN-A-MITE A
25A
VAC/VDC contactor, 4-20mA
Zero-cross
DIN-rail
0 to 176
See page 308
DIN-A-MITE B
40A
1 or 3
VAC/VDC contactor, 4-20mA, multi-zone input
Zero-cross
DIN-rail
Shorted SCR alarm
0 to 176
See page 3
DIN-A-MITE C
80A
1 or 3
VAC/VDC contactor, 4-20mA, multi-zone input, potentiometer
Zero-cross, DIN-rail, phase through angle wall
Shorted 0 to 176 SCR alarm, open heater alarm on zero-cross
See page 34
DIN-A-MITE D
100A
VAC/VDC contactor
Zero-cross DIN-rail
0 to 176
See page 30
POWER SERIES
250A
1 or 3
0 to 20mA and 0-10VDC scalable, multi-zone input
See page 33
Zero-cross, Back panel Load phase current angle monitor, soft start, heater bakeout, current limiting, shorted SCR, open heater alarm output Modbus RTU com.
32 to 149
Ambient Operating Range

-18 to 80 -18 to 80 -18 to 80 -18 to 80 0 to 65
Mounting
Other Features
Output Firing
Inputs
6
WATLOW

Controllers
Phase Configurations Dimensions C
0 to 50 Q32 style C: 13 in. H x 13.7 in. W x 10.25 in. D (330 mm H x 350 mm W x 260 mm D) Q32 style E: 33 in. H x 21 in. W x 13.3 in. D (840 mm H x 535 mm W x 340 mm D) 3.82 in. H x 5.54 in. W x 1.85 in. D (97.03 mm H x 140.72 mm W x 46.99 mm D) 18A models: 3.95 in. H x 0.89 in. W x 3.9 in. D (100 mm H x 22.6 mm W x 99 mm D) 2.25 in. H x 1.75 in. W x 0.9 in. D (57.2 mm H x 44.5 mm W x 23 mm D)
Maximum Current
F
VAC/VDC contactor 4-20mA Zero-cross, Back panel Open phase heater angle alarm, shorted SCR alarm 32 to 122
QPAC
1000A
1 or 3
See page 38
E-SAFE II
35A
1, 2 or 3
VAC/VDC contactor
Zero-cross
Back panel
32 to 158
See page 333
SERIES CZR
42A
VAC/VDC contactor
Zero-cross
DIN-rail, through wall
176 max.
See page 336
Solid State Relays 75A (SSR)
VAC/VDC contactor
Zero-cross
Back panel Shorted SSR alarm
-40 to 185
See page 339
WATLOW
Ambient Operating Range

0 to 70 80 max. -40 to 85
Mounting
Other Features
Output Firing
Inputs
7
Think Safety
All thermal systems pose inherent hazards if applied incorrectly. Improper application and failure to adhere to recognized national, state and local electrical codes as well as agency standards can result in injury to personnel or damage to plant and process. Users are responsible for determining controller or sensor-to-application compatibility. Care should always be exercised in controller or sensor selection, installation and use. Responsibility for sensor and controller installation and wiring lie with the customer. Each sensor, power and temperature controller is packaged with its own user manual. Be sure to review and understand the manual, which will help maximize safety, thermal system performance, efficiency and product life. All Watlow temperature and power controllers and sensors should be installed by qualified personnel who are knowledgeable about the thermal systems characteristics and in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable state or local codes.
Sensor Safety
If a sensor is used in a medical application, with life or death consequences, careful attention must be paid to its fit for the application with appropriate redundancies and/or alarms built into the product. If the sensor is used in an industrial environment where hazards exist, protection methods (isolating sensors and wiring from explosive or flammable substances) should be considered to prevent failures or short circuits from becoming dangerous to personnel and property. It is good engineering practice to always consider the consequences of a catastrophic failure and the affect it would have on personnel and property. Please institute the appropriate safeguards to limit any danger.
Controller Safety
The following recommendations apply to all Watlow temperature and power controllers as well as control panels: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions contained in the user manual Always disconnect electrical power prior to installing, servicing or replacing temperature or power controllers All temperature and power controllers should be used with approved conductors of the correct wire gauge Do not use solid state power controllers in safety limit controller circuits. Solid state components tend to fail in a closed circuit mode and will not cut off power
Safety limit control should be provided by an isolated, redundant sensor and agency-approved controller of the appropriate type, design and installation Electrical enclosures and/or control panels housing temperature and power controllers should match the applications environment and be able to withstand worst-case failures especially in hazardous locations Do not apply temperature or power controllers where ambient conditions exceed specified operating environments and/or exceed power draw permitted by the device or applicable rating curve Pay special attention to wiring practices. Power, sensor and communications wiring should be handled appropriately to avoid inductive and capacitive coupling. These conditions can create errant and/or erratic operation and pose a safety hazard. Use noise suppression devices where appropriate. Make ground connections for any device only to the appropriate electrical ground for that device (chassis, safety or computer ground)
8
WATLOW
Think Safety
Designing Safe Thermal Systems
Most heated thermal systems include: A heat source, either fuel fired or electrical resistance A temperature controller A temperature sensor The sensor produces a signal value based on the temperature to which it is exposed. The temperature controller interprets the signal into a value that is either above, below or at a then predetermined set point. The controller will then create an output signal to command a device to turn the heat source on or off. As with any heated thermal system, failure in the sensor, temperature controller or heat-source controlling device could create an over- or under-temperature condition. These conditions can ruin product in process or pose a danger to personnel and property. Limit controllers are used to prevent injury and property loss that could occur if a process variables value were to cross outside the safe operating range for the system. In systems where temperature is controlled, a limit controller should be used to respond to an over- or under-temperature condition before it becomes a hazard. A properly applied limit controller senses when the temperature or other process variable is outside the limit and shuts the system down. The limit controller must be independent of the primary control system and able to interrupt the flow of energy that could cause a hazard. For example, in a system where temperature is controlled with an electric heater, the limit controller must be able to disconnect the heater from the power source when the temperature exceeds the limit. A proper design requires user intervention to correct the cause of the failure before the system is restored to normal operation. Usually, the sensor used in a limit control system does not need to be as accurate as the primary sensor. Its only function is to create a temperature signal that allows a controller to determine if a preprogrammed over- or under-temperature condition exists. Sensor longevity and aging must be considered if the sensor will have an unacceptable impact on the limit control systems ability to accurately determine an over- or under-temperature condition. As with enclosures, there are agency standards for the design and construction of limit control systems, and their suitability for use exist.
Designing Intrinsically Safe Circuits

When installing temperature sensors in hazardous areas, circuits should be made intrinsically safe with barriers to prevent sparks and excessive heat on the safe side from reaching the hazardous area and causing sparks. All barrier device parameters affect sensor performance and the sensor circuit. Parameters include: Polarity rated for AC or DC signals Rated voltage or working voltage of the signal the device is designed to carry before it senses a fault Internal resistance, as the amount of resistance inherent to the barrier device, affects the strength of the current signal it is allowing to pass
WATLOW
9
Tolerances
Thermocouples
ANSI Tolerances As of 1969, nomenclature of the American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) supersedes previously used International Society of Automation (ISA) designations. The standard and special tolerances in the table below come from ANSI Circular MC96.1-1982. Reference Junction 3F (0C)
Thermocouple Type E J K N R or S T Cryogenic Range Eb Kb Tb
a
Standard and special tolerances stated below apply only to temperature ranges listed for each thermocouple type.
Temperature Range F 32 32 32 32 32 32 to to to to to to 1652 1382 2282 2282 2642 662 0 0 0 0 0 0 C to to to to to to 900 750 1250 1250 1400 350
Tolerancesa Standard whichever is greater 1.7 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.5 1.0 C C C C C C or or or or or or 0.5% 0.75% 0.75% 0.75% 0.25% 0.75% 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.6 0.5
Special
C C C C C C
or or or or or or
3 3 3
0.4% 0.4% 0.4% 0.4% 0.1% 0.4%
-328 to 32 -328 to 32 -328 to 32
-200 to 0 -200 to 0 -200 to 0

3
1.7 C or 1% 2.2 C or 2% 1.0 C or 1.5%
Where tolerances are given in percent, the percentage applies to the temperature measurement in degrees Celsius. For example, the standard tolerance of Type J is 0.75 percent. If the temperature being measured is 538C, the tolerance is 0.75 percent of 538C, or 4.0C. To determine tolerance in degrees Fahrenheit, multiply the tolerance in degrees Celsius times 1.8. Thermocouples and thermocouple material are normally supplied to meet tolerances specified in the table for the normal specified range. The same materials, however, may not fall within the cryogenic tolerances in the second section of the table. Tolerances shown in this table do not necessarily indicate accuracy of temperature measurements used following initial heating of the materials.
Little information is available to justify establishing special tolerances for cryogenic temperatures. Limited experience suggests the following tolerances for Types E and T thermocouples: Type E -200 to 0 C 1.0 C or 0.5% (whichever is greater) Type T -200 to 0 C 0.5 C or 0.8% (whichever is greater) Due to characteristics of the materials, cryogenic tolerances for Type J thermocouples and special cryogenic tolerances for Type K thermocouples are not listed.
Letter Designations
ANSI Letter E J K N R S T T/C Leg EP EN JP JN KP KN NP NN RP RN SP SN TP TN Popular Generic and Trade Names Chromel, Tophel, HAI-KP Constantan, Cupron, Advance Iron Constantan, Cupron, Advance Chromel, Tophel, HAI-KP Alumel, Nail, HAI-KN Nicrosil Nisil Platinum 13% Rhodium Pure Platinum Platinum 10% Rhodium Pure Platinum Copper Constantan, Cupron, Advance
0
WATLOW
Tolerances
RTDs
RTD Tolerance Class Definitions The two equations shown below define tolerances for platinum DIN Class A and B RTDs, where [t] is the actual temperature of the platinum elements. JIS tolerances are the same as DIN tolerances.
DIN class A: DIN class B: Base resistance: Temperature Coefficient of Resistance (TCR): (0.15 + 0.002 [tC]) (0.30 + 0.005 [tC]) 100 @ 0C 0.00385 //C (DIN-IEC-761) 0.003916 //C (JIS 1604-1981)
Table of Tolerance Valuese

Temperature (C) -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 650
e
Resistance Value 18.49 60.25 100.00 138.50 175.84 212.02 247.04 280.90 313.59 329.51
Tolerance DIN-IEC-76 Class A Class B C () C () 0.55 (0.24) 1.3 (0.56) 0.35 (0.14) 0.8 (0.32) 0.15 (0.06) 0.3 (0.12) 0.35 (0.13) 0.8 (0.30) 0.55 (0.20) 1.3 (0.48) 0.75 0.95 1.15 1.35 1.45 (0.27) (0.33) (0.38) (0.43) (0.46) 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.6 (0.64) (0.79) (0.93) (1.06) (1.13)
Tolerance values applicable to JIS Curve 0.003916 (JIS 1604-1981).
Sheath Tolerances
Length and diameter are important considerations for proper installation of temperature sensors. The tables below provide tolerances on these key dimensions of Watlow catalog sensor products.
General Application and RTD Sheath Tolerances Diameter Tolerance (in.)
0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003
Sheath Diameter (in.)

3
Length Tolerance (in.)

0.125 0.125 0.125 0.250
8 16 1 4 3 8
1
Mineral Insulated (MI) Thermocouple Sheath Tolerances Length Tolerance (in.) Diameter (in.)
0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250
Diameter Tolerance (in.)

+ + + + + + + 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001
up to 4 in. 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125
over 4 in. 1% 1% 1% 1 2% 1 2% 1 2% 1 2%
Flexible Lead Tolerances

General Application, MI Thermocouple and RTD Lead Length Lead Length (in.) Tolerance (in.)
Under 6 6 to 24 Over 24 to 120 Over 120 Note: Strip length tolerances 18 in. + + + + 1 2 6 5% 0 0 0 -0
WATLOW
Tolerances
Sheath Configuration
Standard shipping methods and element strength require that long length mineral insulated sensors be shipped in coil format. This chart provides the standard sheath configuration by diameter. MI Thermocouple Standard Sheath Configuration
Sheath Diameter in. 0.020 0.032 Standard Length in. Up to 20 From 20 to 170 170 to 300 greater than 300 Up to 20 From 20 to 120 120 to 200 Greater than 200 Up to 50 50 to 540 (45 feet) Greater than 540 (45 feet) Up to 96 Greater than 96
Configuration Straight 3 in. coil 6 in. coil 9-10 in. coil Straight 3 in. coil 6 in. coil 9-10 in. coil Straight 9-10 in. coil 24 in. coil Straight 24 in. coil
0.040
0.063
0.125 0.188 0.250
WATLOW
Lab Services
General Information
Prototype Testing and Quality Certification
Using Watlow lab services at the front end of product design verifies that a finished product is built to specifications set forth by the worlds leading standards agencies. A battery of tests are performed to research and develop the optimum sensor for an application. In-house services are also available for testing not only Watlow designed and manufactured sensors, wire and cable, but for any temperature sensing products.
Product Development and Prototype Test Lab

Watlow prototype testing evaluates new sheath materials, configurations and manufacturing processes. Watlow is continually stretching limits and searching for improved methods to handle unique applications. Testing is offered for: Time response Measures sensor output relative to a step change in temperature from ambient up to 160F (70C) per ASTM Vibration Sine and random electrodynamic excitation High temperatures Up to 3090F (1700C) Cryogenic temperatures Up to -320F (-195C) for liquid nitrogen; -110F (-80C) continuously variable up to 32F (0C) Tensile and compression Testing to 1,000 lb (500 kg) Humidity To 200F/95 percent RH (95C/95 percent RH) Life testing In molten aluminum and corrosive liquids Cycle and drift Testing up to 3090F (1700C) Wire insulation abrasion testing Repeated scrape and wire to wire Micro-hardness Vickers scale or conversion to other common scales. Dielectric breakdown testing Capabilities to 5000VDC
WATLOW
3
Lab Services
Quality Certification Lab
Watlow certification verifies that the finished sensor complies with initial calibration tolerances as established by ASTM Standard E 230. This standard is based on the thermodynamic temperature scale of TIS 90, succeeding IPTS 68. Initial sensor tolerances are susceptible to change during use due to environmental factors, including contamination, temperature, furnace gradient and physical abuse. Watlows advanced capabilities enable sensor calibration across a broad range of temperatures, from cryogenic -320 to 3090F (-195 to 1700C). ISO 10012 is the standard for all sensor and instrument calibration and results are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Following are standard methods and specifications for sensor calibration: ASTM E207 ASTM E220 ASTM E230 ASTM E644 AMS 2750C Certification Testing Offered
Service End-to-end calibration Dielectric testing Helium leak test Radiographic inspection Metallographic examination Description Compares each end of a length of thermocouple wire, utilizing a common junction measurement test. This is a requirement to verify homogeneity requirements. Specifications ASTM E207, E220, E230
Sensor X-rays verify the nonexistence of cracks at weld points that could let in humidity or gas and potentially shorten the life of the thermocouple.
Performance levels of wire insulations in the presence of high, local fields caused by ASTM D149 electrical discharges. Routinely used in Watlow quality control testing. Verifies the sheath integrity in metal-sheathed cable and sensors to 1000 psi (70 kg/cm2) in specially designed pressure chambers. Determines dimensions and detects and evaluates cracks, voids, inclusions and discontinuities. Technicians are qualified under SNT-TC-1A. Reveals the constituents and structures of metals. Photomicrographs are also available to determine and document average grain size and structure of prepared specimens. Determines compaction of insulating materials in metal-sheathed cable. Determines long-term stability and drift characteristics. Subjects individual sensors to repeated cycling through a temperature range. Measures electrical insulation resistance properties between thermoelements and the sheath at ambient as well as elevated temperatures to determine presence of moisture or impurities which could affect sensor performance. ASTM E235 ASTM E94, E142 ASTM E3, E112, E235
Compaction density test Drift test Thermal cycle test Insulation resistance
ASTM D2771 ASTM E601, E644 ASTM E235 ASTM E780, E235, E644
Spurious EMF Micro-hardness
Determines homogeneity of the thermoelements. Performed at high temperatures on Watlow the entire length of XACTPAK mineral Insulated, metal-sheathed cable. Determines hardness of sheath or conductors used to measure a materials resistance to penetration (hardness) as a predictor of strength, machinability, brittleness, ductility and wear resistance. Vickers
4
WATLOW
Lab Services
Quality Certification Lab (Continued)
Calibration and Certification
SERV-RITE thermocouple wire and elements can be factory calibrated and certified at an extra charge. Each thermocouple, coil, reel or spool of wire is tagged to show the individual departure from curve. Once calibrated, exact departure from the standard curve at any specified temperature is known and considered. Thermocouples and wire samples sent to the factory for calibrating must be at least 36 inches in length. Standard calibrating temperature points range from 32 to 2300F (0 to 1260C), depending on calibration, gauge size and insulation. Sub-zero and cryogenic calibration is available at fixed points, such as boiling helium, nitrogen and sublimated carbon dioxide, including temperatures down to -110F (-80C). A certificate of calibration and a calibration results tag are furnished for all items calibrated.
Common Certifications
The following standard certifications are available from Watlow. Requirements for the following standard certifications available from Watlow must be stated on an order. Certificate # - Certificate of Compliance/Conformity This certification states that the product supplied meets the purchase order requirements. Certificate # - Certificate of Compliance to ASTM E30 Tolerance This certification states that the product being supplied meets the purchase order requirements, including the correct calibration type and tolerance. This certification is also used when conformance to ASTM E230 must be documented. Certificate #3 - Certificate of Conformance to ISO 00 This certificate certifies that Watlows calibration system is in accordance with ISO 10012. Certificate #4 - Certificate of Traceability to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) This certification certifies that the materials received are traceable to NIST via calibration data of the thermoelements used to manufacture the product.
Certificate #5 - Certificate of Calibration for Bulk XACTPAK This calibration certificate provides overall lot calibration data for the bulk XACTPAK. The data will indicate how the final sensor will perform without the additional cost to calibrate each individual sensor. Certificate #6 - Certificate of Calibration at Standard Calibration Points This calibration certification provides preproduction calibration values of the insulated wire product at standard calibration check points. Certificate #7 - Chemical Composition of Tubing and Insulation in XACTPAK Metal Sheathed Cable Products Watlow tubing and insulator vendors supply certification on the chemical composition and physical characteristics of their products (material certification) with each lot received. When requested, certifications are duplicated (proprietary information is blocked out) and sent to customers. Certificate #7A - Chemical and Physical Analysis of Conductors in Insulated Wire Products This certification offers nominal chemical composition of the alloy used in insulated wire products. Certificate #8 - Certificate of Calibration at Specified Temperatures This calibration certification provides post-production calibration data. Calibration is performed in the Watlow calibration laboratory with NIST traceable calibration standards. In addition to calibration data, the test standard, equipment, NIST traceability and reference to applicable calibration procedures are stated. Note: Custom certifications are available upon request.
WATLOW
5
Lab Services
Quality Certification Lab (Continued)
Thermocouple Calibration Watlow offers testing for application temperatures other than the standard points in a range from -320 to 3092F (-195 to 1700C), depending on material. Use outside of the temperature limits of ASTM E230 is not recommended. Existing electromotive force (EMF) data is available from initial testing of base metal thermoelements and from sample testing of manufactured lots of finished products. Data is at specific standard test temperatures for each thermocouple type, but may not be available on all lots.
Calibration* (Thermocouple Type) E, K, J, N, T Temperature F (C) 32 to 2300 (0 to 1260) 32 to 3000 (0 to 1650) Specifications
ASTM E207 ASTM E220 ASTM E230
B, R, S E, K, N, T
-320 plus -110 to 32 (-195 plus -80 to 0) *Maximum temperatures vary depending on thermocouple type.
A lab service technician uses a metallurgical microscope to examine the microstructure of the metallic components in Watlows mineral insulated metal sheathed cable, XACTPAK.
Recommended Sensor Straight Length Required for Calibration

Length in. (mm) Temperature F (C) -320 only (-195 only) -110 to 550 (-80 to 290) 550 to 2000* (290 to 1090*) Above 2000 (Above 1090) Thermocouples Min. Max. 6 (150) 6 (150) 15 (380) 18 (455) 60 (1525) 60 (1525) 10 ft (3 m) 10 ft (3 m) RTDs Min. 6 (150) 6 (150) 15 (380) NA Max. 60 (1525) 60 (1525) 10 ft (3 m) NA
*In this temperature range, some sensors longer than 6 in. (150 mm), but shorter than the stated length minimum of 15 in. (380 mm), can be calibrated. Please call Lab Services to find out if your sensor meets the necessary criteria.
6
WATLOW
Lab Services
Thermocouple Accuracy
Watlow uses a verification process at selected temperature points to assure wire and XACTPAK products conform to ASTM error limits. Samples are taken to the Watlow calibration laboratory and verified for accuracy with NIST traceable standards. Conformance to error limits is required at all test temperatures. The following charts provide the standard test temperatures by thermocouple type. XACTPAK and Mineral Insulated (MI) Insulated Thermocouples
Calibration E J K N T Standard Calibration Points F* 200, 600, 1000, 1600 200, 600, 1000, 1400 600, 1000, 1600, 2000 600, 1000, 1600, 2000 200, 400
SERV-RITE Insulated Wire and General Application Thermocouples

Calibration E J K N T EX JX KX NX RX SX TX Standard Calibration Points F* 300, 500, 1000, 1600 200, 500, 1000, 1400 300, 500, 1000, 1600, 2000 300, 500, 1000, 1600, 2000 200, 500 200, 400 200, 400 200, 300, 400 200, 300, 400 400 400 200, 400
* Calibration is not made when temperature exceeds the sheath rating.
WATLOW
7
Lab Services
Initial Accuracy of Temperature Sensors
Industry specifications establish the accuracy limits of industrial temperature sensors. These limits define initial sensor performance at the time of manufacture. Time, temperature and environmental operating conditions may
Reference Junction 32F (0C) Calibration Type
a c
cause sensors to change during use. Also, consider that overall system accuracy will depend on the instrument and other installation parameters.
Thermocouples Tolerances on Initial Values of Electromotive Force vs. Temperature

Temperature Range F (C) (0 to 870) (0 to 760) (0 to 1260) (0 to 1480) (0 to 370) (-200 to 0) (-200 to 0) (-200 to 0) (0 (0 (0 (0 to to to to 400) 400) 400) 200)
b b b b b b b b
Tolerances (whichever is greater) Standard Special F (C) F (1.7 (2.2 (2.2 (1.5 (1.0 (1.7 (2.2 (1.0 (1.7) (2.2) (2.2) (1.0) (5.0) or or or or or or or or 0.5%) 0.75%) 0.75%) 0.25%) 0.75%) 1%) 2%) 1.5%)
b b b b b b b b
(C) or or or or or 0.4%) 0.4%) 0.4%) 0.1%) 0.4%)

5 5 5
Thermocouples E 32 to 1600 J 32 to 1400 K or N 32 to 2300 R or S 32 to 2700 T 32 to 700 Ed -328 to 32 Kd -328 to 32 Td -328 to 32 Extension Wires f g EX 32 to 400 JX 32 to 400 KX or NX 32 to 400 TX 32 to 200 Compensating Extension Wires h i RX, SX 32 to 400
(1.0 (1.1 (1.1 (0.6 (0.5
3.0 4.0 4.0 1.8 9.0
1.0 1.1 1.1 0.5
(1.8) (2.0) (2.0) (0.9)
(0 to 200)
a Tolerances in this table apply to new, essentially homogeneous thermocouple wire, normally in the size range 0.25 to 3 mm in diameter (No. 30 to No. 8 AWG) and used at temperatures not to exceed the recommended limits shown above. If used at higher temperatures, these tolerances may not apply. b At a given temperature that is expressed in C, the tolerance expressed in F is 1.8 times larger than the tolerance expressed in C. Note: Wherever applicable, percentage-based tolerances must be computed from temperatures that are expressed in C. c Caution: Users should be aware that certain characteristics of thermocouple materials, including the EMF vs. temperature relationship, may change with time in use. Consequently, test results and performance obtained at the time of manufacture may not necessarily apply throughout an extended period of use. Tolerances provided above apply only to new wire as delivered to the user and do not allow for changes in characteristics with use. The magnitude of changes will depend on factors such as wire size, temperature, time of exposure and environment. Further noted that due to possible changes in homogeneity, attempting to recalibrate used thermocouples is likely to yield irrelevant results and is not recommended. However, it may be appropriate to compare used thermocouples in-situ with new or known good thermocouples to ascertain their suitability for further service under conditions of comparison. d Thermocouples and thermocouple materials are normally supplied to meet tolerances specified in the table for temperatures above 0C. The same materials, however, may not fall within the tolerances given for temperatures below C in the second section of the table. Materials required to meet tolerances stated for temperatures below 0C must be stated in the purchase order. Selection of materials will usually be required.
e Special tolerances for temperatures below 0C are difficult to justify due to limited available information. However, the following values for Types E and T thermocouples are suggested as a guide for discussion between purchaser and supplier: Type E: -200 to 0C 1.0C or 0.5 percent (whichever is greater); Type T: -200 to 0C 0.5 or0.8 percent (whichever is greater). Initial values of tolerance for Type J thermocouples at temperatures below 0C, and special tolerances for Type K thermocouples below 0C, are not given due to characteristics of the materials. f Tolerances shown in the table represent the maximum error contribution allowable from new and essentially homogeneous thermocouple extension wire when exposed to the full temperature range shown above. Extension grade materials are not intended for use outside of the temperature range shown. g Thermocouple extension wire contributes to the total thermoelectric signal that depends on the temperature difference between the extreme ends of the extension wire length. The actual magnitude of any error introduced into a measuring circuit by homogeneous and correctly connected extension wires is equal to the algebraic difference of the deviations at its two end temperatures, as determined for that extension wire pair. h Tolerances in the table apply to new and essentially homogeneous thermocouple compensating extension wire when used at temperatures within the range shown above. i Thermocouple compensating extension wire contributes to the total thermoelectric signal that depends on the temperature difference between the extreme ends of the compensating extension wire length. ** Special tolerance grade compensating extension wires are not available.
8
WATLOW
Lab Services
Initial Accuracy of Temperature Sensors (Continued)
Generally, if accuracy is the most important concern and the application temperature is between 284F and 1202F (140C and 650C), RTDs are the best choice. Three-wire is most common, but four-wire provides higher system accuracy.
Resistance Temperature DetectorsRTDs

Table of Tolerance Values
Resistance Temperature Value C -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 18.52 60.26 100.00 138.51 175.86 212.05 247.09 280.98 313.71 329.64 Tolerance DIN-IEC-75 Class B Class A C () C () 0.55 0.35 0.15 0.35 0.55 0.75 0.95 1.15 1.35 1.45 (0.24) (0.14) (0.06) (0.13) (0.20) (0.27) (0.33) (0.38) (0.43) (0.46) 1.3 0.8 0.3 0.8 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.6 (0.56) (0.32) (0.12) (0.30) (0.48) (0.64) (0.79) (0.93) (1.06) (1.13)
Thermistors
Thermistors are a cost effective choice when working with a narrow range of temperatures. Resistance at 77F (25C) and ranges:
Epoxy Bead Tolerance % (+0.3C) #11 #12 1000 3000 -76 to 302F (-60 to 150F) -76 to 302F (-60 to 150F) Glass Bead Tolerance 5% (+3C) #16 100,000 -76 to 500F (-60 to 260F)
Note: Other thermistors available on request.
Where t is the actual temperature, in C, of the platinum elements. RTD Tolerance Class Definitions DIN class A: [0.15 + 0.002 |t| ]C DIN class B: [0.30 + 0.005 |t| ]C
WATLOW
9
Notes
30
WATLOW
Notes
WATLOW
3
Notes
3
WATLOW
Watlows Sensors, Wire and Cable Offering

SENSORS
Watlow manufactures sensor products to fit customer needs. A wide variety of temperature sensors including thermocouples, resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) and thermistors as well as wire, mineral insulated cable, connectors and hardware are supplied by and manufactured at Watlows fully integrated facility. Controlling all of the processes, beginning with selecting bare alloy, helps to ensure that all Watlow manufactured products meet the highest industry standards for performance, reliability and customer service. Watlow also has extensive test lab capabilities and uses a verification process at selected temperature points to ensure that products conform to ASTM error limits. For more complex needs, extended capability products that go beyond traditional functionality are available for large quantity orders. Please contact Watlow for specific application requirements and discuss which products may best fit the application.
Watlow offers outstanding product and applications support as well as less than one week delivery on millions of standard product configurations.
WATLOW
International Color Codes

ANSI Code ANSI/ASTM ANSI/ASTM T/C Exten. BS 1843 (Britain) DIN JIS 43710 C1610-1981 (Germany) (Japan) IEC 584-3 (Europe) Common Uses
E J K N R S T
Suitable for use in oxidizing or inert atmosphere. Limited use in vacuum or reducing atmosphere. Suitable for sub zero. Reducing vacuum, inert atmosphere. Limited use in oxidizing above 1004F (540C). Not recommended for sub zero. Suitable for use in oxidizing or inert atmosphere. Limited use in vacuum or reducing atmosphere. Suitable for sub zero. Alternative to Type K. More stable at high temperatures.
Suitable for use in oxidizing or inert atmosphere. Do not insert in metal tubes. Beware of contamination at high temperatures. Suitable for use in oxidizing or inert atmosphere. Do not insert in metal tubes. Beware of contamination at high temperatures. Mild oxidizing, reducing vacuum or inert atomosphere. Good where moisture is present. Low temperature and cryogenic applications.
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Temperature Product General Applications Tube and Wire Mineral Insulated Description Feature SERV-RITE wire in a variety of insulation types with a metal sheath over the thermocouple. Wide variety of mounting options for use in general industrial and commercial applications. Fast responding, durable and capable of handling high temperatures with the use of XACTPAK metal sheathed cable with compacted MgO insulation. Exhaust gas temperature sensor that combines rugged thermocouple technology with signal conditioning into one package. The primary benefits are high accuracy, durability, quick response, long immersion depth and high temperature. Large gauge, bare alloy available with ceramic insulated elements and protection tubes. Available in ASTM E230 Types K and J. F Up to 900 C Up to 480 Page Thermocouples 41
Up to 2200 -104 to 2192
Up to 1200 -40 to 1200
61
EXACTSENSE
73
Base Metal
Up to 2300 Up to 3100 Up to 1292 Up to 932 Up to 400 Up to 2200
Up to 1260 Up to 1700 Up to 700 Up to 500 Up to 200 Up to 1200
76
High Temperature Available in ASTM E230 Types S or R with a variety of high temperature sheath materials capable of withstanding high temperatures. MICROCOIL Radio Frequency True Surface Multipoints Miniature thermocouple provides surface temperature measurement. Thermocouple designed for use in plasma generation applications. Flat surface temperature sensor that isolates the thermocouple from ambient airflow. Accurately measures temperatures at various locations. Constructed with a variety of protection tubes with XACTPAK mineral insulated metal sheathed cable.
80
88 90 92 94
WATLOW
33
34
WATLOW
Thermocouples
General Information
Calibration Types
Thermocouples are classified by calibration type because they have varying electromotive force (EMF) versus temperature curves. Some generate considerably more voltage at lower temperatures, while others do not begin to develop a significant voltage until subjected to high temperatures. Also, calibration types are designed to deliver as close to a straight line voltage curve inside their temperature application range as possible. This makes it easier for an instrument or temperature controller to correctly correlate the received voltage to a particular temperature. Additionally, thermocouple calibration types have different levels of compatibility with different atmospheres. Chemical reaction between certain thermocouple alloys and the application atmosphere could cause metallurgy degradation, making another calibration type more suitable for sensor life and accuracy requirements.
Thermocouple Types
Calibration types have been established by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) according to their temperature versus EMF characteristics in accordance with ITS-90, in standard or special tolerances. Additionally, there are non-ASTM calibration types. These thermocouples are made from tungsten and tungsten-rhenium alloys. Generally used for measuring higher temperatures, they are a more economical alternative to the platinum and platinum alloy based noble metal thermocouples, but limited to use in inert and non-oxidizing atmospheres.
Thermocouple Type E* J K* N R S T* Useful/General Application Range 200-1650F (95-900C) 200-1400F (95-760C) 200-2300F (95-1260C) 200-2300F (95-1260C) 1600-2640F (870-1450C) 1800-2640F (980-1450C) 32-660F (0-350C)
*Also suitable for cryogenic applications from -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C)
**Millivolt values shown for R and S calibrations pertain to thermocouple calibrations only. RX and SX constructions described in this catalog section are intended for use as extension wire only and will not exhibit the millivolt outputs shown.
WATLOW
35
Thermocouples
General Information
Calibration Types Type E
The Type E thermocouple is suitable for use at temperatures up to 1650F (900C) in a vacuum, inert, mildly oxidizing or reducing atmosphere. At cryogenic temperatures, the thermocouple is not subject to corrosion. This thermocouple has the highest EMF output per degree of all the commonly used thermocouples.
Type T
This thermocouple can be used in either oxidizing or reducing atmospheres, though for longer life, a protecting tube is recommended. Because of its stability at lower temperatures, this is a superior thermocouple for a wide variety of applications in low and cryogenic temperatures. Its recommended operating range is -330 to 660F (-200 to 350C), but it can be used up to -452F (-269C) (boiling helium).
Type J
Type J is the second most common calibration type and is a good choice for general purpose applications where moisture is not present. The Type J thermocouple may be used, exposed or unexposed, where there is a deficiency of free oxygen. For cleanliness and longer life, a protection tube is recommended. Since iron (JP) wire will oxidize rapidly at temperatures over 1000F (540C), it is recommended that larger gauge wires be used to compensate. Maximum recommended operating temperature is 1400F (760C).
Types S and R
Maximum recommended operating temperature for Type S or R is 2640F (1450C). These thermocouples are easily contaminated. Reducing atmospheres are particularly damaging to the calibration. Noble metal thermocouples should always be protected with a gas-tight ceramic tube, a secondary tube of porcelain, and a silicon carbide or metal outer tube as conditions require.
Type K
Type K thermocouples usually work in most applications as they are nickel based and exhibit good corrosion resistance. It is the most common sensor calibration type providing the widest operating temperature range. Due to its reliability and accuracy the Type K thermocouple is used extensively at temperatures up to 2300F (1260C). This type of thermocouple should be protected with a suitable metal or ceramic protection tube, especially in reducing atmospheres. In oxidizing atmospheres, such as electric furnaces, tube protection is not always necessary when other conditions are suitable; however, it is recommended for cleanliness and general mechanical protection. Type K will generally outlast Type J because the JP wire rapidly oxidizes, especially at higher temperatures.
Type N
This nickel-based thermocouple alloy is used primarily at high temperatures up to 2300F (1260C). While not a direct replacement for Type K, Type N provides better resistance to oxidation at high temperatures and longer life in applications where sulfur is present. It also outperforms Type K in Ks aging range.
36
WATLOW
Thermocouples
General Information
Maximum Temperatures
The diameter of the sensor wires determines the upper most operating temperature. The larger the diameter, the higher the temperature rating. Choose alloy 600 over 304 stainless steel (SS) or 316 SS when higher temperatures are expected. The environment is also a critical factor when determining the best material to use. Consult the manual on The Use of Thermocouples in Temperature Measurement, published by ASTM for further details.
Recommended Upper Temperature Limit for Protected Thermocouple Wire

Thermocouple Type E J K and N R and S T No. 8 Gauge F (C) 1600 (870) 1400 (760) 2300 (1260) No. 14 Gauge F (C) 1200 1100 2000 700 (650) (590) (1190) (370) No. 20 Gauge F (C) 540 480 980 260 (1000) (900) (1800) (500) No. 24 Gauge F (C) 800 700 1600 2700 400 (430) (370) (870) (1480) (200) No. 28 Gauge F (C) 800 700 1600 400 (430) (370) (870) (200)
This table gives the recommended upper temperature limits for the various thermocouples and wire sizes. These limits apply to protected thermocouples in a conventional closed-end protecting tubes. They do not apply to sheathed thermocouples with compacted mineral oxide insulation. The temperature limits shown here are intended only as a guide and should not be taken as absolute values nor as guarantees of satisfactory life or performance. These types and sizes are sometimes used at temperatures above the given limits, but usually at the expense of stability, life or both. In other instances, it may be necessary to reduce the above limits to achieve adequate service.
Mineral Insulated Sensors by Diameter and Sheath

Sheath Diameter in. 0.032 0.032 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.063 0.063 0.063 0.063 0.063 0.063 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 Sheath Material 304 SS/Alloy 600 304 SS 304 SS/316 SS/Alloy 600 304 SS 304 SS 304 SS Alloy 600 Alloy 600 304 SS/316 SS 304 SS 304 SS/316 SS Hastelloy X Alloy 600 304 SS/316 SS/Alloy 600 Alloy 600 Alloy 600 304 SS/316 SS 304 SS Alloy 600 304 SS/310 SS/316 SS 304 SS 304 SS 304 SS/316 SS 310 SS 316 SS 316 SS 446 SS Maximum Recommended Operating Temperature F (C) 1600 1500 1600 1500 662 1600 2000 2000 1500 1600 1600 2200 2150 662 1600 2150 1500 1600 2150 1500 1600 662 1600 2000 1600 662 2100 (871) (816) (871) (816) (350) (871) (1093) (1093) (816) (871) (871) (1204) (1177) (350) (871) (1177) (816) (871) (1177) (816) (871) (350) (871) (1093) (871) (350) (1149)
Calibration K J K J T E K or N S J E K K K or N T E S J K K or N J K T E K K T K
WATLOW
37
Thermocouples
General Information
Junction Types
Generally, the grounded junction offers the best compromise between performance and reliability. It is the best choice for general purpose measurements. Select an ungrounded junction if the lead wire will be shielded and attached to the sheath. Also, select the ungrounded junction to avoid ground loops between instruments, power supplies and the sensor. Listed below are junction styles offered by Watlow.
Ungrounded Junction
The thermocouple junction is fully insulated from the welded sheath end. The ungrounded junction is excellent for applications where stray EMFs would affect the reading and for frequent or rapid temperature cycling. Response time is longer than with the grounded junction.
Exposed Junction Ungrounded Dual Isolated Junction
Thermocouple wires are butt welded, insulated and sealed against liquid or gas penetration. This junction style provides the fastest possible response time but leaves the thermocouple wires unprotected against corrosive or mechanical damage.
Two separate thermocouples are encased in a single sheath. The isolation prevents ground loop errors if wired to separate instruments. Only available as ungrounded junctions.
Grounded Junction
The sheath and conductors are welded together, forming a completely sealed, integral junction. The grounded junction is recommended in the presence of liquids, moisture, gas or high pressure. The wire is protected from corrosive or erosive conditions. Response time with this style approaches that of the exposed junction.
38
WATLOW
Thermocouples
General Information
Response Time
The smaller the diameter, the faster the thermocouple responds. Grounding the junction also improves response time by approximately 50 percent based on the sensor achieving 63.2 percent of the final reading or to the first time constant. It takes approximately five time constants to obtain steady state readings. Temperature accuracy of the surrounding medium depends on the capability of the sensor to conduct heat from its outer sheath to the element wire. Several factors come into play. Most commonly noted is time constant (thermal response time). Time constant, or thermal response time, is an expression of how quickly a sensor responds to temperature changes. As expressed here, time response is defined as the length of time it takes a sensor to reach 63.2 percent of a step temperature change (see graph to the right). Response is a function of the mass of the sensor and its efficiency in transferring heat from its outer surfaces to the wire sensing element. A rapid time response is essential for accuracy in a system with sharp temperature changes. Time response varies with the probes physical size and design. Response times indicated represent standard industrial probes.
Time Constant (Thermal Response Time)
Step Temp. Change
63%
Time Constant
Time
Thermocouple Time Response

Sheath Diameter 0.010 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 0.090 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.313 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. Average Response Time Still Water (seconds)* Grounded Junction Ungrounded Junction <0.02 <0.02 0.02 0.04 0.22 0.33 0.50 1.00 2.20 5.00 8.00 15.00 <0.02 0.04 <0.15 0.25 0.40 0.95 2.00 5.00 <0.02 0.03 0.07 0.13 0.40 0.68 1.10 2.30 4.10 7.00 11.00 20.00 0.03 0.13 0.35 0.55 0.90 2.00 3.50 7.00
0.375 in. 0.500 in. 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 3.0 4.5 6.0 8.0 mm mm mm mm mm
*Readings are to 63 percent of measured temperatures.
WATLOW
39
Thermocouples
General Information
Thermocouple Resistance
Although resistance cannot confirm that the alloy meets the correct thermoelectric specifications, it checks for other undesirable characteristics such as opens, poor welds or wire corrosion. Always measure thermocouple resistance outside of the application to ensure that EMF output does not conflict with the resistance meter. Ohms per Double Feet Long lead wire runs or use of analog-based instrumentation make conductor resistance an important factor when selecting the wire gauge best suited for an application. The table below lists nominal ohms per double feet for thermocouple and thermocouple extension wire. Ohms per double feet are the total resistance, in ohms, for both conductors, per foot.
Calibration Type AWG Gauge 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Diameter in. (mm) 0.258 0.204 0.162 0.129 0.102 0.081 0.064 0.051 0.040 0.032 0.025 0.020 0.016 0.013 0.010 0.008 0.006 0.005 0.076 0.060 0.048 0.038 0.030 0.024 (6.543) (5.189) (4.115) (3.264) (2.588) (2.053) (1.630) (1.290) (1.020) (0.813) (0.645) (0.508) (0.406) (0.320) (0.254) (0.203) (0.152) (0.127) (1.930) (1.520) (1.220) (0.965) (0.762) (0.610) E 0.011 0.017 0.028 0.044 0.070 0.111 0.177 0.281 0.453 0.709 1.129 1.795 2.853 4.537 7.214 11.470 18.239 29.000 0.161 0.256 0.408 0.648 1.031 1.639 *J 0.006 0.009 0.014 0.023 0.036 0.057 0.091 0.145 0.234 0.367 0.584 0.928 1.476 2.347 3.731 5.933 9.434 15.000 0.083 0.133 0.211 0.335 0.533 0.848 K 0.009 0.014 0.023 0.036 0.058 0.092 0.147 0.233 0.376 0.589 0.937 1.490 2.369 3.767 5.990 9.524 15.145 24.080 0.134 0.213 0.338 0.538 0.856 1.361 N 0.012 0.019 0.030 0.048 0.077 0.123 0.195 0.310 0.500 0.783 1.245 1.980 3.148 5.006 7.960 12.656 20.126 32.000 0.178 0.283 0.450 0.715 1.137 1.808 RX, SX T
Nominal Resistance for Thermocouple Alloys in Ohms per Double Feet at 20C
14 16 18 20 22 24
0.006 0.010 0.016 0.025 0.040 0.063 0.100 0.159 0.253 0.402 0.639 1.016 1.615 0.009 0.014 0.023 0.036 0.057 0.091
0.048 0.076 0.120 0.194 0.304 0.483 0.768 1.221 1.942 3.088 4.910 7.808 12.415 0.069 0.110 0.174 0.277 0.441 0.701
Note: RX and SX indicate compensating thermocouple materials.
Conductor Sizes
Wire Size AWG Gauge 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 Solid Diameter in. (mm) 0.064 0.051 0.040 0.032 0.025 0.020 0.016 0.013 0.010 0.008 0.006 0.005 (1.630) (1.290) (1.020) (0.813) (0.635) (0.508) (0.406) (0.330) (0.254) (0.203) (0.152) (0.127) Stranded Diameter in. (mm) 0.076 0.060 0.048 0.038 0.030 0.024 (1.930) (1.520) (1.220) (0.965) (0.762) (0.610) Number of Strands 7 7 7 7 7 7 Strand Gauge 22 24 26 28 30 32
40
WATLOW
Thermocouples
General Applications Tube and Wire
Watlow is a world class supplier of temperature measurement products, with more than 90 years of manufacturing, research and design expertise. Companies engaged in critical process control of food and metals rely on Watlow thermocouples. Watlow designs and manufactures sensors to meet customers industrial and commercial equipment needs. Watlow has developed an extensive line of thermocouples to meet a broad range of sensing needs.
Performance Capabilities
Fiberglass insulated thermocouples can reach temperatures up to 900F (480C) for continuous operation.
Features and Benefits

Custom-tailored standard products including: 32 standard sheath lengths Lead lengths from six to 360 inches Stainless steel braid or hose protection J, K, T and E calibrations Grounded, ungrounded and exposed junctions Flat and drill point Epoxy sealed cold ends Adjustable depths Flexible extensions Washers, nozzles and clamp bands Custom diameters PFA coated and stainless steel sheaths Straight, 45 bend or 90 bend Locking bayonet caps in standard, 12 mm and 15 mm
Typical Applications
Food processing equipment De-icing Plating baths Industrial processing Medical equipment Pipe tracing control Industrial heat treating Packaging equipment Liquid temperature measurement Refrigerator temperature control Oven temperature control
Construction and Tolerances

Thermocouples feature flexible SERV-RITE wire insulated with woven fiberglass or high temperature engineered resins. For added protection against abrasion, products can be provided with stainless steel wire braid and flexible armor. ASTM E230 color-coding identifies standard catalog thermocouple types. The addition of a metal sheath over the thermocouple provides rigidity for accurate placement and added protection of the sensing junction. Mounting options include springs, ring terminals, specialized bolts, pipe style clamps and shims.
WATLOW
41
Thermocouples
Bends
Standard Bend Radius in.
3 3 1
Diameter in. 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.375
Minimum A Dimension in. 1 1 2 3
Minimum H Dimension in. 2 2 2 2

A
8 8 2
10 - 90 Radius
Lead Terminations
Termination Code Length
Length
212
Split Leads
B
Length
212
#6 Spade Lugs
C
Length
212
# 6 Spade Lugs and BX Connector

D
Standard Male Plug
Standard Female Jack
Miniature Male Plug
Miniature Female Jack
H
Length
212
4 inch Push-on Connectors
42
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Adjustable Spring Styles 10, 11, 14, 15, 16 and 17
Lead Length Spring Length
Adjustable spring style thermocouples bend to any angle to fit a wide range of hole depths, eliminating the need to stock numerous styles.
Sheath Length 0.3125 in. (7.9 mm)
Spring O.D. 0.250 in. (6.3 mm)
Ordering Information
Part Number
Const. Style Sheath Length Lead Length Term./ Options
Sheath Lead Diameter Calibration Protection Junction
D
Construction Style 10 = 716 in. I.D. single slot (standard cap) - 6 in. spring 11 = 716 in. I.D. single slot (standard cap) - 12 in. spring D= J K T E F S P B T U V W = = = = = = = = Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS
3
B
B= Sheath Length (in.) 1 in. (25 mm)
Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory Termination/Options
16 in. Calibration
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
J K T E Lead Protection
Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Grounded, drill point Ungrounded, flat tip Ungrounded, round tip Ungrounded, drill point Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings A = Standard, 212 in. split leads B = 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs C = 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector D = Standard male plug, quick disconnect E = Standard female jack, quick disconnect F = Miniature male plug, quick disconnect G = Miniature female jack, quick disconnect H = 14 in. push-on connector
F = G = D = R = U = P = H = S =
WATLOW
43
Thermocouples
Adjustable Armor Style 12
0.265 in. (6.7 mm) O.D. Lead Length
Adjustable armor thermocouples bend to any angle to fit a wide range of hole depths, eliminating the need to stock numerous styles. A stainless steel hose offers additional lead protection in demanding applications.
Sheath Length 0.3125 in. (7.9 mm)
Part Number
Sheath Length Const. Style Sheath Lead Diameter Calibration Protection Junction Lead Length Term./ Options
12

D
Construction Style
B
B= Sheath Length (in.) 1 in.
12 = Adjustable armor thermocouple, 716 in. I.D. single slot (standard cap) D= J K T E H C K Y = = = = Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS
3
Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory Termination/Options
16 in. Calibration
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Grounded, drill point Ungrounded, round tip Ungrounded, drill point Ungrounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings A = Standard, 212 in. split leads B = 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs C = 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector D = Standard male plug, quick disconnect E = Standard female jack, quick disconnect F = Miniature male plug, quick disconnect G = Miniature female jack, quick disconnect H = 14 in. push-on connector
F = G = D = U = P = R = H = S =
44
WATLOW
AFF-English
Thermocouples
Rigid Sheath Styles 20, 21 and 22 1 8 and 316 inch Diameter
Sheath Length Lead Length
The rigid sheath provides protection and accurate placement through bulkheads or platens. Use with a compression fitting for water tight immersion application.
1.125 in. (28.6 mm) Lead Length
1.375 in. (34.9 mm) 0.375 in. R (9.5 mm) A
Lead Length
The bent rigid tube offers protection and accurate lead placement around machinery.
0.375 in. R (9.5 mm)
Part Number
Construction Style
20 = Plain sheath, straight 21 = Plain sheath, 45 bend 22 = Plain sheath, 90 bend C= D= T= J K T E F = S = H = P = B* = C* = T = U = K = V* = W* = Y* = * Not Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS
1
8 in. 3 16 in. 3 16 in. epoxy sealed 300F (149C) Calibration
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
F = G = D = R = U = P = E = H* = S* = * Not A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H=
Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Grounded, drill point Ungrounded, flat tip Ungrounded, round tip Ungrounded, drill point Exposed Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element available with 18 in. diameter sheath. Sheath Length or A Dimension (in.)
1
Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) available with 18 in. diameter sheath.
2 in. 1 in. 112 in. 2 in. 212 in. 3 in. 1 in. 312 in.
J= K= L= M= N= P= Q= R=
S= T= U= W= Y= Z=
812 in. 9 in. 912 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = = Termination/Options Standard, 212 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
Metric sizes are available for made-to-order units. Contact the factory for information. A minimum quantity order may apply.
WATLOW
45
Thermocouples
Rigid Sheath with Threaded Fitting Styles 23 and 24 1 8 and 316 inch Diameter
Silver Braze Lead Length
Rigid sheath with threaded fitting provides accurate placement in process applications.
2 in. (51 mm)
Part Number
Construction Style
23 = Straight sheath with 18 in. National Pipe Thread (NPT) SS fitting 24 = Straight sheath with 12 in. NPT SS fitting C= D= T= J K T E F = S = H = P = B* = C* = T = U = K = V* = W* = Y* = * Not Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS
1
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
F = G = D = R = U = P = E = H* = S* = * Not A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H=
Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Grounded, drill point Ungrounded, flat tip Ungrounded, round tip Ungrounded, drill point Exposed Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element available with 18 in. diameter sheath. B Dimension (in.)
1
J= K= L= M= N= P= Q= R=
S= T= U= W= Y= Z=
812 in. 9 in. 912 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = =
1
Termination/Options Standard, 2 2 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
46
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Flange Style 25
Lead Length D C C = 0.75 in. (19 mm) D = 1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm) B
The flanged thermocouple allows rapid assembly and low profile when going through bulkheads.
H = 0.144 in. (3.7 mm)
Part Number
25
C= D= T= J K T E F = S = H = P = B* = C* = T = U = K = V* = W* = Y* = * Not Construction Style F = G = D = R = U = P = E = H* = S* = * Not Lead Protection Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) available with 18 in. diameter sheath. D= E= F= G= H= J= K= 2 in. 212 in. 3 in. 312 in. 4 in. 412 in. 5 in. Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Grounded, drill point Ungrounded, flat tip Ungrounded, round tip Ungrounded, drill point Exposed Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element available with 18 in. diameter sheath. B Dimension (in.) L= M= N= P= Q= R= S= 512 in. 6 in. 612 in. 7 in. 712 in. 8 in. 812 in. T= U= W= Y= Z= 9 in. 912 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
25 = Thermocouple with flange Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS

1
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
J K T E
1
WATLOW
47
Thermocouples
Rigid Sheath Styles 30, 31 and 32
0.75 in. (19 mm) 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) Lead Length
0.375 in. R (9.5 mm) 1.625 in. (41.3 mm)
1 in. (25 mm)
Lead Length
1.625 in. (41.3 mm) 0.75 in. (19 mm)
Lead Length
0.375 in. R (9.5 mm) 1.625 in. (41.3 mm)
1.625 in. (41.3 mm)
Bayonet fittings allow rapid attachment. Spring pressure on the junction tip assures fast response time. This style of bayonet fitting connects quickly and allows leads to exit with a protective sheath.
Part Number
Const. Style Sheath Length Lead Length Term./ Options
Sheath Lead Diameter Calibration Protection Junction
30 = 31 = 32 = C= D= T= J K T E F = S = H = P* = B* = C* = T = U = K = V* = W* = Y* = * Not
7 7
Construction Style 16 in. I.D. single slot (standard cap) straight 16 in. I.D. single slot (standard cap) with spring, 45 bend 7 16 in. I.D. single slot (standard cap) with spring, 90 bend Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS
1
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
F = G = D = R = U = P = E = H* = S* = * Not D= E= F= G= H= J= K=
Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Grounded, drill point Ungrounded, flat tip Ungrounded, round tip Ungrounded, drill point Exposed Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element available with 18 in. diameter sheath. B Dimension (in.) 2 in. 212 in. 3 in. 312 in. 4 in. 412 in. 5 in. L= M= N= P= Q= R= S= 512 in. 6 in. 612 in. 7 in. 712 in. 8 in. 812 in. T= U= W= Y= Z= 9 in. 912 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
48
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Large Diameter Rigid Sheath Styles 40, 41 and 42
A
Lead Length
Sheath Length
Lead Length
The bent rigid tube offers protection and accurate lead placement around machinery. The rigid sheath provides protection and accurate placement through bulkheads or platens. Use with a compression fitting for water tight immersion application.
Lead Length
R A
0.25 in. (6.4 mm) Dia. R = 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) H = 1.625 in. (41.3 mm) 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) Dia. R = 0.75 in. (19 mm) H = 1.875 in. (47.6 mm)
Part Number
Construction Style 40 = Plain sheath, straight, large, diameter 41 = Plain (45) large diameter 42 = Plain (90) large diameter E= G= U= V= J K T E F S H P B C T U K V W Y = = = = = = = = = = = = Sheath Diameter (in.) 316 SS
1
4 3 8 1 4 3 8
in. in. in. epoxy sealed 300F (149C) in. epoxy sealed 300F (149C) Calibration
F = G = R = U = E = H = S = A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H=
Junction Grounded, flat tip Grounded, round tip Ungrounded, flat tip Ungrounded, round tip Exposed Grounded, round tip, dual element Ungrounded, round tip, dual element Sheath Length or A Dimension (in.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. J= K= L= M= N= P= Q= R= 9 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in. 13 in. 14 in. 15 in. 16 in. S= T= U= W= Y= Z= 17 18 19 20 22 24 in. in. in. in. in. in.
= = = =
Type Type Type Type
Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded)
WATLOW
49
Thermocouples
Flexible Extensions Style 60
Termination A Lead Length Termination B
Flexible extensions allow thermocouples to be disconnected from a system without disturbing the remaining wiring.
Part Number
Const. Style Lead Termination Diameter Calibration Protection Junction A Lead Length Term./ Options
60

X
Construction Style
X
X = Not applicable Junction
60 = Flexible extension X= J K T E F S H P B C T U K V W Y = = = = = = = = = = = = Diameter Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel hose (20 gauge stranded)
Termination A
A = Standard, 212 in. split leads B = 212 in. split leads with spade lugs C = 212 in. split leads with spade lugs and BX connector D = Standard male plug, quick disconnect E = Standard female jack, quick disconnect F* = Miniature male plug, quick disconnect G* = Miniature female jack, quick disconnect H = 14 in. push-on connector *Not available with SS hose Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = =
1
Termination B Standard, 2 2 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
50
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Insulated Wire Styles 61 and 62
Constructed with SERV-RITE insulated thermocouple wire, Styles 61 and 62, are economical and versatile and can be ordered with an exposed or protected measuring junction. Style 61 is fitted with an exposed junction and is suitable for most general purpose applications, such as measuring air, gas and surface temperatures. Style 62 is fitted with an encapsulated measuring junction that is ideal for corrosive fluids and gases, such as sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, strong mineral acids and oils.
Style 61 Lead Length
Styles 61 and 62 are available with fiberglass insulated lead wire (SERIES 304 construction) with continuous temperature ratings up to 900F (480C). It can also be ordered with FEP insulated lead wire (SERIES 507), ratings to 400F (200C) continuous temperature. For additional mechanical strength and abrasion resistance, a stainless steel overbraid is available.
Style 62 Lead Length
Teon Encapsulated Thermocouple Junction
Part Number
Const. Style Lead Termination Diameter Calibration Protection Junction A Lead Length Term./ Options
X
E = Exposed Junction
Construction Style 61 = SERIES 61 62* = SERIES 62 *Only available with wire (lead protection) options J or T (5th digit) X= J K T E P B J F S T = = = = = = Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection Fiberglass (20 gauge solid) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge solid) Extended FEP (20 gauge solid) Fiberglass (24 gauge solid) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge solid) Extended FEP (24 gauge solid) Diameter
Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 600 in. contact factory A B D E F G H = = = = = = = Termination Options Standard, 212 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with spade lugs Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
WATLOW
51
Thermocouples
Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) Encapsulated Style 65
Sheath Length Lead Length
The rigid sheath is covered with a 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) wall of PFA for corrosion resistance in acid environments. An epoxy seal improves moisture resistance of the sensor and provides a barrier for migrating fumes in corrosive applications.
Part Number
Const. Style Diameter Under Lead Covering Calibration Protection Junction Sheath Length Lead Length Term./ Options
65
Construction Style 65 = PFA coated sheath D= E= J K T E
3
Diameter (in.) Under Covering 16 in. epoxy sealed 300F (149C) 1 4 in. epoxy sealed 300F (149C) Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection
U = Ungrounded, round tip G = Grounded, round tip B= C= D= E= F= G= H= 1 in. 112 in. 2 in. 212 in. 3 in. 312 in. 4 in.
Junction
Sheath Length (in.) J= K= L= M= N= P= Q= 412 in. 5 in. 512 in. 6 in. 612 in. 7 in. 712 in. R= S= T= U= W= Y= Z= 8 in. 812 in. 9 in. 912 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
T = PFA (24 gauge stranded) R = PFA (20 gauge stranded)
1
52
WATLOW
nglish/Metric
Thermocouples
Ring Terminal Style 70
Lead Length
The nickel terminal can be placed beneath existing screws or bolts to permit surface temperature measurement.
Stud Size
Note: Grounded junction shown.
Part Number
Const. Style Stud Size Hole Diameter Lead Length Term./ Options
Lead Diameter Calibration Protection Junction
70
X= J K T E F S P B T U V W = = = = = = = =
X
Construction Style Junction G = Grounded U* = Ungrounded *Only available with 24 gauge wire. A* = B* = C* = D = E = Stud Size - Hole Diameter (in.) No. 6 No. 8 No. 10 1 4 3 8
70 = Ring terminal thermocouple Diameter Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded)
Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = = Termination Options Standard, 212 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
WATLOW
53
Thermocouples
Nozzle Style 71
Lead Length
Grounded Junction
The nozzle thermocouple has a short installation depth and a low profile to allow control of thin platen sections.
0.375 in. (9.5 mm)
Part Number
Const. Style 304 SS Bolt Size Lead Length Term./ Options
71
X= J K T E F S P B T U V W = = = = = = = =
X
Construction Style
G
G = Grounded A = B = C = M =
1 3
Junction
71 = Nozzle thermocouple Diameter Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass (20 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded)
304 SS, Bolt Size 4 in. x 28 UNF, 8 in. thread depth 8-32 thread 10-32 thread M6 x 1
54
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Pipe Clamp Thermo-English

Pipe Clamp Style 72
0.5 in. (12.7 mm)
The stainless steel clamp allows temperature measurement without drilling or tapping which is ideal for measuring pipe temperatures.
Lead Length
Diameter
Part Number
Const. Style Clamp Band Lead Dia. Lead Range Length Diameter Calibration Protection Junction Term./ Options
72
X= J K T E S B U W = = = =
X
Construction Style
G
G = Grounded A = B = C = D = E = F = G = Junction
72 = Pipe clamp thermocouple Diameter Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (20 gauge stranded)
Clamp Band Diameter Range (in.) 1116 to 114 114 to 214 214 to 314 314 to 414 414 to 5 5 to 6 6 to 7
WATLOW
55
Thermocouples
Grommet Style 73
Lead Length
The extremely low profile of the stainless steel grommet provides fast response time.
0.375 in. (9.5 mm) O.D.
0.196 in. (5 mm) I.D. 0.005 in. (0.1 mm)
Part Number
Const. Style Grommet Size Lead Diameter Calibration Protection Junction Lead Length Term./ Options
73
A
G = Grounded Junction
Construction Style 73 = Grommet thermocouple X= J K T E Diameter Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection
Grommet Size (in.)
A = 0.195 in. I.D. x 0.375 in. O.D. x 0.035 in. thick Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = = Termination Options Standard, 212 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
F = Fiberglass (24 gauge solid) T = PFA (24 gauge solid)
56
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Brass Shim Style 74
0.25 in. (6.4 mm)
The shim stock thermocouple has a low profile and can be placed between components for surface temperature measurement.
0.125 in. (3.2 mm)
0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 0.016 in. (0.4 mm) Brass Shim
Lead Length
0.625 in. (15.9 mm)
Part Number
Shim Size Const. Style Lead Diameter Calibration Protection Junction Lead Length Term./ Options
74
X= J K T E
X
Construction Style
X
74 = Shim stock thermocouple Diameter Not applicable Calibration = = = = Type Type Type Type J K T E Lead Protection
Shim Size (in.)
A = 12 x 58 x 0.016 in. brass Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = = Termination Options Standard, 212 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
F = Fiberglass (24 gauge solid) T = PFA (24 gauge solid)
WATLOW
57
Thermocouples
Stainless Steel Shim Style 75
0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)
0.75 in. (19 mm)
0.010 in. (0.3 mm) Stainless Steel Shim Stock
The shim stock thermocouple has a low profile and can be placed between components for surface temperature measurement.
0.75 in. (19 mm)
Lead Length
Part Number
Const. Style Shim Size Lead Length Term./ Options
75
X=
X
Construction Style
A
75 = Stainless steel shim stock thermocouple Diameter Not applicable Calibration
Shim Size (in.) A = 34 x 34 x 0.010 in., 304 SS Lead Length (in.) Available lengths: 006 to 360 in., over 360 in. contact factory A B C D E F G H = = = = = = = =
1
J = Type J K = Type K F S T U = = = =
Termination Options Standard, 2 2 in. split leads 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs 212 in. split leads with #6 spade lugs and BX connector Standard male plug, quick disconnect Standard female jack, quick disconnect Miniature male plug, quick disconnect Miniature female jack, quick disconnect 1 4 in. push-on connector
Lead Protection Fiberglass (24 gauge stranded) Fiberglass with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded) PFA (24 gauge stranded) PFA with stainless steel overbraid (24 gauge stranded)
58
WATLOW
Kapton #2
Thermocouples
Polyimide Bracket Style
The Polyimide thermocouple, when used with the aluminum bracket, is designed primarily to measure roller temperature. Light pressure on the roller enables the Polyimide thermocouple to measure roller surface temperature without using slip rings. This type of set-up greatly reduces lag time and eliminates slip rings cost and maintenance. It can also be used to measure conveyor belt temperatures and any other moving part by riding gently on the part surface. Continuous use at 400F (200C), 500F (260C) for limited periods Low mass Fast response Totally insulated construction Available in Type J or K
Aluminum Bracket Polyimide
and Stick
1 in. (25 mm)
7/8 in. (22 mm)
0.016 in. = 0.41 mm 1/4 in. = 6 mm 1/8 in. = 3 mm 1/2 in. = 13 mm

1 4
1 8
C.L. for / in. R 30
/ in.
0.016 in.
Polyimide Thermocouple with Bracket

Calibration J K
1 4
Rivet
1 2
/ in.
Lead Length in. (cm) 48 96 48 96 (122) (244) (122) (244)
Part No. OKJ30B4A OKJ30B4B OKK30B2A OKK30B2B wire, with fiberglass

Polyimide 1 1/4 in.
1 in.
Sensors with 30 gauge insulation and split lead termination.
1 in. = 25 mm solid thermocouple 1 / in. = 32 mm
Low Profile Polyimide Peel and Stick Style

1 in. 1 in. = 25 mm 1 / in. = 32 mm
1 4
Polyimide
1 1/4 in.
Polyimide Peel and Stick This sensor requires no bracket or special mounting. Simply peel away the backing and this self-adhesive film will bond to almost any surface. Temperature ratings for continuous use is 400F (200C).
Lead Length in. (cm)
Low Profile Polyimide Thermocouple (without Bracket) When used without the bracket it can be placed between heated parts for accurate temperature measurement. At the thermocouple junction, the overall thickness is only 0.016 in. (0.4 mm), so that it does not interfere with fit or thermo conductivity.
Calibration J Lead Length in. (cm) Part No. OKJ30B2A OKJ30B2B OKK30B1A OKK30B1B fiberglass
Calibration
Part No. OKJ30B11A OKJ30B11B OKK30B10A OKK30B10B OKT30B12A OKT30B12B fiberglass
48 (122) J 96 (244) 48 (122) K 96 (244) 48 (122) T 96 (244) Sensors with 30 gauge solid thermocouple wire, with insulation and split lead termination.
48 (122) 96 (244) 48 (122) K 96 (244) Sensors with 30 gauge solid thermocouple wire, with insulation and split lead termination.
WATLOW
59
Thermocouples
Melt Bolt
Immersion Length A 0.3125 in. (7.9 mm) E
1/2-20
UNF-3 Thread
45 0.310 in. (7.9 mm)
0.307 in. (7.8 mm)
0.419 in. (10.6 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) 2.1875 in. 55.6 mm A Dim. 0.3125 in. (7.9 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm)
0.416 in. (10.57 mm)
Fixed Immersion Style M1
Immersion Length A
0.3125 in. (7.9 mm) E
Flexible SS Armor
Standard Dimensions for Melt Bolts
Fixed Immersion Style M3
Part Number
Style Sheath O.D. Lead Melt Bolt Wire Length Const. A Cold End Term. Probe Const. Extension Imm. Imm. Length Length Length I E I (in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration
M
1= 3= G= 0= R= 1 = 3 2 = 6 A= B= C= T = U= W= Cold End Terminations Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Zero standard 112 in. split leads (Style M3 only) 112 in. split leads with spade lugs (Style M3 only) 112 in. split leads with BX connector and space lugs (Style M3 only) Style Fixed immersion Fixed immersion with ex armor Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.125 Lead Wire Construction No ex armor (M1) SS ex armor (M3 only) Melt Bolt Length A (in.)
0
A= 1= 1= 0= U= G= J= K= 3= 4= Whole inches: 02 to 99 1 Immersion Length I ( fractional in.)
1
0
Probe Construction Mineral insulated with 304 SS sheath Immersion Length I (in.)
8 Flush Junction Ungrounded Grounded Calibration Standard limits Standard limits Special limits Special limits Extension Length E
60
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated (MI)
Watlows mineral insulated (MI) thermocouples are fast-responding, durable, and capable of handling high temperatures. Manufactured with best-in-class XACTPAK, Watlows trademark for metal sheathed, mineral insulated (MI) thermocouple material, XACTPAK responds fast because the protective metal outer sheath allows use of smaller diameter thermocouple conductors. The rock hard compacted MgO insulation further enhances the sensors ability to read temperature by transferring heat quickly to the measuring junction. The XACTPAK protecting sheath and compacted insulation outperform bare wire thermocouples in most applications.
Easily handles temperatures up to 2200F (1200C) Meets or exceeds initial calibration tolerances per ASTM E 230

Special mineral insulation Protects thermocouple from moisture and thermal shock Permits operation in high temperature, high pressure environments Diameters as small as 0.020 in. (0.50 mm) Ideal when physical space or extremely fast response are critical Flexibility of the XACTPAK material Allows forming and bending of the thermocouple, without risk of cracking, to meet design requirements Outer sheath Protects wires from oxidation and hostile environments Wide range of sheath materials, diameters, and calibrations Meet specific requirements In-house manufacturing of XACTPAK material Rigid quality control procedures Ensures high standards are met Single source reliability Custom capabilities Include options such as special lead lengths, lead wires and terminations
Heat treating Furnaces/kilns Turbines Bearing temperature Power stations Steam generators Diesel engines Nuclear reactors Atomic research Jet engines and test cells Rocket engines Semiconductor manufacturing Refineries/oil processing Catalytic reformers Food processing
WATLOW
61
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Bends
C
Diameter in. 0.063 0.090 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.313 0.375 0.500

3
Minimum H Dimension in.

1 3
Minimum C Dimension in. 112 112 2 2 2 2 2 2

H 10 - 90 Radius
16 4 8 2 4
2 4
1 3 1 3
1 1 2 2 3 4
114 112 2
Term D
Lead Terminations
A
Term D
Standard Male Plug

B
Standard Male Plug with Mating Connector
Miniature Male Plug

G
Miniature Male Plug with Mating Connector

Length
112
Split Leads
112
#8 Spade Lugs
Length
62
WATLOW
Fixed Bayonet Fitting
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Fitting Options
Fixed Fittings
Fitting Type Material Sheath Size in. NPT Thread Size in. Hex Size in. Length in. Code
Fixed Fittings
303 SS
L
0.063 to 0.250
16
11
16
Fixed Single Thread 8 NPT

Customer Specified
303 SS
0.125 to 0.250
16
Fixed Single Thread 14 NPT L

Customer Specified Non-Adjustable Compression Fitting
303 SS
0.125 to 0.250

Customer Specified
Non-Adjustable Compression Fitting
A L Fixed Double Thread 2 NPT
303 SS
1
0.125 to 0.250
134
Customer Specified
Compression Fittings
Fitting Type
Material
Sheath Size in. 0.125
NPT Thread Size in.

1
Hex Size in.

1
Length in. 1 118 1 16 114 114 1516 1516 1 4 114 114 2716 114 1 4 114 2716
1 1 3
Code J J J L L L L G G G X Q Q Q V
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8
Brass
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125
Non-Adjustable Compression Brass

303 SS
Non-Adjustable Compression SS
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS
Adjustable Compression TFE Gland
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS
2 2 2 8
Adjustable Compression Lava Gland
0.188 0.250
Compression Fittings: Compression fittings are shipped finger-tight on the sheath allowing field installation. Once non-adjustable fittings are deformed, they cannot be relocated. Adjustable fittings come with Tetrafluorethylene (TFE) sealant or lava sealant glands.
WATLOW
63
Fitting Options TH-2760
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Fitting Options (Continued)
Adjustable Spring Loaded
316 SS
0.250
Bayonet Lockcap and Spring

Fitting Type Material Plated Steel Plated Steel Sheath Size in. 0.125 0.188 Length in. 158 158 Code W W
rmocouples 71b
Weld Pads
Weld Pad Type Material Code
hermocouples 71b
1"
304 SS*
1"
1
Flat
/8"
1"
304 SS
1"
1
/8"
Milled Slot
*Alloy 600 available on special order and recommended for use with alloy 600 sheath.
64
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Cut and Stripped Style AB
Watlows Style AB thermocouple allows self termination of the thermocouple. Style AB is simply a section of XACTPAK material, junctioned and stripped and is the most basic of all the mineral insulated thermocouple styles. Its XACTPAK mineral insulation construction protects the thermocouple from moisture, thermal shock, high temperatures and high pressure.
Maximum temperature depends on sheath material, calibration and other variables

Cold end stripped and sealed with epoxy Inhibits moisture penetration Dual element style Allows two instruments to run from the same element, reducing costs
Part Number
Sheath O.D. Fittings, Weld Pads Sheath Sheath Strip Strip Length S Length S Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration (whole in.) (fract. in.)
A
B= C= D= E = G= H= J =
0
Sheath O.D. (in.)
0
Junction
0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250
Grounded Ungrounded Single G U Dual* H W (isolated) *Only available for 0.063 diameter and larger. Standard limits Special limits 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= E E 2 Calibration J J 3 K K 4 N N
Exposed E D (isolated)
Fittings, Weld Pads 0 = None Notes: If required, enter code from pages 63 to 64. If none, enter 0. Weld pads only available for 0.063 diameter and larger. A= F= Q= 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 (Type K) Sheath Material
T T 8
Strip Length S (whole in.) Strip Length S (fractional in.) 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8
0, 1, 2 and 3 - 1 in. max. on 0.040 and smaller
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory 0= 4= Sheath Length (fractional in.) 0 1 2
WATLOW
65
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Mini Plug or Jack Termination Style AC
L
X
Part Number
Sheath O.D. Connector Type Fittings, Weld Pads Sheath Sheath Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration
A
B= C= D= E = G=
C
Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 0.125
00
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory. Maximum length for PFA coating is 48 in. 0= 4= Single Standard limits Special limits E E 2 Sheath Length L (fractional in.) 0 1 2 Junction Grounded G Ungrounded U Exposed E
Connector Type F = Miniature plug G = Miniature jack H = Miniature plug with mating connector Note: Miniature plugs and jacks 400F (200C) (0.125 in. max. O.D.) Fittings, Weld Pads 0 = None Notes: If required, enter code from pages 63 to 64. If none, enter 0. Weld pads only available for 0.063 and 0.125 diameters. A= F= C= Q= Sheath Material 304 SS 316 SS PFA coated over SS (available on G diameter) Alloy 600 (Type K)
Calibration J J 3 K K 4 N N T T 8
66
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Standard Plug or Jack Termination Style AC
Part Number
Fittings, Weld Sheath Connector Pads Type O.D. Sheath Sheath Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration
A
D= E = G= H= J =
C
Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.040 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250
0
0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7=
00
Sheath Length L (fractional in.) 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 Junction Exposed E D (isolated)
Connector Type A = Standard plug B = Standard jack C = Standard plug with mating connector Note: If required Fittings, Weld Pads 0 = None Notes: Standard plug and jacks 425F (218C). Weld pads only available for 0.063 diameter and larger. A= F= C= Q= Sheath Material 304 SS 316 SS PFA coated over SS (available on G, H, J diameters) Alloy 600 (Type K)
Grounded Ungrounded Single G U Dual* H W (isolated) * Only available for 0.063 diameter and larger. Standard limits Special limits E E 2 Calibration J J 3 K K 4 N N
T T 8
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory. Maximum length for PFA coating is 48 inches.
WATLOW
67
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Metal Transitions with Spring Strain Relief Style AF
L E
Part Number
Style Sheath O.D. Lead Wire Const. Fittings, Weld Pads Lead Wire Term. Sheath Sheath Lead Wire Length E Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration (whole ft) Special Rqmts.
A
F= B= C= D= E = G= H= J =
F
Style Metal transition with strain relief and 300F (149C) Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250 Lead Wire Construction A= F= C= Q= Sheath Material 304 SS 316 SS PFA coated over SS (available on G, H and J diameter) Alloy 600 (Type K)
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, lengths over 99 inches contact factory. Maximum length for PFA coating is 48 inches. 0= 4= Single Dual* Standard limits Special limits E E 2 Sheath Length L (fractional in.) 0 1 2 Junction Grounded G H Ungrounded U W (isolated) Exposed E D (isolated)
Standard Overbraid Flex Armor Fiberglass Solid A J R FEP Solid C L T Fiberglass Stranded* B K S FEP Stranded* D M U *Stranded lead wire available only for sheath O.D. 0.063 and larger. Fittings, Weld Pads 0 = None Note: If required, enter code from pages 63 to 64. If none, enter 0. A= B= C= F= G= H= T= U= Lead Wire Termination Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature male plug Miniature female jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard, 112 in. split leads 112 in. split leads with #8 spade lugs
Lead Wire Length E (whole feet)
Available lengths: 01 to 30, for lengths over 30 contact factory Special Requirements
0= 0 H = High temperature 1000F (538C) potting M = 500F (260C)
68
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Miniature Transitions Style AQ
L E
1 in. (25 mm) Note: 300F (149C) potting standard
0.156 in. dia.
Part Number
Sheath O.D. Lead Wire Const. Lead Wire Term. Sheath Sheath Lead Wire Length E Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration (whole in.)
5/32"
Special Rqmts.
A
Q= B= C= D= E = A= C= A= B= C= F= G= H= T= U= A= F= Q=
Q
Style
Miniature metal transition with 300F (149C) Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 Lead Wire Construction Fiberglass Solid FEP Solid Lead Wire Termination Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature male plug Miniature female jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard, 112 in. split leads 112 in. split leads with #8 spade lugs Sheath Material 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 (Type K)
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory 0= Single Standard limits Special limits Sheath Length L (fractional in.) 0 Junction Grounded G Calibration J J 3 K K 4 Ungrounded U
Lead Wire Length E (whole feet) Available lengths: 01 to 30 Special Requirements 0= 0 M = 500F (260C) potting X = Special requirements, contact factory
WATLOW
69
eaded Fitting
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
MI Thermocouples Option DorE
Connection Head Style AR

Single Threaded Fitting L Double Threaded Fitting
Type D (Small Cast Iron) or E (Small Aluminum)
Type H (Explosion Proof)
Type C (Polypropylene)
Part Number
Head Sheath Connection Mounting O.D. Fittings Head (in.) Sheath Sheath Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration
MI Thermocouples Option C
A
G= H= J = C= D= E= H=
0
Sheath O.D. (in.) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= Single Dual Standard limits Special limits E E 2 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 Junction Grounded G H
00
Sheath Length L (fractional in.)
0.125 0.188 0.250
Connection Head
Polypropylene Small cast iron Small aluminum Explosion proof
Head Mounting Fittings 0 = Single threaded 303 SS F = Double threaded 303 SS 12 in. NPT H* = Spring loaded double threaded 316 SS 12 in. NPT *0.250 in. diameter only A= F= Q= 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 (Type K) Sheath Material
Ungrounded U W (isolated)
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory
70
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
Wafer Head Style AS
L
The Style AS thermocouple features a wafer head, which allows quick access to terminal screws for wiring. This thermocouple is an economical choice because the termination is attached directly to the XACTPAK sheath.
Cold end termination temperature rating up to 1000F (540C)

Termination directly to sheath Allows quick hookup and disassembly Terminal head Available in a wide range of materials in both single and dual configurations
Part Number
Sheath Cold End O.D. Term. (in.) Fittings, Weld Pads Sheath Sheath Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration
A
G= H= J = C=
C
Sheath O.D. (in.)
0
Single Dual Junction Grounded G H
00
0.125 0.188 0.250 Cold End Termination Ceramic 1000F (540C), 1 8 in. diameter x 8 in. thick
1 5
Standard limits Special limits E E 2
Fittings, Weld Pads 0 = None Note: If required, enter code from pages 63 to 64. If none, enter 0. A= F= Q= Sheath Material 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 (Type K)
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 Sheath Length L (fractional in.)
WATLOW
71
Thermocouples
Mineral Insulated
For Use With Thermowells Style AT
Nom. 6 in. (152.4 mm)
3 4
/ in. (19 mm) NPT
Type 1 - 6 inch N-U-N typical (2 each 12 x 3 inch steel pipe nipples and 1 each malleable union)
Nom. 2 in. (50.8 mm)
/ in. (19 mm) NPT Type 4 - Connection Head Only with 12 inch NPT process connection
3 4
/ in. (19 mm) NPT Type 3 - 12 x 3 inch steel pipe nipple typical
3 4
Part Number
Sheath Connection Cold End O.D. Cong. Head (in.) Sheath Sheath Sheath Length L Length L Material (whole in.) (fract. in.) Junction Calibration SpringLoading
A
J = C= D= E= H=
J
Sheath O.D. (in.)
0
0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= Single Dual Standard limits Special limits Y= N= Yes No E E 2 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 Junction Grounded G H
0
Sheath Length L (fractional in.)
0.250 Connection Head Polypropylene (12 in. NPT thermocouple opening only) Small cast iron Small aluminum Explosion proof (12 in. NPT and 34 in. NPT thermocouple opening only)
Cold End Conguration 1 = Type 1, 6 in. nipple-union-nipple 3 = Type 3, 3 in. nipple 4 = Type 4, no extensions Note: Steel nipple and unions are standard. A= F= Q= Sheath Material 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 (Type K)
Sheath Length L (whole in.) Available lengths: 01 to 99, for lengths over 99 inches contact factory Note: For a complete sensor, add thermowell part number to the 15-digit AT part number. For sheath length, use AR (as required) and the factory will determine correct length.
Spring-Loading
72
WATLOW
Thermocouples
EXACTSENSE
The EXACTSENSE thermocouple from Watlow provides the accuracy, time response and durability required to help manufacturers improve the control of their diesel engine after-treatment systems. The resulting benefits include more efficient regeneration, better fuel economy and improved emissions to meet the more stringent global requirements. The EXACTSENSE thermocouple features integrated electronics within a molded connector housing. The electronics convert the thermocouple signal into either an analog or digital output signal that is compatible with the engine control module (ECM). Having a sensor with integrated electronics helps improve overall system accuracy and enables the use of information about the sensor such as part number, serial number, date of manufacture, time response, calibration, drift and more to enhance system performance or improve diagnostic capabilities. The EXACTSENSE thermocouple includes WATCOUPLE sensing technology. This technology uses materials selected for their stability and longevity at high temperatures; making this thermocouple an ideal choice for burner, flame and turbo applications. The durable mineral insulated thermocouple construction is also superior for applications requiring long immersion depths up to 7.9 in. (200 mm). The EXACTSENSE is point sensitive unlike RTDs which average the temperature over the length of the element. These EXACTSENSE features provide the ability to accurately measure the temperature near the center of larger pipes without complex algorithms. The mineral insulated construction also enables the tip to be tapered. This durable closed tip construction results in faster response times than competing sensor technologies can achieve with their less durable open tip constructions. EXACTSENSE tapered construction results in improved control and increased sensor life. The EXACTSENSE thermocouple meets the demanding requirements for over-the-road medium and heavy-duty vehicles as well as on off-road equipment including construction, mining, agriculture, marine and locomotive. The EXACTSENSE thermocouple is available with a variety of standard options to meet specific manufacturer requirements.
D DE ITY EN IL XT AB E AP

Integrated electronics Provide high system accuracy resulting in improved fuel economy Enable the availability of information for system performance monitoring and improved diagnostic capability Allow a variety of output signals compatible with ECMs WATCOUPLE thermocouple technology Provides reliability in rugged environment Operates at a wide range of temperatures Maximizes stability at high temperatures Provides longer sensor life Tapered tip construction Provides faster response time Increases life of sensors due to closed tip construction Long immersion depth Improves detection of actual process temperatures
Diesel particulate filter (DPF) Diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) Selective catalytic reduction (SCR) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Lean NOx trap (LNT) Turbocharger Burner Reformer
WATLOW
73
Thermocouples
EXACTSENSE
Specications
Sensor Type Mineral insulated thermocouple Output Options Analog 0 5V ratiometric analog voltage signal (RAVS) Analog 0 5V non-ratiometric analog voltage signal (AVS) LIN 2.1 or 1.3 compatible CAN J1939 Analog Supply Voltage (Vs1) 5V 0.25VDC LIN Supply Voltage (Vs2) 9 to 17VDC CAN Supply Voltage 6 to 16VDC LIN Output Communication Speed 9600, 19200 baud rate LIN 2.1 or 1.3 compatible CAN Output Communication Speed 250,000, 500,000 baud rate Operating Temperature Range of Sensor -40 to 1382F (-40 to 750C) (stainless) -40 to 1832F (-40 to 1000C) (alloy 600) -40 to 2012F (-40 to 1100C) (Haynes 230) Analog Accuracy with Electronics 18F (10C) from -40 to 932F (-40 to 500C) 22.5F (12.5C) from 932 to 1832F (500 to 1000C) LIN Accuracy with Electronics 14.4F (8C) from -40 to 2012F (-40 to 1100C) CAN Accuracy with Electronics 12.6F (7C) from -40 to 1112F (-40 to 600C) Response Time (T63) 0.08 in. (2.1 mm) Tip ~3 seconds in air moving at 70 meters/second Response Time (T63) 0.16 in. (4.0 mm) Tip ~7 seconds in air moving at 70 meters/second Immersion Depth (A Dimension) 0.98 to 7.87 in. (25 to 200 mm) Operating Temperature Range of Electronics and Connector -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C) Operating Temperature Range of Sensor to Wire Interface -40 to 392F (-40 to 200C) Electromagnetic Interference (EMI), Radio Control Frequency (RFI) 100V/meter 20MHz to 2GHz
Materials and Mounting

Sheath Materials 316 SS, alloy 600 or Haynes 230 Mounting Fittings M12x1.5-6g, M14x1.5-6g and M16x1.5-6g, 400 SS Lead Wire 0.96 mm2 (18 AWG - 19 strands of 30 AWG) stranded wire with Tefzel insulation Protective Sleeve 392F (200C) silicone coated fiberglass sleeve (optional) Connector Tyco Electronics 776488-1 (AMPSEAL 16 SERIES) with 2 rows of 2 gold plated pins Mating connector: Tyco plug 776487-1, Tyco S&F gold plated socket 776492-1, Tyco plug seal 776363-1
74
WATLOW
Thermocouples
EXACTSENSE
Dimensional Drawings
Bent Probe (90)
0.50 0.03 in. R (13 76 mm) 2.36 0.20 in. (60 5 mm) SS Transition with 200C Elastomer Seal 3 PLCS 48 1.0 in. (1220 25 mm) 48 1.0 in. (1220 25 mm)
Assembly (Shown with Three Inputs)
120C Plastic Enclosure Mates with 4 Position Dual Row Ampseal 16 - Key #1
Alloy 600 Sheath 0.188 in. ( 4.78 mm)
1.24 in. (31.5 mm) 0.82 mm 2 (18 AWG) Stranded WATCOUPLE Wire 200C ETFE Singles 200C Coated Fiberglass Sleeving
Mounting Fitting 400 SERIES SS TC2 0.272 in. Max. (6.9 mm Max.) TC3 A + 1.65 in. (A + 42 mm)
48 1.0 in. (1220 25 mm)
Electronic Housing
Taper to 0.083 in. (2.1 mm) optional WATCOUPLE T/C U-Junction 0.71 in. (18 mm) 2.88 in. (73 mm)
0.59 in. (15 mm)
0.93 in. (23.6 mm)
Straight Probe
Mounting Fitting 400 SERIES SS
1.07 in. (27 mm) 0.47 in. (12 mm)
Alloy 600, Haynes 230, or 316 SS Sheath 0.188 in. (4.78 mm)
Taper to 0.083 in. (2.1 mm) optional WATCOUPLE T/C U-Junction
0.272 in. Max. (6.9 mm Max.)
A + 3.75 in. (A + 95 mm)
WATLOW
75
Thermocouples
Base Metal
Watlow offers two basic types of base metal thermocouples with protection tubes: bare and ceramic insulated elements. Many variations of each type are available to meet your application needs.
2300F (1260C) maximum temperature

Insulated wire thermocouples Suitable for most general purpose applications Bare and ceramic insulated elements Available in ASTM E 230 Types K and J can be twisted or butt welded Choices include straight or angle types, two- or four-hole insulators and single or dual element Protected thermocouples Supplied complete with head, block and protection tube Several styles available
Metal processing such as aluminum, zinc, brass (with appropriate protection tube) Chemical Petrochemical Industrial storage tanks
76
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Base Metal
Bare Elements
To order, specify: Part number-length Example: 1402-36 or 1432-BW-24
0.75 in. (19 mm) L
Straight Elements with Two-Hole Insulators

To order, specify: Part number-length Example: 1409-48 or 1436-BW-18
Bare Thermocouple Element, Twisted and Welded 0.75 in. (19 mm) L
Thermocouple Element, Twisted and Welded 0.75 in. (19 mm) L
Thermocouple Element, Butt Welded
Part Number Type K Twisted and Twisted and Welded Butt Welded Welded 1402 1432-BW 1403 1433-BW 1404 1434-BW 1503 1409 1436-BW 1507 1410 1437-BW 1411 1438-BW 1509 1412 1439-BW 1510 Note: For special limits, add -SP to part number. Type J Butt Welded 1576-BW 1578-BW 1579-BW 1580-BW AWG Gauge 8 11 14 8 11 14 20 Insulator Part No. BARE BARE BARE 301 304 304 328 Length (in.)
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 54, 60, 66, 72
Angle Type with Two-Hole Insulators

To order, specify: Part number-cold leg length-hot leg length Example: 1440-BW-12-24
Part Number Type K Butt Welded 1440-BW AWG Gauge 8 Insulator Part No. Hot and Hot Leg Length Cold Sections* (in.) 301 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 54, 60
Cold Leg 0.75 in. (19 mm)
Note: For special limits, add -SP to part number.
Hot Leg
WATLOW
77
Thermocouples
Base Metal
Dual Elements with Four-Hole Insulators
To order, specify: Part number-length Example: 1442-BW-36
0.75 in. (19 mm) L
Thermocouple Element, Butt Welded
Part Number (Butt Welded Only) Type K 1442-BW 1443-BW Type J 1584-BW 1585-BW AWG Gauge 14 20 Insulator Part No. 360 378 Length 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48 54, 60, 66, 72
Immersion Tips
SERV-RITE immersion tips are superior thermocouples for nonferrous molten metals. The hot junction is forged into the 446 stainless steel sheath for maximum sensitivity. Available in Type K calibration only. To order, specify: Part number-tip length-lance length Example: 1449-501-T-8-43 1449-M-12-43
Tip Length
Length of Tip in. (mm) 8 12 15 20 (203) (305) (381) (508)
Length of Leads in. (mm) 43 43 43 43 (1092) (1092) (1092) (1092)
Part Number 1449-501-T-8-43 1449-M-12-43 1449-M-15-43 1449-M-20-43
Note: Not available for sale outside the United States.
78
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Base Metal
Standard Thermocouple with Protection
Straight Type To order, specify: Part number-length Example: 1409-1308-24 Metal Tube
Length
Part Number Type K 1409-1395 1409-1396 1409-1341 1409-1342 1409-1307 1409-1308 1409-1309 Type J 1507-1395 1507-1396 1507-1341 1507-1342 1507-1307 1507-1308 1507-1309 AWG Gauge 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Protection Tube NPT Size Material in. 1 Alloy 601 2 3 Alloy 601 4 1 304 SS 2 3 304 SS 4 1 446 SS 2 3 446 SS 4 446 SS 1
Pipe Diameter Construction in. 0.840 Seamless 1.050 Seamless 0.840 Welded 1.050 Welded 0.840 Seamless 1.050 Seamless 1.315 Seamless
Cast Iron Head 70900203 70900202 70900203 70900202 70900203 70900202 70900201
Length in.
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 54, 60
90 Degree Angle Type To order, specify: Part number- cold leg length, hot leg length. Standard cold leg length is 18 inches. Example: 1414-1395-18-24
Hot Leg
Cold Leg 18 in. (460 mm)
Standard Fixed Elbow
709 Series Head
Part Number Type K 1414-1307-18 1414-1328-18 1414-1395-18 1415-1307-18 1415-1326-18 1415-1328-18 1415-1395-18 Pipe Diameters 1 2 in. NPT = 0.840 3 4 in. NPT = 1.050 1 in. NPT = 1.315 Type J 1517-1307-18 1517-1328-18 1517-1395-18 1518-1307-18 1518-1326-18 1518-1328-18 1518-1395-18 AWG Gauge 8 8 8 14 14 14 14
Protection Tube NPT Size Material in. 1 446 SS 2 Black steel 1 1 Alloy 601 2 1 446 SS 2 1 Black steel 2 Black steel 1 1 Alloy 601 2
Construction Seamless Welded Seamless Seamless Welded Welded Seamless
Cast Iron Head 70900203 70900201 70900203 70900203 70900203 70900201 70900203
Length in.
12, 18, 24, 30, 36
WATLOW
79
Thermocouples
High Temperature
As a long time leader in the field of temperature measurement, Watlow continues to meet the demands of technological advances by developing thermocouples using materials with unusually high performance characteristics and superior quality. Watlows modern facilities are built to ensure that products meet compliance with todays complex specifications, standards and industrial or governmental regulatory requirements. Thermocouples are tested and certified to meet document compliance with agency standards - proof that Watlow products meet reliability and high performance standards.
Compliance with recognized agency tolerances and specifications Temperature ranges up to 3100F (1700C) NIST traceable calibration certificates Thermocouple limits set to ITS-90 reference standards
Semiconductor: CVD processing, control spikes Diesel engines Jet engines Laboratory research Nuclear environments Power stations and steam generators Rocket engines Turbines Vacuum furnaces Exhaust gas sensing Glass manufacturing Heat treating and control sensors Ferrous and non-ferrous metals

Thermocouple conductors Ideal for all temperature applications Wide selection of sheath materials Meets specific application temperatures Insulation materials Meets demanding application temperatures Grounded and ungrounded junctions Meets electrical configurations Testing and certification services Ideal for demanding applications
80
WATLOW
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Noble Metal
Watlows noble metal thermocouples tolerate higher temperatures and provide greater accuracy than base metal thermocouples. Choose from ASTM E230 Types B, R or S, depending on temperature and tolerance requirements. Thermocouples can be ordered as bare elements, elements with insulators or as assemblies. A typical assembly includes a head, alumina insulators and a protecting tube. A variety of hardware choices are available.
Type B, R or S, 24 AWG
To order, specify: Part number-calibration-length Example: 2114-R-24-MC
Enlarged picture of copper sleeves
For use with standard, general purpose heads; platinum assemblies can be furnished with MC-124 copper sleeves at no additional charge. Add the suffix -MC to part number.
Length
1.5 in. (38 mm)
Elements with Insulators; Shown with Optional MC-124 Copper Sleeves
Calibration
Length in. 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
Part Number Bare T/C 2110-B-12 2110-B-18 2110-B-24 2110-B-30 2110-B-36 2110-B-42 2110-B-48 2110-R-12 2110-R-18 2110-R-24 2110-R-30 2110-R-36 2110-R-42 2110-R-48 2110-S-12 2110-S-18 2110-S-24 2110-S-30 2110-S-36 2110-S-42 2110-S-48
Part Number T/C with Aluyminia Insulator* 2114-B-12 2114-B-18 2114-B-24 2114-B-30 2114-B-36 2114-B-42 2114-B-48 2114-R-12 2114-R-18 2114-R-24 2114-R-30 2114-R-36 2114-R-42 2114-R-48 2114-S-12 2114-S-18 2114-S-24 2114-S-30 2114-S-36 2114-S-42 2114-S-48
*Insulation consists of a one-piece two-hole alumina (0.125 diameter) insulator. For lengths over 24 in. (610 mm), a single piece alumina 3 16 inch diameter insulator is used.
WATLOW
81
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Noble Metal Thermocouple Assemblies
To order, specify: Part number-calibration-length of tube Example: 2144-S-24 2147-R-36
1027 Support Casting 1081 Silicon Carbide Secondary Tube With Collar
70900203 Head
MC-258 Fiber Gasket TH-191 Fitting
1147 Primary Tube 1146 Inner Primary Tube
2114 Type S or R Element With Insulators TH-135 Iron Coupling 1027-A Flange
Typical Assembly with 70900203 Head
70900203 Head* and Alumina Ceramics

Part Number* 2144 2145 Calibration B, R, S B, R, S AWG Gauge 24 24 Protecting Tubes 1147 Alumina Primary only 1147 Primary only 1146 Alumina Inner Primary 1147 Alumina Primary 1146 Alumina Inner Primary 1081 Secondary Size I.D. x O.D. in.
7
Length in.
16 x 1116 4 x 1116 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48
2147
B, R, S
24
4 x 134
*Specify Type B, R or S by adding -B, -R or -S after the part number. Types B, R and S thermocouples and the thermoelements are provided in accordance with ITS-90.
82
WATLOW
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Exotic Metal Sheath
The specification tables shown on the following pages detail Watlows highly specialized line of metal sheathed thermocouple configurations. Some combinations of noble or refractory metal sheaths, high temperature insulations and compatible thermocouple conductors can withstand temperatures as high as 3100F (1700C); others can be used in unusually corrosive environments. Pressure, atmosphere and other process variables all affect service life and operating maximums. High Temperature Insulation Materials All of our most common exotic sheathed thermocouples are produced using hard-fired ceramic insulators strung onto the thermocouple conductors and inserted into the sheath with minimum practical clearance.
Part Number B Insulation Alumina Oxide (AI2O3) (99.6% min. purity) Hafnia Oxide (HfO2) Approximate Upper Useful Temperature 2800F (1540C)
These sensors are constructed with hard-fired ceramic insulators strung onto the thermocouple conductors and inserted into the sheath with minimum practical clearance. This type of loose pack assembly cannot be bent or formed in the field. Contact the factory for special pre-bent sensors.
This type of loose pack assembly cannot be bent or formed in the field. Please contact the factory for special pre-bent assemblies.
Approximate Melting Point 3660F (2015C)
Remarks Comparable electrical properties to MgO. Used primarily in loose pack constructions because of availability and low cost. Hafnia is replacing BeO in applications where BeO cannot be used because of safety concerns. Hafnia can be used up to 4530F (2500C)
4530F (2500C)
5000F (2760C)
High Temperature Sheath Materials Below is a table with our most common sheath materials. However, if an alternate material is required please refer to
Sheath Material Molybdenum (mo)
our extended capabilities section on page 85 for additional materials
Available Constructions (in.) Max. Approximate Recommended Melting Point Temperature Environment 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250 4750F 3450F Inert, vacuum, N/A LP LP LP (2620C) (1900C) reducing
Remarks Molybdenum is a refractory metal that is brittle and available in uncompacted styles only. Do not use in oxidizing environments above 750F (400C). Vacuum at <10(-2) torr to 3100F (1700C). Vacuum <10(-4) torr to 3400F (1870C). Stable in inert gases to 3450F (1900C). Avoid contamination with graphite, carbon and hydrocarbons Maximum temperature 2150F (1175C). Most widely used thermocouple sheath material. Good high temperature strength, corrosion resistance, resistance to chloride ion stress corrosion cracking and oxidation resistance to high temperatures. Do not use in sulfur bearing environments. Good in nitriding environments.
Alloy 600
2470F (1345C)
2150F (1175C)
Inert, vacuum, reducing, oxidizing
N/A
LP
N/A
LP
WATLOW
83
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Exotic Metal Sheath
High Temperature Sensing Wire
Calibration Type Conductors ASTM Type B PT-30% Rh vs. Pt-6% Rh Approximate Upper Useful Temperature Melting Point 3100F (1700C) 3250F (1790C) Remarks Type B is composed of a positive leg (BP) which is approximately 70% platinum and 30% rhodium and a negative leg (BN) which is approximately 94% platinum and 6% rhodium. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and appropriate outer sheath, Type B is usable from 1600 to 3100F (870 to 1700C). Type B is available in standard limits and special limits ITS-90 scale. Type R is composed of a positive leg (RP) which is 87% platinum and 13% rhodium, and a negative leg (RN) which is 100% platinum. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and appropriate outer sheath, Type R is usable from 32 to 2700F (0 to 1480C). Type R is available in standard limits and special limits ITS-90 scale. Type S is composed of a positive leg (SP) which is 90% platinum and 10% rhodium, and a negative leg (SN) which is 100% platinum. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and appropriate outer sheath, Type S is usable from 32 to 2700F (0 to 1480C). Type S has a lower EMF output than Type R and is available in standard limits and special limits ITS-90 scale.
ASTM Type R
PT-13% Rh vs. Pt
2700F (1480C)
3200F (1760C)
ASTM Type S
PT-10% Rh vs. Pt
2700F (1480C)
3200F (1760C)
84
WATLOW
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Exotic Metal Sheath
High Temperature Sheath Materials
Sheath Material Platinum 20% Rhodium (Pt-20% Rh) Available Constructions (in.) Maximum Approximate Recommended 0.125 0.188 0.250 Melting Point Temperature Environment 0.063 3400F 3000F Oxidizing, inert, * * N/A N/A (1870C) (1650C) vacuum
Tantalum (Ta)
5425F (2995C)
4350F (2400C)
Inert, vacuum
Remarks Used primarily in oxidizing environments to 3000F (1650C). Applications include semiconductor manufacturing, research and gas turbine probes. Silicon, sulfur and carbon are contaminants of platinum and should be avoided. Refractory metal that is very ductile. Use only in inert atmospheres or very good vacuums. <10(-3) torr. Hydrogen and nitrogen will react with tantalum above 750F (400C) resulting in nitride and hydride formation that will affect life. Lightweight, excellent strength in the 300 to 800F (150 to 425C) temperature range. Excellent resistance to oxidizing agents such as nitric or chromic acids. Resistant to inorganic chloride solutions, chlorinated organic compound and moist chlorine gas. Resistant to salt water spray and sea water.
Titanium (Ti)
3135F (1725C)
Oxidizing 600F (315C)
Oxidizing, inert, N/A vacuum
NA - Not available * = Available as special
WATLOW
85
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Exotic Metal Sheath Plug or Jack Termination
High temperature insulations Loose pack assemblies Plug or jack cold end terminations
Part Number
Sheath O.D. Connector Type Insulation Sheath Material Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L (fract. in.) Junction Calibration Special Rqmts.
HC
G= H= J* = * Not
0
Sheath O.D. (in.) Sheath Length L (in.) Whole inches: 01 to 60 0= 4=
00
0.125 0.188 0.250 available with molybdenum sheath.
Sheath Length L (fractional in.) 0 1 2
Connector Type A = Standard plug B = Standard jack C = Standard plug with mating connector Note: Standard plugs and jacks 400F (205C), 0.250 in. max. O.D. B= D= 3= Q= Molybdenum Alloy 600 Insulation Loose pack AI2O3 Loose pack HfO2 Sheath Material
Junction U= Ungrounded - Single Contact Ungrounded - Dual Factory Calibration B = ASTM Type B - Standard limits R = ASTM Type R - Standard limits S = ASTM Type S - Standard limits Note: For special limits contact the factory. Special Requirements
0 = None Note: If required, contact the factory
86
WATLOW
Thermocouples
High Temperature
Exotic Metal Sheath Metal Transitions
(Lead tolerance +4 / -0 in.) E
High temperature insulations Loose pack assemblies Transition with lead wire termination Standard maximum continuous operating temperature of 500F (260C) for the transition.
Part Number
Sheath O.D. Lead Wire Const. Lead Wire Term. Insulation Sheath Material Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Lead Wire Length L Length (fract. in.) Junction Calibration E (ft) Special Rqmts.
HF
G= H= J* = * Not Sheath O.D. 0.125 0.188 0.250 available with molybdenum sheath. Sheath Length L (in.) Whole inches: 01 to 60 0= 4= U= Ungrounded - Single Contact Ungrounded - Dual Factory Calibration B = ASTM Type B - Standard limits R = ASTM Type R - Standard limits S = ASTM Type S - Standard limits Note: For special limits contact the factory. Lead Wire Length E (ft) Whole feet: 01 to 25 (01 foot standard) Special Requirements M = Standard 500F (260C) potting Sheath Length L (fractional in.) 0 1 2 Junction
Lead Wire Construction A = Fiberglass solid - standard J = Fiberglass solid - overbraid A B C F G H T U W = = = = = = = = = Lead Wire Termination Standard plug Standard jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature plug Miniature jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard - 112 in. split leads 112 in. split leads with space lugs 112 in. split leads with BX connector and spade lugs Insulation Loose pack AI2O3 Loose pack HfO2 Sheath Material Molybdenum Alloy 600
B= D= 3= Q=
WATLOW
87
Thermocouples
MICROCOIL
Accurate, Repeatable, Fast Response in Perpendicular Surface Measurement Watlows MICROCOIL miniature thermocouple provides surface temperature measurements that deliver an unparalleled degree of accuracy. This patented technology achieves critical isothermal surface temperature measurement and offers superior design flexibility. Typical sensor-to-sensor repeatability of one to two percent (DT) can be achieved with the MICROCOIL because sensor areas that are vulnerable to normal production variances are not inside of the thermal gradient. Weld location, insulation thickness and welded tip thickness no longer impact measurement in an isothermal environment. Therefore, the inherent challenges of measuring surface temperatures no longer exist. The MICROCOIL thermocouple utilizes Watlows XACTPAK mineral insulated thermocouple cable. When used with an ungrounded junction, the sensor is electrically isolated from the surface being measured. For higher voltage applications, the aluminum nitride sensor disc option can be used for additional protection. The helix design of the MICROCOIL thermocouple elicits a faster response time because the surface temperature conducts only through the diameter of the cable and the width of the sensor disk. Thermal analysis demonstrates the superior performance of the MICROCOIL technology. This patented process achieves critical isothermal area for a long length of a very small cable, ensuring accurate and repeatable measurement. Standard straight sensors experience poor accuracy of response time, non-repeatable results as well as errors ranging from 20 to 30 percent and higher.

Miniature size Allows for precision measurement in tight spaces XACTPAK mineral insulated thermocouple cable Electronically isolated and shielded 1292F (700C) maximum continuous temperature Offers exact measurement for demanding applications Self leveling and loading Provides superior repeatability of measurement for a wide variety of surfaces
Environmental chambers Chip cases Heat sinks Packaging Platens
88
WATLOW
Thermocouples
MICROCOIL
S H R 0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
0.125 in. (3.175 mm) L
302F (150C) standard surface calibration supplied.
Part Number

0.125 in. (3.175 mm)
Temp. Rating
Junction Type
Sheath Length S
Hot Leg Length L H
Fitting, Optional
Lead Length Const.
Lead Length L
Lead Wire Term.
MC
302F (150C) standard surface calibration supplied.
Type K Calibration, 0.020 inch diameter Alloy 718 thermocouple sheath, 0.125 inch coil diameter, 12.5 oz approx. spring force for 0.0500 inch compression. C= N= G= U= Temperature Rating Copper tip 662F (350C) max. Aluminum nitride 1292F (700C) max. Junction Type Grounded single junction Ungrounded single junction Sheath Length S 0= C= 1= 2= 5= Fitting, Optional None Compression tting, adjustable, 18 in. NPT, TFE gland Lead Length Construction, Solid Conductors 24 gauge berglass 26 gauge FEP with shield and drain not attached 24 gauge FEP with stainless steel overbraid Lead Length L
XX = 02 to 18 in.
Hot Leg Length H, if 90 bend (in.)
XX = 03 to 99 in. A= B= C= F = G= H= T = U=
0 = N/A, straight length A = 1.125 D = 1.500 H = 2.000 M = 2.500 S = 3.000 Notes: Bend radius is 0.25 in. Cold leg length (1 inch min.) = S - H - 0.4 inch If a tting is ordered, it will be installed hand tightened onto the hot leg. If a tting is ordered, the min. hot leg length H is 2.500 inch
Lead Wire Terminations Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature male plug Miniature female jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard, 1.5 in. split leads 1.5 in. split leads with spade lugs
WATLOW
89
Thermocouples
Radio Frequency
Watlows TR thermocouple probe is designed for use in plasma generation applications to ensure accurate temperature readings through radio or conduction environments where traditional sensors are ineffective. Radio frequency energy can cause serious temperature measurement errors when exposed to these types of environments. The TR probe is constructed using a unique combination of high performance materials. The sensor tip is made from high thermal conductivity materials to provide a quick response time. High dielectric insulation electrically insulates the sensor from capacitive coupling. Lead wires are twisted to improve common mode rejection and reduce induced EMI (electromagnetic interference).

3000VDC dielectric rating Allows thermocouple to be used in platens with dc bias High thermal conductivity design Ensures accurate, repeatable measurements High CMMR lead wire design Reduces induced error from EMI
Options
Type K calibration 0.875 in. (22.23 mm) to 1.5 in. (3 mm) immersion depths 516 - 18 or M8 threaded fitting 260C or 500C rated constructions
90
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Radio Frequency
TR Thermocouple
Stainless Steel Threaded Fitting 260 Version
Lead Length
0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
Thermally Conductive Tip
Spring Compressed
Platen Modification Detail

Drill Point
0.250 in. (6.35 mm)
Threads 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) ("I" 0.005 in.)
Standard Drill For Thread Size
2.44 in. (62 mm)
Lead Length
500 Version
0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
Tip Shape
Flat 0.250 in. (6.35 mm)
59 0.344 in. (8.74 mm)
0.344 in. (8.74 mm)
+0.127 mm/ 0.201 in. +0.005 in./ 5.11 mm -0.000 mm -0.000 in.
0.190 in. (4.83 mm)
0.190 in. (4.83 mm)
0.313 in. .010 in. (7.95 mm 0.254 mm)
* Tolerance
Class 2B for UNC Threads Tolerance Class 6H for Metric Threads
Part Number
Max. Temp. Tip Shape Imm. Depth I Threaded Fitting Junction Size Type Calibration Lead Length L Lead Wire Term.
TR
C= N= F= Maximum Temperature 260C silver-plated copper tip 500C aluminum nitride tip (AIN) Tip Shape Flat Immersion Depth I (in.) U= K= Junction Type Ungrounded single Calibration Special limits K (1.1C or 0.4%) Lead Length L
XX = 12 to 48 in. A= B= C= F = G= H= T = U=
From Tip to top of threads, spring compressed 08 = 0.875 10 = 1.000 11 = 1.125 12 = 1.250 13 = 1.375 15 = 1.500 5= 8= Threaded Fitting Size 5/16-18 UNC-2A M8 x 1.25-6g
Lead Wire Terminations Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature male plug Miniature female jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard, 1.5 in. split leads 1.5 in. split leads with spade lugs
WATLOW
91
Thermocouples
True Surface (TST)
Increase Surface Temperature Accuracy with Improved Thermocouple Design Watlows true surface thermocouple (TST) offers superior accuracy for measuring flat surface temperatures. This compact, highly accurate sensor isolates the thermocouple junction from ambient airflow. The TST typically achieves accuracy and repeatability between one to two percent (T). The TST, with its removable molded cover, fits into corners and other tight locations. TSTs are easy to install with a variety of commonly used screw types. Watlows TST sensor is ideal for many applications including semiconductor chambers, platens, packaging, cleaning and food preparation.

Isothermal measuring junction Offers excellent thermal conductivity for the measuring junction Molded insulator Isolates the isothermal measuring block from ambient airflow Compact, universal package Fits into corners and other tight locations easily (0.44 in. (11.88 mm) side by 0.24 in. (6.10 mm) high) Molded insulator is removable for applications where an even smaller package is needed Temperature rating of 400F (200C) Offers superior application flexibility for a wide variety of surfaces
Steady State Temperature Measurement Test

Purpose: To determine and compare the steady state error of the Watlow TST and a common washerstyle thermocouple at several temperature settings with and without ambient airflow. Test Description: Each sensor was attached to a brass hot plate and allowed to reach equilibrium before temperature readings were taken. Room temperature air was then blown onto the hot plate and the sensors. Temperature readings were taken after the system reached the new equilibrium point. The test was performed with a 20, 40, 60 and 80C differential between the hot plate temperature and ambient. Results: Ambient temperature = 25C.
Options
Ungrounded or grounded junction(s) Type J or K calibrations Shielded lead wire with drain, either isolated from or connected to the sensor sheath
92
WATLOW
Thermocouples
True Surface (TST)
0.25 in. (6.35 mm) 1.40 in. (35.56 mm) 1.87 in. (47.50 mm)
0.438 in. (11.13 mm)
0.1066 in. 0.325 in. (4.22 mm) (8.26 mm) (Use #6, #8 or M4 bolt)
Part Number
Lead Wire Const. Lead Wire Term. Junction Type Calibration Lead Length E
TST
2= 3= Lead Wire Construction FEP 26 gauge solid FEP 26 gauge solid with shield and ground, not continuous to sheath (Terminations A, B and C are not available with this lead wire construction Lead Wire Terminations Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature male plug Miniature female jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard, 1.5 in. split leads 1.5 in. split leads with spade lugs Single Standard limits Special limits 01 to 99 feet Junction Type Grounded G Calibration J J 3 Lead Length E K K 4 Ungrounded U
A= B= C= F = G= H= T = U=
WATLOW
93
Thermocouples
Multipoints
Temperature variances exist in all systems, regardless of materials, working fluid or system design. There is not a process that involves heating a particular medium where temperature of that medium is consistent throughout temperature gradients always exist. Sensing temperature at a single location during a process is acceptable for many applications because temperature gradients are often insignificant. However, there is a need for many applications to monitor temperature in multiple locations to ensure a safe, accurate and cost efficient process. Installing multiple, independent temperature sensors may be impractical due to cost or space limitations. Multipoint temperature sensors accurately measure temperatures at various locations along the sensors length. They are used across a broad range of processes and installationspredominately in applications involving a large or complex process where close temperature control is necessary. Multipoint temperature sensors are designed to meet requirements of specific applications that include temperature, pressure, chemical environments, time response and number of points required. Sensors are constructed from a variety of protecting tube materials that use XACTPAK mineral insulated, metal-sheathed cable. Multipoint temperature sensors are available in standard or special ASTM thermocouple calibration tolerances. For applications requiring extreme accuracy, special constructions can be made with platinum resistance temperature detectors (RTDs).
Chemical processing Petroleum distillation towers Semiconductor manufacturing Profiles of furnaces and kilns Combustion research Storage tanks Air flow ducts
94
WATLOW
Thermocouples
Multipoints
Protection Tube Diameter Point 10 Point 9 Point 8 Point 7 Point 6 Point 5 Point 4 Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Lead Wire Length
Transition 5/8 in. Dia. x 5 in. Length Protection Tube Length
Note: Sensor point locations are measured from the protection tube tip. Please specify point location when ordering.
Thermocouple sensors made from mineral insulated, metal-sheathed cable are positioned inside the overall protection sheath.
Part Number
Prot. Tube Dia. Prot. Number Tube of Points Materials Calibration Junction Protection Tube Length Lead Wire Const. Lead Wire Length Lead Wire Term.
AW
G= H= J= Protection Tube Diameter (in.) 0.125 0.188 0.250 Number of Points Protection Tube Length (in.) 006-096* *Contact the factory for lengths greater than 96 in. A= C= 01-25 A= B= C= F = G= H= T = Lead Wire Construction Fiberglass solid wire FEP solid wire Lead Wire Length (ft)
02 = 10 F = 316 SS Q = Alloy 600 Standard limits Special limits G= U=
Protection Tube Materials
Lead Wire Terminations Standard male plug Standard female jack Standard plug with mating connector Miniature male plug Miniature female jack Miniature plug with mating connector Standard, 112 in. split leads
Calibration J J 3 Junction Grounded Ungrounded K K 4
WATLOW
95
96
WATLOW
Resistance Temperature Sensors

Temperature Product RTDs Description F C Accuracy Accurate, repeatable and interchangeable -328 to -200 to DIN Class A over a wide operating range. 1200 650 0.06% at 32F (0C) DIN Class B 0.12% at 32F (0C) Highly sensitive to small changes in -75 to -60 to 1% at 77F temperature, fairly accurate over a limited 500 260 (25C) or 77F temperature range. (25C) Suited for heavy-duty applications including those in harsh environments. -40 to -40 to Available with 392 200 either RTD or Thermistors. See information above Page 98
Thermistors
109
ENVIROSEAL HD
116 Resistance Temperature Sensors
WATLOW
9

RTDs
Bends
3 3 1
Diameter in. 0.125 0.188 0.250
Minimum H Dimension in. 2 2 2
Minimum C Dimension in. 2 2 2

H 10 - 90 Radius
8 8 2
Lead Terminations
Standard Male Plug
Miniature Male Plug

K

T 112*
Length
Split Leads
U
Length
112*
#8 Spade Lugs
* When style contains jacketed wire.
98
WATLOW

RTDs
Fitting Options
Fixed Fittings
303 SS
0.063 to 0.250
16
11
16

Customer Specified
303 SS
0.125 to 0.250
16

Customer Specified
303 SS
1
0.125 to 0.250

Customer Specified
303 SS
0.125 to 0.250
134
Fixed Double Thread 12 NPT

Customer Specified
Fitting Type Material Sheath Size in. 0.125 Brass 0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS NPT Thread Size in.
1
Hex Size in.

1
Length in. 1 118 1316 114 114 1516 1516 114 114 114 2716 114 114 114 2716
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS
2 2 2 8
0.188 0.250
Compression Fittings: Compression fittings are shipped finger-tight on the sheath allowing field installation. Once non-adjustable fittings are deformed, they cannot be relocated. Adjustable fittings come with Tetrafluorethylene (TFE) sealant or lava sealant glands.
WATLOW
99

RTDs
316 SS
0.250

100
WATLOW

RTDs
Watlow manufactures a variety of RTD sensors that are specially designed to ensure precise and repeatable temperature measurement. Watlow sensors are built to meet the most demanding industrial applications while providing a lower total cost of ownership for our customers.
Precise and stable within the wide temperature range of -328 to 1200F (-200 to 650C)

Strain-free construction Provides dependable, accurate readings Allows elements from different lots to be substituted with no recalibration needed High signal-to-noise output Increases accuracy of data transmission Permits greater distances between sensor and measuring equipment Temperature coefficient (alpha) carefully controlled while insulation resistance values exceed DIN-IEC-51 standards Ensures sensor sensitivity Minimizes self heating Allows precise measurement Repeatable
Stoves, grills, fryers and other food equipment Textile production Plastics processing Petrochemical processing Air, gas and liquid temperature measurement Exhaust gas temperature measurement Semiconductor processing Bearing and gear boxes
WATLOW
101

RTDs
Standard Industrial Insulated Leads Style RB
L Lead Wire Length
1/ in. 2 Nominal
Part Number
Sheath O.D. (in.) Lead Wire Const. Fittings Lead Wire Term. Sheath Const. Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L (fract. in.) Element Initial Element Accuracy Lead Wire Length (ft)
RB
G= H= J= 0.125 0.188 0.250 Sheath O.D. (in.)
A
A= Sheath Construction 316 SS
Sheath Length L (in.) Whole inches: 02 to 99 0= 4= Sheath Length L (fractional in.) No fraction, whole inches 1 2 in. 3-Wire B E K 4-Wire C L
Lead Wire Construction* Standard Overbraid Flex Armor Fiberglass stranded A J* R* PFA stranded B L* T* Certain option combinations must be furnished with a transition between the sheath and lead wire. Contact the factory if a transition is unacceptable. *May require a transition. Fittings If required, enter the order code from pages 99 to 100. If none enter 0. Lead Wire Termination
Element 2-Wire 100 single A 100 dual* D 1000 single J * Available in 0.250 inch diameter only.
A* = Standard male plug 400F (200C) B* = Standard female plug C* = Standard plug with mating connector J* = Male miniature plug K* = Female miniature jack L* = Male/female mini set T = Standard leads U = Leads with spade lugs * Requires two-or three-wire, single element only.
A= B=
Initial Element Accuracy @ 0C DIN Class A (0.06%) DIN Class B (0.12%)
Lead Wire Length (ft) Whole feet: 01 to 99 Note: Single wires for 4 feet and under. Duplex wires for over 4 feet.

High accuracy Dependable readings Customized diameters From 0.125 to 0.250 inch Epoxy sealed Resists moisture and pull out Standard 500F (260C) potting Durable rigid sheath 316 stainless steel -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C) Internal heat transfer paste Quick time response
102
WATLOW

RTDs
Plug or Jack Termination Style RC
Part Number
Fittings Sheath Const. Sheath Cold End Term. O.D. (in.) Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L (fract. in.) Element Initial Element Accuracy
RC
G= H= J= Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.125 0.188 0.250
00
Sheath Length L (in.) Whole inches: 02 to 36 0= 4= 100 single 1000 single A= B= Sheath Length L (fractional in.) No fraction, whole inches 1 2 in. Element 2-Wire A J Initial Element Accuracy @ 0C DIN Class A (0.06%) DIN Class B (0.12%)
Cold End Termination A = Standard plug C = Standard plug with mating connector Note: Standard plugs and jacks 400F (200C) Fittings If required, enter the order code from pages 99 to 100. If none enter 0. A= Sheath Construction 316 SS
3-Wire B K

Durable rigid sheath 316 SS -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C) Durable connectors with copper pins 400F (200C) temperature rating Provides simple connection to extension leads Brazed adapter Provides superior connector attachment High accuracy Ensures dependable readings
WATLOW
103

RTDs
Metal Transitions Style RF
L
Part Number
Sheath O.D. (in.) Lead Wire Const. Fittings Lead Wire Term. Sheath Const. Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L (fract. in.) Element Initial Element Accuracy Lead Wire Length (ft)
RF
G= H= J= Fiberglass stranded PFA stranded Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.125 0.188 0.250 Lead Wire Construction Standard Overbraid A J B L Flex Armor R T K= Sheath Construction 316 SS mineral insulated
Sheath Length L (in.) Whole inches: 03 to 99, metric lengths and lengths over 99 inches contact factory. 0= 4= 100 single A= B= Sheath Length L (fractional in.) No fraction, whole inches 1 2 in. Element 2-Wire A Initial Element Accuracy @ 0C DIN Class A (0.06%) DIN Class B (0.12%) Lead Wire Length (ft) 3-Wire B
Fittings If required, enter the order code from pages 99 to 100. If none enter 0. Lead Wire Termination
A* = Standard male plug B* = Standard female plug C* = Standard plug with mating connector J* = Male miniature plug K* = Female miniature jack L* = Male/female mini set T = Standard leads U = Leads with spade lugs * Requires two-or three-wire, single element only.
Whole feet: 01 to 99

Stainless steel transitions filled with 500F (260C) epoxy Protects sensor from moisture Encapsulates connection between wire and cable Coiled spring strain relief Protects lead wire against sharp bends in the transition area Flexible mineral insulated construction Provides a bendable and highly durable sensor Temperature rating -328 to 1200F (-200 to 650C) High accuracy Ensures dependable readings Diameters available 0.125 to 0.250 inch O.D. 104 WATLOW

RTDs
Connection Head/Optional Transmitter Style RR
Single Threaded Fitting L Double Threaded Fitting
Part Number
Sheath O.D. (in.) Con. Head Head Mtg. Fittings Sheath Const. Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L (fract. in.) Element Initial Element Accuracy
RR
G= H= J= Sheath O.D. (in.) 0.125 0.188 0.250
00
Sheath Length L (in.) Whole inches: 02 to 99; for metric lengths and lengths over 99 inches contact the factory. 0 = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = 6 = 7 = Sheath Length L (fractional in.) No fraction, whole inches 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8
Connection Head C = Polypropylene D = Cast iron E = Cast aluminum H = Explosion proof U* = E head with 5750 transmitter V* = C head with 5750 transmitter W* = H head with 5750 transmitter * For units with transmitter, the order must specify a range and degree F or C, as well as a temperature span. O = Single threaded, 303 SS F= Double threaded, 303 SS 12 in. NPT H* = Spring loaded, double threaded, 316 SS 12 in. NPT * Available in 0.250 inch diameter only. Head Mounting Fittings Sheath Construction -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C) 316 SS A
Element 2-Wire 3-Wire 100 single A B 100 dual *, ** D E 1000 single ** J K * Available in 0.250 inch diameter only. ** Available with standard industrial construction only. A= B= Initial Element Accuracy @ 0C DIN Class A (0.06%) DIN Class B (0.12%)
4-Wire C L
-328 to 1200F (-200 to 650C) 316 SS K
Standard industrial 0.125 - 0.250 in. O.D.) Mineral insulated (0.125 - 0.250 in. O.D.)

Connection heads Provides superior dust and moisture resistance Weatherproof plastic heads Resists weak acids, organic solvents, alkalies, sunlight and dust Complete assembly available Head-mounted 4-20mA transmitter, three- or four-wire input and non-isolated
WATLOW
105

RTDs
For Use With Thermowells Style RT
Type 1
Nom. 6 in. (152 mm)
Type 3
Nom. 2 in. (51 mm) L L
Type 4
L
3/4
in. (19 mm) NPT
3/4
in. (19 mm) NPT
3/4
in. (19 mm) NPT
6 inch N-U-N Typical (2 each 12 X 3 inch steel pipe nipples and 1 each malleable union)
2 x 3 inch long steel pipe nipple typical
Part Number
Sheath O.D. (in.) Conn. Head Cold End Cong. Sheath Const. Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L (fract. in.) Element Initial Element Accuracy SpringLoading
RT
J= 0.250 Sheath O.D. (in.)
Connection Head C = Polypropylene D = Cast iron E = Cast aluminum H = Explosion proof U* = E head with 5750 transmitter V* = C head with 5750 transmitter W* = H head with 5750 transmitter * For units with transmitter, the order must specify a range and degree F or C, as well as a temperature span. 1= 3= 4= Cold End Conguration Type 1 Type 3 Type 4 Sheath Construction -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C) 316 SS A -328 to 1200F (-200 to 650C) 316 SS K
Sheath Length L (in.) - See Drawings Above When ordering a complete assembly with thermowell, specify AR as required; otherwise, specify the L dimension in whole inches. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sheath Length L (fractional in.) = = = = = = = = No fraction, whole inches 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8 4-Wire C L
Element 2-Wire 3-Wire 100 single A B 100 dual* D E 1000 single* J K * Available with standard industrial construction only. A= B= Initial Element Accuracy @ 0C DIN Class A (0.06%) DIN Class B (0.12%) Spring -Loading Yes No
Standard industrial 0.125 - 0.250 in. O.D.) Mineral insulated (0.125 - 0.250 in. O.D.)
Y= N=

High quality thermowells and pipe wells Protects sensor Mineral insulated construction Available in 0.125 to 0.250 inch O.D. Available with spring-loading Ensures positive contact Complete assembly available Head-mounted 4-20mA transmitter, three- or four-wire input and non-isolated Variety of connection head options Meets your application requirements
106
WATLOW

RTDs
Specialty Construction Styles Adjustable Spring Style
Part Number 10 = 6 in. Part Number 11 = 12 in.
E Spring Length L (Spring O.D. = 0.250 in. (6.4 mm)
Open Air
Part Number 50
0.3125 in. (7.9 mm)
0.187 in. (4.7 mm)

Part Number 12
0.265 in. (6.7 mm) O.D. 0.3125 in. (7.9 mm) L E

Part Number 55
0.625 in. (15.9 mm) L E
0.187 in. (4.7 mm)
Stainless Steel Sheath and Flange
Flange 0.648 in. (16.5 mm) 0.324 in. (8.2 mm)

Part Number 25
0.156 in. (4 mm) Dia. (3) Holes 0.625 in. (15.9 mm) L E
4.7 mm (0.187 in.) 0.373 in. (9.5 mm)
Surface Mount
Stainless Steel Sheath and Flange Flange 0.648 in. (16.5 mm)
Part Number 80
0.250 in. 1.375 in. (6.3 mm) (34.9 mm) 0.187 in. (4.7 mm) 0.250 in. (6.3 mm) E
0.875 in. (22.2 mm)
0.324 in. (8.2 mm) 0.156 in. (4 mm) Dia. (3) Holes
0.373 in. (9.5 mm) 0.531 in. (13.5 mm)
0.343 in. (8.7 mm)
Aluminum Body
0.101 in. (2.6 mm) Dia. (4) Holes
WATLOW
10

RTDs
Specialty RTDs Ordering Information
Part Number
Const. Styles Diameter (in.) Element Type Lead Type Sheath Length L (in.) Lead Wire Length E (ft) Term.
S
Construction Styles 10 = 6 inch adjustable spring style 11 = 12 inch adjustable spring style 12 = Adjustable armor style 25 = Cartridge with ange 50 = Open air 55 = Open air with ange 80 = Surface mount Note: See previous page for construction style drawings. D= A= Diameter (in.) 0.188 Not applicable: surface mount Element Type A= C* = D= E= F= G= H= J= * 1.5 Sheath Length L (in.) Not applicable K = 5.0 in. 1.5 in. L = 5.5 in. 2.0 in. M = 6.0 in. 2.5 in. N = 6.5 in. 3.0 in. P = 7.0 in. 3.5 in. Q = 7.5 in. 4.0 in. R = 8.0 in. 4.5 in. S = 8.5 in. required for VAT construction: No. 10, 11, T= U= W= Y= Z= 9.0 in. 9.5 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
12)
C = RTD 2-wire, 100 DIN 0.00385 D = RTD 3-wire, 100 DIN 0.00385 Lead Type L4 = Fiberglass and SS armor M4= Fiberglass N4 = Fiberglass and SS overbraid T2 = PFA or TFE
012 = 024 = 036 = 048 = 060 = 072 =
Lead Wire Length E (ft) 1 2 3 4 5 6 ft ft ft ft ft ft 084 = 096 = 108 = 120 = 180 = 7 ft 8 ft 9 ft 10 ft 15 ft
Terminations A = 1.5 inch stripped split leads, no terminals B = No. 8 spade terminals H = 0.25 in. female quick connect terminals
Specifications
Two- or three-wire Resistance: 100 at 0C Alpha curve: 0.00385//C Tolerance at 0C: 0.12% Range: -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C)
108
WATLOW

Thermistors
Watlow thermistors are designed to ensure fast, accurate and repeatable temperature measurement. Thermistors are highly sensitive to small changes in temperature and maintain accurate temperatures over a limited range. These sensors are made with either epoxy-coated or glass-coated constructions and can be used in the most demanding environmental conditions.
Epoxy thermistors are suitable for use from -75 to 302F (-60 to 150C). Glass-coated thermistors are available for use from -75 to 500F (-60 to 260C). High temperature rugged glass coated thermistors rated up to 572F (300C) are available for select high volume applications. Please contact the factory for availability. Thermistors have an accuracy of 1% at 77F (25C).

Designed to maintain accuracy over the life sensor Improved process control High Resistance Large signal change compared to RTDs minimizing the impact of lead wire resistance errors Interchangeable Maintains good system repeatability Small mass and internal heat transfer paste Quick time response Point sensitive Able to sense temperature in a very specific location
Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) Air conditioning Refrigeration and freezer temperature control Food preparation Deep fryers Food storage systems Medical Blood analysis and dialysis equipment Infant incubators Industrial electronics Fluid temperature measurement Liquid level indicators
WATLOW
109

Thermistors
Bends
3 3 1
Diameter in. 0.125 0.188 0.250
Minimum H Dimension in. 2 2 2
Minimum C Dimension in. 2 2 2

H 10 - 90 Radius
8 8 2
Term D
Lead Terminations
Standard Male Plug

Term D
mB
Miniature Male Plug

K

Length
112*
Split Leads
U
Length
112*
#8 Spade Lugs
* When style contains jacketed wire.
110
WATLOW

Thermistors
Fitting Options
Fixed Fittings
ixed Fittings
A L Fixed Single Thread 18 NPT
303 SS
0.063 to 0.250
16
11
16
Customer Specified
303 SS
0.125 to 0.250
16

Customer Specified Non-Adjustable Compression Fitting
303 SS
1
0.125 to 0.250

Customer Specified
A L Fixed Double Thread 12 NPT
303 SS
0.125 to 0.250
134
Customer Specified
Fitting Type
Material
Sheath Size in. 0.125
NPT Thread Size in.

1
Hex Size in.

1
Length in. 1 118 1316 114 114 1516 1 16 114 114 114 2716 1 4 114 114 2716
1 5
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8
Brass
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125

303 SS
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS
0.188 0.250 0.063 0.125 303 SS
2 2 2 8
0.188 0.250
Compression Fittings: Compression fittings are shipped finger-tight on the sheath allowing field installation. Once non-adjustable fittings are deformed, they cannot be relocated. Adjustable fittings come with TFE or lava sealant glands.
WATLOW
111
Fitting Options TH-2760

Thermistors
316 SS
0.250

112
WATLOW

Thermistors
Standard Industrial Thermistor with Insulated Leads Style TB
L Lead Wire Length
1/ in. 2 Nominal
Part Number
Sheath O.D. (in.) Lead Wire Const. Fittings Lead Wire Term. Temp. Rating & Accuracy Sheath Length L (in.) Sheath Length L Element/ (fract. in.) Resistance Sheath Lead Wire Length E (ft)
T
H= J= B= 0.188 0.250
B
Sheath O.D. (in.) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6
0
Sheath Length L (fractional in.) = = = = = = = = No fraction, whole inches 1 8 in. 1 4 in. 3 8 in. 1 2 in. 5 8 in. 3 4 in. 7 8 in.
Lead Wire Construction Standard - PFA or TFE stranded
Fittings If required, enter order code from pages 111 to 112. If none enter 0. T= U= Lead Wire Termination Standard leads Leads with spade lugs
Temperature Rating and Accuracy A* = -75 to 302F (-60 to 150C) 1% accuracy @ 25C U** = -75 to 500F (-60 to 260C) 15% accuracy @ 25C * Only available with 1,000, 2,200, 3,000 or 10,000 **Only available with 100,000 Whole inches: 02 to 24 Sheath Length L (in.)
Element/Resistance at F (25C) E = 1,000 G = 3,000 T = 100,000 F* = 2,200 H* = 10,000 * Compatible with EZ-ZONE controllers 0= Sheath Standard sheath Lead Wire Length E (ft)
Whole feet: 01 to 15

Rigid 316 stainless steel sheath Ideal for industrial applications Cold end epoxy seal Rated to 260C (500F) Internal heat transfer paste Quick time response
WATLOW
113

Thermistors
Specialty Construction Styles Adjustable Spring Style
Part Number 10 = 6 in. Part Number 11 = 12 in.
E Spring Length L (Spring O.D. = 0.250 in. (6.4 mm)
Open Air
Part Number 50
0.3125 in. (7.9 mm)
0.187 in. (4.7 mm)

Part Number 12
0.265 in. (6.7 mm) O.D. 0.3125 in. (7.9 mm) L E

Part Number 55
0.625 in. (15.9 mm) L E
0.187 in. (4.7 mm)
Stainless Steel Sheath and Flange
Flange 0.648 in. (16.5 mm) 0.324 in. (8.2 mm)

Part Number 25
0.156 in. (4 mm) Dia. (3) Holes 0.625 in. (15.9 mm) L E
4.7 mm (0.187 in.) 0.373 in. (9.5 mm)
Surface Mount
Stainless Steel Sheath and Flange Flange 0.648 in. (16.5 mm)
Part Number 80
0.250 in. 1.375 in. (6.3 mm) (34.9 mm) 0.187 in. (4.7 mm) 0.250 in. (6.3 mm) E
0.875 in. (22.2 mm)
0.324 in. (8.2 mm) 0.156 in. (4 mm) Dia. (3) Holes
0.373 in. (9.5 mm) 0.531 in. (13.5 mm)
0.343 in. (8.7 mm)
Aluminum Body
0.101 in. (2.6 mm) Dia. (4) Holes
114
WATLOW

Thermistors
Specialty Thermistors Ordering Information
Part Number
Const. Styles Diameter (in.) Element Type Lead Type Sheath Length L (in.) Lead Wire Length E (ft) Term.
S
Construction Styles A= C* = D= E= F= G= H= J= * 1.5 Sheath Length L (in.) Not applicable K = 5.0 in. 1.5 in. L = 5.5 in. 2.0 in. M = 6.0 in. 2.5 in. N = 6.5 in. 3.0 in. P = 7.0 in. 3.5 in. Q = 7.5 in. 4.0 in. R = 8.0 in. 4.5 in. S = 8.5 in. required for VAT construction: No. 10, 11, T= U= W= Y= Z= 9.0 in. 9.5 in. 10 in. 11 in. 12 in.
10 = 6 inch adjustable spring style 11 = 12 inch adjustable spring style 12 = Adjustable armor style 25 = Cartridge with ange 50 = Open air 55 = Open air with ange 80 = Surface mount Note: See previous page for construction style drawings. D= A= Diameter (in.) 0.188 Not applicable: surface mount Element Type
12)
M = Thermistor No. 11, 1,000 N = Thermistor No. 12, 3,000 P = Thermistor No. 16, 100,000 Note: Contact the factory for other thermistors which are available on request. See Style TB thermistor. Lead Type L4 = Fiberglass and SS armor M4= Fiberglass N4 = Fiberglass and SS overbraid T2 = PFA or TFE
012 = 024 = 036 = 048 = 060 = 072 =
Lead Wire Length E (ft) 1 2 3 4 5 6 ft ft ft ft ft ft 084 = 096 = 108 = 120 = 180 = 7 ft 8 ft 9 ft 10 ft 15 ft
Terminations A = 1.5 inch stripped split leads, no terminals B = No. 8 spade terminals H = 0.25 in. female quick connect terminals
Specifications
Metal oxide, sintered and encapsulated Negative temperature coefficient Non-linear temperature/resistance curve Resistance at 77F (25C) and ranges:
#11 #12 1000 3000
Epoxy Bead Tolerance 1% +0.3C (37F) -76 to 302F (-60 to 150C) -76 to 302F (-60 to 150C) Glass Bead Tolerance 15% +0.3C (37F) #16 100,000 -76 to 500F (-60 to 260C)
WATLOW
115

ENVIROSEAL HD Sensors
Watlows ENVIROSEAL-HD temperature sensor keeps out moisture, oil and contaminants in all heavy-duty applications including those outside applications exposed to harsh weather, oils and other extreme moisture environments. The ENVIROSEAL-HD sensor is designed to provide accurate, dependable measurements in high-vibration environments.
ED Y ND LIT TE BI EXAPA

Submersible and 1200psi pressure wash rated seal (not including connector area) Protects the sensor from washdown or other extreme moisture environments Oil resistant materials Sensors maintain a long life even when exposed to oil, gasoline or diesel fuel Vibration resistant design, 25 lb pull out force rating Tough, rugged design to hold up to the roughest applications -40 to 392F (-40 to 200C) sensor temperature rating Offers superior application flexibility Time response of two seconds Fast response measures 63.2 percent (first order) of the temperature change in two seconds or less 250psi threaded fitting pressure rating Suitable for most rugged applications
Engine coolant or oil Refrigeration or condensation units Industrial equipment Heat exchangers Gear boxes Hydraulic fluid Marine
116
WATLOW

ENVIROSEAL HD Sensors
Sensor Types:
RTD or thermistor Sheath length: 0.75 to 3 inches Fitting: 14 inch NPT or 18 inch NPT male thread either brass or 316 stainless steel Lead length: up to 48 inches Lead wire: 18 gauge stranded with Tefzel insulation Lead wire terminations: stripped leads or Deutsch 2 pin connector or similar automotive style connector
WATLOW
11
118
WATLOW
Accessories
Page Product Fittings Thermowells Description A variety of sensor mounting fittings are available such as fixed, adjustable, non-adjustable, compression and bayonet style. Thermowells are manufactured from drilled bar stock and provide a pressure-tight connection at the point of installation. These thick-wall thermowells are sturdy enough to handle high pressure, high velocity and corrosive environments. Suited for applications where the sensors are not compatible with the environment. Constructed of ceramic or metal. The metal protection tubes are suited for high thermal conductivity for fast, precise readings. The ceramic tubes resist deformation, corrosion, abrasion and oxidation. Many varieties of connectors are available such as standard, quick-attach, high-temperature, three-pole and miniature connectors. All Watlow connectors meet the ASTM E1129 requirement and are color coded. Watlow offers standard cast iron or aluminum, explosion proof, and polypropylene heads. Terminal blocks are available to complement the connection heads. Watlows temperature transmitters offer accurate measurement and improved reliability which reduces downtime and costs. The two-wire signal conditioner is constructed using surface mount and digital technology. 121 125
Protection Tubes Connectors
130
134
Connection Heads and Blocks Transmitters
141
143
Accessories
WATLOW
119
120
WATLOW
Accessories
Fittings
Sensor Mounting Fittings - Non-Adjustable Non-Adjustable Compression Type
Non-adjustable compression type fittings allow the exact immersion length to be set in the field during sensor installation. Since the compression sleeve and sheath are deformed in application, the fitting cannot be relocated along the sheath after tightening. When ordered as a part of a sensor for mounting the thermocouple, all compression type fittings are shipped finger-tight on the sheath.
Brass Compression Fitting, Non-Adjustable
Brass Compression Fitting, Assembled
Cap
Sleeve
Body
Part No. TH-185-2 TH-185-3 TH-185-4 TH-185-5 TH-185-6 TH-185-7 TH-185-9
Sheath O.D. in. 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.313 0.375 0.250
Material Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
Bore +0.10, -0.000 in. 0.130 0.192 0.256 0.256 0.318 0.380 0.256
Male NPT in. 8 8 1 8 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 2

1 1
Length in. 1 118 1316 138 138 1716 134
Stainless Steel Compression Fitting, Non-Adjustable

Made entirely of 303 stainless steel
Single Threaded
Cap
Ferrule
Body
Single Threaded Part No. Length (in.) TH-2745-063 TH-2745-125 TH-2745-188 TH-2745-250 114 114 1516 1516
Sheath O.D. in. 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250
Bore 0.001 in. 0.067 0.129 0.194 0.257
Male NPT in. 8 8 1 8 1 8

1 1
Hex Across Flats in. 2 2 1 2 1 2

1 1
Note: All accessories are subject to minimum purchase quantities.
WATLOW
121
Accessories
Fittings
Sensor Mounting Fittings - Adjustable Adjustable Compression Type
Adjustable compression type fittings can be relocated at different positions along the sheath whenever changes in the immersion length are necessary. To relocate an adjustable compression fitting, simply loosen the cap, slide the fitting to the new location and retighten the cap. It is recommended that lava sealant glands be replaced after each tightening. Tetrafluorethylene (TFE) sealant glands should withstand several relocations before replacement is necessary.
Stainless Steel Adjustable Compression Fitting

Except for their sealant glands, these fittings are made entirely of 303 stainless steel. Sealant glands are available in lava, -300 to 1000F (-184 to 540C) and TFE, -300 to 500F (-184 to 260C). Unless otherwise specified,* TFE sealant glands are provided. Fittings are pressure rated up to 3,000psi depending on temperature and sheath diameter.
Cap Shown Single Threaded
Follower
Sealant Gland
Body
Single Threaded Part No.* Length in. TH-2747-T-063 TH-2747-T-125 TH-2747-T-188 TH-2748-T-250 TH-2748-T-313 TH-2748-T-375 1 14 1 14 1 14 2 716 2 716 2 716
Sheath O.D. in. 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.313 0.375
Bore +0.002 in. 0.067 0.136 0.193 0.257 0.316 0.386
Male NPT in. 8 8 1 8

1 1
Hex Across Flats Replacement Sealant in. Glands, Neoprene 2 2 1 2

1 1
TH-279-T-063 TH-279-T-125 TH-279-T-188 TH-280-T-250 TH-280-T-313 TH-280-T-375
4 4 1 4
1 1
8 8 7 8
7 7
*If lava sealant glands are desired, substitute L in place of T in the part number.
Adjustable Spring-Loaded Hex Fitting

The adjustable spring-loaded fitting has a stainless steel body, end cap and spring and is designed for use with 0.250 inch O.D. sheath thermocouples and RTDs. This fitting is not intended for use in pressurized applications.
Process End Head End 316 SS Body and Spring
Part No. 6556-250
Length in. 2
Sheath O.D. in. 0.250
Material 316 SS
Male NPT in.

1
Hex Across Body Flats in.

7
Hex Across Cap Flats in.

9
16
122
WATLOW
Accessories
Fittings
Bayonet Fittings Adjustable Bayonet Compression Fitting
This fitting combines features of the fixed bayonet fitting in a compact unit which does not require brazing to assemble. The fitting is designed for 0.125 inch O.D. sensor and is available with either brass or TFE ferrules. For TFE ferrules, the fitting may be relocated at different positions along the sheath if changes in the immersion length are necessary. Brass ferrules cannot be relocated once they are set.
Part No. TH-2762-BR TH-2762-T Description Adjustable bayonet fitting with brass ferrule Adjustable bayonet fitting with TFE ferrule
Flared 3/16 in. (4.7 mm) O.D. Stainless Steel Support Tube Bayonet Lockcap Body Brass, or TFE Ferrule Cap
Spring 2 3/16 in. (55.6 mm)
Nickel Plated Brass Compression Fitting

When used together, a bayonet fitting and bayonet adapter act as a spring-loading device for bottoming a thermocouple hot junction in a hole. The fitting is designed for use on an 0.188 inch O.D. sensor. The TH-2760 fitting includes a lockcap, spring and spring stop, which requires brazing for assembly. The adapter requires a tapped 18 inch NPT or 38 24 hole for mounting. All components are nickel plated steel.
1.625 in. (41.3 mm)
Part No. TH-2760
Description Lockcap, spring and spring stop
Bayonet Adapter
Part No.
7 16
Description
L Length in. 178 1 112 2 212 178 112
Thread in.
1
/ in.
(0.4375 mm) L
TH-295-1 TH-295-2 TH-295-3 TH-295-4 TH-295-5 TH-298-1 TH-298-2
Bayonet Adapter
8 8 1 8 1 8 1 8
1 3
NPT NPT NPT NPT NPT
8-24 SAE 8-24 SAE
WATLOW
123
Accessories
Fittings
Bayonet Fittings (Continued) Pipe Clamp with Bayonet Adapter
The pipe clamp band with bayonet adapter is designed for use in conjunction with a bayonet style thermocouple. It allows temperature measurement without drilling or tapping. Thermocouple replacement is extremely fast and simple and is accomplished without disturbing surroundings, such as pipe insulation.
0.270 in. (7 mm) nom.
Part Number
Const. Part L Bayonet Adapter D Clamp Length Band Dia.
A= B= C= D= E = F = G= 1 = 2 =
11
Construction Code
90 = Pipe clamp band with bayonet adapter D Clamp Band Diameter Range (in.) 16 to 114 114 to 214 214 to 314 314 to 414 414 to 5 5 to 6 6 to 7 L Bayonet Adapter Length (in.) 1 (use with thermocouple that has B dimension = 2 in.) 2 (use with thermocouple that has B dimension = 3 in.)
Note: All combinations are available for next day shipment.
124
WATLOW
Accessories
Thermowells
Manufactured from drilled bar stock, Watlow thermowells provide a pressure-tight connection at the point of installation. With thick walls, thermowells are sturdy enough to handle high pressure, high velocity and corrosive environments. They are frequently used in petrochemical and power plant applications. Highly critical or demanding applications may require thermowells not only for protection of the temperature sensor, but also to withstand high pressure, erosion or both, caused by material flows through vessels.

Bar stock used to manufacture thermowells Provides protection against corrosion Round bar with wrench flats is substituted when hex is not available
Petrochemical Chemical Oil refineries Power plants Storage tanks and lines
Manufacturing Standards Bar Stock Process Connection Mill Standards (0.010 inch approximately) Threaded: Inspected with standard ring gauge Flanged: Front J groove welds are 14 inch wide by 14 inch deep. Welds are machined, leaving 18 inch radius. Rear welds are 18 inch wide by 18 inch deep. Welds are machined, leaving 14 inch radius. Full penetration welds are available upon request. Must be specified. Straight: 0.015 inch Tapered: 0.015 inch (minor dimension) 18 inch 18 inch 4 inch 116 inch 63 RMS
1
Stem O.D. U Dimension Overall Dimension End Thickness Finish Bore Tapered Wells
+0.005 inch -0.003 inch The maximum taper on all thermowells is 16 inches +0.5 - 1.0.
Specifications listed are for standard thermowells or for thermowells manufactured where no other specifications prevail.
WATLOW
125
Accessories
Thermowells
Threaded TypeStraight
1 in. (25 mm) U T
Standard Bore Size: 0.260 inch Standard Materials: 304 SS, 316 SS Typical Dimensions
Process Conn. NPT P in.
3
A 0.5 in. NPT (13 mm) R 0.25 in. (6 mm) P
A in.
49 49
M in. 0.260 0.260
R in.
49 49
T in.
3 3
1 4
64 64
64 64
4 4
Part Number
TWell Style Stem U Dim. U Dim. TWell Cong. (in.) (fract in.) Material Process Conn. Size P Flange Rating Flange Face Type Flange Material Lag T Lag T (fract. Bore Dia. Special Options (in.) in.) M
T
T= S=
S
Thermowell Style 0= Stem Conguration 0= 0= No ange Flange Face Type No ange Flange Material No ange Lag T (in.) Flange Rating
Threaded
Straight U Dimension (in.)
Whole inches: 02 to 22 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A = 304 C = 316 SS D = 34 NPT E = 1 NPT = = = = = = = = 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8
U Dimension (fractional in.)
Whole inches: 0 to 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Lag T (fractional in.) = = = = = = = = 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 - Industry Standard 7 8 Bore Diameter M (in.)
Thermowell Material
Process Connection Size P (in.)
A = 0.260 0 = None
Special Options
126
WATLOW
Accessories
Thermowells
Threaded TypeTapered
1 in. (25 mm) U T
Standard Bore Size: 0.260 inch Standard Materials: 304 SS, 316 SS Typical Dimensions
Process Conn. NPT P in.
0.5 in. NPT (13 mm)
3
A in.
5 5
M in. 0.260 0.260
R in. 1116 7 8
T in.
3 3
1 4
8 8
4 4
M 0.25 in. (6 mm) R P
Part Number
TWell Style Stem U Dim. U Dim. TWell Cong. (in.) (fract in.) Material Process Conn. Size P Flange Rating Flange Face Type Flange Material Lag T Lag T (fract. Bore Dia. Special Options (in.) in.) M
T
T= T=
T
Thermowell Style 0= Stem Conguration 0= 0= No ange Flange Face Type No ange Flange Material No ange Lag T (in.) Flange Rating
Threaded
Standard taper U Dimension (in.)
Whole inches: 02 to 22 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A = 304 SS C = 316 SS D = 34 NPT E = 1 NPT = = = = = = = = 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 7 8
U Dimension (fractional in.)
Whole inches: 0 to 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Lag T (fractional in.) = = = = = = = = 0 1 8 1 4 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 - Industry Standard 7 8 Bore Diameter M (in.)
Thermowell Material
Process Connection Size P (in.)
A = 0.260 0 = None Special Options
WATLOW
127
Accessories
Thermowells
Other Available Thermowells Van Stone Type (TVS)
B C 0.5 in. NPT (13 mm) T T 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) R
Welded Flange Well (TFS, TFT)

0.5 in. NPT (13 mm) 0.125 in. (28.6 mm)
Socket Weld Type (TST)
O 0.5 in. (13 mm)
M U U
M R U M
0.25 in. (6 mm) 0.25 in. (6 mm) A A 0.25 in. (6 mm) A
Weld-In Type (TWT)

O 0.5 in. (13 mm)
Bimetallic Thermometer WellsThreaded Type (TBD)

0.5 in. NPT (13 mm)
Bimetallic Thermometer WellFlanged Type (TFD)

0.5 in. NPT (13 mm)
1 in. (25 mm)
Q
Q
M U U M 2.5 in. (64 mm)

U M
0.25 in. (6 mm) 0.25 in. (6 mm) A
0.25 in. (6 mm)
2.5 in. (64 mm)
0.5 in. (13 mm)

0.5 in. (13 mm)
128
WATLOW
Accessories
Thermowells
Pipe Type
U T
Standard Materials: 316 SS, Black Steel, 446 SS and Alloy 601
Pipe Size
Pipe Size NPT
Part Number
Pipe Size Pipe Size S U Dim. (in.) Pipe Material
P
C= D= E= N=
N
Pipe Size (in.)
1
2 3 4 1 Pipe Type S Schedule 40 U Dimension (in.)
Whole inches: 12 to 72 0 = 0 C G K W = = = = 316 SS Black steel 446 SS Alloy 601
U Dimension
Pipe Material
Dimensions of Schedule 40 Pipe

Nominal Pipe Size
1
O.D. 0.840 1.050 1.315
Wall Thickness 0.109 0.113 0.133
2 4
WATLOW
129
Accessories
Protection Tubes
Both ceramic and metal (pipe type) protecting tubes protect the temperature sensor from harsh environments. Unlike thermowells, they are not primarily designed for pressure tight applications. Protection tubes are often used in heat treatment furnaces, ovens, open container, flues and ducts. Protecting Tube Application Data
Max. Use Air 3000F (1650C) Flexural Thermal Strength Conduct. (X103 psi) W/m.K 1475K 67 54.0 Thermal Shock Resistance Excellent Typical Applications Incineration, molten aluminum and non-ferrous metals, flue gas, hydrofluoric and sulfuric acids, bauxite calcining Non-ferrous metals
Protecting tube construction styles are more limited than thermowells. The tubes offer the advantages of economy, corrosion resistance and, in some cases, higher temperature capabilities.
Material Hexoloy SA
Grade Sintered
Remarks Maintains strength to 3002F (1650C), exceptional corrosion resistance, does not creep, attacked by halides, fused caustics and ferrous metals Permeable
Silicon Carbide Alumina
Oxide Bonded 99.9%
3000F (1650C) 3450F (1900C) 50
15-20
Good
6.3
Fair-preheating to 900F (482C) recommended
Creeps (sags) at 3452F (1900C) ferrous metals, dry H2
96% Mullite
3100F (1700C) 3100F (1700C)
49 12
5.4 2.1
Same as above Poormust be preheated to 900F (482C)
Creeps at 3452F (1900C) Creeps at 3092F (1700C), attacked by halides contains silica
Barium, crown glass; non-ferrous metals; gas-tight protection for noble metal thermocouples in excess of 2400F (1316C) Non-ferrous metals; gas-tight protection for base metal thermocouples to 2400F (1316C) Molten non-ferrous metals; calcining kilns, oxidizing atmospheres up to 2552F (1400C)
Metal Ceramic
LT-1
2500F (1400C)
45
29.0 (R.T.)
Must be preheated to 900F (482C) before immersion into molten metal at 1999F (1093C) or higher Excellent
Not recommended in carburizing, nitrogen atmospheres, high vacuum or in molten aluminum
Coated Protection Tubes (SERIES 1100)
1400F (760C)
Do not exceed 1400F (760C)
Molten aluminum, zinc and galvanizing; maximum operating temperature 1373F (745C)
* Note: Please contact the factory for other mounting fittings availability.
130
WATLOW
Accessories
Protection Tubes
Ceramic Protecting Tubes
L Mullite or Alumina Protecting Tube, Plain End
L Mullite or Alumina Protecting Tube with TH-43 or TH-50 Ferrule

1/2 in. NPT (12.7 mm) 3 4
/ in. NPT (19 mm)
1 3/4 in. (45 mm)
Mullite or Alumina Protecting Tube with TH-190 or TH-191 Fitting (34 inch of Tube Enters Fitting)
Mullite Protecting Tubes

Part No. 1152115311551152-N1153-N1153-1901153-191I.D. X O.D. in. 4 x 38 16 x 1116 3 4 x 1 1 4 x 38 7 16 x 1116 7 16 x 1116
1 7
Construction Plain end Plain end Plain end With TH-50 ferrule 78 - 27 threads With TH-43 ferrule 78 - 27 threads With TH-190 12 x 34 in. brass With TH-191 12 x 34 in. steel
Length in.
12,18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48
Order - Part No. Code - Length Example: 1152-12, 1152-N-12, 1153-191-24 Alumina (99% Minimum Purity) Protecting Tubes
Part No. 1146 1147 146-N 1147-N 1147-190 1147-191 I.D. X O.D. in.
1 4 x 38 16 x 1116 1 4 x 38 7 16 x 1116 7 16 x 1116 7 16 x 1116 7
Construction Plain end Plain end TH-50 ferrule 78-27 threads TH-43 ferrule 78-27 threads With TH-190 12 x 34 in. brass With TH-191 12 x 34 in. steel 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, 18, 18, 18, 18, 18, 18, 24, 24, 24, 24, 24, 24, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 36, 36, 36, 36, 36, 36,
Length in. 42 42, 48 42 42 42, 48 42, 48
Dimension tolerance: Up to one inch, 5 percent or 0.025 inch, whichever is greater; over one inch, 4 percent or 0.050 inch, whichever is greater.
Order - Part No. Code - Length Example: 1146-18, 1146-N-36, 1147-190-30
WATLOW
131
Accessories
Protection Tubes
Coated Protection Tubes for Molten Aluminum, Zinc and Galvanizing Applications SERIES 1100 Protection Tube
With a tough refractory laminated coating, SERIES 1100 protecting tubes resist erosion from molten aluminum, zinc or galvanizing baths. They stay strong, even at high temperatures and require no washing or maintenance to prolong their service life. A special protective cap at the tip provides fast response time, permitting thermal expansion without damage to the refractory laminate. The 0.493 inch I.D. easily accommodates up to an 8-gauge beaded thermocouple and is stocked for immediate shipment. The maximum operating temperature for the SERIES 1100 is 1400F (745C). Order - Part No. Code - Length Example: 1100-24
3/4 in. (19 mm)
Part No. 1100
I.D. in. 0.493
Nominal O.D. in. 1 12 Max.
Fitting in.
3
Tube Length in. 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48
4 NPT
SERIES 1101 Protection Thermocouple

Watlows SERIES 1101 protected thermocouple assemblies incorporate a mineral-insulated stainless steel sheathed XACTPAK thermocouple hermetically sealed within a refractory laminated SERIES 1100 protection tube. Standard calibration is Type K (part no. 402-2107), complete with 36 inches of high temperature insulated thermocouple wire. As with the SERIES 1100 protection tube, the SERIES 1101 assembly requires no washing or maintenance to prolong its service life. It delivers fast, accurate readings in molten aluminum, zinc and galvanizing baths. Order - Part No. Code - Length Example: 1101-12
3/4 in. (19 mm)
Part Nominal No. Calibration O.D. in. 1101 K 112 Max.
Fitting in.
3
Lead Length in. 36
Tube Length in. 12, 18, 24, 30, 36
4 NPT
132
WATLOW
Accessories
Protection Tubes
Hexoloy SA Tubes
L
Physical Properties of Hexoloy Materials Technical Data
Typical Values Physical Properties Composition* (Phases) Density kg/m3 (g/cm3) Hardness-Knopp (Kg/mm2) Flexural Strength 4 pt. @ RT** MPa (x 103 lb/in2) Flexural Strength 3 pt. @ RT** MPa (x 103 lb/in2) Compressive Strength RT MPa (x 103 lb/in2) Modulus of Elasticity RT GPa (x 106 lb/in2) Weibull Modulus (2 Parameter) Poisson Ratio Fracture Toughness @ RT Double Torsion and SENB MPa/ m (x 103 lb/in2/ in) Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 68-1,292F (RT-700C) x 10-6mm/mmK (x 10-6in/inF) Maximum Service Temp. (Air) C (F) Mean Specific Heat @ RT (J/gm K) Thermal Conductivity @ RT W/m K (BTU/ft h F) Thermal Conductivity 200C W/m K (BTU/ft h F) Thermal Conductivity 400C W/m K (BTU/ft h F) Electrical Resistivitya RT, ohm-cm 1000C, ohm-cm Emissivity Max Warpage
Hexoloy Grade SA SiC 3100 (3.10) 2800 460 (67) 550 (80) 3900 (560) 410 (59) 10 0.14 4.60 (4.20)
4.02 (2.20) 1650 (3000) 0.67 125.6 (72.6) 102.6 (59.3) 77.5 (44.8) 0.2 to 300 a 0.01 to 0.2 0.9 0.005/inch
a
* Composition code: Si = Free Silicon Metal; C = Free Graphite; SiC = Silicon Carbide; TiB = Titanium Diboride ** Test Bar Size: 18 x 14 x 2 inch (3.2 x 6.4 x 50.8 mm), Outer Span = 1.5 inch; Inner Span = 0.75 inch
a
Dependent upon dopants in Hexoloy SA SiC which will decrease electrical resistivity to a desired range
How to Order
To order, specify the following part numbers and lengths required for your application. Order - Part No. Code - Length Example: 1040-12 Cemented mounting fittings are available for most tubes. Contact the factory or your local Watlow sales representative or distributor for information.
Part No. 1040 1041 1042 O.D./I.D. in. 8 x 14 8 x 38 3 4 x 12
3 5
Tubes with Optional Mounting Fittings

Tube Part No. 1040-L 1041-M 1042-P Head Mount 2 NPT 4 NPT 3 4 NPT
1 3
Process Mount 2 NPT 4 NPT 3 4 NPT

1 3
Fitting Description Cemented hex nipple Cemented hex nipple Cemented hex nipple
Lengths in. 6, 12, 18, 24
Lengths in. 6, 12, 18, 24
Example: 1041-M-24 is a 58 x 38 inch Hexoloy tube 24 inches long with a single 34 inch NPT cemented hex fitting. Note: The maximum recommended temperature rating for cemented fittings is 1000F (538C) continuous.
WATLOW
133
Accessories
Connectors
Many varieties of thermocouple connectors are available from Watlow. Watlows broad offering includes benefits such as high impact strength, fast installation and high temperature capabilities. Listed below are the various connectors and systems from which to choose: Standard thermocouple connectors Quick-attach thermocouple connectors High temperature connectors Three-pole connectors for RTD applications Miniature thermocouple connectors Watlow's standard line of connectors are lightweight, rugged and accurate and feature a clamping mechanism that is unique in the industry. This easy-to-use clamping connection will replace traditional screw and wire wrap. This device allows a straight-in application, which squeezes the wire and forms a tight connection assuring a clean, strong signal.
Applications and Technical Data

To eliminate measuring errors, all Watlow connectors are made exclusively of matching metal alloys. If the connector material has different thermal electromagnetic field (EMF) characteristics from the thermocouple or lead wire, a uniform temperature must be maintained across the connector, which is not always easily achievable or practical. If a temperature gradient exists across the connector made with a third metal, unwanted EMFs generate between the thermoelectric materials and the connector extremities causing an error to occur at the thermocouple output. The larger the gradient, the larger the error. In some instances, depending on the calibration, net errors may occur that are even larger than the gradient.

ASTM color coded Ensures easy identification Compensated alloys Provides accuracy in readings Glass-filled thermoplastic Provides high impact strength Captive cap screws Ensures a secure connection Connection hardware Eliminates several components Meets requirements for ASTM E1129 Ensures adequate pin spacing, dimensions and contact resistance Rated to 425F (215C) Fits high-temperature applications
134
WATLOW
Accessories
Connectors
S SERIES Standard Connectors, 425F (215C)
17/16 in. (36.5 mm ) 17/16 in. (36.5 mm)
1 2 in.
(13 mm)
1 2 in.
13/32 in. (27.8 mm )
(13 mm)
13/32 in. (27.8 mm )
Part Number
Style Calibration Name Plate Color Code
SC
M = Male (plug) F = Female (jack) E J K S T U Style Name Plate W = With Watlow name N = Without name label (For J and K calibration only) Color Code AT = ASTM E 230 color code
Calibration = = = = = = Type E Type J Type K Type S / Type R Type T Uncompensated
Cable Clamp Style for Male or Female

Part Number: SAC-220
Crimp/Brass Style Ordering Information

Part Number
Style
SAB
040 = 0.040 in. 063 = 0.063 in. 090 = 0.090 in. 125 = 0.125 in. 188 = 0.188 in. 250 = 0.250 in. 30M = 3.0 mm 60M = 6.0 mm Style
WATLOW
135
Accessories
Connectors
Quick-Attach Thermocouple Connectors, 425 F (215C)
Watlows time-saving thermocouple connectors are quick and convenient to use because there are no loose parts and there is no need to remove caps or wrap wires around terminal screws. Stripped wire ends are simply inserted into a plug or jack then tightened with two terminal screws. Thermocouple connectors accept solid or stranded wires up to 16 gauge, are available in Type J, K and T calibrations and are ASTM E 230 color-coded. The connector is made with high-impact strength, 425F (215C) rated glass filled thermoplastic with matching thermocouple materials. Other features and specifications are identical to standard Watlow S SERIES quick-disconnect connectors. Step 1.
Simply insert stripped wires into connector.
Part Number
Style Calibration Name Plate Color Code Assembly
SK
M = Male (plug) F = Female (jack) J = Type J K = Type K T = Type T W = With Watlow name AT = ASTM E 230 color code
W
Style
AT
ASSY
Calibration
Step 2.
Tighten two terminal screws.
Name Plate
Color Code
Assembly
ASSY = Comes with cap assembly on body
Weather Resistant Boots

Used in pairs as illustrated, these flexible neoprene rubber boots add moisture protection to standard plug-to-jack connections. Part No. 943
I.D. 2 3/8 in. (60.3 mm)
3 16
/ to 1/8 in. (4.8 to 3.2 mm) Tapered I.D.
15/16 in. (23.8 mm) I.D.
Code No. 943
136
WATLOW
Accessories
Connectors
High-Temperature Connectors 1000F (540C)
The ASTM E 230 color-coded bodies of these high temperature ceramic connectors are practical for temperatures up to 1000F (540C). Colors are permanent and will not fade even after exposure to temperature. The positive-locking screw type terminals are captive for easy assembly. Solid plug pins and collet inserts are made of thermocouple alloys (except Type R/S which is compensated). Calibration must be specified when ordering. Both plug and jack are marked for polarity and standard 716 inch pin spacing.
Part Number 912-* 913-* 925-125 925-188 925-250 926
Description Ceramic plug (specify calibration J, K, R/S or E) Ceramic jack (specify calibration J, K, R/S or E) XACTPAK adapter for plug or jack (0.125 inch sheath O.D.) XACTPAK adapter for plug or jack (0.188 inch sheath O.D. XACTPAK adapter for plug or jack (0.250 inch sheath O.D.) Cable clamp for ceramic plug or jack
*Insert calibration letter for full part number 912-J
Three-Pole Connectors for RTD Applications, 400F (200C)

Three pins to accommodate most RTD sensor applications Rated up to 400F (200C) continuous Jacks have spring-loaded inserts for positive contact Larger diameter negative pin prevents user from reversing polarity
Part Number TH-335 TH-336 TH-337-125 TH-337-188 TH-337-250 80701201 Description 3-pole connector plug with copper pins 3-pole connector jack with copper inserts Compression-type adapter for 0.125 inch tube Compression-type adapter for 0.188 inch tube Compression-type adapter for 0.250 inch tube Cable clamp for 3-pole connector
Plug
1 7/16 in. (36.5 mm)
1 7/16 in. (36.5 mm)

1/2 in. 13 mm 7/16 in.
(11.1 mm) Dia. 4.8 mm

3/16 in. 7/16 in.
(11.1 mm)
Jack
Oval Wire Entrance
Collet Type Inserts
Large Head Terminal Screws Molded-in Polarity Symbols
WATLOW
137
Accessories
Connectors
Miniature Thermocouple Connector System, 400F (200C)
Miniature design enables mating with other miniature size thermocouple connectors Molded-in pin contacts ensure precise alignment (no loose, wobbly parts) Rugged, high quality, high performance connectors Matching thermocouple alloy materials Available in all standard calibrations and copper-copper, ASTM E 230 color-coded Exclusive channel design isolates wires for clean, strong signals
1.75 in. (45 mm) 0.31 in. (7.9 mm)
Connection Method
Stripped ends of thermocouple wire are simply inserted between the contact base and washer, then tightened with two terminal screws, there are no loose parts. Connectors do not need to be wrapped around terminal screws. Watlow miniature connectors can accommodate wire sizes from 0.001 inch diameter up to 24 AWG, stranded. The connector is made with high impact strength, 400F (200C) rated, glass-filled thermoplastic. To maintain the highest measurement accuracy, matching thermocouple alloy materials are used throughout. The same fine features and high quality performance characteristics found in Watlows standard connectors are found in the miniature connectors.
0.09 x 0.03 x 0.50 in. (2.3 x 0.8 x 13 mm) 0.75 in. (19 mm)
0.31 in. (7.9 mm)
0.12 x 0.03 x 0.50 in. (3 x 0.8 x 13 mm)
0.63 in. (16 mm)
0.63 in. (16 mm)
1.0 in. (25 mm)
138
WATLOW
Accessories
Connectors
Miniature Thermocouple Connector System, 400F (200C) Ordering Information
0.75 in. (19 mm) 0.09 x 0.03 x 0.50 in. (2.3 x 0.8 x 13 mm) 0.31 in. (7.9 mm) 0.12 x 0.03 x 0.50 in. (3 x 0.8 x 13 mm) 0.63 in. (16 mm)
Part Number
Style Calibration Name Plate Color Code
MC
M = Male (plug) F = Female (jack) Style
AT
0.63 in. (16 mm)
1.0 in. (25 mm)
E J K N R S T U
Calibration = = = = = = = = Type E Type J Type K Type N Type R Type S Type T Uncompensated Name Plate
W = With Watlow name N = Without name label
Color Code AT = ASTM E 230 color code/uncompensated = white
Crimp Style Ordering Information

Part Number
Sheath Size
Brass Style Ordering Information

Part Number
Sheath Size
MBC
040 = 0.040 in. 063 = 0.063 in. Sheath Size
MBB
040 = 0.040 in. 063 = 0.063 in. 125 = 0.125 in. Sheath Size
WATLOW
139
Accessories
Connectors
Single Panel Mount Hardware, 425F (218C)
Designed for use with Watlows S standard thermocouple connectors, these units fit panels up to 7 16 inch thick. Panel cutout: 118 inch to 1532 inch hole. Units fit into standard 34 inch knockouts. SKP Style
Part Number
Calibration Name Plate Color Code
1.5 in. (38 mm)
SKP
J = Type J K = Type K T = Type T W = With Watlow name Calibration
1.5 in. (38 mm) Diameter x 0.057 in. (1.45 mm) Plate Thickness Single circuit panel mount with quick-disconnect jack included. Available calibrations J, K, T, R/S and Cu/cu.
Name Plate
SNP Style
Color Code AT = ASTM E 230 color code/uncompensated = white

1.5 in. (38 mm)
1.5 in. (38 mm) Diameter x 0.057 in. (1.45 mm) Plate Thickness Panel mount hardware only without Watlow name.
140
WATLOW
Accessories
Connection Heads and Blocks
Standard Thermocouple Connection Heads
(Assembly ordering options D or E) Watlows standard heads are made of cast iron or aluminum. A plated chain attaches the gasketed cover to the body. Flats are provided for tightening. The connector block, held in place with two screws, can be single, duplex or triplex. These heads have 1, 34 or 12 inch NPT openings for protecting tubes or drilled wells. The conduit outlet is 34 inch NPT. Epoxy coating is available on the aluminum head. Maximum operating temperature is 825F (441C).
Cast Iron Head Only Part No. 70900201 70900202 70900203 Aluminum Head Only Part No. 70900301* Sensor Opening (NPT) in. 1 4 1 2
3
3.8 in. (96.5 mm)
3.8 in. (96.5 mm)
Conduit Connection in.

3
Approximate Assembled Dimensions: 3.8 in. (96.5 mm) H x 3.8 in. (96.5 mm) L x 3.8 in. (96.5 mm) W
4 4 3 4
3
*Available with epoxy coating (70900302)
Terminal Blocks for Standard Connection Heads
Barrier Type Terminal Strips

1 1/8 in. (28.6 mm)
7/16 in. (11.1 mm)
Terminal Centers
Standard barrier type terminal strips made of molded phenolic blocks with nickel plated brass terminals are available with two to 18 terminals and a temperature range of -55 to 300F (-48 to 149C). Terminal strips using thermocouple material also are available. Note: Two terminals required for each thermocouple.
Part No. 50500401 50500501 50500601 Description Single element, max. operating temperature 1000F (540C) Dual, max. operating temperature 1000F (540C) Triplex, max. operating temperature 1000F (540C)
Ordering Information:
Specify 4201-BR Insert the number of terminals desired (02 to 18) in the blank. For terminals of thermocouple material, insert thermocouple calibration symbol in place of BR (K, J, E, T and R/S). Terminal strips then will be supplied with alternate positive and negative strips.
WATLOW
141
Accessories
MI Thermocouples Option C
Connection Heads and Blocks

Explosion Proof Thermocouple Connection Heads
(Assembly ordering option H)
4 in. ref. (102 mm)
PT Polypropylene Head and Connector Blocks

(Assembly ordering option C) The polypropylene head is the answer to many of the corrosion problems facing connection heads. The U.V. stabilized polypropylene head is impervious to practically all corrosive media and is rated for continuous operation up to 220F (105C). The PT-20 and PT-30 are colored black and the RT-30-WHT is white.
3 1/2 in. nom. ref. (89 mm)
3 in. ref. (76 mm) Conduit Connection
Sensor Opening
Approximate Assembled Dimensions: 4 in. H x 2 14 in. L x 3 in. W
3 3/4 in. ref. (95 mm)
Ground Screw
Sensor Opening
Conduit Connection
PT Polypropylene Heads
Part No. Head Only Conduit Connection in.
3 3
XP Head Shown with TH-615 Block
Sensor Opening in. 2 2 1 2

1 1
Conduit Connection in. 2 4 3 4

1 3
Part No. XP-11 XP-12
Sensor Opening in.

3 1
PT-20 PT-30 RT-30-WHT
4 2
4 4
Terminal Blocks for PT Heads

Part No. 50500701 50500801 Description Single element block Dual element block
For hazardous locations. Underwriters Laboratories Listed Class 1, Groups C, D; Class 2, Groups E, F, G; Class 3, all Groups. All XP explosion-proof heads use a TH-615 (six terminal) block. Order separately. Also approved for CSA Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E and F; and Class III.
142
WATLOW
Accessories
Transmitters
SERIES 5750
The SERIES 5750 temperature transmitter from Watlow offers remarkably accurate temperature measurement and improves reliability to reduce downtime and costs. The SERIES 5750 offers new measurements with resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) in 3 and 4-wire connections. It is designed to fit directly inside connection heads type DIN B or larger. The transmitter is programmed using a separate connection cable and an easy-to-use Windows-based software program configures the transmitter in seconds. The SERIES 5750 provides linearization between temperature sensor input signals and the 4-20 mA output signal to ensure accurate temperature measurements across a broad range. Contact Watlows customer service department to integrate this transmitter into a Watlow Style AR or AT thermocouple sensor or with a Style RR or RT RTD sensor.

Accepts 3 and 4-wire RTD and thermocouple sensor inputs Standardizes transmitter for various sensors and applications Designed for harsh conditions Withstands high vibration and high humidity applications Sensor error compensation function Provides convenience for adjusting the sensor/transmitter combination, or the transmitter alone, ensuring accurate temperature measurement within a specific range Large center hole and robust terminals with test connections and low height Enables easy mounting Configuration without external power Allows configurations to be edited or read offline by connecting to a personal computer (PC) universal serial bus (USB) port Easy-to-use Windows configuration software Parameters such as sensor type, measuring range, filter activation, cold junction compensation, sensor failure and error corrections are set in one window
WATLOW
143
Accessories
Transmitters
SERIES 5750 Specifications
Accuracy Input RTD Linearity RTD 0.1% Pt100 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) T/C 0.2% -328 to +1832F (-200 to +1000C) Calibration RTD max. of 0.4F / 0.2C or 0.1% Pt100 (JIS C 1604, = 0.003916) T/C max. of 20V or 0.1% -328 to +1832F (-200 to +1000C Cold junction compensation (CJC) T/C 0.9F (0.5C) Pt1000 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) Temperature influence All inputs max. of -328 to +392F (-200 to +200C 0.25C/25C or 0.25%/25C 3-, 4-wire connection Max. of 0.5F/50F or 0.28%/50F Sensor current ~ 0.4mA Housing Max. sensor wire resistance 25/wire Material, Flammability (UL) PC/ABS + PA, V0 Input Thermocouples Mounting DIN B-head or larger, DIN rail (with Range Type: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T mounting kit) Max. sensor wire resistance 500 (total loop) Connection single/stranded wires max. 1.5 mm2, AWG 16 Monitoring Weight 32g Sensor failure monitoring upscale or downscale action Protection, housing / terminals IP 65/IP 00 Input Connections Adjustments REVISIONS 1 RTD Schematic Zero adjustments for all inputs at any value within REV C.O. NO DESCRIPTION DATE ZONE DWN GN MFG A Q D Of input span temperature range limits 1 2 3 4 RTD If zero-deection >100% of input span: add 0.125% of input span/ 3-wire connection Min. spans: Pt input 18F (10C) 25C or 0.14% of input span/50F per 100% zero-deection RTD T/C 2mV Reference temperature 68F (20C) Output Connections Input Connections Output REVISIONS 1 RTD Schematic REV C.O. NO DESCRIPTION DATE ZO Output Connections Input Connections Analog 4-20mA, temperature linear 1 2 3 1 4 RTD 3 6 7 2 4 RTD Resolution 5A 4-wire connection 3-wire connection Min. output signal measurement/failure 3.8mA/3.5mA RTD RTD Max. output signal measurement/failure Output Connections I OUT R LOAD 20.5mA/21.6mA + Permissible load, see load diagram 725 @ 24VDC 1 2 3 1 4 ThermocoupleRTD 2 3 4 6 7 4-wire connection Temperature RTD Ambient, storage and operation T/C -40 to +185F (-40 to +85C) I OUT R LOAD + General Data + 1 2 3 4 Thermocouple Selectable dampening time ~ 2s Update time ~ 1.5s DMM 24JUN09 WATLOW Richmond, IL. Isolation in - out non-isolated Phone: 815-678-2211 Fax 815-678-3961 T/C Humidity 0 to 100% RH + Vibration acc. to IEC 60068-2-6, test Fc, 60-500Hz, 10g A RTD Schematic PR01 Dimensional Drawing DMM 24JUN09 Output limitations and fail currents are NAMUR 1 1 WATLOW 2:1 RTD Schematic Richmond, IL compliant Phone: 815-678-2211 Fax 815-6 Power Supply Polarity protected Supply voltage 8 to 32VDC A RTD Schematic 1 2:1 RTD Schematic Permissible ripple 4V p-p @ 50/60Hz
DWG NO. SHT. DWG NO. SHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES:
DRAWN DATE DGN. APR. DATE
.XX = .010 .XXX = .005 ANGLES = 5 FRACTIONS = 1/32
MFG. APR. QA
DATE DATE
TITLE
WATLOW ELECTRIC MANUFACTURING COMPANY CLAIMS PROPRIETY RIGHTS IN THE MATERIAL HEREIN DISCLOSED. IT IS SUPPLIED IN CONFIDENCE, WITHOUT PREJUDICE TO ANY PATENT RIGHTS OF WATLOW, AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED OR USED TO MANUFACTURE ANYTHING SHOWN THEREIN WITHOUT WATLOW'S WRITTEN PERMISSION.
SIZE
CAGE CODE
DWG NO
REV
CUSTOMER CAD NO.
MAT'L
1.75 in. (44.5 mm)
1.3 in. (33 mm)
0.28 in. (7 mm)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED SCALE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES:
DRAWN
DATE
PART NO.
SHEET
OF
DGN. APR.
DATE
.XX = .010 .XXX = .005 ANGLES = 5 FRACTIONS = 1/32
MFG. APR. QA
DATE DATE
TITLE
WATLOW ELECTRIC MANUFACTURING COMPANY CLAIMS PROPRIETY RIGHTS IN THE MATERIAL HEREIN DISCLOSED. IT IS SUPPLIED IN CONFIDENCE, WITHOUT PREJUDICE TO ANY PATENT RIGHTS OF WATLOW, AND MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED OR USED TO MANUFACTURE ANYTHING SHOWN THEREIN WITHOUT WATLOW'S WRITTEN PERMISSION.
SIZE
CAGE CODE
DWG NO
CUSTOMER CAD NO.
MAT'L
SCALE
PART NO.
SHEET
OF
0.72 in. (18.5 mm)
144
WATLOW
Accessories
Transmitters
SERIES 5750 Ordering Information
Part Number
SERIES Sensor Type Low Temp. Sign Low Temp. High Temp. Sign High Temp. Unit of Measure
5750
SERIES 5750 = Linearized T/C or RTD B C E J K N R S T 0 1 2 3 4 5 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Sensor Type Type B T/C Type C T/C Type E T/C Type J T/C Type K T/C Type N T/C Type R T/C Type S T/C Type T T/C PT100 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 3-wire PT100 (JIS C 1604, = 0.003916) 3-wire PT100 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 4-wire PT100 (JIS C 1604, = 0.003916) 4-wire PT1000 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 3-wire PT1000 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 4-wire Enter + or - sign Low Temperature Enter lower limit temperature required Enter + or - sign High Temperature Sign Low Temperature Sign
High Temperature Enter higher limit temperature required Enter F or C Program cable and software part #5750-CABLE (required for optional future changes) Unit of Measure
WATLOW
145
Accessories
Transmitters
SERIES 5900 (Isolated)
Watlows SERIES 5900 temperature transmitter delivers remarkably accurate temperature measurement and improves reliability to reduce downtime and costs. The 5900 SERIES two-wire signal conditioner uses surface mount and digital technology with non-volatile memory. It is designed to fit directly into universal aluminum or universal iron connection heads with a separate mounting kit. The transmitter is programmed using a separate connection cable and an easy-to-use Windows-based software program. There is no need to use a separate thermocouple/RTD calibrator or individual resistors. The SERIES 5900 is isolated to 1500VAC and features full linearization between temperature sensor input signal and the 4-20mA output signal. Isolated transmitters provide isolation from input to output thus eliminating ground loops and signal integrity. Additional options include insulation resistance monitoring between sensor and ground to prevent inaccurate measurements due to insulation breakdown. Contact Watlows customer service department to integrate this transmitter into a Watlow Style AR or AT thermocouple sensor or a Watlow Style RR or RT RTD sensor.

Full temperature to thermocouple signal linearization throughout the complete operation temperature span Ensures signal accuracy Full isolation from input to output Eliminates ground loops for high data integrity Fits directly into connection head Easy to install Programmable Ensures greater convenience for future changes and inventory efficiency User selectable input types Thermocouple calibration Types B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S and T; RTD Pt100 and Pt1000 including four-wire Optional insulation resistance monitoring Prevents inaccurate measurements due to insulation breakdown CE marked Compliant to electromagnet interference
146
WATLOW
Accessories
Transmitters
SERIES 5900 (Isolated) Specifications
Isolation: 1500VAC for one minute Operating voltage: 6.5 to 36 volts (the 5900 is protected against voltage surges and reverse polarity) Sensor burn out protection: A pulsed current continuously checks all sensor leads for disconnect. The output will go upscale or downscale. Minimum input signal: RTDs: 10C, Thermocouples: 2mV Operating temperature: -40 to 85C Response time approx.: 0.5 seconds RFI sensitive: 20 - 1000 MHZ, 10V/m typical <0.1% (of end value) Permissible ripple of supply: 4V p-p Long term stability: 0.1% per year Calibration inaccuracy, thermocouples: max. of 20 volts or 0.01% Temperature effect: cold junction compensation 0.02% C/C Housing: PC, ABS/VO connection polyamid / V2 Mounting: DIN B
Input
1 2 3 4
6.5 - 36VDC PC
1.73 in. (44 mm)
6
Load
5
0.63 in. (16 mm) 1.02 in. (26 mm) 0.3 in. (7 mm) 1.3 in. (33 mm)
Wiring Diagram
Smart Sense Smart Sense
1 2 3 4 * +
T/C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 *
T2
1 2 3 4
T1
Pt100 Diff temperature
Pt100, Pt1000, 4 -sensor wires
Pt100, Pt1000, 3-sensor wires
Pt100 "Smart Sense" 3-sensor wires
* Smart Sense-wire
* Smart Sense-wire
T1
>
T2
WATLOW
147
Accessories
Transmitters
SERIES 5900 (Isolated) Ordering Information
Part Number
SERIES Sensor Type Low Temp. Sign Low Temp. High Temp. Sign High Temp. Unit of Measure
SERIES 5900 = Linearized T/C or RTD 5901 = 1000 RTD 5902 = Isolated, linearized with insulation resistance monitoring Sensor Type
Enter + or - sign
Low Temperature Sign
Low Temperature Enter lower limit temperature required Enter + or - sign High Temperature Sign
B = Type B T/C C = Type C T/C E = Type E T/C J = Type J T/C K = Type K T/C N = Type N T/C R = Type R T/C S = Type S T/C T = Type T T/C 0 = PT100 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 3-wire 1 = PT100 (JIS C 1604, = 0.003916) 3-wire 2 = PT100 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 4-wire 3 = PT100 (JIS C 1604, = 0.003916) 4-wire 4* = PT1000 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 3-wire 5* = PT1000 (IEC 60751, = 0.00385) 4-wire * Only valid options for 5901 SERIES
High Temperature Enter higher limit temperature required Unit of Measure
Enter F or C Program cable and software part #5900-CABLE
148
WATLOW
Accessories
Transmitters
System Components Typical Wiring Diagrams for Two-Wire Signal Conditioners Controller or PLC with 4-20mA Input
Transmitter
Controller or PLC with 1 to 5 Volt Input

Transmitter 4-20mA
+ Input
4-20mA
4-20mA Input
+ Input
250 Load
1 to 5 Volt Input
+ DC Power Supply
+ +
DC Power Supply Controller or PLC
+
Contoller or PLC
Controller or PLC with Intergal Power Supply

Transmitter
+ Input 4-20mA
+ + -
4-20mA Input DC Output
Controller or PLC
Transmitter and Connection Head Mounting Options

Connection Heads Cast Aluminum Mount with kit 81501901 Mount with kit 81501901 Cast Iron Does not fit Does not fit Explosion XP SERIES Mount with kit 81501301 Mount with kit 81501301 Poly Heads Pt SERIES Mount with kit 81501201 Mount with kit 81501201
Signal Conditioner Model and Description 5750, Non-isolated, Non-linearized 5900, 5901 and 5902, Isolated, Linearized
WATLOW
149
150
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Page Product Description Thermocouple Single pairs of thermocouple conductors are available using a variety of and Extension insulation materials. Matched pairs with duplex insulation are color coded Wire according to ANSI MC 96.1-1982 requirements. The operating temperature rating for thermocouple and extension wire is up to 2600F (1427C). RTD Lead Wire Nickel or tin plated 2, 3 and 4-wire copper conductor constructions are available in a variety of gauge sizes. All types are twisted to achieve maximum reduction of electromagnetic interferences, are available with PVC, FEP, PFA or fiberglass insulations and are color coded according to ANSI requirements. 153
188
SERV-RITE Wire
WATLOW
151
SERV-RITE Wire
General Information
Thermocouple and Extension Wire Color Codes
United States and International Color Coding Standard ASTM E 230 color coding (United States) is used on all insulated thermocouple wire and extension wire when insulation type permits. In color coding, the right is reserved to include a tracer to identify the ASTM E 230 type. Thermocouple grade wire normally has a brown overall jacket. For Types R and S, the color codes correlate to the compensating cable normally used. Thermocouple and Extension Wire Color Codes
Overall/Positive (+)/Negative (-)
T/C Type E (overall) EP EN J (overall) JP JN K (overall) KP KN N (overall) NP NN R (overall) RP RN S (overall) SP SN T (overall) TP TN ASTM E 230 T/C Brown +Purple RedBrown +White -Red Brown +Yellow -Red Brown +Orange -Red Brown +Blue -Red ASTM E 230 Extension Purple +Purple -Red Black +White -Red Yellow +Yellow -Red Orange +Orange -Red Green +Black -Red Green +Black -Red Blue +Blue -Red UK BS 1843 Brown +Brown -Blue Black +Yellow -Blue Red +Brown -Blue Green +White -Blue Green +White -Blue Blue +White -Blue Germany DIN 43710 Black +Red -Black Blue +Red -Blue Green +Red -Green White +Red -White Brown +Red -Brown Japan JIS C1610-1981 Purple +Red -White Yellow +Red -White Blue +Red -White Black +Red -White Black +Red -White Brown +Red -White IEC 584-3 Violet +Violet -White Black +Black -White Green +Green -White Orange +Orange -White Orange +Orange -White Brown +Brown -White
Various national and international standard agencies have adopted color codes for identifiying thermocouples which generally differ from those specified in ASTM E 230. The overall extension color code is also used to identify connectors to specific thermocouple types.
152
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Manufactured to Exact Specifications Since 1914, SERV-RITE thermocouple wire and thermocouple extension wire have been recognized for premium performance and reliability. All stock and custom wire is manufactured in Watlows plant where materials, manufacturing equipment and quality controls are carefully selected to ensure superior uniformity. Watlow offers popular wires as well as custom manufactured wire using alloys and insulation types to meet specific application demands. All SERV-RITE thermocouple wire and thermocouple extension wire is manufactured under rigid quality controls following ISO 9001 standards. In addition, all electromotive force (EMF) versus temperature calibration procedures follow one or more of the following standards: ASTM E 207 ASTM E 220 AMS 2750 All testing has NIST traceability. Unless otherwise specified, all SERV-RITE thermocouple wire and extension wire are supplied to meet standard tolerances of ASTM E 230. Special tolerances are also available.

Type E, J, K, N, S and T thermocouple wire Fit virtually all applications Compensation extension wire Permits fine tuning of temperature measuring circuits Solid or stranded wire Meets specific application requirements Wide selection of insulation types Meets temperature, chemical, moisture and abrasion resistance objectives Color coding Complies with United States, United Kingdom, German, Japanese and IEC standards Metallic overbraids and wraps Enhance abrasion resistance Stock RTD lead wire Meets virtually all industrial RTD applications
Compliance with recognized agency tolerances Insulation temperature ranges from -328 to 2600F (-200 to 1427C) Tolerances from 0.5C or 0.4 percent NIST calibration certificates ISO 17025 Accredited Lab
WATLOW
153
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Stock Wire Products by Temperature
Thermocouple Wire Max. Opr. Temp. F C Insulation Part Number K20-1-350 2600 1427 Ceramic K20-1-355 K20-2-350 K20-2-355 K20-1-301 K20-1-365 K20-2-301 K20-2-365 J20-1-321 J20-2-314 J20-2-321 K20-1-321 K20-2-314 K20-2-321 E20-1-304 J20-1-304 J20-1-S-304 J20-2-304 J20-3-304 J20-3-S-304 J24-1-304 J24-2-304 J24-3-304 J28-2-305 1000 538 Standard Fiberglass J30-1-305 J30-2-305 K20-1-304 K20-2-304 K20-3-304 K24-1-304 K24-2-304 K24-3-304 K28-2-305 K30-1-305 K30-2-305 S20-5-304* T20-1-304 T24-1-304 Limits of Error Standard Standard Special Special Standard Standard Special Special Standard Special Special Standard Special Special Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Special Standard Special Standard Special Standard Standard Special Standard Special Standard Special Standard Standard Standard
R KED FO STOCME DAY SA ENT SHIPM

Physical Properties Abrasion Moisture Chemical Resistance Resistance Resistance Good Good Good Good Fair Fair Fair Fair Good Good Good Good Good Good Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Fair Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good CONTINUED
Description
Brd. C. Fbr./Brd. C. Fbr. (heavy build) Brd. C. Fbr./Brd. C. Fbr. Brd.C. Fbr./Brd. C. Fbr. (heavy build) Brd. C. Fbr./Brd. C. Fbr. Brd. Sil./Brd.Sil. (heavy build) Brd. Sil./Brd.Sil. Brd. Sil/Brd.Sil. (heavy build) Brd. Sil./Brd.Sil. Brd. HT Gls./Brd. HT Gls. Brd. HT Gls./TW Brd. HT Gls./Brd. HT Gls. Brd. HT Gls./Brd. HT Gls. Brd. HT Gls./TW Brd. HT Gls./Brd. HT Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls./SS Brd. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Wrp. Dbl. Gls./Brd. Gls. Wrp. Dbl. Gls./Brd. Gls. Wrp. Dbl. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls./SS Brd. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Wrp. Dbl. Gls./Brd. Gls. Wrp. Dbl. Gls./Brd. Gls. Wrp. Dbl. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls. Brd. Gls./Brd. Gls.
2000
1093
Vitreous Silica
1652
900
High Temp. Fiberglass
K20-1-S-304 Standard
K20-3-S-304 Standard
*Note: The recommended operating temperature is limited to the extension grade alloy recommended temperature of 400F (204C).
154
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Stock Wire Products by Temperature (Continued)
Thermocouple Wire Max. Opr. Temp. F C Insulation Part Number J20-1-512 J20-3-512 800 427 Polyimide Tape J24-2-511 K20-3-512 J20-1-508 J20-2-508 J24-1-508 J24-2-508 K20-1-508 600 316 TFE Tape K20-2-508 K24-1-508 K24-2-508 T20-2-508 T24-1-508 T24-2-508 550 288 PFA J24-3-516 K24-2-516 E20-1-507 J16-5-509* J20-1-507 J20-1-509 J20-2-507 J20-3-507 J20-5-507* J20-5-509* J24-1-507 500 260 FEP J24-2-507 J24-3-507 J30-2-506 K16-5-509* K20-1-507 K20-1-509 K20-2-507 K20-2-509 K20-3-507 K20-5-507* K20-5-509* K24-1-507 K24-2-507 K24-3-507 K30-2-506 S20-5-507* T20-1-507 Limits of Error Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Special Standard Special Standard Special Standard Special Special Standard Special Standard Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Special Standard Standard Standard Special Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Special Standard Standard

Physical Properties Abrasion Moisture Chemical Resistance Resistance Resistance Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent CONTINUED
Description
Tp. P-mide/Tp. P-mide Tp. P-mide/Tp. P-mide Tp. P-mide/TW Tp. P-mide/Tp. P-mide Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE Tp. TFE/Tp. TFE PFA/PFA PFA/PFA FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP
WATLOW
155
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Stock Wire Products by Temperature (Continued)
Thermocouple Wire Max. Opr. Temp. F C Insulation 500 260 FEP Part Number T20-1-509 T20-2-507 T20-3-507 T24-2-507 T30-2-506 E20-5-502* E20-5-510* J16-5-502* J16-5-510* J20-5-502* J20-5-510* J20-7-502* J20-7-510* J24-1-505 J24-2-505 K16-5-502* 221 105 PVC K16-5-510* K20-5-502* K20-5-510* K20-7-502* K20-7-510* K24-1-505 K24-2-505 S20-5-502* S20-5-510* T16-5-510* T20-5-502* T20-5-510* T20-7-502* T24-1-505 T24-2-505 RTD Lead Wire 1000 500 221 538 260 105 Standard RT3-24-8-705 Fiberglass FEP PVC RT3-22-8-704 RT3-22-4-701 N/A N/A FEP/TW/FEP PVC/TW/PVC Excellent Good Excellent Excellent Excellent Good N/A Brd. Gls./TW/Brd. Gls. Fair Good Good Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Special Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Special

Physical Properties Abrasion Moisture Chemical Resistance Resistance Resistance Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Description
FEP/TWS/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP FEP/FEP PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/Ripcord PVC/Ripcord PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/Ripcord PVC/Ripcord PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/TWS/PVC PVC/PVC PVC/Ripcord PVC/Ripcord
156
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Heat Treat Thermocouple Wire
Thermocouple Wire Max. Opr. Temp. F C Insulation 1800 982 Part Number Limits of Error

Physical Properties Abrasion Moisture Chemical Resistance Resistance Resistance Good Good Good
Description
High Temp. K20-2-321-CAL Special Fiberglass
2200
1204
Vitreous Silica
2200
1204
Ceramic
Brd. HT Gls./Brd. HT Gls. Calculated from 200-1800F (93-982C), every 200F (93C) K-20-2-301-CAL Special Brd. Vit. Sil./Brd. Sil. Calculated from 200-2200F (93-1204C), every 200F (93C) K20-2-350-CAL Special Brd. C. Fbr./Brd. C. Fbr. from 200-2200F (93-1204C), every 200F (93C)
Fair
Fair
Good
Good
Fair
Good
Legend Brd. = Braided Gls. = Fiberglass TWS. = Twisted and shielded HT = High temperature Tp. = Taped P-mide = Polyimide Cbl. = Cable TW. = Twisted Wrp. = Wrapped
Dbl. = Double Cot. = Cotton C.Fbr = Ceramic fiber Sil. = Vitreous silica Pr. = Pair Std. = Standard Spc. = Special
WATLOW
157
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Ordering Information How to Order
Include the following information when ordering SERV-RITE thermocouple and extension wire: Calibration E, J, K, N, S or T Gauge size AWG gauge Solid or stranded conductors Stranded conductors are seven strand constructions. If other configurations are required, please contact the factory. Thermocouple or extension grade Determine if it will be used for the actual sensor or only to extend the signal at lower temperatures. Standard or special limits of error This will determine the accuracy of the sensor. Limits of error are determined by testing at a pre-defined Watlow standard test point. To guarantee limits of error at other temperature points, please contact the factory to arrange special testing. Insulation on singles and duplex The insulation material used is usually chosen to fit the environment where the sensor will be used. Color coding Unless specified, all color coding is to ASTM E 230 standards. Spool lengths Spool length requirements should be specified. Watlow strives to maintain a policy of shipping 1,000 foot spools. However, if not specified, random lengths may be shipped. If special packaging is required, please contact the factory. Variation in quantity Watlow follows the industry standard of shipping and invoicing at plus or minus ten percent of the cost for any ordered item. If requirements dictate anything other than plus or minus ten percent, contact the factory for potential additional charges. Overbraid options Options for overbraid are shown below. Overbraid selection code SStainless steel wire braid CTinned copper wire braid NAlloy 600 wire braid Options are listed on each page. Special requirements and testing are available at additional cost. Contact the factory for details. These include: Shielding Some constructions are available with shielding possibilities. Calibration Tests If calibration is required, please specify temperatures. Certificate of Compliance These may be provided for various specifications. When ordering, please provide specification requirements. Special Requirements Please contact the factory for any requirements not listed above.
Availability
Stock constructions: Many constructions are available for same day shipment Stock constructions with options: Shipment is usually within five working days or less Stock constructions requiring calibration or other laboratory services: Shipment is usually within five working days or less
158
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Technical Data How to Select Wire to Meet Requirements
The following information will explain some of the nomenclature associated with thermocouple wire and thermocouple extension wire. By reading this information, orders can be placed quickly and accurately. Thermocouple Wire or Thermocouple Extension Wire There are some significant differences between wire used to actually measure temperature and wire used to carry a millivoltage signal to an instrument. The most obvious difference is the color-code used to identify the wire itself. In most instances, thermocouple grade wire is identified by its overall brown color. Exceptions in the SERV-RITE wire product line are the very high temperature yarns such as those used in the SERIES 301 and 350. Of course, the overall color code is not used if there is no overall covering, as in SERV-RITE wire SERIES 505, 511 and 314. The functional differences between the two wires are that thermocouple extension wire is not calibrated above 400F (204C). The temperature rating of the insulations used on some extension grade wire exceeds 400F (204C) temperature to allow the wire to survive occasional contact with hot parts or furnace walls. Terms used in the tables of this section: Single Conductor Insulation Identifies insulation type used on individual thermoelements. Certain part numbers use a combination of insulations. When there is a combination, insulations are listed in order of application. Duplex Conductor Insulation Lists the overall insulation when one is used. Constructions which have no overall insulation use this area to describe the duplexing methodi.e. twisting, ripcord, etc. Temperature Rating Most constructions are rated for both continuous use and for single reading applications. Continuous use temperature is considered to be the highest temperature a particular construction will survive indefinitely. The single reading temperature is the highest temperature at which the construction will perform and continue to produce an accurate reading. However, after exposure to the single reading temperature, the wire will exhibit less flexibility and/or abrasion resistance. Therefore, it is not likely that the wire could be removed from the application and then reused. ASTM E 230 Color Code Generally, SERV-RITE wire has color codes wherever possible. Exceptions are high temperature yarn constructions such as the SERIES 301 and 350. Color coding of the SERIES 511 and 512 is accomplished by including a colored thread or tracer under the tape. Physical Properties Abrasion Resistance is rated fair, good, or excellent and is based on the wall thickness of the construction and how well it survives with other insulations of similar thicknesses. The 511 SERIES receives an excellent rating because the thin wall of polyimide tape will survive better than almost any other insulation applied in the same wall thickness. The absolute abrasion resistance of a construction will depend not only on the type of insulation, but on thickness at which it is applied. Moisture Resistance ratings are given for wire in the as received condition. In the case of fiberglass insulated wire, moisture resistance is achieved by using impregnations or spirally applied tapes called moisture barriers. The impregnations and/or tapes will burn off at temperatures below the upper useful operating temperatures of the fiberglass. The thermoplastic insulations (PVC and fluoroplastics) and polyimide insulated constructions will maintain their moisture resistance up to their continuous temperature rating. Chemical Resistance ratings are applied as they relate to most common chemicals. These ratings apply to insulation types and not necessarily to the type of impregnation used. Contact the factory for specific applications.
WATLOW
159
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Technical Data (Continued)
Metallic Overbraids and Wraps Although standard SERV-RITE wire products are designed to yield a high degree of abrasion resistance, it is sometimes necessary to add an additional metallic covering to further enhance this property. Following are available overbraids and wraps. Stainless Steel Wire Braid (S) This most popular over-braid uses 300 series stainless steel and is available on virtually all standard SERV-RITE wire offerings. It is an economical method to extend the life of thermocouple and extension wire. Several of Watlows standard wire items are available from stock with a stainless overbraid. Non-stock items are available as a special order. Alloy 600 Wire Braid (N) Most commonly specified on high temperature SERV-RITE wire yarn insulations, the Inconel braid offers a higher operating temperature than the series 300 stainless steel overbraid. When this braid is specified on SERV-RITE SERIES 350, the performance of the material is only surpassed by metal-sheathed cables. Consult the factory for availability on specific wire items. Tinned Copper Wire Overbraid (C) When there is a possibility of electrical interference in the area of the thermocouple installation, it may be necessary to shield the wire from electrical noise. Several Watlow standard products use aluminized tapes as an intrinsic shield. If shielding is needed on other constructions, a tinned copper shield can be specified as a special order.
160
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
High-Temperature Vitreous Silica Braided Thermocouple Wire SERIES 301 and 365
Both the SERIES 301 and 365 use vitreous silica yarn as the insulation on both the conductors and duplex. This yarn retains its flexibility after exposure to high temperatures. Because this insulation has no binders or impregnations, it may flower when stripped. The vitreous silica yarns greater purity performs better at high temperatures than other fibrous glass products. Testing indicates that contamination will compromise this materials upper use temperature. For this reason, our standard offering is supplied without color coding or impregnations. The SERIES 365 construction is a cost-effective, medium insulation build of the popular heavy duty SERIES 301 construction. For higher temperatures consider SERIES 350.
Applications
Heat treating Oven and furnace Survey and load
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 1800F (980C) Single use temperature 2000F (1093C) Resistance properties Moisture: Fair Chemical: Good Abrasion: Fair
Continuous temperature rating: 1800F (982C) Vitreous silica braided yarn insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Popular Constructions
Wire Type Insulation Limits of Error Solid Heavy Standard Solid Heavy Special Thermocouple 20 Solid Heavy Special Solid Medium Standard Solid Medium Special * Calibrated from 200 to 2200F (93 to 1204C), every 200F (93C). Only available in this construction. Note: Bolded products are stocked. Grade AWG Type K K20-1-301 K20-2-301 K20-2-301-CAL* K20-1-365 K20-2-365
Wire Specifications
AWG Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) (0.813) (1.020) (1.290) (0.813) Nominal Insulation Thickness Overall Conductor in. (mm) in. (mm) 0.018 0.018 0.016 0.015 (0.457) (0.457) (0.406) (0.381) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.012 (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.305) 0.098 0.110 0.118 0.090 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x 0.154 0.180 0.198 0.140 (2.49 (2.79 (3.00 (2.29 x x x x 3.91) 4.57) 5.03) 3.56) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 15 19 25 13 (22.4) (28.3) (37.3) (19.4)
20a 0.032 18a 0.040 16a 0.051 202 0.032 aSERIES 301, 2SERIES 365
Part Number
ASTM E 230 Calibration AWG Conductor Type/ Insulation Tolerance Type
K = Type K N = Type N 20 = 20 gauge solid
ASTM E 230 Calibration
Conductor/Type Tolerance 1 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, standard tolerance 2 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, special tolerance Insulation Type 301= Heavy build 365= Medium build Note: Minimum order sizes apply for non-stock constructions.
AWG
WATLOW
161
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304
The uniform quality and availability of the SERIES 304 make it the ideal wire for general applications requiring moderate abrasion and moisture resistance, wide temperature capabilities and economy. Each conductor is covered with a color coded glass braid. This braid is impregnated to enhance abrasion resistance and reduce fraying. The insulated single conductors are laid parallel and covered with another layer of woven glass. A final impregnation is then applied to the glass. For higher temperatures, consider SERIES 321.
Applications
Heat treating Oven General use
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 900F (482C) Single use temperature 1000F (540C) Resin retained to 400F (204C) Resistance properties Moisture: Good Chemical: Good Abrasion: Fair
Continuous temperature rating: 900F (482C) Fiberglass braided yarn insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 20 Thermocouple 24 Extension 20 Wire Type Solid Solid Stranded Solid Solid Stranded Solid Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Type K K20-1-304* K20-2-304 K20-3-304* K24-1-304 K24-2-304 K24-3-304 Type J J20-1-304* J20-2-304 J20-3-304* J24-1-304 J24-2-304 J24-3-304 Type T T20-1-304 T20-2-304 T20-3-304 T24-1-304 T24-2-304 Type E E20-1-304 E20-2-304 E20-3-304
* These constructions stocked with a stainless steel overbraid (order overbraid by adding -S in front of construction type (i.e. K20-1-S-304). Note: Bolded products are stocked.
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) Conductor in. (mm) Overall in. (mm) Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 7 8 9 10 (10.4) (11.9) (13.4) (14.9)
24 0.020 (1.508) 0.005 (0.127) 24 S* (7/32) 0.024 (1.610) 0.005 (0.127) 20 0.032 (1.813) 0.005 (0.127) 20 S* (7/28) 0.038 (1.965) 0.006 (0.152) * S denotes stranded wire: e.g., 20 S (7/28) is seven strands of
0.006 (0.152) 0.045 x 0.072 0.006 (0.152) 0.048 x 0.080 0.006 (0.152) 0.056 x 0.096 0.006 (0.152) 0.064 x 0.112 28 gauge wire to make a 20 gauge
(1.14 x 1.83) (1.22 x 2.03) (1.42 x 2.44) (1.63 x 2.84) stranded conductor.
162
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
ASTM E 230 Calibration AWG Conductor Type/ Tolerance
3
E J K N S T = = = = = = Type E Type J Type K Type N Type S Type T ASTM E 230 Calibration
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Conductor Type/Tolerance = = = = = = = = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, standard tolerance Thermocouple grade, solid wire, special tolerance Thermocouple grade, stranded wire, standard tolerance Thermocouple grade, stranded wire, special tolerance Extension grade, solid wire, standard tolerance Extension grade, solid wire, special tolerance Extension grade, stranded wire, standard tolerance Extension grade, stranded wire, special tolerance
AWG 24 = 24 gauge solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) 20 = 20 gauge solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28)
Note: Minimum order sizes apply for non-stock constructions.
WATLOW
163
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305
SERIES 305 is specifically constructed for light duty applications where size is a critical factor. Single conductors are insulated using a specialized yarn wrapped around the conductors in layers. Yarn is then impregnated to add abrasion resistance and enhance electrical properties. The insulated single conductors are then laid parallel and covered with a layer of braided glass. A final impregnation is applied to the braid. For higher temperature applications, use SERIES 321.
Applications
Heat treating Oven General use
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 900F (482C) Single use temperature 1000F (540C) Resin retained to 400F (204C) Resistance properties Moisture: Good Chemical: Good Abrasion: Fair
Continuous temperature rating: 900F (482C) Fiberglass braided yarn insulation Yarn wrapped conductors for superior coverage on small gauge wires Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 24 Thermocouple 28 30 Note: Bolded products are stocked. Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Special Standard Special Type K K24-1-305 K24-2-305 K28-1-305 K28-2-305 K30-1-305 K30-2-305 Type J J24-1-305 J24-2-305 J28-1-305 J28-2-305 J30-1-305 J30-2-305
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 30 28 24 24 S* (7/32) 20 20 S* (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.010 0.013 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 (0.254) (0.320) (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) Conductor in. (mm) 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) Overall in. (mm) 0.008 0.008 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 (0.203) (0.203) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) 0.036 0.040 0.042 0.048 0.054 0.060 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x x 0.056 (0.914 x 1.42) 0.062 (1.02 x 1.57) 0.072 (1.07 x 1.83) 0.080 (1.22 x 2.03) 0.096 (1.37 x 2.44) 0.108 (1.52 x 2.74) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 3 3 7 8 9 10 (4.5) (4.5) (10.4) (11.9) (13.4) (14.9)
* S denotes stranded wire: e.g., 24 S (7/32) is seven strands of 32 gauge wire to make a 24 gauge stranded conductor.
164
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
3
E J K N S T 30 28 24 20 = = = = = = Type Type Type Type Type Type E J K N S T AWG gauge gauge gauge gauge solid solid solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28) ASTM E 230 Calibration
5
= 30 = 28 = 24 = 20
WATLOW
165
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
High-Temperature Fiberglass Twisted Thermocouple Wire SERIES 314
The SERIES 314 is an economical construction for general, high temperature applications. The braided high temperature yarn is applied in a unique manner that allows SERIES 314 to be competitively priced with other fiberglass constructions. It produces a finished wire that performs at temperatures to 1600F (870C). The conductors are insulated with braided, high strength fiberglass and impregnated to improve abrasion resistance. The impregnation is tinted to impart color coding to primary insulations. The insulated single conductors are then twisted together to yield a construction flexible enough for almost any application.
Applications
Heat treating Aluminum stress relieving Steel annealing
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 1300F (705C) Single use temperature 1600F (870C) Resin retained to 400F (204C) Resistance properties Moisture: Good Chemical: Good Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 1300F (705C) Fiberglass braided yarn insulation Twisted design has no jacket Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade Thermocouple 24 Note: Bolded products are stocked. AWG 20 Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Solid
Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Special Type K K20-1-314 K20-2-314 K24-1-314 K24-2-314 Type J J20-1-314 J20-2-314 J24-1-314 J24-2-314
Wire Specifications
AWG 24 20 18 16 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.051 (0.508) (0.965) (1.02) (1.29) Nominal Conductor Insulation Thickness in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 0.018 0.018 (0.381) (0.381) (0.457) (0.457) Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) 0.100 0.124 0.152 0.174 (2.54) (3.15) (3.56) (4.42) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 6 10 16 21 (8.9) (14.9) (23.8) (31.3)
Part Number
3
J = Type J K = Type K 24 20 16 = 24 gauge solid = 20 gauge solid = 16 gauge solid AWG ASTM E 230 Calibration
4
Conductor Type/Tolerance 1 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, standard tolerance 2 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, special tolerance Note: Minimum order sizes apply for non-stock constructions.
166
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
High-Temperature Braided Fiberglass Thermocouple Wire SERIES 321
The addition of color coding and impregnation to the high temperature fiberglass make this wire the next logical step for systems which exceed temperature capabilities of the standard glass insulated series. Each conductor is covered with a color coded, high temperature fiberglass braid. This braid is then impregnated to enhance abrasion resistance and reduce fraying. The insulated conductors are laid parallel and covered with another braid of high temperature fiberglass and impregnation.
Applications
Heat treating Aluminum and steel
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 1300F (705C) Single use temperature 1600F (870C) Resin retained to 400F (204C) Resistance properties Moisture: Good Chemical: Good Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 1300F (705C) Heavy fiberglass braided yarn insulation Twisted design has no jacket Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 20 Thermocouple 24 Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Limits of Error Standard Special Special Standard Special Type K K20-1-321 K20-2-321 K24-1-321 K24-2-321 Type J J20-1-321 J20-2-321 J20-2-321-CAL* J24-1-321 J24-2-321
* Calibrated from 200 to 2200F (93 to 1204C), every 200F (93C). Only available in this construction. Bolded products are stocked.
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24 20 18 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.032 0.040 (0.508) (0.965) (1.02) Conductor in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 0.015 (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) Overall in. (mm) 0.010 0.010 0.010 (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) 0.072 x 0.120 0.082 x 0.140 0.090 x 0.156 (1.83 x 3.05) (2.08 x 3.56) (2.29 x 3.96) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 10 13 18 (14.9) (19.4) (26.8)
Part Number
3
J = Type J K = Type K N = Type N 24 = 24 gauge solid 20 = 20 gauge solid AWG ASTM E 230 Calibration
1
WATLOW
167
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
High-Temperature Ceramic Fiber Thermocouple Wire SERIES 350 and 355
The SERIES 350 uses the ultimate high-temperature flexible insulating system. The ceramic fiber yarns upper temperature limit often exceeds the melting point of the material it insulates. Because this insulation has no binders or impregnations, it may flower when stripped. When an application requires flexible insulation, while pushing Type K or Type N to extreme limits, ceramic fiber insulation is the only choice. Watlow supplies standard SERIES 350 without color coding or impregnations to minimize contaminating the pure ceramic fiber yarn. Because this insulation has no binders or impregnations, it may flower when stripped. Laboratory testing indicates impregnation can decrease the upper use temperature by as much as 1000F (540C). The SERIES 355 construction is a cost-effective, medium insulation build of the popular SERIES 350 heavy-duty construction. If application temperatures exceed SERIES 350 construction, specify XACTPAK mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable.
Applications
Heat treating Oven and furnace survey Load thermocouple
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 2200F (1205C) Single use temperature 2600F (1430C) Resistance properties Moisture: Fair Chemical: Good Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 1205C (2200F) Ceramic fiber braided yarn insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Insulation Heavy Heavy Heavy Medium Medium Limits of Error Standard Special Special Standard Special Type K K20-1-350 K20-2-350 K20-2-350-CAL* K20-1-355 K20-2-355
Thermocouple
20
* Calibrated from 200 to 2200F (93 to 1204C), every 200F (93C). Only available in this construction. Bolded products are stocked.
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24a 20a 16a 14a 242 202 162
a
Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.032 0.051 0.064 0.020 0.032 0.051 (0.508) (0.965) (1.29) (1.63) (0.508) (0.965) (1.29)
Conductor in. (mm) 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.012 0.012 0.012 (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305)
Overall in. (mm) 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) (0.406) 0.088 0.100 0.119 0.132 0.078 0.090 0.111
Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x x x 0.132 0.154 0.192 0.218 0.116 0.138 0.176 (2.24 (2.54 (3.02 (3.35 (1.98 (2.29 (2.82 x x x x x x x 3.35) 3.91) 4.88) 5.54) 2.95) 3.50) 4.47)
Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 13 16 32 44 13 16 32 (19.4) (23.8) (47.7) (65.6) (19.4) (23.8) (47.7)
SERIES 350, 2SERIES 355
168
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
High-Temperature Ceramic Fiber Thermocouple Wire SERIES 350 and 355 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
ASTM E 230 Calibration AWG Conductor Type/ Insulation Tolerance Type
K = Type K N = Type N 24 = 20 20 = 20 16 = 16 14 = 14
ASTM E 230 Calibration
Conductor/Type Tolerance 1 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, standard tolerance 2 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, special tolerance Insulation Type 350= Heavy build 355= Medium build Note: Minimum order sizes apply for non-stock constructions.
AWG gauge gauge gauge gauge solid solid solid solid
WATLOW
169
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502
SERIES 502 is an economical wire that has PVC for the primary and duplex insulation. The primary and duplex insulation is PVC. It yields a construction that is inexpensive and performs continuously at temperatures up to 220F (105C). SERIES 502 is often used in conduit and wiring trays where its flexibility allows for easy installation. It can be easily stripped using hand tools or mechanical methods.
Applications
General use extension wire
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 220F (105C) Single use temperature 220F (105C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Excellent Abrasion: Excellent
Continuous temperature rating: 220F (105C) Flexible PVC plastic insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 16 Extension 20 24 Wire Type Solid Stranded Solid Stranded Solid Stranded Limits of Error Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Type K K16-5-502 K16-7-502 K20-5-502 K20-7-502 K24-5-502 K24-7-502 Type J J16-5-502 J16-7-502 J20-5-502 J20-7-502 J24-5-502 J24-7-502 Type T Type E Type S
T20-5-502 T20-7-502 T24-5-502 T24-7-502
E20-5-502
S20-5-502
Note: Bolded products are stocked.
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24 24 S* (7/32) 20 20 S* (7/28) 16 16 S* (7/24) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 0.051 0.060 (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) (1.29) (1.52) Conductor in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 0.020 (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.508) (0.508) Overall in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 0.020 (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.508) (0.508) 0.080 0.084 0.092 0.098 0.131 0.140 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x x 0.130 0.138 0.154 0.166 0.222 0.240 (2.03 (2.13 (2.34 (2.49 (3.33 (3.56 x x x x x x 3.30) 3.51) 3.91) 4.22) 5.64) 6.10) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 10 11 14 16 28 30 (14.9) (16.4) (20.9) (23.8) (41.7) (44.7)
170
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
E J K N S T 24 20 16 = = = = = = Type Type Type Type Type Type E J K N S T ASTM E 230 Calibration
2
5 6 7 8 Conductor Type/Tolerance = = = = Extension Extension Extension Extension grade, grade, grade, grade, solid wire, standard tolerance solid wire, special tolerance stranded wire, standard tolerance stranded wire, special tolerance
AWG = 24 gauge solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/28) = 20 gauge solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28) = 16 gauge solid or 16 gauge stranded (7/24)
WATLOW
171
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
PVC Insulated RIPCORD SERIES 505
The SERIES 505 is the most economical wire produced. Unlike some competitive ripcord type constructions which use only a stripe to establish polarity, SERIES 505 single conductors are fully color coded. The conductors are individually insulated with the proper colored PVC and fused into ripcord using a proprietary process. Insulated conductors can be easily separated by hand once the bond between conductors has been slit. As with other PVC insulated products, SERIES 505 lends itself well to both manual and mechanical stripping methods.
Applications
Laboratory Test stand Automotive
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 220F (105C) Single use temperature 220F (105C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Good Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 220F (105C) Flexible PVC plastic insulation Ripcord peelable construction Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade Thermocouple AWG 24 Wire Type Solid Solid Limits of Error Standard Special Type K K24-1-505 K24-2-505 Type J J24-1-505 J24-2-505 Type T T24-1-505 T24-2-505
Wire Specifications
AWG 26 24 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.016 0.020 (0.406) (0.508) Nominal Conductor Insulation Thickness in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 (0.381) (0.381) Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) 0.046 x 0.088 0.050 x 0.096 (1.17 x 2.24) (1.27 x 2.44) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 4 5 (6.0) (7.5)
Part Number
5
J = Type J K = Type K T = Type T 26 24 20 AWG = 26 gauge solid = 24 gauge solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) = 20 gauge solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28) ASTM E 230 Calibration
5
1 2 3 4 Conductor Type/Tolerance = = = = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, standard tolerance Thermocouple grade, solid wire, special tolerance Thermocouple grade, stranded wire, standard tolerance Thermocouple grade, stranded wire, special tolerance
172
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Small Gauge Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (FEP) Insulated SERIES 506
The SERIES 506 is the smallest standard insulated wire construction. The thin FEP wall on both primary and duplex insulation yields a construction that can operate safely at temperatures far beyond common PVC and nylon insulations. The SERIES 506 is fully color coded for easy installation. Its small size allows use in high density circuits. Response time is minimized by small diameter conductors. For larger diameter gauge sizes than #28, specify SERIES 507.
Applications
Laboratory Test stand Industrial equipment testing
Specifications
Continuous temperature rating: 400F (204C) Flexible FEP plastic insulation Thin insulation wall for a compact construction Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade Thermocouple AWG 28 30 36 Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Limits of Error Special Special Special Type K K28-2-506 K30-2-506 K36-2-506 Type J J28-2-506 J30-2-506 J36-2-506 Type T T28-2-506 T30-2-506 T36-2-506
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 36 32 30 28 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.013 (0.127) (0.203) (0.254) (0.330) Conductor in. (mm) 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) Overall in. (mm) 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) 0.025 0.028 0.030 0.033 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x 0.040 0.046 0.050 0.056 (0.635 (0.711 (0.762 (0.838 x x x x 1.02) 1.17) 1.27) 1.42) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 2 2 3 3 (3.0) (3.0) (4.5) (4.5)
Part Number
5
E J K N S T = = = = = = Type Type Type Type Type Type E J K N S T ASTM E 230 Calibration
6
36 30 28 = 36 gauge solid = 30 gauge solid = 28 gauge solid AWG
WATLOW
173
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507
The SERIES 507 is the most economical fluoroplastic insulated wire. Individual conductors are coated with a layer of color coded FEP. The insulated conductors are then parallel duplexed with an additional layer of color coded FEP. The finished construction has a continuous temperature rating of 400F (204C). Abrasion, moisture and chemical resistance exceed most other insulations. This construction is widely used when pulling long lengths of wire through conduit. FEPs low friction coefficient and abrasion resistance are suited for these applications. For higher abrasion resistance consider SERIES 514 Tefzel insulated constructions. For higher temperatures specify SERIES 508.
Applications
Specifications
Continuous temperature rating: 400F (204C) Flexible FEP plastic insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade Extension AWG 20 24 20 Thermocouple 24 Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Stranded Solid Solid Stranded Solid Limits of Error Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Special Type K K20-5-507 K20-1-507 K20-3-507 K20-2-507 K24-1-507 K24-3-507 K24-2-507 Type J J20-5-507 J20-1-507 J20-3-507 J20-2-507 J24-1-507 J24-3-507 J24-2-507 Type T T20-5-507 T20-1-507 T20-3-507 T20-2-507 T24-1-507 T24-3-507 T24-2-507 Type E E20-5-507 E20-1-507 E20-3-507 E20-2-507 E24-1-507 E24-3-507 E24-2-507 Type S S20-5-507 S24-5-507
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24 24 22 22 20 20 18 18 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.024 0.025 0.030 0.032 0.038 0.040 0.048 (0.508) (0.610) (0.635) (0.762) (0.813) (0.965) (1.02) (1.22) Conductor in. (mm) 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) Overall in. (mm) 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) 0.056 0.060 0.061 0.066 0.068 0.074 0.076 0.084 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x x x x 0.096 0.104 0.106 0.116 0.120 0.132 0.136 0.152 (1.42 (1.52 (1.55 (1.68 (1.73 (1.88 (1.93 (2.13 x x x x x x x x 2.44) 2.64) 2.69) 2.95) 3.05) 3.35) 3.45) 3.86) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 8 9 10 11 12 14 18 20 (11.9) (13.4) (14.9) (16.4) (17.9) (20.9) (26.8) (29.8)
S* (7/32) S* (7/30) S* (7/28) S* (7/26)
174
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
7
WATLOW
175
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
TFE Insulated SERIES 508
The primary and duplex insulation of SERIES 508 is fused TFE tape which is spirally applied to the conductor and heated. This process, called sintering, forms the tape into a homogeneous layer. When sintered, the tape exhibits all of the advantages of extruded TFE insulation, while eliminating the concentricity problems associated with TFE extrusions. The SERIES 508 is fully color coded and capable of continuous operation in excess of 500F (260C). Because the fusing process causes the duplex tape to fuse with the primary insulation, SERIES 508 is not recommended for applications where it is necessary to remove the outer tape while leaving the primary insulation intact.
Applications
Aircraft Petroleum processing
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 500F (260C) Single use temperature 600F (315C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Excellent Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 500F (260C) Fused TFE tape insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 20 Thermocouple 24 Note: Bolded products are stocked. Wire Type Solid Stranded Solid Solid Stranded Solid Limits of Error Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Special Type K K20-1-508 K20-3-508 K20-2-508 K24-1-508 K24-3-508 K24-2-508 Type J J20-1-508 20-3-508 J20-2-508 J24-1-508 J24-3-508 J24-2-508 Type T T20-1-508 T20-3-508 T20-2-508 T24-1-508 T24-3-508 T24-2-508 Type E E20-1-508 E20-3-508 E20-2-508 E24-1-508 E24-3-508 E24-2-508
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 26 24 24 S* (7/32) 20 20 S* (7/28) 18 18 S* (7/26) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.016 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 0.040 0.048 (0.406) (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) (1.02) (1.22) Conductor in. (mm) 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) Overall in. (mm) 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) 0.044 0.047 0.049 0.061 0.064 0.068 0.076 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x x x 0.072 0.077 0.084 0.106 0.112 0.120 0.136 (1.12 (1.19 (1.24 (1.55 (1.63 (1.73 (1.93 x x x x x x x 1.83) 1.95) 2.13) 2.69) 2.84) 3.05) 3.45) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 4 5 6 11 12 16 18 (6.0) (7.5) (8.9) (16.4) (17.9) (23.8) (26.8)
176
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
TFE Insulated SERIES 508 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
8
AWG = 26 gauge solid = 24 gauge solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) = 20 gauge solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28)
WATLOW
177
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509
The SERIES 509 was developed specially for use with microprocessor-based systems. The conductors are insulated with color coded FEP. They are then twisted with a copper drain wire. An aluminized polyester tape is wrapped around the conductors and drain wire and then FEP is applied. The finished construction can withstand temperatures in excess of 400F (204C). Twisted conductors minimize electromagnetic interference (EMI) and the shield tape eliminates most problems associated with AC noise in the sensing circuit.
Applications
Specifications
Continuous temperature rating: 400F (204C) Flexible FEP plastic insulation Twisted and shielded construction to reduce electrical noise interference Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 16 Extension 20 20 Thermocouple 24 Wire Type Solid Stranded Solid Stranded Solid Solid Solid Stranded Limits of Error Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Special Standard Standard Type K K16-5-509 K16-7-509 K20-5-509 K20-7-509 K20-1-509 K20-2-509 K24-1-509 K24-3-509 Type J J16-5-509 J16-7-509 J20-5-509 J20-7-509 J20-1-509 J20-2-509 J24-1-509 J24-3-509 Type T Type E Type S
T20-5-509 T20-7-509 T20-1-509 T20-2-509 T24-1-509 T24-3-509
E20-5-509
S20-5-509
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24 24 20 20 18 18 16 16 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 0.040 0.048 0.051 0.060 (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) (1.02) (1.22) (1.29) (1.52) Conductor in. (mm) 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) Overall in. (mm) 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) 0.104 0.112 0.128 0.140 0.152 0.168 0.174 0.192 (2.64) (2.84) (3.25) (3.56) (3.86) (4.27) (4.42) (4.88) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 12 13 18 20 25 27 33 35 (17.9) (19.4) (26.8) (29.8) (37.3) (40.2) (49.2) (52.2)
S* (7/32) S* (7/28) S* (7/26) S* (7/24)
178
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
9
WATLOW
179
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510
The SERIES 510 is a PVC insulated, twisted and shielded construction for systems sensitive to induced voltages and noise. The conductors are insulated with color coded PVC and then twisted with a copper drain wire. An aluminized polyester tape is wrapped around the two conductors and drain wires to impart 100 percent shielding. Then, another layer of PVC is applied. The twisting eliminates most EMI while the shield tape minimizes AC noise in the sensing circuit.
Applications
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 220F (105C) Single use temperature 220F (105C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Good Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 220F (105C) Flexible PVC plastic insulation Twisted and shielded construction to reduce electrical noise interference Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 16 Extension 20 24 Wire Type Solid Stranded Solid Stranded Solid Stranded Limits of Error Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Type K K16-5-510 K16-7-510 K20-5-510 K20-7-510 K24-5-510 K24-7-510 Type J J16-5-510 J16-7-510 J20-5-510 J20-7-510 J24-5-510 J24-7-510 Type T T16-5-510 T16-7-510 T20-5-510 T20-7-510 T24-5-510 T24-7-510 Type E Type S
E20-5-510
S20-5-510
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24 24 20 20 18 18 16 16 Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 0.040 0.048 0.051 0.060 (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) (1.02) (1.22) (1.29) (1.52) Conductor in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) Overall in. (mm) 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) 0.140 0.148 0.164 0.176 0.200 0.216 0.222 0.240 (3.56) (3.76) (4.17) (4.47) (5.08) (5.49) (5.64) (6.10) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 13 14 22 24 30 32 39 41 (19.4) (20.9) (32.8) (35.8) (44.7) (47.7) (58.1) (61.1)
S* (7/32) S* (7/28) S* (7/26) S* (7/24)
180
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
0
Conductor Type/Tolerance 1 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, standard tolerance 2 = Thermocouple grade, solid wire, special tolerance 3 = Thermocouple grade, stranded wire, standard tolerance 4 = Thermocouple grade, stranded wire, special tolerance 5 = Extension grade, solid wire, standard tolerance 6 = Extension grade, solid wire, special tolerance 7 = Extension grade, stranded wire, standard tolerance 8 = Extension grade, stranded wire, special tolerance Note: Minimum order sizes apply for non-stock constructions.
WATLOW
181
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Polyimide Insulated and Twisted SERIES 511
SERIES 511 is the most economical polyimide taped construction. Polyimide film applied to the conductors is considered to be the ultimate soft insulation. The tape maintains its strength at temperatures up to 600F (315C). The FEP laminate serves as a moisture barrier and allows the tape to fuse with itself. The finished construction will not unravel when cut. SERIES 511 conductors are wrapped with the polyimide tape which is fused to itself. Each conductor is color coded with a colored thread under the tape. The insulated conductors are twisted into a duplex construction to eliminate the overall duplex insulation and minimize cost.
Applications
Aerospace Petrochemical Plastics
Specifications
Continuous temperature rating: 600F (315C) Polyimide fused tape insulation Twisted design has no outer jacket Colored tracer used to indicate calibration type Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 20 Thermocouple 24 Note: Bolded products are stocked. Wire Type Solid Solid Solid Solid Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Special Type K K20-1-511 K20-2-511 K24-1-511 K24-2-511 Type J J20-1-511 J20-2-511 J24-1-511 J24-2-511
Wire Specifications
AWG 30 24 24 S* (7/32) 20 20 S* (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.010 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 (0.254) (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) Nominal Conductor Insulation Thickness in. (mm) 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 (0.102) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) Nominal Overall Size in (mm) 0.040 0.060 0.068 0.084 0.094 (1.02) (1.52) (1.73) (2.13) (2.39) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 3 4 5 8 9 (4.5) (6.0) (7.5) (11.9) (13.4)
Note: FEP laminate melts at approximately 260C (500F). * S denotes stranded wire: e.g., 24 S (7/32) is seven strands of 32 gauge wire to make a 24 gauge stranded conductor.
182
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Polyimide Insulated and Twisted SERIES 511
(Continued)
Part Number
5
J = Type J K = Type K T = Type T 30 24 20 16 = 30 = 24 = 20 = 16 AWG gauge gauge gauge gauge solid solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28) solid ASTM E 230 Calibration
1
WATLOW
183
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512
The SERIES 512 is a heavier duty version of SERIES 511 construction, using the same polyimide insulation. Color coding is accomplished using the same colored thread tracers. The SERIES 512 has a duplex insulation of polyimide tape. The extra wall of tape yields a construction with increased abrasion resistance. For higher temperature requirements, choose one of our fiberglass insulated wires. For improved abrasion resistance, and easier color identification of conductors, specify SERIES 513 when contacting the factory.
Applications
Aerospace Petrochemical Plastics
Specifications
Continuous temperature rating: 600F (315C) Polyimide fused tape insulation Colored tracer used to indicate calibration type Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 20 Thermocouple 24 Note: Bolded products are stocked. Wire Type Solid Solid Stranded Solid Solid Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Standard Special Type K K20-1-512 K20-2-512 K20-3-512 K24-1-512 K24-2-512 Type J J20-1-512 J20-2-512 J20-3-512 J24-1-512 J24-2-512
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 30 24 24 S* (7/32) 20 20 S* (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.010 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 (0.254) (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) Conductor in. (mm) 0.004 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 (0.102) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) Overall in. (mm) 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) (0.127) 0.026 0.036 0.043 0.048 0.056 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x 0.044 0.064 0.066 0.088 0.098 (0.660 x 1.18) (0.914 x 1.626) (1.092 x 1.676) (1.219 x 2.235) (1.42 x 2.490) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 3 5 6 8 9 (4.5) (7.5) (8.9) (11.9) (13.4)
Note: FEP laminate melts at approximately 260C (500F). * S denotes stranded wire: e.g., 24 S (7/32) is seven strands of 32 gauge wire to make a 24 gauge stranded conductor.
184
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
E J K N T 30 24 20 = = = = = Type Type Type Type Type E J K N T AWG ASTM E 230 Calibration
2
= 30 gauge solid = 24 gauge solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) = 20 gauge solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28)
WATLOW
185
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516
A relatively new fluoroplastic, perfluoralkoxy (PFA), is the insulation used for SERIES 516. PFAs temperature rating is only slightly less than TFE. However, PFA can be applied using conventional extrusion techniques. This produces a smooth finish, as opposed to the spiral usually associated with TFE tape constructions. This is important in the foodservice industry where taped constructions present cleaning problems. The smooth surface also allows this construction to be pulled through conduits and cut-outs more easily. Once each conductor has been coated with a color coded PFA layer, they are laid parallel and coated again with PFA.
Applications
Specifications
Continuous use temperature 500F (260C) Single use temperature 550F (290C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Excellent Abrasion: Good
Continuous temperature rating: 500F (260C) Flexible TFE plastic insulation Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Grade AWG 20 Thermocouple 24 Note: Bolded products are stocked. Wire Type Solid Solid Stranded Solid Solid Stranded Limits of Error Standard Special Standard Standard Special Standard Type K K20-1-516 K20-2-516 K20-3-516 K24-1-516 K24-2-516 K24-3-516 Type J J20-1-516 J20-2-516 J20-3-516 J24-1-516 J24-2-516 J24-3-516 Type T T20-1-516 T20-2-516 T20-3-516 T20-1-516 T20-2-516 T20-3-516 Type E E20-1-516 E20-2-516 E20-3-516 E24-1-516 E24-2-516 E24-3-516
Wire Specifications
Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 36 30 24 24 S* (7/32) 20 20 S* (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.005 0.010 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.038 (0.127) (0.254) (0.508) (0.610) (0.813) (0.965) Conductor in. (mm) 0.003 0.003 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 (0.076) (0.076) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) Overall in. (mm) 0.003 0.003 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 (0.076) (0.076) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) 0.017 0.022 0.056 0.060 0.068 0.074 Nominal Overall Size in. (mm) x x x x x x 0.028 (0.432 x 0.711) 0.038 (0.559 x 0.965) 0.092 (1.42 x 2.34) 0.100 (1.52 x 2.54) 0.116 (1.73 x 2.95) 0.128 (1.88 x 3.25) Approximate Shipping Weight lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 3.0 4.5 11.9 13.4 17.9 20.9 (2) (3) (8) (9) (12) (14)
186
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
Thermocouple Wire
PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
5
E J K N S T 36 30 24 20 = = = = = = Type Type Type Type Type Type E J K N S T AWG gauge gauge gauge gauge solid solid solid or 24 gauge stranded (7/32) solid or 20 gauge stranded (7/28) ASTM E 230 Calibration
6
= 36 = 30 = 24 = 20
WATLOW
187
SERV-RITE Wire
RTD Lead Wire
SERIES 701, 704, 705 and 707
Watlows quality, experience and versatility extend from insulated thermocouple and extension wire to resistance temperature detector (RTD) lead wire and fiberglass wire.
Continuous temperature rating: 220 to 900F (105 to 480C) depending upon construction Available with an optional metallic overbraid for additional abrasion resistance
Applications
General use RTD sensor wire
Specifications
PVC Continuous use temperature 220F (105C) Single use temperature 220F (105C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Good Abrasion: Good FEP Continuous use temperature 400F (204C) Single use temperature 500F (260C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Excellent Abrasion: Excellent PFA Continuous use temperature 500F (260C) Single use temperature 550F (290C) Resistance properties Moisture: Excellent Chemical: Excellent Abrasion: Good Fiberglass Continuous use temperature 900F (480C) Single use temperature 1000F (540C) Resistance properties Moisture: Good Chemical: Good Abrasion: Fair
No. of Conductors 2 AWG 22 24 22 24 4 22 24 Wire Type* Nickel plated copper Nickel plated copper Tinned copper Nickel plated copper Nickel plated copper Nickel plated copper Nickel plated copper PVC 220F (105C) RT2-22-8-701 RT2-24-8-701 RT3-22-4-701 RT3-22-8-701 RT3-24-8-701 RT4-22-8-701 RT4-24-8-701 Insulation Material FEP PFA 400F (204C) 500F (260C) RT2-22-8-704 RT2-24-8-704 RT3-22-8-704 RT3-24-8-704 RT4-22-8-704 RT4-24-8-704 RT4-24-8-707 RT3-24-8-707 RT2-24-8-707 Fiberglass 900F (480C) RT2-22-8-705 RT2-24-8-705 RT3-22-8-705 RT3-24-8-705 RT4-22-8-705 RT4-24-8-705
188
WATLOW
SERV-RITE Wire
RTD Lead Wire
SERIES 701, 704, 705 and 707 (Continued) Wire Specifications - SERIES 701 - PVC
No. of Conductors 2 3 4 Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 22S* 20S* 22S* 20S* 22S* 20S* (7/30) (7/28) (7/30) (7/28) (7/30) (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.030 0.038 0.030 0.038 0.030 0.038 (0.762) (0.965) (0.762) (0.965) (0.762) (0.965) Conductor in. (mm) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) (0.381) Overall in. (mm) 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) (0.508) Nominal Overall Approximate Size Shipping Weight in. (mm) lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 0.160 0.176 0.172 0.190 0.184 0.204 (4.06) (4.47) (4.37) (4.83) (4.67) (5.18) 17 19 20 25 23 30 (25.3) (28.3) (29.8) (37.3) (34.3) (44.7)
*Note: 24 and 16 gauge constructions also available, contact factory for details.
Wire Specifications - SERIES 704 - FEP

No. of Conductors 2 Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24S* 22S* 20S* 24S* 22S* 20S* 24S* 22S* 20S* (7/32) (7/30) (7/28) (7/32) (7/30) (7/28) (7/32) (7/30) (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.024 0.030 0.038 0.024 0.030 0.038 0.024 0.030 0.038 (0.610) (0.762) (0.965) (0.610) (0.762) (0.965) (0.610) (0.762) (0.965) Conductor in. (mm) 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 0.008 (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) Overall in. (mm) 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) (0.305) Nominal Overall Approximate Size Shipping Weight in. (mm) lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 0.118 0.130 0.146 0.126 0.140 0.158 0.136 0.150 0.170 (3.00) (3.30) (3.71) (3.20) (3.56) (4.01) (3.46) (3.81) (4.32) 12 14 17 16 20 24 19 23 27 (17.9) (20.9) (25.3) (23.8) (29.8) (35.8) (28.3) (34.3) (40.2)
Wire Specifications - SERIES 707 - PFA

No. of Conductors 2 3 4 Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24S* (7/32) 24S* (7/32) 24S* (7/32) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.024 0.024 0.024 (0.610) (0.610) (0.610) Conductor in. (mm) 0.008 0.008 0.008 (0.203) (0.203) (0.203) Overall in. (mm) 0.010 0.010 0.010 (0.254) (0.254) (0.254) Nominal Overall Approximate Size Shipping Weight in. (mm) lbs/1000 ft (kg/km) 0.108 0.115 0.126 (2.74) (2.91) (3.20) 12 16 19 (17.9) (23.8) (28.8)
Wire Specifications - SERIES 705 - Fiberglass

No. of Conductors 2 Nominal Insulation Thickness AWG 24S* 22S* 20S* 24S* 22S* 20S* 24S* 22S* 20S* (7/32) (7/30) (7/28) (7/32) (7/30) (7/28) (7/32) (7/30) (7/28) Nominal Conductor Size in. (mm) 0.024 0.030 0.038 0.024 0.030 0.038 0.024 0.030 0.038 (0.610) (0.762) (0.965) (0.610) (0.762) (0.965) (0.610) (0.762) (0.965) Conductor in. (mm) 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.005 0.005 0.006 0.005 0.005 0.006 (0.127) (0.127) (0.152) (0.127) (0.127) (0.152) (0.127) (0.127) (0.152) Overall in. (mm) 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) (0.152) Nominal Overall Approximate Size Shipping Weight in. (mm) kg/km (lbs/1000 ft) 0.080 0.092 0.112 0.086 0.098 0.120 0.092 0.106 0.130 (2.03) (2.34) (2.84) (2.18) (2.49) (3.05) (2.34) (2.69) (3.30) 6 7 9 8 9 12 10 12 16 (8.9) (10.4) (13.4) (11.9) (13.4) (17.9) (14.9) (17.9) (23.8)
WATLOW
189
SERV-RITE Wire
RTD Lead Wire
SERIES 701, 704, 705 and 707 (Continued) Ordering Information
Part Number
Number of Conductors AWG Conductor Insulation Type/ Type Tolerance
R
2 = Type 2 3 = Type 3 4 = Type 4 24 22 20
T
Number of Conductors Conductor Type/Tolerance
4 = Stranded tinned copper 8 = Stranded nickel plated copper AWG Insulation Type 701 = PVC 704 = FEP 705 = Fiberglass 707 = PFA Note: Minimum order sizes apply for non-stock constructions.
= 24 gauge solid = 22 gauge solid = 20 gauge solid
190
WATLOW
Mineral Insulated Cable

Page Product Description XACTPAK Cable XACTPAK cable is fireproof, high-pressure rated, cold and thermal shock resistant, gas tight, moisture proof, formable, weldable, corrosion resistant and high temperature rated. Diameters down to 0.020 in. (0.5 mm) and temperature ranges from 32 to 2700F (0 to 1480C). 193 Mineral Insulated Cable
WATLOW
191
192
WATLOW

XACTPAK Cable
Watlows XACTPAK mineral insulated, metal-sheathed cable is ideally suited to solve a wide variety of problem applications. The outer sheath can be made from any malleable metal in a wide range of diameters, containing single or multiple wires. Easily formed or bent, it can accommodate virtually any configuration. The outer sheath protects thermocouple or thermocouple extension wires from oxidation and hostile environments that would quickly destroy unprotected wire. The mineral insulations available provide excellent high temperature dielectric strength to ensure signals are carried faithfully to the instrumentation or controls.
Available in standard and special limits of error accuracy Diameters from 0.020 to 0.5 in. (0.5 to 12.7 mm) Compliance with recognized agency tolerances and specifications Sheath materials available to withstand a wide variety of hostile and corrosive environments Calibrated for intended temperature range Temperature ranges from 32 to 2200F (0 to 1205C) Cryogenic cable available upon request
Atomic research Bearing temperature Blast furnaces Catalytic reformers Diesel engines Foodservice and beverage Furnaces Glass and ceramic Heat treating Instrument cabling Jet engines and test cells Kilns Laboratory and research Medical Nuclear reactors Power stations and steam generators Refineries and oil processing Rocket engines Semiconductor processing Turbines Vacuum furnaces

Fireproof cable Performs where conventional insulated wires burn and degrade Fast and accurate Precisely measures temperature for a fast response Tight moisture and gas seals Resists contamination High pressure rating Allows use in pressure vessels and vacuum applications Form flexibility Adapts to virtually any application Thermal shock resistance Withstands thermal cycling Compact, durable and corrosion resistant Ensures long-life performance with minimum constraints on applications High temperature rating Meets demanding application needs
WATLOW
193

XACTPAK Cable
Technical Data Quality Control and Testing
To maintain quality and consistency, XACTPAK cable is manufactured under carefully controlled procedures and rigid standards of cleanliness. Quality checks are made at critical points throughout the manufacturing process. Every coil of XACTPAK cable is thoroughly tested for continuity, insulation resistance, physical dimensions and physical appearance. Each lot, or batch of XACTPAK, contains raw materials (sheath, insulation, wires) from one production lot which eliminates the need to calibrate every thermocouple cut from a coil because of poor homogeneity. Samples from each lot are calibrated in Watlows modern calibration laboratory by highly skilled technicians. Unlike some manufacturers who calibrate at a few low temperature calibration points, Watlow calibrates throughout the range that matches the cables capabilities. Cutting When pieces are cut from a length of XACTPAK cable, the exposed ends should immediately be squared and sealed. Squaring and sealing guards against possible contamination and removes any loosened insulation or distorted wire caused by cutting. A light pressure sanding with a 180-grit belt is the easiest method for rough squaring of 0.040 in. (1.016 mm) or larger diameter XACTPAK cable. Applying hard pressure against the sanding belt causes excessive heat build-up which may smear the soft metal over the insulation. After sanding, a clean fine toothed file should be used to dress the squared ends. Each exposed end should be sealed to prevent moisture absorption. Inexperienced personnel may find 0.032 in. (0.813 mm) or smaller diameter XACTPAK cable difficult to handle and will probably prefer to have all cutting, stripping and fabricating done at the Watlow factory. Insulation Resistance XACTPAK mineral insulated, metal-sheathed cable should have a minimum room temperature insulation resistance of 100 megohms when tested at 50VDC for both wires to sheath and wire to wire. All ceramics used in XACTPAK cable decrease in resistance as temperature increases. Shipping and Packaging XACTPAK cable is stocked in random lengths from 20 feet (6 m) to the Maximum Stock Lengths listed in the tables on the following pages. We reserve the right to supply random lengths of our choice unless specific cut lengths are specified on the order. Upon request, XACTPAK cable can be furnished in other coil dimensions or shipped in straight form if necessary. Longer lengths are available for special order. Stripping A hand stripping tool will readily remove the sheath from 0.020 through 0.125 in. (3 mm) diameter XACTPAK cable. However, due to difficulty in working with 0.032 in. (0.8 mm) or smaller diameter material, it is recommended that small diameter material be ordered as factory stripped. Material larger than 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) diameter can be stripped on a lathe with a suitable tool bit or lathe-mounted stripping tool. It is also possible to strip larger sizes of XACTPAK cable by using a hacksaw to make a ring cut through the sheath at the desired distance from the end. Hammering the severed portion of sheath at several places will break up the insulation allowing the sheath to be slipped off. WATLOW
Care, Handling and Fabrication of XACTPAK Cable

To maximize performance advantages made possible by XACTPAK cables overall premium quality, the following instructions covering its storage, handling and further fabrication should be followed. Storage To prevent moisture from being absorbed by its hygroscopic mineral insulation, both ends of each length of XACTPAK cable are sealed at the factory. To further guard against moisture penetration, it is advisable to store XACTPAK material in a dry place. Moisture If XACTPAK cable is not adequately sealed, its insulation absorbs moisture. This lowers its electrical resistance and may prove to be troublesome in subsequent welding. Minor moisture penetration can be remedied by using a blow torch to heat the sheath. Apply the flame 6 to 7 inches from the open end and slowly work the flame to and over the end. Reseal the end after it has cooled to about 180F (82C). Deep moisture penetration is unlikely, but if it occurs, the material may be baked at approximately 250F (121C) for 24 hours to increase its insulation resistance. If baking does not return the insulation resistance to acceptable levels, the material should be discarded.
194

XACTPAK Cable
Technical Data (Continued)
After stripping, the exposed conductors should be sandblasted or cleaned with emery cloth. The exposed ends should be resealed immediately after completion of the stripping operation. Forming Because XACTPAK cables sheath is dead soft and bright annealed, it can be formed and shaped to most contours without risk of cracking. As a guideline, the sheath can be formed around a mandrel twice the sheath diameter without damage. Therefore, 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) diameter XACTPAK cable can be wound around a 0.250 in. (6 mm) diameter mandrel. Welding Due to of the delicate nature of the process and to avoid possible contamination, it is recommended that fabrication of hot or measuring junctions be done at the factory. If attempted in the field, a welding rod made from the same material as the sheath should be used with inert gas. Flux should not be used as it will contaminate the insulation. Other weldments, such as to a vessel or pipe, should be made in an inert atmosphere to prevent oxidation of the sheath. When working with XACTPAK cable of 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) outside diameter or less, extreme caution should be used not to burn through the sheath.
How to Select XACTPAK Cable to Suit Your Requirements

Watlows mineral insulated metal-sheathed cable section has been designed for ease of use so that the right cable is chosen for each application. The following four items must be considered when selecting XACTPAK mineral insulated metal-sheathed cable: 1. Sheath Material The sheath serves to isolate and protect the wires and insulation from contamination and mechanical damage. There is no single sheath material that is appropriate for all conditions, so Watlow offers a wide variety. Temperature, strength, corrosiveness, service life and cost must be considered when selecting a sheath material. 2. Calibration Watlow stocks most ANSI/ASTM recognized thermocouple types. Watlow also manufactures cable with other wire alloys such as nickel, copper, nickel clad copper, 304 stainless steel, alloy 600 and virtually any malleable metal. 3. Insulation Material Insulation separates conductors from each other and the outer sheath. When selecting an insulation, temperature rating, environment and cost must be considered. 4. Physical Characteristics Diameter of the sheath and the wall thickness will directly affect the following: Time response Service life Flexibility Pressure rating Strength 5. Specify Coil Lengths Randomthe factory selects 20 ft (6 m) minimum. Specialspecify lengths and tolerance. Cut to length charges and minimum order quantities may apply.
WATLOW
195

XACTPAK Cable
Sheath Material
The following information is designed to be used as a guide and may not be correct for every application. If in doubt, consult with a Watlow sales engineer or contact the factory.
Part Number
Sheath Material Code Below Calibration Insulation Sheath O.D. Variation Limits of Error
Alloy 600 01Maximum temperature: 2150F (1175C). Most widely used thermocouple sheath material. Good high temperature strength, corrosion resistance, resistance to chloride ion stress corrosion cracking and oxidation resistance to high temperatures. Do not use in sulfur bearing environments. Good for use in nitriding environments. 304 SS 02Maximum temperature: 1650F (900C). Most widely used low temperature sheath material. Extensively used in food service, beverage, chemical and other industries where corrosion resistance is required. Subject to damaging carbide precipitation in 900 to 1600F (480 to 870C) range. Lowest cost corrosion resistant sheath material available. 316 SS 04Maximum temperature: 1650F (900C). Best corrosion resistance of the austenitic stainless steel grades. Widely used in the food service and chemical industry. Subject to damaging carbide precipitation in 900 to 1600F (482 to 870C) range.
Hastelloy X 18Maximum temperature: 2200F (1205C). Widely used in aerospace applications. Resistant to oxidizing, reducing and neutral atmospheric conditions. Excellent high temperature strength along with superior oxidation resistance. Resistant to stress corrosion cracking in petrochemical applications. Inconel 625 25Maximum temperature: 1800F (980C). Used in many aerospace applications. Excellent high temperature strength. Excellent resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion. Unaffected by radiation embrittlement. Haynes Alloy 230 32Maximum temperature: 2150F (1177C). This alloy offers excellent high temperature strength, oxidation resistance and long term thermal stability. Used in aerospace applications, chemical process industries and high temperature industrial heating applications. This alloy is recommended for use in nitriding environments.
196
WATLOW

XACTPAK Cable
Calibration
Part Number
Sheath Material Calibration Code Below Insulation Sheath O.D. Variation Limits of Error
ASTM Type J 1Type Js positive leg (JP) is iron. Its negative leg (JN) is approximately 45 percent nickel-55 percent copper. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and outer sheath, Type J is usable from 32 to 1500F (0 to 815C). Type J is not susceptible to short range ordering in the 600 to 1100F (315 to 593C) temperature range, (+2 to +4F drift) which occurs with ASTM Type E and K. This low cost, stable thermocouple calibration is primarily used with 96 percent pure magnesium oxide (MgO) insulation and stainless steel sheath. ASTM Type K 2Type Ks positive leg (KP) is approximately 90 percent nickel-10 percent chromium. Its negative leg (KN) is approximately 95 percent nickel-two percent aluminum-two percent manganese-one percent silicon. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and outer sheath, Type K is usable from 32 to 2300F (0 to 1260C). If the application is 600 to 1100F (315 to 593C), we recommend Type J or N due to short range ordering that can cause drift of +2 to +4F (+1.5 to +2C) in a few hours time. Type K is relatively stable during radiation transmission in nuclear environments. For applications below 32F (0C), special alloy selections are usually required. ASTM Type T 3Type Ts positive leg (TP) is pure copper. Its negative leg (TN) is approximately 45 percent nickel-55 percent copper. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and outer sheath, Type T is usable from 32 to 660F (0 to 350C) and very stable in cryogenic and low temperature applications. For applications below 32F (0C) special alloy selections may be required.
ASTM Type E 4Type Es positive leg (EP) is approximately 90 percent nickel-10 percent chromium. Its negative leg (EN) is approximately 45 percent nickel-55 percent copper. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and outer sheath, Type E is usable from 32 to 1650F (0 to 900C) and has the highest electromotive force (EMF) output per degree of all ASTM types. If the application temperature is 600 to 1100F (315 to 593C) Type J or N is recommended due to short range ordering which can cause drift of +1 to +3F in a few hours time. For applications below 32F (0C), special alloy selections may be required. ASTM Type N 8Type Ns positive leg (nicrosil) is approximately 14 percent chromium-1.4 percent silicon-84.6 nickel. Its negative leg (nisil) is approximately 4.4 percent silicon-95.6 percent nickel. When protected by compacted mineral insulation and outer sheath, its usable from 32 to 2300F (0 to 1260C). Type N overcomes several problems inherent in Type K. Short range ordering, +2 to +4F drift (+1.5 to +2C), in the 600 to 1100F (315 to 593C) range is greatly reduced, and drift rate at high temperatures is considerably less. Type N is also more stable than Type K in nuclear environments. Miscellaneous 9Contact the factory.
WATLOW
197

XACTPAK Cable
Insulation
Part Number
Sheath Material Calibration Insulation Code Below Sheath O.D. Variation Limits of Error
High Purity Magnesium Oxide (MgO) 99.4 Percent Minimum Purity 1Low impurity levels make this insulation very useful for all thermocouple calibrations up to 2500F (1370C). Above 2500F (1371C), Watlow recommends using hafnia oxide insulation because of MgOs low resistivity. This material meets the requirements established in ASTM E-235. Magnesium Oxide (MgO) 96% Minimum Purity 5This low cost insulation is similar to high purity MgO (1) except it should be used in applications below 2000F (1095C) due to impurity levels. This insulation should not be used with platinum or in nuclear applications.
198
WATLOW

XACTPAK Cable
Sheath O.D.
Part Number
Sheath Material Calibration Insulation Sheath O.D. Code Below Variation Limits of Error
Code 01 02 03 04 07 08 11 13 15 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Sheath Diameter Nominal Tolerance 0.020 inch +0.001, -0.0005 0.032 inch +0.001, -0.0005 0.040 inch +0.001, -0.0005 0.063 inch 0.001 0.125 inch +0.002, -0.001 0.188 inch +0.002, -0.001 0.250 inch +0.003, -0.001 0.375 inch +0.003, -0.001 0.500 inch +0.003, -0.001 0.5 mm 0.02 1.0 mm 0.02 1.5 mm 0.02 2.0 mm 0.03 3.0 mm 0.03 4.5 mm 0.03 6.0 mm 0.05
Approximate Standard 9 inch 9 inch 9 inch 24 inch 24 inch 24 inch 24 inch Straight or 40 inch coils Straight or 40 inch 23 cm 23 cm 61 cm 61 cm 61 cm 61 cm 61 cm
Coil Weight lbs/100 ft 0.08 0.20 0.32 0.74 3.00 6.65 11.65 28.10 47.00 0.08 0.32 0.65 1.13 2.60 6.00 10.50
Average Response Time* Still Water (seconds) G-JCT U-JCT <0.02 0.03 0.02 0.07 0.04 0.13 0.22 0.40 0.50 1.10 1.00 2.30 2.20 4.10 8.00 11.00 15.00 20.00 <0.02 0.03 0.04 0.13 <0.15 0.35 0.25 0.55 0.40 0.90 0.95 2.00 2.00 3.50
* Note: First order response time 63.2%
WATLOW
199

XACTPAK Cable
Variations
Part Number
Sheath Material Calibration Insulation Sheath O.D. Variation Code Below Limits of Error
4
Variation 050 = Dual adjacent Note: leave space blank for no variation
Limits of Error
Part Number
Sheath Material Calibration Insulation Sheath O.D. Variation Limits of Error Code Below
4
Limits of Error Standard = Leave blank SP = Special limits initial tolerance
200
WATLOW

XACTPAK Cable
Sheath Material
Extended capabilities go beyond the functionality offered by catalog products. These offerings are only available for large quantity orders. 310 SS Maximum temperature: 2100F (1150C). Mechanical and corrosion resistance, similar to but better than 304 SS. Very good heat resistance. This alloy contains 25 percent chromium, 20 percent nickel. Not as ductile as 304 SS. 347 SS Maximum temperature: 1600F (870C). Similar to 304 SS except nickel niobium stabilized. This alloy is designed to overcome susceptibility to carbide precipitation in the 900 to 1600F (480 to 870C) range. Used in aerospace and chemical applications. 446 SS Maximum temperature: 2100F (1150C). Ferritic stainless steel with good resistance to sulfurous atmospheres at high temperatures. Good corrosion resistance to nitric acid, sulfuric acid and most alkalies. 27 percent chromium content gives this alloy the highest heat resistance of any ferritic stainless steel. 321 SS Maximum temperature: 1600F (870C). Similar to 304 SS except titanium stabilized for inter-granular corrosion. This alloy is designed to overcome susceptibility to carbon precipitation in the 900 to 1600F (480 to 870C) range. Used in aerospace and chemical applications. Inconel 601 Maximum temperature: 2150F (1175C) continuous, 2300F (1260C) intermittent. Similar to Alloy 600 with the addition of aluminum for outstanding oxidation resistance. Designed for high temperature corrosion resistance. This material is good for use in carburizing environments and exhibits good creep rupture strength. Do not use in vacuum furnaces. Susceptible to intergranular attack by prolonged heating in 1000 to 1400F (540 to 760C) temperature range. Haynes Alloy HR-160 Maximum temperature: 2150F (1175C). Developed to provide superior sulfidation-resistance at high temperatures. This alloy exhibits good resistance to corrosion in some salt bath applications. Used in applications for sulfur furnaces, waste incinerators, coke burners, recuperators, cement kilns and high temperature furnaces.
Haynes Alloy 718 Maximum temperature: 1300F (700C). A precipitation hardenable Inconel alloy developed for corrosion resistance and excellent weldability. Application uses include gas turbine, aerospace, oil and gas production and nuclear.
Insulation
Alumina Oxide (Al2O3) 99.6% Minimum Purity Although this material is comparable to MgO in its electrical properties and cost, it does not compact well and tends to powder out. This undesirable characteristic has made this insulation unpopular, therefore, cable with this type of insulation is available only as a special order. Hafnia Oxide (HfO2) Hafnia is used as a substitute for beryllia oxidez (BeO) because of beryllias toxicity problem. The temperature limit of hafnia is 4530F (2500C), which is higher than BeO.
Variations
Triple element Heavy wall (approximately 20 percent heavier)
WATLOW
201

XACTPAK Cable
Single Element Cable
Standard Limit Code Number 401-2101 401-2102 401-2103 402-2103 404-2103 401-2104 N/A 404-2104 401-2107 N/A 402-1507 402-2507 404-2507 401-2108 402-1508 402-2508 404-2508 401-2111 402-1511 402-2511 404-1511 404-2511 401-2113
a
Special Limits of Error Code Number 401-2101-SP 401-2102-SP 401-2103-SP 402-2103-SP 404-2103-SP 401-2104-SP 401-2104-HT a 404-2104-SP 401-2107-SP 401-2107-HT a 402-1507-SP 402-2507-SP 404-2507-SP 401-2108-SP 402-1508-SP 402-2508-SP 404-2508-SP 401-2111-SP 402-1511-SP 402-2511-SP 404-1511-SP 404-2511-SP 401-2113-SP
Sheath Diameter 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.063 0.063 0.063 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.188 0.188 0.188 0.188 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.375
Sheath Material Alloy 600 Alloy 600 Alloy 600 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 Alloy 600 316 SS Alloy 600 Alloy 600 304 SS 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 304 SS 304 SS 316 SS Alloy 600 304 SS 304 SS 316 SS 316 SS Alloy 600
Calibration K K K K K K K K K K J K K K J K K K J K J K K
Nominal AWG Gauge 38 34 32 32 32 28 28 28 22 22 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 16 16 16 16 16 13
Max. Recommended Nominal Wall Operating Temp Thickness (in.) F (C) 0.003 1600 (871) 0.004 0.006 0.006 0.009 0.009 0.009 0.012 0.017 0.017 0.017 0.017 0.017 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.033 0.033 0.033 0.033 0.033 0.051 1600 (871) 1600 (871) 1600 (871) 1600 (871) 2000 (1093) 2000 (1093) 1600 (871) 2150 (1177) 2150 (1177) 1500 (816) 1600 (871) 1600 (871) 2150 (1177) 1500 (816) 1600 (871) 1600 (871) 2150 (1177) 1500 (816) 1600 (871) 1500 (816) 1600 (871) 2150 (1177)
This cable is designed for heat treat applications where stability and calibration per AMS2750 are required.
Double Element Cable

Special Limits Standard Limit of Error Code Number Code Number 401-2104-050 401-2104-050-SP 401-2107-050 401-2108-050 401-2111-050 401-2107-050-SP 401-2108-050-SP 401-2111-050-SP Sheath Diameter 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250 Sheath Material Alloy 600 Alloy 600 Alloy 600 Alloy 600 Nominal AWG Gauge 28 24 21 18 Max. Recommended Nominal Wall Operating Temp Thickness (in.) F (C) 0.009 2000 (1093) 0.017 0.025 0.033 2000 (1093) 2150 (1177) 2150 (1177)
Calibration K K K K
202
WATLOW

MI Cable 252
XACTPAK Cable
Mineral Insulated Metal-Sheathed RTD Cable
This cable is used for making rugged resistance temperature detector (RTD) probes. Special spacing allows room for elements to be placed between conductors. Dimensions are shown below.
Part Number
Sheath Material Wire Wire Insulation Sheath O.D. Variation
D E .Dim. .Dim.
G .Dim. F .Dim.
C Dia. A .Dia.
4
01 = Alloy 600 04 = 316 SS 9= 1= 5= 99.4% MgO 96% MgO
9
Sheath Material
B Dim.
4 Conductor RTD MIMS Cable
Wire Nickel 201 Wire Insulation

G Dim. F Dim.
Sheath O.D.
D E Dim. Dim. H Dim. A Dim. J Dim.
07 = 0.125 in. (3 mm) diameter 08 = 0.188 in. (4.8 mm) diameter 11 = 0.250 in. (6 mm) diameter 001 = 6-wire 003 = 4-wire Variation
B Dim. C Dim.
6 Conductor RTD MIMS Cable
A Diameter 0.125 +0.002 -0.001 0.188 +0.002 -0.001 0.250 +0.003 -0.001
B Wall Thickness 0.015 0.002 0.023 0.002 0.030 0.005
C Diameter 0.014 0.002 0.020 0.002 0.027 0.003
Spacing Nominal D Dim. 0.022 0.034 0.045 E Dim. 0.045 0.068 0.090 F Dim. 0.025 0.037 0.050 G Dim. 0.050 0.074 0.100
A Dim. 0.125 +0.002 -0.001 0.188 +0.002 -0.001 0.250 +0.003 -0.001
B Dim. 0.015 0.002 0.023 0.002 0.030 0.005
C Dim. 0.014 0.002 0.020 0.002 0.027 0.003
D Dim. 0.022 0.034 0.045
E Dim. 0.045 0.068 0.090
F Dim. 0.025 0.037 0.050
G Dim. 0.050 0.074 0.100
H Dim. 0.034 0.052 0.068
J Dim. 0.068 0.104 0.137
WATLOW
203

XACTPAK Cable
Made-to-order Mineral Insulated (MI) Cable Ordering Information
Part Number
Sheath Material Sheath O.D. Variation Limits of Error
Calibration Insulation
4
01 = Alloy 600 02 = 304 SS 04 = 316 SS 18 = Hastelloy X 25 = Inconel 625 32 = Haynes Alloy 230 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 8 = Sheath Material 01 02 03 04 07 08 11 13 15 = = = = = = = = = 0.020 0.032 0.040 0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250 0.375 0.500 (0.6) (0.8) (1.0) (1.6) (3) (4.8) (6) (9.5) (13) Sheath O.D. in. (mm)
Calibration J K T E N Insulation
Variation 050 = Dual adjacent Example: 401-2107-050 Note: leave space blank for no variation Limits of Error SP = Special limits Example: 401-2107-SP Note: leave space blank for standard
0 = Unused 1 = Magnesium oxide 99.4% 5 = Magnesium oxide 96%
204
WATLOW
Notes
WATLOW
205
Notes
206
WATLOW
Notes
WATLOW
207
Notes
208
WATLOW
Watlows Temperature, Process and Power Controller Offering

Watlow is a leading supplier of integrated multi-function, process and temperature controllers, power switching devices, agency-rated safety limits, operator interface terminals, process and event data loggers and recorders and accessories to reliably implement and control a complete thermal system. Our expertise is backed by 80 years experience designing, manufacturing and assisting customers with controller challenges across a broad range of applications. In industrial machines, processes and commercial equipment, Watlow products control parameters including temperature, over/under temperature limits, relative humidity, flow, position and pH, to name a few. Watlows solution development capabilities address all aspects of challenging control problems with just the right combination of proven techniques and innovation. While standard products are extremely flexible, some applications require accelerating a solution to the next level. Whether you use a standard product or a customized solution, our focus is to be your control expert.
A variety of flexible, standard products are offered to address a multitude of control needs. Complementary accessories extend the controller solution seamlessly, and easy-to-understand user manuals and product documentation make it easy to quickly and effectively apply Watlow products. Our experienced and knowledgeable applications engineers will help you to find the ideal solution without added cost and time delay.
CONTROLLERS
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE Connectivity Options via Ethernet

SILVER SERIES Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) Ethernet Switch
To LAN
Ethernet
EZ-ZONE RUI Gateway
EZ-ZONE PM Family
EZ-ZONE RM with Access Module
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
EZ-ZONE Standard Bus
CONTROLLERS
EZ-ZONE ST Family
EZ-ZONE PM Family
EZ-ZONE RM Family
EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP EZ-ZONE Standard Bus
WATLOW
Output Comparison Guide

I want to switch... I want to control... DC input solid state relay (SSR) PLC-dc input Low voltage panel lamp Resistive 120 or 240VAC heater at less than 15A AC input SSR AC input solid state contactor High impedance load, typ. 5k Piezoelectric buzzer Indicator lamps Solenoid coil/valve Mercury displacement relay (MDR) Electromechanical relay General purpose contactor Various devices in on-off mode with contact suppression
Controller Output Switched dc, open collector
Output Life
NO-ARC 15A power control Solid state relay, Form A
Solid state relay, Form A with external contact suppression
Electromechanical relay, Form A Electromechanical relay, Form A or C
Various high impedance or inductive devices in on-off mode with coils suppressed Indicator lamps Small heaters AC input solid state contactor A safety limit circuit with contactor, electromechanical relay or MDR Various devices in on-off mode Solenoid coil/valve MDR Electromechanical relay General purpose contactor Pilot duty relays
Electromechanical relay, Form A with external contact suppression Electromechanical relay, Form C with external contact suppression
N/A
Phase-angle or burst fire SCRs 0-20mA(dc), 4-20mA(dc), 0-5VDC, 1-5VDC or 0-10VDC valve positioner Inner loops set point for cascading controllers Other instruments with process inputs
Universal process
Retransmit/Alarms
I want to switch... I want to control... Multiple devices, impedance dependent Chart recorder Master-remote (slave) system Data logging device Controller Output Universal process Output Life
Various devices in on-off mode
Electromechanical relay, Form A or C
Best Life Better Life Good Life
WATLOW
209
210
WATLOW
Control/Limit Loops Mounting 152/192 DIN-rail Maximum Communication Output Protocols 15A Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU 75A Standard Bus, Modbus RTU 15A Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard Bus Modbus RTU N/A Page 213
Product EZ-ZONE RM
Profiling
EZ-ZONE ST EZ-ZONE PM
1/1 2/1
DIN-rail
1
231 238 Integrated Multi-Function
EZ-ZONE PM Express SERIES EHG SL10 SERIES EHG
1/1 1/1 1/0
15A 10A 10A
247 251 255
In-line/Sub panel In-line
Note: The specifications in the table above are best available values in each category. Not all combinations of these values are available in a single model number.
WATLOW
211
212
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
The EZ-ZONE RM controller simplifies thermal system management. The EZ-ZONE RM controller family is comprised of six module types: an integrated on-off or PID control, monitoring and over/under temperature limit module, a high-density on-off or PID control module, a high-density limit only module, an input/output (I/O) expansion module, a high-density monitor/scanner module and a data logging and field communications access module. A system is configured by connecting any combination of module types to address specific application needs. The EZ-ZONE RM is extremely flexible and scalable allowing mixing and matching of I/O to configure 1 to 152 control loops and up to 256 monitor points. Optional integrated controller functions can be combined or ordered in different quantities: PID control loops Over/under temperature limit control loops 10 and 15 ampere power output/heater driver options On-board data logging Current measurement input Sequencer start up and control function Programmable timer and counter functions Programmable math and logic options Multiple communication protocol options Mobile configuration with removable secure digital (SD) flash card Benefits of using an integrated controller solution: Reduces wiring time and termination complexity compared with connecting multiple discrete products Improves system reliability Reduces termination and installation cost Eliminates compatibility issues often encountered with using various discrete components and brands Reduces troubleshooting time and downtime costs because the system can specifically identify any problems with a sensor, controller, solid state relay (SSR) power output or heater load Complete thermal solution saves engineering time and labor costs while shortening project schedules

Multiple inputs; from 1 to 152 PID loops of control or monitor up to 256 analog inputs Mix and match I/O to fit any application; from 1 input with 2 outputs to 152 analog inputs with 152 outputs, or monitor up to as many as 256 analog inputs all in one system Reduces cost because only required loops are purchased Allows a common controller platform across many design applications as both loops and outputs can be ordered in single increments Advanced PID control algorithm Offers TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control to provide tighter control for demanding applications Enables auto-tune for fast, efficient start-up Communication capabilities Provides a range of protocol options including universal serial bus (USB) device port, Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS USB Port Provides data log retrieval SPLIT-RAIL control Enables modules mounted in separate high-voltage and low-voltage cabinets to function as an integrated system Minimizes the length and cost of wire runs and improves system reliability by locating inputs closer to sensors and outputs closer to loads AUTO CLONE Reduces time and configuration complexity by automatically building a new module with the same parameter settings as the replaced module SENSOR GUARD Prevents unplanned process shutdowns and product loss by switching to a backup sensor if the primary sensor fails 213
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
Additional Key Functions
Configuration communication port (standard bus) Removable modules and connectors Ring lug and front-screw terminal options Profile ramp soak with 400 total steps Retransmit and remote set point input virtually inside controller eliminating costs for input/output hardware User configuration settings can be stored and recalled Thermistor input Elevated operating range of 0 to 149F (-18 to 65C) UL listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. FM, SEMI F47-0200, Class 1, Div. 2 rating on selected models Agency Approvals UL/EN 61010 Listed, C-UL C22.2 #61010ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007 Class 1, Div. 2-Group A, B, C, D temperature code T4 (optional) UL 1604 Class 1, Div. 2 (optional) EN 60529 IP20 UL 50, NEMA 4X, EN 60529 IP66; 116 DIN remote user interface (RUI) CSA 610110 CE RoHS by design, W.E.E.E. FM Class 3545 on limit control versions CE Serial Communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all other EZ-ZONE products Implicit Messaging Number of data members accessible through implicit messaging
RM RMC System Ethernet/IP 100 20 DeviceNet 200 20 Protocol RMH 40 40 RML 40 40 RME 20 20 RMS 40 40 RMA 20 20
Common Specifications (Applies to all models)

Line Voltage/Power 20.4 to 30.8VAC/VDC, 50/60Hz 5% Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating (see specific module specification listing for max. VA power consumption) Data retention upon power failure via non-volatile memory Compliant with Semi F47-0200, Figure R1-1 voltage sag requirements Environment 0 to 149F (-18 to 65C) operating temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) storage temperature 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Functional Operating Range for RMC, RMH, RML and RMS Type J: -346 to 2192F (-210 to 1200C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1371C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) Type E: -454 to 1832F (-270 to 1000C) Type N: -454 to 2372F (-270 to 1300C) Type C: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type D: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type F: 32 to 2449F (0 to 1343C) Type R: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type S: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type B: 32 to 3300F (0 to 1816C) RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Process: -1999 to 9999 units
User Interface Seven-segment LED, address/protocol indicator programmed via push button switch Communication activity, 2 LEDs Error condition of each loop, 4 LEDs Output status indication, 16 LEDs Maximum System Configuration One access module plus up to 16 additional control or expansion modules (any combination), up to 152 loops Mounting DIN-rail specification EN50022, 1.38 x 0.30 in. (35 x 7.5 mm) DIN-rail mounted or chassis mounted with customer supplied screws Wiring TerminationTouch-Safe Terminals Right angle and front screw type terminal blocks (slots A, B, D, E) Input, power and controller output terminals, touch safe, removable, 12 to 30 AWG
214
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
Programmable Application Blocks
Compare Greater than, less than, equal, not equal, greater than or equal, less than or equal Counters Counts up or down, loads predetermined value on the load signal. Output is active when the count value equals or exceeds predetermined target value Linearization Interpolated or stepped relationship Logic And, nand, or, nor, equal, not equal, latch, flip flop Math Average, process scale, deviation scale, differential (subtraction), ratio (divide), add, multiply, absolute difference, min., max., square root, sample and hold, altitude and dew point Process Value Sensor backup, average, crossover, wet/dry bulb, switch over, differential (subtraction), ratio (divide), add, multiply, absolute difference, min., max., square root, altitude, visala and dew point
EZ-ZONE RM Family Comparison
Control Module Number of modules per system Number of PID loops per module Number of limit loops per module Number of monitoring points per module Mechanical relays per module Digital I/O points per module Actions (events) per module Alarms per module Compare per module Counters per module Linearization per module Logic per module Math per module Process value per module Special output function per module Timers per module Variable per module 1 to 16 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 to 3 1 to 8 6 8 8 4 4 4 4 8 1 to 4 4 4 8 High-Density Control Module 1 to 16 4, 8, 12 or 16 0 0 4 or 8 6 or 12 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 1 to 24 0 24 24 High-Density Limit Module 1 to 16 0 4, 8 or 12 0 4, 6 or 8 6 or 7 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 0 0 16 16 Expansion Module 1 to 16 0 0 0 4, 8 or 12 6, 12, 18 or 24 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 0 4 8 8 High-Density Scanner 1 to 16 0 0 4, 8, 12 or 16 4 or 8 6 or 12 16 16 24 24 24 24 24 16 0 24 24
Special Output Function Compressor turns on-off compressor for one or two loops (cool and dehumidify with single compressor) Motorized valve turns on-off motor open/closed outputs causing valve to represent desired power level Sequencer turns on-off up to four outputs to distribute a single power across all outputs with linear and progressive load wearing Timers On pulse produces an output of fixed time on the active edge of timer run signal Delay output is a delayed start of timer run and off at same time One shot oven timer Retentive measures timer run signal and output on when accumulated time exceeds target Variable User value for digital or analog variable
WATLOW
215
5.8 in. (147.1 mm) 4.57 in. (116.08 mm) 4 in. (102 mm)
EZ-ZONE RM
2.03 in. (51.56 mm) Add 2.03 in. (51.56 mm) per module
4.57 in. (116.08 mm)
4 in. (102 mm)
Straight Connectors
Straight Connectors 6.1 in.

(154.4 mm)
Front-Screw Connectors
6.1 in. (154.4 mm)
1.75 in. (44.45 mm)
4.41 in. (112.04 mm) Slot D Slot E
Ring Terminal Connectors

Slot A Slot B

Slot C
6.5 in. (164.9 mm)
Connector Type
Module Depth in. (mm) 5.8 (148) 6.1 (155) 6.5 (166)
Standard Connectors
6.5 in. (164.9 mm)
Standard (Right Angle) Dimension A Straight (Front Screw) Ring Terminal
Standard Connectors
5.8 in. (147.1 mm)
4.57 in. (116.08 mm)
4 in. (102 mm)
Straight Connectors
Control Module Specifications (RMC)

(Select an RMC module for 1 to 4 loops of control.) 6.1 in. Line Voltage/Power (154.4 mm) Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Controller User-selectable heat/cool, on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or alarm action, not valid for limit controllers Process PID or Over-temperature Limit Mode Options Auto-tune with TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, output = 10Hz (non-divisional) Ring Terminal Connectors
6.5 in. (164.9 mm)
Connector Standard Straight Ring Terminal
Dim "A" (mm / in) 148 / 5.80 155 / 6.10 166 / 6.50
Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all other EZ-ZONE controllers Additional Communication Option EIA 485, Modbus RTU Profile Ramp and Soak (RMC only, not available with high-density controller) Profile engine affects one to four loops 25 profiles and 15 sub-routines, 400 steps total Option for battery backup and real time clock is via the access module
216
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
Calibration Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) change in ambient Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 2k source resistance RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV Potentiometer: 0 to 1,200 Inverse scaling Current: input range is 0 to 50mA, 100 input impedance Response time: 1 second max., accuracy 1mA typical Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves are built-in Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Input Update rate 10Hz Min. open resistance 10k Max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit 13mA Current Measurement Input Accepts 0-50mA signal (user programmable range) Displayed operating range and resolution can be scaled and are user programmable Output Hardware Switched dc: Max. 32VDC open circuit Max. current 30mA per single output Max. current 40mA per paired outputs (1 & 2, 3 & 4, 5 & 6, 7 & 8) Open collector: Max. 30VDC @ 100mA 6 digital inputs/outputs: Switched dc, max. 20VDC @ 40mA, 12VDC @ 80mA Open collector, max. 32VDC @ 1.5A, max. 8A per 6 outputs combined SSR, Form A, 1A at 50F (10C) to 0.5A at 149F (65C), 0.5A @ 24VAC min., 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression Electromechanical relay, Form C, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty NO-ARC relay, Form A, 15A @ 122F (50C), 85 to 264VAC, no VDC, resistive load, 2 million cycles at rated load Universal process/retransmit, output range selectable: 0 to 10VDC 15mV into a min. 1,000 load with 2.5mV nominal resolution 0 to 20mA 30A into max. 800 load with 5A nominal resolution Temperature stability is 100ppm/C
WATLOW
217
EZ-ZONE RM
Control Module Ordering Information
Requires 24 to 28VDC power supply, includes communication port for conguration with EZ-ZONE congurator and PC. Part Number
EZ-ZONE Rail Mount Control Module Input 1 Primary Function Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options Output 5 and 6 Hardware Options Input 4 Output 7 and 8 Hardware Options

Input 2
Input 3
Connector Style
Enhanced Options
Additional Options
RM
C
A B U D E F G H J K L M N P R S T Y Z A 1 2 5 6 7 R P = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options Output 3 None None Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Universal process Universal process Universal process Universal process None SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A Input 3 = = = = = = = = None Control with universal input Control with thermistor input Limit with universal input (only valid Output 5 and 6, options will be B, F, L) Limit with thermistor input (only valid Output 5 and 6, options will be B, F, L) Current transformer input (not valid Output 5 and 6, options are N, P, R, S) Auxiliary 2nd input (universal input) Auxiliary 2nd input (thermistor input) Output 4 None Mechanical relay 5A, Form A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control SSR Form A, 0.5A
Input 1 Primary Function 1 = Control with universal input 2 = Control with thermistor input 3 = Ramp/Soak control with universal input (R/S applies to all loops in module) 4 = Ramp/Soak control with thermistor input (R/S applies to all loops in module) 5 = Limit with universal input (only valid Output 1 and 2, options will be B, F, L) 6 = Limit with thermistor input (only valid Output 1 and 2, options will be B, F, L) 7 = Current transformer input (not valid Output 1 and 2, options are A, B, N, P, R, S, T) 9 = Custom A B U D E F G H J K L M N P R S T Y Z A 1 2 5 6 7 R P = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 None None Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Universal process Universal process Universal process Universal process None SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A Input 2 = = = = = = = = None Control with universal input Control with thermistor input Limit with universal input (only valid Output 3 and 4, options will be B, F ,L) Limit with thermistor input (only valid Output 3 and 4, options will be B, F, L) Current transformer input (not valid Output 3 and 4, options are N, P, R, S) Auxiliary 2nd input (universal input) Auxiliary 2nd input (thermistor input) Output 2 None Mechanical relay 5A, Form A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control SSR Form A, 0.5A
218
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
Control Module Ordering Information (Continued)
EZ-ZONE Rail Mount Control Module Input 1 Primary Function Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options Output 5 and 6 Hardware Options Input 4 Output 7 and 8 Hardware Options

Input 2
Input 3
Connector Style
Enhanced Options
Additional Options
RM
A B U D E F G H J K L M N P R S T Y Z A 1 2 5 6 7 R P A B U D E F G H J K L M N P R S T Y Z C = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
C
Output 5 and 6 Hardware Options Output 5 None None Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Universal process Universal process Universal process Universal process None SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A Input 4 Output 6 None Mechanical relay 5A, Form A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control SSR Form A, 0.5A Connector Style A = Right angle screw connector (standard) F = Front screw connector (slots A, B, D and E only) Enhanced Options A = Standard bus 1 = Standard bus and Modbus RTU 485 (selectable via dipswitch) Additional Options
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings
AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only for the entered part number. Additional cost for the model can be disregarded as you are only ordering replacement connectors. 12 = Class 1, Div. 2 (not available with integrated limit controller or mechanical relay options) XX = Custom
= = = = = = = =
None Control with universal input Control with thermistor input Limit with universal input (only valid Output 7 and 8, options will be B, F, L) Limit with thermistor input (only valid Output 7 and 8, options will be B, F, L) Current transformer input (not valid Output 7 and 8, options are N, P, R, S) Auxiliary 2nd input (universal input) Auxiliary 2nd input (thermistor input) Output 7 and 8 Hardware Options Output 8 None None None Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Switched dc/open collector None Switched dc/open collector NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc/open collector Switched dc Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Switched dc/open collector SSR Form A, 0.5A Mechanical relay 5A, Form C None Mechanical relay 5A, Form C NO-ARC 15A power control Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form C SSR Form A, 0.5A Universal process None Universal process Switched dc Universal process Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Universal process SSR Form A, 0.5A None SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A 6 digital inputs/outputs (valid option only if Input 4 selection = A) Output 7
WATLOW
219
EZ-ZONE RM
High-Density Control Module Specifications (RMH)
(Select an RMH module for 4 to 16 loops of control.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Controller User-selectable heat/cool, on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or alarm action, not valid for limit controllers Process PID Options Auto-tune with TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, output = 10Hz (non-divisional) Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all other EZ-ZONE controllers Additional Communication Option EIA 485, Modbus RTU Calibration Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) change in ambient Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 2k source resistance RTD 2-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves are built-in Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Input Update rate 10Hz Min. open resistance 10k Max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit 13mA Output Hardware 6 digital inputs/outputs: Switched dc, max. 20VDC @ 40mA, 12VDC @ 80mA Open collector, max. 32VDC @ 1.5A, max. 8A per 6 outputs combined Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty
220
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
High-Density Control Module Ordering Information
Requires 24 to 28VAC/VDC power supply, includes communication port for conguration with EZ-ZONE congurator and PC. Part Number
EZ-ZONE Rail Mount Connector Style Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Future Option Enhanced Options Additional Options
Control Module
RM
A
Slot E A = None 1 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with control loops 2 = 4 thermistor inputs with control loops J = 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A C = 6 digital I/O Enhanced Options A = Standard Bus 1 = Standard Bus and Modbus RTU 485 (user-selectable) Additional Options Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only for the entered part number XX = Custom
Connector Style/Custom Product A = Right angle screw connector (standard) F = Front screw connector S = Custom Slot A 1 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with control loops 2 = 4 thermistor inputs with control loops Slot B A = None 1 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with control loops 2 = 4 thermistor inputs with control loops Slot D A = None 1 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with control loops 2 = 4 thermistor inputs with control loops J = 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A C = 6 digital I/O
WATLOW
221
EZ-ZONE RM
High-Density Limit Module Specifications (RML)
(Select an RML module for 4 to 12 safety limits.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all other EZ-ZONE controllers Additional Communication Option EIA 485, Modbus RTU Calibration Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) change in ambient Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 2k source resistance RTD 2-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves are built-in Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Input Update rate 10Hz Min. open resistance 10k Max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit 13mA Output Hardware 6 digital inputs/outputs: Switched dc, max. 20VDC @ 40mA, 12VDC @ 80mA Open collector, max. 32VDC @ 1.5A, max. 8A per 6 outputs combined Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty
222
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
High-Density Limit Module Ordering Information
Connector Style Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Future Option Enhanced Options Additional Options EZ-ZONE Rail Mount
Limit Module
RM
A
Slot E J = 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A B = 1 digital input and 2 mechanical relays, 5A (1 Form A and 1 Form C)* Enhanced Options A = Standard Bus 1 = Standard Bus and Modbus RTU 485* (user-selectable) Additional Options Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only for the entered part number XX = Custom
Connector Style/Custom Product A = Right angle screw connector (standard) F = Front screw connector S = Custom Slot A 5 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with limit control loops 6 = 4 thermistor inputs with limit control loops Slot B A = None 5 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with limit control loops 6 = 4 thermistor inputs with limit control loops Slot D A = None 5 = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with limit control loops 6 = 4 thermistor inputs with limit control loops J = 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A C = 6 digital I/O*
* Reset limits via digital input, EZ key on RUI or communications commands
WATLOW
223
EZ-ZONE RM
Expansion Module Specifications (RME)
(Select an RME module for additional inputs and outputs and higher amperage outputs.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Serial Communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all other EZ-ZONE products Wiring TerminationTouch Safe Terminals Right angle and front-screw type terminal blocks (slots A, B, D, E) Input, power and controller output terminals, touch safe, removable, 12 to 30 AWG Ring lug terminal blocks (slots A and D only) Input, power and controller output terminals are touch safe and removable Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Min. open resistance 100k Max. closed resistance 50 Output Hardware (6 digital inputs/outputs) Update rate 10Hz Switched dc Output voltage 20VDC max. Max. supply current source 40mA at 20VDC and 80mA at 12VDC Open collector Switched voltage max. 32VDC Max. switched current per output 2.5A Max. switched current for all six outputs combined 10A Dual Solid State Relay Two SSR board option, Form A, 10A max. each SSRs combined @ 24VAC min., 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression, max. resistive load 10A per output at 240VAC, max. 20A per card at 122F (50C), max. 12A per card at 149F (65C) Four Mechanical Relay Four electro mechanical relays, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load. Requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty
224
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
Expansion Module Ordering Information
Connector EZ-ZONE Style/ Expansion Custom Rail Product Module Mount Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Future Options Additional Options
RM
A F R S A C J K = = = =
Connector Style/Custom Product
AA
Slot E A = None C = 6 digital I/O T = Quad inputs for external current transformers. Can do either single-phase or three-phase system measurement for all hardware outputs ordered within the expansion module (future option, contact factory) Additional Options Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only, for the entered part number. Additional cost for the model can be
disregarded as you are only ordering replacement connectors.
Right angle screw connector (standard) Front screw connector (slots A, B, D and E only) Ring lug connector (if ordered, then slots B and E must be = A) Custom Slot A None 6 digital I/O 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A 2 SSRs, Form A, 10A max. each (if ordered, then slots B must be = A)
= = = =
Slot B A = None C = 6 Digital I/O J = 4 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A A C J K Slot D = = = = None 6 digital I/O 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A 2 SSRs, Form A, 10A max. each (if ordered, then slot E must be = A)
12 = Class 1, Div. 2 (not available with integrated limit controller or mechanical relay options) XX = Custom
WATLOW
225
EZ-ZONE RM
High-Density Scanner Module Specifications (RMS)
(Select an RMS module for 4 to 16 auxiliary analog inputs.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all EZ-ZONE controllers Additional Communication Option EIA 485, Modbus RTU Calibration Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) change in ambient Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 2k source resistance RTD 2-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves are built-in Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Input Update rate 10Hz Min. open resistance 10k Max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit 13mA Output Hardware 6 digital inputs/outputs: Switched dc, max. 20VDC @ 40mA, 12VDC @ 80mA Open collector, max. 32VDC @ 1.5A, max. 8A per 6 outputs combined Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty
226
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
High-Density Scanner Module Ordering Information
Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Future Option Enhanced Options Additional Options
EZ-ZONE Scanner Connector Rail Style Module Mount
RM
A
Slot E A = None R = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops P = 4 thermistor inputs without control loops J = 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A C = 6 digital I/O B = 1 digital input and 2 mechanical relays, 4A Enhanced Options A = Standard Bus 1 = Standard Bus and Modbus RTU 485 (user-selectable) Additional Options Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only for the entered part number XX = Custom
Connector Style/Custom Product A = Right angle screw connector (standard) F = Front screw connector S = Custom Slot A R = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops P = 4 thermistor inputs without control loops Slot B A = None R = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops P = 4 thermistor inputs without control loops Slot D A = None R = 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops P = 4 thermistor inputs without control loops J = 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A C = 6 digital I/O
WATLOW
227
EZ-ZONE RM
Access Module Specifications (RMA)
(Select an RMA module for communication protocol options, datalogging and automatic configuration backup.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 4 W, 9VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication connection to all EZ-ZONE products Additional Communication Options EIA 232/485, Modbus RTU EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP (future option, contact factory) USB, controller recognized as a device Note: If an access module is present, all other modules must have Modbus disabled in order to achieve communications with all of the modules. USB USB 1.1 device only Mini USB connector type Recognized as a mass storage device Real Time Clock with Battery Backup Accuracy (typical): +/- 30ppm at 77F (25C) +30/-100ppm overtemperature operating range Battery type and typical lifetime rating: 10 years at 77F (25C) Lithium battery used, recycle properly Data Logging 200 points File storage on-board module Common separated value (CSV) file type Export files via removable SD micro memory card or USB communications port Memory Card Removable SD micro card 2G SD memory card provided, also accepts other storage space amounts -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) ambient rating, non-volatile memory Information access to configuration files and the ability to store module auto-configuration settings and datalog files if options have been ordered Auto-configuration File Backup Limited memory can support up to four modules Limited memory is fixed on board Unlimited memory can support up to 16 modules Unlimited memory utilizes removable SD micro card option Note: All module parameters are backed up in memory except for USER SET 1 and USER SET 2 parameter settings and address.
228
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE RM
Access Module Ordering Information
EZ-ZONE Rail Mount Access Module Future Options Connector Style System Ramp/ Cong. & Comms. Soak Data Logging Options Functions Options Future Options Additional Options
RM
AA
USB Device Conguration: USB access to conguration les (and data log les if data logging option is ordered) stored via on-board SD memory card. PC access to product via standard bus protocol. Auto-Conguration Backup: Limited xed on board memory can support backing up conguration les for a maximum of four modules. The unlimited option utilizes a SD memory card to enable conguration le backup for up to 16 modules. Feature can be used for cloning conguration les to multiple modules or for easy eld replacement to limit downtime. Data Logging: Data log les stored on 2G SD memory card. Data les can be exported via USB communication port transfer or removing SD card into external card reader. Watlow reserves the right to ship a larger memory amount at any point in time. Mobile Data: Transfer conguration les (and data logging les if data logging option is ordered) via removable SD memory card. Additional Options Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only, for the entered part number. Additional cost for the model can be
disregarded as you are only ordering replacement connectors
Connector Style A = Right angle screw connector (standard) F = Front screw connector (slots B and E only) S = Custom A = Standard A 2 3 5 6 Future Options
Communications Options None Modbus RTU 232/485 EtherNet/IP, Modbus/TCP DeviceNet = PROFIBUS DP = = = =
Ramp/Soak Functions A = None B = Battery backup and real time clock for prole ramp and soak System Conguration and Data Logging Options Unlimited Limited AutoAutoConguration Conguration File Backup File Backup Order USB Device for Up to for Up to 16 On-Board Option Communication 4 Modules Modules Data Logging A B Y D
Mobile Data (2G SD Card)
12 = Class 1, Div. 2 (not available with integrated limit controller or mechanical relay options) XX = Custom
Compatible Accessories
Basic Remote User Interface (RUI) EZKB The EZ-ZONE Remote User Interface (RUI and communications gateway) can be utilized as a communication gateway device to save cost, space and wiring when digital communications is being used with two or more EZ-ZONE controllers. The EZ-ZONE RUI can also serve as a display for showing all parameter values for up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers, again saving cost, space and wiring expenses. See page 353.
WATLOW
229
EZ-ZONE RM
Compatible Accessories (Continued)
EZ-ZONE Congurator Software Operator Interface Terminals (OIT)
The EZ-ZONE configurator software is used to set up Watlow EZ-ZONE products in one simple process. It works without requiring the purchase of any communication options because it uses the standard bus communications protocol that is included with all EZ-ZONE products. EZ-ZONE configurator can be used for on-line and off-line configurations and downloading previously saved setups. It is available as a FREE download at www.watlow.com. See page 375. SpecView
Silver Series touchscreen operator interface terminals provide a customizable user interface and log and graph data for Watlow controllers and other devices. A Silver Series operator interface terminal paired with Watlow controllers, is the perfect solution for industrial processes or machine control applications. See page 347. Power Supplies - See page 389 AC/DC power supply converter 90-264VAC to 24VDC volts. P/N 0847-0299-0000 31 W P/N 0847-0300-0000 60 W P/N 0847-0301-0000 91 W EZ-ZONE RM Product Documentation Users manual electronic CD P/N 0601-0001-0000 Users manual printed hard copy P/N 0600-0061-0000 Users manual (RMH) printed hard copy P/N 0600-0074-0000 Users manual (RML) printed hard copy P/N 0600-0075-0000 Users manual (RMS) printed hard copy P/N 0600-0071-0000
SpecView from Watlow is designed for industrial users and includes features such as data logging, trending and support for bar code readers and touch screens. Errors are reduced for any process by creating application-specific screens. The software provides a historical replay option, easy-to-use recipe features and remote access options, including LAN, internet and modem. See page 364.
230
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE ST
The EZ-ZONE ST integrated solid state controller from Watlow, offers a complete thermal system control solution in a single package. Features include a PID temperature controller connected to a high-amperage solid state relay with the option of adding a properly sized heat sink, an over- and under-temperature limit, a power shut-down contactor and digital communications in one complete and professionally engineered product. Because the system is modular and scalable, a user only pays for what is needed. Stacking the EZ-ZONE ST integrated controller into multiple configurations enables flexibility to standardize the product platform to solve a wide range of application needs.
Features and Benets

Back panel or DIN-rail mount Provides several mounting options Compact package Reduces panel size Touch-safe package Complies with IP2X increasing user safety 0.1 percent temperature accuracy Provides efficient and accurate temperature control Agency approvals: UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. Meets applications requiring agency approvals Three-year warranty Ensures Watlows reliability and product support Off-the-shelf designed system solution Improves system reliability and termination reduction Reduces installation cost Eliminates incompatibility headaches often encountered with using many different components and brands Profile capability Includes ramp and soak with four files and 40 total steps Ability to communicate with programmable logic controller (PLC), personal computer (PC) or operator interface terminal (OIT) Optional EIA 485 Modbus RTU RUI/communications gateway with optional EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP/TCP Modbus, DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP. Refer to page 353 for further information. Solid state relay output Allows faster cycling, more precise control, increased heater life and improves energy efficiency Ability to handle up to 75 amperes Uses either zero-cross or phase angle control modes for flexibility to control resistive loads such as nichrome, tungsten or quartz lamps Utilizes phase angle control mode to prevent load failure or blowing fuses for tungsten or quartz loads PID temperature control Allows single input/dual output Allows standard PID or adaptive TRU-TUNE+ tuning algorithms for demanding controllability requirements Optional temperature limit Increases safety in over- and under-temperature condition Optional definite purpose mechanical contactor Enables circuit safety shut down driven by limit control or PID alarm output signal Optional current monitoring feature Detects heater current flow and alarm indication of failed solid state relay (SSR) or heater zone Optional SSR heat sink Sized and engineered for specific applications Factory supplied heat sink is UL listed System diagnostics Provides continuous self-monitoring alerts when there is any system trouble to reduce maintenance and service costs PC SoftwareEZ-ZONE Configurator Wizard style configuration of controller settings On-line or off-line recipe editing
WATLOW
231
EZ-ZONE ST
Specications
Line Voltage/Power 100 to 240VAC, +10/-15%; (85-264VAC), 50/60Hz, 5% 24VAC/VDC, +10/-15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 12VA max. power consumption without mechanical contactor in system 50VA max. power consumption with mechanical contactor used in system, 140VA if using external contactor Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Environment 0 to 158F (-18 to 70C) operating temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) storage temperature 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B: 0.2% Type T below -50C: 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max. Agency Approvals UL, CSA, CE (zero cross models only), RoHS, W.E.E.E. Limit version features FM approval Controller Microprocessor based user-selectable control modes PID module: single universal input, 2 outputs Limit module: single universal input, 2 outputs Two total additional digital input/outputs shared between PID and limit functions Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, outputs = 10Hz Isolated EIA 485 Modbus RTU serial communications Wiring TerminationTouch Safe Terminals Input, power and controller output terminals touch safe removable 12 to 22 AWG Power load terminals 6 to 12 AWG Tightening torque: 30 in.-lbs Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 20 source resistance RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 0C calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @ 100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV Inverse scaling Digital Input Update rate: 1Hz Dry contact or dc voltage DC voltage Max. input: 36V at 3mA Min. high state: 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state: 2V Dry contact Max. short circuit: 13mA Min. open resistance: 500 Max. closed resistance: 100 Current Measurement Accuracy: typical 1A, max. error 3A Accuracy and operating range: 0 to 75A Digital Output Update rate: 1Hz Output voltage: 24V, current limit 10mA Allowable Operating Range Type J: 32 to 1500F or 0 to 815C Type K: -328 to 2500F or -200 to 1370C Type T: -328 to 750F or -200 to 400C Type N: 32 to 2372F or 0 to 1300C Type E: -328 to 1470F or -200 to 800C Type C: 32 to 4200F or 0 to 2315C Type D: 32 to 4200F or 0 to 2315C Type F: 32 to 2543F or 0 to 1395C Type R: 32 to 3200F or 0 to 1760C Type S: 32 to 3200F or 0 to 1760C Type B: 32 to 3300F or 0 to 1816C RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F or -200 to 800C Process: -1999 to 9999 units Output Hardware User selectable for heat/cool as on-off, P, PI, PD, PID, or alarm action. Not valid for limit controls Electromechanical relay. Form A, rated 2A SSR drive: 20-28VDC low side open collector switch SSR, Form A, 0.5A @ 24VAC min., 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression Electromechanical relay, Form A, rated 5A, auxiliary output on PID module, output 2 Electromechanical relay, Form C, rated 5A, auxiliary output on limit module, output 3 WATLOW
232
Amperage/Temperature Derating Curves EZ-ZONE ST Ez Zone ST
Specifications for Mechanical Contactor

Insulation class: UL class B 266F (130C) Min. load of 100 watts Duty cycle: continuous
Contact Ratings
Full Load Amperes 40 Number of Poles 2 Line Voltage 240/277 480 600 Locked Rotor Amps 240 200 160 Resistive Amp Rating 50 50 50 Max. Horsepower Voltage Single-Phase 120 240 2 3
EZ-ZONE ST Solid State Relay with Heat Sink Specifications

Temperature and SSR Amperage Performance Curve Watlow 25, 40 and 75 Ampere Solid State Relays
80 70 75A at 70C 60 Amperes (Full On) 50 40 30 20 25A at 50C 10 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Degree C (Heatsink Inlet Temperature) 65 70 75
25A 40A 75A
All Versions Current output (50C) One-cycle surge current Max. I2t for fusing Thermo resistance Base plate temperature (max.) Forward voltage drop Min. holding current Frequency Time Proportioned Models Off-state leakage Max. off-state dv/dt 120/240VAC Output voltage range Over voltage rating Input voltage range 277/600VAC Output voltage range Over voltage range Input voltage range Phase Angle Models Off-state leakage Max. off-state dv/dt 120/240VAC Output voltage range Over voltage rating Input voltage range 277/600VAC Output voltage range Over voltage range Input voltage range
25A 25Arms 600Apk 1500A2s 0.35C/W 116C 1.3Vpk 150mA
47 to 63Hz 47 to 63Hz 47 to 63Hz 1mA 500V/sec 24 to 280VAC 600Vpk 0 to 28VDC 48 to 660VAC 1200Vpk 0 to 28VDC 6mA 200V/sec 100 to 240VAC 600Vpk 2.7 to 10VDC 260 to 600VAC 1200Vpk 2.8 to 10VDC
40A at 50C
WATLOW
233
EZ-ZONE ST
EZ-ZONE ST with Denite Purpose Mechanical ContactorDimensional Drawing
6.14 in. ref. (156 mm) 25A heat sink (shown) 1.43 in. (36.2 mm) 6.14 in. ref. (156 mm) 40A heat sink same as 25A for this dimension
1.65 in. (41.9 mm)
1.38 in. (35 mm) 7 in. (177.8 mm) 7.43 in. (188.6 mm)
2.5 in. (63.5 mm) 25A (shown) 3.88 in. (98.6 mm) 40A
4.98 in. (126.5 mm)
1.16 in. (29.5 mm)
Note: EZ-ZONE ST must be mounted vertically (as shown) to meet amp/ambient performance curve.
EZ-ZONE ST with 25 or 40A Heat Sink, without Denite Purpose Mechanical Contactor Dimensional Drawing
2.03 in. (51.6 mm) 1.43 in. (36.2 mm) 6.14 in. ref. (156 mm) 25A (shown) 6.14 in. ref. (156 mm) 40A same as 25A for this dimension
1.65 in. (41.9 mm)
1.38 in. (35 mm) 7 in. (177.8 mm) 3.43 in. (87 mm) 7.43 in. (188.6 mm)
0.68 in. (17.4 mm) 2.5 in. (63.5 mm) 25A (shown) 3.88 in. (98.6 mm) 40A 4.98 in. (126.5 mm) 1.16 in. (29.5 mm)
234
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE ST
EZ-ZONE ST with 75A Heat Sink, without Denite Purpose Mechanical Contactor Dimensional Drawing
2.03 in. (51.6 mm) 1.81 in. (46 mm) 8.47 in. (215.1 mm)
1.57 in. (39.9 mm) 1.38 in. (35 mm)
3.43 in. 5.45 in. (87 mm) (138.5 mm)
7.76 in. (197.1 mm) 120 and 240VAC fan (shown) 7.26 in. (184.4 mm) 24VDC fan
1.11 in. (28.1 mm)
1.89 in. (48 mm) 3.15 in. (80 mm)
4.98 in. (126.5 mm)
3.51 in. (89.2 mm)
Communications
Selecting the right communications ordering option for the EZ-ZONE ST:
*A = Standard bus used to connect to Watlow PC software, RUI, other EZ-ZONEs Correct Ordering Option Letter Option Option Option Option A* M** A* M** Another EZ-ZONE Product RUI, EZ-ZONE Congurator, SpecView Yes Yes - Via Modbus Yes Yes Yes Yes - Via Modbus Yes - Via Modbus Yes - Via Modbus Third Party Device (PLC, PC, Touch Panel, etc.) Silver Series Operator Interface Terminal **M = Modbus RTU (needed to communicate to third-party devices) and standard bus. User selectable
Connecting To
WATLOW
235
EZ-ZONE ST
Part Number
Integrated Integrated Limit PID Controller Controller Mech. Cont. & Pwr Supply Comm. SSR Heat Sink/DINRail Mtg. Firmware Customization
ST
Integrated PID Controller Output 1* Output 2 Total of 2 Digital I/O Points Current Measurement SSR
K= SSR drive 0.5A SSR No No B= SSR drive 0.5A SSR Yes No P= SSR drive 0.5A SSR No Yes E = SSR drive 0.5A SSR Yes Yes H= SSR drive 5A mechanical relay No No D= SSR drive 5A mechanical relay Yes No J = SSR drive 5A mechanical relay No Yes C= SSR drive 5A mechanical relay Yes Yes * Output 1 is dedicated to providing the command signal to the internal SSR. Note: If 75A heat sink is selected below, then 1 digital I/O will be factory set and xed as the SSR over-temperature digital input. A= L= B= Integrated Limit Controller None Limit control module with output 3, 5A Form C mechanical relay; with output 4, 2A Form A mechanical relay No limit control module but access to coil connection on mechanical contactor Mechanical Contactor and Power Supply Options
B = Zero cross 10A (24 to 240VAC output) C = Zero cross 25A (24 to 240VAC output) D = Zero cross 40A (24 to 240VAC output E = Zero cross 50A (24 to 240VAC output K = Zero cross 75A (24 to 240VAC output) F = Zero cross 90A (24 to 240VAC output) G = Zero cross 25A (48 to 600VAC output) H = Zero cross 40A (48 to 600VAC output) L = Zero cross 75A (48 to 600VAC output) J = Zero cross 90A (48 to 600VAC output) M = Phase angle 25A (100 to 240VAC output) N = Phase angle 40A (100 to 240VAC output) P = Phase angle 75A (100 to 240VAC output) R = Phase angle 25A (260 to 600VAC output) S = Phase angle 40A (260 to 600VAC output) T = Phase angle 75A (260 to 600VAC output) Note: EZ-ZONE ST phase angle is designed to work with tungsten or quartz loads. The EZ-ZONE ST should not be used with globars, molybdenum, graphite or transformer loads. Heat Sinks/DIN-Rail Mounting Bracket A = None B = 25A C = 40A D = 75A 24VDC fan cooled E = 75A 115VAC fan cooled F = 75A 240VAC fan cooled Note: If heat sink option D, E or F is selected you must also order integrated PID controller options B, E, D or C. 75A heat sink option includes SSR over-temperature thermostat shut-down feature. A= P= S= Firmware Standard Watlow Prole ramp and soak (40 total steps, 1 to 4 proles total) Custom
AH= No contactor and universal high voltage power supply 100-240VAC/VDC AL = No contactor and universal low voltage power supply 24- 28VAC/VDC B1 = Single pole, 40A Watlow contactor, 24VAC power supply B2 = Single pole, 40A Watlow contactor, 110/120VAC power supply B3 = Single pole, 40A Watlow contactor, 208/240VAC power supply F1 = Dual pole, 40A Watlow contactor, 24VAC power supply F2 = Dual pole, 40A Watlow contactor, 110/120VAC power supply F3 = Dual pole, 40A Watlow contactor, 208/240VAC power supply A= Communications
Standard bus used to connect to Watlow PC software, RUI, other EZ-ZONEs M = 485 Modbus RTU (needed to communicate to third-party devices) and standard bus. User selectable
Customization (logo, parameters, hardware, rmware) AA = Standard XX = Letters to be determined, contact factory Note: Maximum rating of final configured product is determined by the lowest component rating of either the mechanical contactor, solid-state relay or heat sink. Maximum UL rating for product is 75A
236
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE ST
Basic Remote User Interface (RUI) EZKB Operator Interface Terminals (OIT)
The EZ-ZONE Remote User Interface (RUI and communications gateway) can be utilized as a communication gateway device to save cost, space and wiring when digital communications is being used with two or more EZ-ZONE controllers. The EZ-ZONE RUI can also serve as a display for showing all parameter values for up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers, again saving cost, space and wiring expenses. See page 353.
Silver Series touchscreen operator interface terminals provide a customizable user interface and log and graph data for Watlow controllers and other devices. A Silver Series operator interface terminal paired with Watlow controllers, is the perfect solution for industrial processes or machine control applications. See page 347. SpecView
EZ-ZONE Congurator Software
The EZ-ZONE configurator software is used to set up Watlow EZ-ZONE products in one simple process. It works without requiring the purchase of any communication options because it uses the standard bus communications protocol that is included with all EZ-ZONE products. EZ-ZONE configurator can be used for on-line and off-line configurations and downloading previously saved setups. It is available as a FREE download at www.watlow.com. See page 375.
WATLOW
237
EZ-ZONE PM
The EZ-ZONE PM panel mount controller offers control options that reduce system complexity and thermal loop ownership cost. It can be ordered as a PID controller, an over/under limit controller or its functions can be combined into an integrated controller. An option to integrate a high amperage power controller output with a high-performance PID controller and an over/under limit controller in one space-saving, panel mount package is also available. Many communications options are offered to support connectivity needs. Because the EZ-ZONE PM controller is highly scalable, pay only for what is needed. This controller is available in 132, 116, 18 and 14 DIN panel mount packages. The EZ-ZONE PM controller is easy to use and is ideal for PID, over/under limit or integrated controller needs.

Integrated PID and limit controller Reduces wiring time and termination complexity compared with connecting discrete products Decreases required panel space Lowers installation costs Increases user and equipment safety for over/under temperature conditions High amperage power control output Drives 15 ampere resistive loads directly Reduces component count Decreases cost of ownership Current monitoring Detects heater current flow and provides alarm indication of a failed output device or heater load Serial communication capabilities Provides a wide range of protocol choices including Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS DP and DeviceNet Supports network connectivity to a PC or PLC Dual-channel controller Provides two PID controllers in one space-saving package Enhanced control options Easily handles complex process problems such as cascade, ratio, differential, square-root, motorized valve control without slidewire feedback, wet-bulb/ dry-bulb, compressor control and peltier loads Advanced PID control algorithm Offers TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control to provide tighter control for demanding applications Provides auto-tune for fast, efficient startup
Configuration communications with software Includes Watlow standard bus communications and EZ-ZONE configurator software Saves time and improves reliability of controller setup Ten-point linearization curve Improves sensor accuracy Built-in sensor compensation curves Saves cost of buying compensated sensors Includes Vaisala RH and altitude (pressure) curves Remote set point operation Supports convenient set point manipulation from a remote device such as a master control or PLC Profile capability Offers pre-programmed process control Allows ramp/soak programming with 40 total steps, battery backup and real time clock Retransmit Output Supports industry needs for recording Factory Mutual (FM) approved over/under limit with auxiliary outputs Increases user and equipment safety for over/under temperature conditions WATLOW
238
EZ-ZONE PM
Features and Benefits (Continued)
Memory for saving and restoring parameter settings Decreases service calls and time down Agency approvals: UL listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E., FM, SEMI F47-0200, Class 1, Div. 2 rating on selected models Assures prompt product acceptance Reduces end product documentation costs Touch-safe package Increases safety for installer/operator Complies with IP2X requirements Consistent termination labeling connection system Simplifies switching between products Speeds up users system documentation EZ-KEY Enables simple, one-touch operation of user-defined, repetitive activities Programmable menu system Reduces setup time and increases operator efficiency Three-year warranty Provides product support and reliability Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors greater than 20M input impedance, 3A open sensor detection, 2k source resistance max. RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @ 100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k, 0-50mV at 20M, 0-1000 potentionmeter; scalable; inverse scaling Functional Operating Range Type J: -346 to 2192F (-210 to 1200C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1371C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) Type E: -454 to 1832F (-270 to 1000C) Type N: -454 to 2372F (-270 to 1300C) Type C: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type D: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type F: 32 to 2449F (0 to 1343C) Type R: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type S: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type B: 32 to 3300F (0 to 1816C) RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Process: -1999 to 9999 units Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max. Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves built-in Current Transformer Input Accepts 0-50mA signal (user-programmable range) Displayed operating range and resolution can be scaled and are user-programmable Digital Inputs (DC Voltage) Max. input: 36V at 3mA Logic: min. high state 3V at 0.25mA, max. low state 2V
Specifications
Controller User-selectable heat/cool, on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or alarm action, not valid for limit controllers Auto-tune with TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control algorithm Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, outputs = 10Hz Profile Ramp/Soak - Real Time Clock and Battery Backup 4 profiles, 40 total steps Accuracy (typical): 30 PPM at 77F (25C) +30/-100 PPM at -4 to 149F (-20 to 65C) Battery type/typical life: lithium, three cumulative years unpowered at 77F (25C) Isolated Serial Communications EIA 232/485, Modbus RTU EtherNet/IP/Modbus TCP DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP Wiring TerminationTouch-Safe Terminals Input, power and controller output terminals are touch safe, removable, 12 to 22 AWG
WATLOW
239
EZ-ZONE PM
Specifications (Continued)
Digital Inputs (Dry Contact) Logic: min. open resistance 10k, max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit: 20mA 2 Digital I/O (ordered with power supply option) Update rate: 10Hz Input type: user-selectable, dc voltage or dry contact Output type: switched dc Output voltage: 24V Output 5: 24mA max. or drive one 3-pole DIN-A-MITE Output 6: 10mA max. 6 Digital I/O (ordered with communications option) Update rate: 10Hz Input type: user-selectable, dc voltage or dry contact Output type: user-selectable, switched dc or open collector Switched dc output voltage: 12 to 24VDC, depending on current draw Switched dc max. supplied current: 40mA at 20VDC and 80mA at 12VDC Switched dc max. low state: 2V Open collector max. switched voltage: 32VDC Open collector max. switched current: 1.5A per output; 8A total for all 6 outputs Output Hardware Switched dc: 22 to 32VDC @ 30mA max. per single output and 40mA max. total per paired outputs (1 & 2, 3 & 4) Open collector: 30VDC max. @ 100mA max. SSR, Form A, 24 to 240VAC, 1A at 50F (10C) to 0.5A at 149F (65C) resistive load, 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression, 120/240VAC @ 20VA pilot duty Electromechanical relay, Form C, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., 5A resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, 120/240 @ 125VA or 24VAC @ 25VA pilot duty Electromechanical relay, Form C, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., 5A resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, 120/240 @ 125VA or 24VAC @ 25VA pilot duty NO-ARC relay, Form A, 85 to 264VAC, 15A @ 122F (50C), resistive load, no VDC, 2,000,000 cycles at rated load Universal process output: range selectable; 0 to 10VDC 15mV into a min. 1,000 load with 2.5mV nominal resolution; 0 to 20mA 30A into max. 800 load with 5A nominal resolution; temperature stability 100ppm/C Operator Interface Dual 4-digit, 7-segment LED displays Advance, infinity, up and down keys, plus 1 or 2 programmable EZ-KEY(s) depending on model size Typical display update rate: 1Hz RESET key substituted for infinity on all models with limit controller Line Voltage/Power High voltage option: 85 to 264VAC, 47 to 63Hz Low voltage option: 20 to 28VAC, +10/-15%; 50/60Hz, 5% or 12 to 40VDC Max. power consumption: 10VA; 14VA (18 and 14 DIN) Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Compliant with SEMI F47-0200, Figure R1-1 voltage sag requirements @ 24VAC or higher Environment Operating temperature: 0 to 149F (-18 to 65C) Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Relative humidity: 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Agency Approvals cULus UL/EN/CSA C22.2 No 61010-1 Listed, File E185611 CSA C22.2 No. 24, File 158031 (132 and 116 DIN sizes) UL 50 4X indoor locations, NEMA 4X, IP66 front seal cULus ANSI/ISA 12.1201-2001, CSA-C22.2 No. 213-1987, Class 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D, temperature code T4A, File E184390 (optional) FM Class 3545 (limit controls) CE, RoHS by design, W.E.E.E. EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet ODVA Conformance Tested
240
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE PM
Comparison of Available Features PID Loops Prole Ramp/Soak Prole Battery Backup and Real Time Clock Number of Digital Inputs/Outputs Number of Outputs Integrated Safety Limits Maximum Power Output Current Measurement Standard Bus Communications Field Bus Communications 10-Point Calibration Offset Cascade, Ratio, Differential and Square-Root Sensor Compensation Curves - Altitude (Pressure) and Vaisalla RH Motorized Valve Control (without Feedback) Wet Bulb/Dry Bulb
32 DIN
16 DIN
8 DIN
4 DIN
1 1 1 to 2 1 to 2 40 total steps 40 total steps 40 total steps 40 total steps None None Yes Yes 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 8 0 to 8 1 to 4 1 to 6 1 to 12 1 to 12 Limit must be ordered as sepa1 1 1 rate device 5A mechanical 15A NO-ARC 15A NO-ARC 15A NO-ARC relay None Accepts 0-50mA signal from external current transformer Yes Yes Yes Yes Modbus RTU 232/485, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU 485 DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP None None Yes Yes None None None None None None None None Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
EZ-ZONE Congurator Software
The EZ-ZONE configurator software is used to set up Watlow EZ-ZONE products in one simple process. It works without requiring the purchase of any communication options because it uses the standard bus communications protocol that is included with all EZ-ZONE products. EZ-ZONE configurator can be used for on-line and off-line configurations and downloading previously saved setups. It is available as a FREE download at www.watlow.com. See
Operator Interface Terminals (OIT)

Silver Series touchscreen operator interface terminals provide a customizable user interface and log and graph data for Watlow controllers and other devices. A Silver Series operator interface terminal paired with Watlow controllers, is the perfect solution for industrial processes or machine control applications.
See page 347. SpecView

page 375.
WATLOW
241
EZ-ZONE PM
EZ-ZONE PM 132 DIN
2.10 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. 15.82 mm 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 116 DIN

2.10 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. (15.82 mm)
0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
1.22 in. (30.86 mm)
2.10 in. (53.34 mm)
0.50 in. (12.70 mm)
1.21 in. (30.73 mm)
4.00 in. (101.57 mm)
0.40 in. (10.16 mm) 1.20 in. (30.49 mm) 4.00 in. (101.57 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 18 DIN - Horizontal

0.62 in. (15.75 mm) 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 18 DIN - Vertical

2.1 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. (15.75 mm)
3.95 in. (100.33 mm)
2.1 in. (53.34 mm)
2.16 in. (53.86 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm) 1.21 in. (30.73 mm) 4 in. (101.6 mm)
3.95 in. (100.33 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 14 DIN
3.95 in. (100.33 mm) 0.62 in. (15.75 mm) 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm)
2.16 in. (54.86 mm)
1.21 in. (30.73 mm) 4 in. (101.6 mm)
3.95 in. (100.33 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm) 1.21 in. (30.73 mm) 3.97 in. (100.84 mm)
242
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE PM
PID Model Ordering Information
Universal Sensor Input, Standard Bus Communications, TRU-TUNE+ Adaptive Tune, Red and Green Seven-Segment Displays
Part Number
Power Output 1 and Package Primary Supply, 2 Hardware Function Digital I/O Size Options Addl Comm. Options Future Options Custom Options
PM
3= 6= 8= 9= 4= Package Size 32 DIN 1 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical 1 8 DIN horizontal 1 4 DIN
1
AAAA
Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options PM3: CH, EH and KH are not valid options for 1 32 DIN package type Output 1 Output 2 CA = Switched dc/open collector None CH = Switched dc/open collector NO-ARC 15A power control CC = Switched dc/open collector Switched dc CJ = Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form A CK = Switched dc/open collector SSR Form A, 0.5A EA = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C None EH = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C NO-ARC 15A power control EC = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Switched dc EJ = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form A EK = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C SSR Form A, 0.5A FA = Universal process None FC = Universal process Switched dc FJ = Universal process Mechanical relay 5A, Form A FK = Universal process SSR Form A, 0.5A AK = None SSR Form A, 0.5A KH = SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control KK = SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A Additional Communication Options Standard bus always included A = None 1= EIA 485 Modbus RTU Custom Options Firmware, overlays, parameter settings AA = Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate 12 = Class 1, Div. 2 (not available with mechanical relay Output types E, H or J)
Primary Function Options B and E are not available with 132 DIN (PM3) or 1 16 DIN (PM6) models C = PID controller with universal input R = PID controller with universal input and profiling ramp/soak B = PID controller with universal input and profiling ramp/soak and battery back-up with real time clock J= PID controller with thermistor N = PID controller with thermistor input and profiling ramp/soak E = PID controller with thermistor input and profiling ramp/soak and battery back-up with real time clock S = Custom firmware 1= 2= 3= 4= Power Supply, Digital Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 100 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC plus 2 digital I/O points 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC, plus 2 digital I/O points
WATLOW
243
EZ-ZONE PM
Limit Model Ordering Information
Universal Sensor Input, Standard Bus Communications, Red and Green Seven-Segment Displays
Part Number
Power Output 1 and Package Primary Supply, 2 Hardware Function Digital I/O Size Options Addl Comm. Options Future Options Custom Options
PM
3= 6= 8= 9= 4= L= M= D= 1= 2= 3= 4= Package Size 32 DIN 1 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical 1 8 DIN horizontal 1 4 DIN
1
AAAA
AJ = CJ = EJ = Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 None Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Output 2 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A
Primary Function Limit controller with universal input Limit controller with thermistor input Custom firmware Power Supply, Digital Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 100 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC plus 2 digital I/O points 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC, plus 2 digital I/O points
Additional Communication Options Standard bus always included A = None 1= EIA 485 Modbus RTU Custom Options Firmware, overlays, parameter settings AA = Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate
Typical Block Diagrams

EZ-ZONE PM PID Model
Controller Power Heater Power Branch Fuse
EZ-ZONE PM Limit Model

Limit Power Branch Fuse Controller Power Branch Fuse
Branch Fuse
Heater Power Branch Fuse
External Process Sensor Temperature Controller
15 Ampere Control Output
Heater
Limit Output Alarm Heater External Limit Contactor
Alarm
Process Sensor
Limit Sensor
EZ-ZONE PM Integrated PID Model

Controller Power Computer Limit Output
External Mechanical Contactor
Branch Fuse
Heater Power Branch Fuse
Digital Inputs: Reset Limit Idle Set Point
15A Control Output Alarm
Heater
Process Sensor Limit Sensor
244
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE PM
Integrated PID Controller Model Ordering Information
Universal Sensor Input, Standard Bus Communications, TRU-TUNE+ Adaptive Tune, Red and Green Seven-Segment Displays
Part Number
Power Output 1 and Package Primary Supply, 2 Hardware Function Digital I/O Size Options Auxiliary Output 3 and Comm. 4 Hardware Additional Options or Addl Control Options Options Functions Digital I/O Custom Options
PM
6= 8= 9= 4=
1
Package Size
16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical 1 8 DIN horizontal 1 4 DIN
A= C= J= R= None
Auxiliary Control Functions

2nd PID channel with universal input - not available on 132 DIN models 2nd PID channel with thermistor input - not available on 116 DIN models Auxillary 2nd input (universal input) Auxillary 2nd input (thermistor input)
Primary Function
P= T=
Options B and E are not available with 116 DIN (PM6) models C= PID controller with universal input R= PID controller with universal input and profiling ramp/soak B= PID controller with universal input and profiling ramp/soak and battery back-up with real time clock J= PID controller with thermistor input N= PID controller with thermistor input and profiling ramp/soak E= PID controller with thermistor input and profiling ramp/soak and battery back-up with real time clock S= Custom firmware
Current transformer input (not valid Output 3 and 4 selections = FA, FC, FJ and FK) L= Integrated limit controller with universal input (only valid Output 3 and 4 selections = CJ, EJ and AJ M= Integrated limit controller with thermistor input (only valid Output 3 and 4 selections = CJ, EJ and AJ 1 16 DIN Models: If communication options 2 thru 6 is ordered in previous digit, then Option A must be ordered here. 1 16 DIN Models: Auxiliary input supports remote set point and backup sensor.
1
1= 2= 3= 4=
Power Supply, Digital Inputs/Outputs (I/O)

100 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC plus 2 digital I/O points 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC, plus 2 digital I/O points
8 DIN and 14 DIN Models: Auxiliary input supports remote set point, backup sensor ratio, differential and wet-bulb/dry-bulb input.
Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options

Output 3

CA CH CC CJ CK EA EH EC EJ EK FA FC FJ FK AK KH KK = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

Output 1 Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Universal process Universal process Universal process Universal process None SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A Output 2 None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control SSR Form A, 0.5A
Output 4 AA = None None AJ = None Mechanical relay 5A, Form A AK = None SSR Form A, 0.5A CA = Switched dc/open collector None CC = Switched dc/open collector Switched dc CH = Switched dc/open collector NO-ARC 15A power control CJ = Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form A CK = Switched dc/open collector SSR Form A, 0.5A EA = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C None EC = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Switched dc EH = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C NO-ARC 15A power control EJ = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form A EK = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C SSR Form A, 0.5A FA = Universal process None FC = Universal process Switched dc FJ = Universal process Mechanical relay 5A, Form A FK = Universal process SSR Form A, 0.5A KH = SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control KK = SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A 1 16 DIN Models: If communication options 2 thru 6 is ordered in previous digit, then Option AA must be ordered here. 1 16 DIN Models: Output options CH, EH and KH are not valid.
Communication Options or Additional Digital Inputs/Outputs (I/O)
A= C= Standard
Additional Options
Enhanced firmware which includes compressor control, cascade, ratio, differential, square-root and motorized valve control without feedback. Option not available with 116 DIN (PM6)
Standard bus always included A= None 1= EIA 485 Modbus RTU 2= EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU 3= EtherNet/IP/Modbus TCP 5= DeviceNet 6= PROFIBUS DP C= 6 digital I/O (not available on 116 DIN models) D= 6 digital I/O and EIA 485 Modbus RTU (not available on 1 16 DIN models)

AA = 12 =
Custom Options
Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate Class 1, Div. 2 (not available with integrated limit Option L or M, or with Output types E, H, or J)
WATLOW
245
EZ-ZONE PM
Enhanced Limit Model Ordering Information
Universal Sensor Input, Configuration Communications, Red and Green Seven-Segment Displays
Part Number
Power Output 1 and Package Primary Supply, 2 Hardware Function Digital I/O Size Options Addl Comm. Options Future Option Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options Future Option Custom Options
PM
6= 8= 9= 4= L= M= D= 1= 2= 3= 4= AJ = CJ = EJ = Package Size 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical 1 8 DIN horizontal 1 4 DIN
1
A
Output 3 and 4 Hardware Options Output 3
Primary Function Limit controller with universal input Limit controller with thermistor input Custom firmware Power Supply, Digital Inputs/Outputs (I/O) 100 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC plus 2 digital I/O points 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC, plus 2 digital I/O points Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 None Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Output 2 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A
Output 4 AA = None None AJ = None Mechanical relay 5A, Form AK = None SSR Form A, 0.5A CA = Switched dc/open collector None CC = Switched dc/open collector Switched dc CJ = Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form CK = Switched dc/open collector SSR Form A, 0.5A EA = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C None EC = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Switched dc EJ = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form EK = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C SSR Form A, 0.5A FA = Universal process None FC = Universal process Switched dc FJ = Universal process Mechanical relay 5A, Form FK = Universal process SSR Form A, 0.5A KK = SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A 1 16 DIN Models: If communication options 2 thru 6 is ordered in previous digit, then Option AA must be ordered here. Custom Options Firmware, overlays, parameter settings AA = Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate
Additional Communication Options Standard bus always included A = None 1= EIA 485 Modbus RTU 2= EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU 3= EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP 5= DeviceNet 6= PROFIBUS DP
246
WATLOW
EZ-ZONE PM Express
The EZ-ZONE PM Express panel mount controller is an industry-leading PID controller that allows optimal performance utilizing simple control and menu functionality without complex features. It is ideal for basic applications and usage levels. The EZ-ZONE PM Express is the next generation controller to follow the legacy of Watlows SERIES 93, SERIES 935 AND SERIES SD controllers that offer easy-to-use features to perform many basic applications. The EZ-ZONE PM Express includes one universal input and an option for up to two outputs and is available in 1 32 and 116 DIN panel mount packages. It can be ordered as a PID process controller or as a dedicated over and under-temperature limit controller. The EZ-ZONE PM Express is a valuable addition to the EZ-ZONE PM controller family which also includes the EZ-ZONE PM integrated controller and the EZ-ZONE PM standard version.

Simplified menu Fits basic applications with a user-friendly interface supported by two menus and a streamlined list of parameters Eliminates complexity often experienced with more advanced controllers and unnecessary features Reduces training costs and user programming errors PID auto-tune Provides auto-tune for fast, efficient startup Standard bus communications Allows easy product configuration via PC communications protocol and free software Saves time, simplifies programming process and improves reliability of controller setup Factory Mutual (FM) approved over and under limit with auxiliary outputs Increases user and equipment safety for over and under-temperature conditions Agency approvals: UL listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. FM, SEMI F47-0200, Class 1, Div. 2 rating on selected models Assures prompt product acceptance Reduces end product documentation costs Front panel removable Saves time and labor for replacements and troubleshooting
P3T armor sealing system Complies with NEMA 4X, IP66 specifications Allows controller to be cleaned and washed Certified UL 50 independent to NEMA 4X specification Touch-safe package Increases installer and operator safety Complies with IP2X requirements Consistent Termination Labeling (CTL) connection system Simplifies switching between products Speeds up users system documentation Three-year warranty Demonstrates Watlows reliability and product support High-amperage power control output Drives 15 ampere resistive loads direct Reduces component count Saves panel space and simplifies wiring Reduces cost of ownership Class 1, Div. 2 Rated UL 1604 for use in hazardous locations Saves agency and component costs
WATLOW
247
EZ-ZONE PM Express
Specifications
Line Voltage/Power 85 to 264VAC, 47 to 63Hz 20 to 28VAC, +10/-15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 12 to 40VDC 10VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via non-volatile memory Compliant with SEMI F47-0200, Figure R1-1 voltage sag requirements @ 24VAC or higher Environment 0 to 149F (-18 to 65C) operating temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) storage temperature 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Type S: 0.2% Type T below -50C: 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max. Agency Approvals UL/EN 61010 listed ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007 Class 1, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D, temperature code T4A UL 50, NEMA 4X, EN 60529 IP66 CSA C22.2 No. 24 File 158031 RoHS, W.E.E.E. CSA 610110 CE Controller User selectable heat/cool, on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or alarm action, not valid for limit controllers Auto-tune with control algorithm Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, outputs = 10Hz Input and output capacity per controller type ordering information Serial Communications Isolated communications Standard bus configuration protocol Wiring TerminationTouch-Safe Terminals Input, power and controller output terminals are touch safe, removable, 12 to 22 AWG Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors, greater than 20M input impedance, 2k source resistance max. RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100 @ 0C calibration to DIN curve (0.00385 //C) Process, 4-20mA @ 100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable Functional Operating Range Type J: -346 to 2192F (-210 to 1200C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1371C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) Type E: -454 to 1832F (-270 to 1000C) Type N: -454 to 2372F (-270 to 1300C) Type C: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type D: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type F: 32 to 2449F (0 to 1343C) Type R: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type S: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type B: 32 to 3300F (0 to 1816C) RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Process: -1999 to 9999 units Output Hardware Switched dc = 22 to 32VDC @ 30mA Open collector = 30VDC max. @ 100mA max. current sink Solid state relay (SSR), Form A, 0.5A @ 24VAC min., 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression Electromechanical relay, Form C, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., 5A resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load Electromechanical relay, Form A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., 5A resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load NO-ARC relay, Form A, 24 to 240VAC, 15A @ 122F (50C), resistive load, no VDC, 2 million cycles at rated load Universal process output: range selectable; 0 to 10VDC 15mV into a min. 1,000 load with 2.5mV nominal resolution; 0 to 20mA 30A into max. 800 load with 5A nominal resolution; temperature stability 100ppm/C Operator Interface Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED displays Typical display update rate 1Hz Advance, infinity (RESET), up and down keys plus an EZ-KEY (not available in 132 DIN) Infinity key is also labeled RESET on limit control models EZ-KEY automatically programmed as an auto/manual transfer mode function on PID models. WATLOW
248
EZ-ZONE PM Express
EZ-ZONE PM EXPRESS PID Model
Controller Power Heater Power Branch Fuse
EZ-ZONE PM 132 DIN
2.10 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. 15.82 mm 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
1.22 in. (30.86 mm) 15A Control Output
Heater
0.50 in. (12.70 mm) 1.21 in. (30.73 mm)
Alarm
4.00 in. (101.57 mm)
Process Sensor
EZ-ZONE PM 116 DIN

2.10 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. (15.82 mm) 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM EXPRESS Limit Model

Heater Power Limit Power Branch Fuse Branch Fuse Branch Controller Power Fuse Branch Fuse
2.10 in. (53.34 mm)
External Process Sensor Temperature Controller

0.40 in. (10.16 mm)
Limit Output
Heater
Alarm
1.20 in. (30.49 mm)
4.00 in. (101.57 mm)
External Limit Contactor
Limit Sensor
WATLOW
249
EZ-ZONE PM Express
Universal Sensor Input, Standard Bus Communications, Dual Line Red over Green Seven-Segment Displays
Part Number
Power Supply Package Primary Function Size Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Future Options Menu Type Addl Options
PM
3= 6= 8= 9= 4= C= L= 1= 3= AJ = CA = CH = CC = CJ = CK = EA = EH = EC = EJ = EK = FA = FC = FJ = FK = AK = KH = KK = Package Size 32 DIN 1 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical (future option) 1 8 DIN horizontal (future option) 1 4 DIN (future option)
1
AAAA
B
B= AA = AB = AC = 12 = Menu Type PM Express with English manual Additional Options Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate EZ-ZONE logo, no Watlow name No logo, no Watlow name Class 1, Div. 2 (not available with mechanical relay Output types E, H or J)
Primary Function PID controller with universal input Limit controller with universal input (only valid Output 1 and 2 selections = AJ, CJ or EJ) Power Supply 100 to 240VAC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 None Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Universal process Universal process Universal process Universal process None SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A Output 2 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None NO-ARC 15A power control Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, Form A SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A NO-ARC 15A power control SSR Form A, 0.5A
Replacement Parts/Accessories
PID Manuals 0600-0065-0000 0600-0065-0001 0600-0065-0002 0600-0065-0003 0600-0065-0004 0600-0065-0005 0600-0065-0006 0600-0065-0007 250 English Simplified Chinese Japanese Korean German French Italian Spanish Limit Manuals 0600-0066-0000 English
WATLOW
SERIES EHG SL10
The SERIES EHG SL10 integrated, multi-function controller is a key component to a powerful system that integrates a heater, an adjustable set point temperature controller, a high/low temperature alert, a power switching device and a high temperature safety limit. Its agency recognized controller/safety limit meets UL 1998 and CE 60730 requirements. An optional display/communications module can be easily added in the field to provide a digital display indication, an adjustment of set point, RS485 Modbus communications and other Human Machine Interface (HMI) features. As a scalable system, only what is needed can be purchased. The EHG SL10 controllers easy to install, compact design, inherent reliability and integrated limit functions offer unmatched value. It is designed for easy integration with Watlow heaters to simplify engineering, reduce component count for new equipment and decrease ownership cost. For original equipment manufacturers, (OEMs), CE, Semi-S2 compliance and UL recognition, the EHG controller reduces time and costs associated with global agency testing and validation.

Process controller and safety limit in one package Meets UL 1998 and CE 60730 requirements Eliminates the need for a thermal fuse on a heater Eliminates replacement of heater when fuse fails Optional display/communications module Allows easy upgrade on to base device Offers low cost field upgrade Provides easy, snap-on installation Accurate and flexible temperature process controller Replaces problematic bi-metal thermostats with accurate electronic temperature process controller Allows easy change of process parameters Ambient operating temperature range 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Increases reliability when mounting in harsh temperature environments or in close proximity to heaters Integrated high/low temperature alert signal relay Provides dry contact output to activate external alarm or process function Signals control status with three integrated LEDs Allows a signal of up to two amperes 30VAC/VDC, Form A to alert if process temperature is out of range limits
Health check diagnostics Monitors maximum heater process temperature, maximum ambient temperature and thermocouple operation Provides health check signal to inform operator that the process is working correctly Universal power supply Allows an input of 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz Provides safe control of up to 2400 watts with 10 amperes switching in both controller and safety limit Can be switched from on-off and PID algorithm Increases product life (on-off control is default) Offers selectable PID control algorithm for tighter temperature uniformity Universal 18 turn mounting bracket Allows mounting to most surfaces Provides flexible mountingeither horizontally or vertically
Foodservice equipment Warming and serving equipment Food holding cabinets Life sciences Laboratory equipment Medical equipment Packaging Heat sealing bars Hot glue application equipment Semiconductor processing Gas delivery lines
WATLOW
251
SERIES EHG SL10
Technical Information Specifications
Operational Two, Type K thermocouple inputs - process temperature control and safety limit Process temperature output - 10A NO-ARC relay Safety limit alarm - 10A relay High/low temperature alert - 2A 30VAC/VDC, Form A (single pole, normally open contact) On-off temperature controller algorithm, upgraded via communications to PID algorithm (min. cycle time 30 seconds) Standard Molex connectors Controllers are integral to the heater and are supplied by Watlow Power Isolated universal power supply 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz Up to 2400 W with 10A switching capability NO-ARC Relay 10A switching 4.5 million cycles Environmental Ambient operating temperature range 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Agency Approvals UL 1998/ C-UL CE 60730 Semi-S2 SERIES EHG Versus Thermostat (typical application)
90.00
85.00
80.00
75.00
70.00
65.00
60.00
55.00
50.00 0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00 50.00 Elapsed Time (min.)
60.00
70.00
80.00
90.00
Thermostat EHG
Dimensions
3.496 in. (88.80 mm)
2.196 in. (55.78 mm)
Base Unit
1.907 in. (48.44 mm) 2.486 in. (63.14 mm)
1.582 in. (40.18 mm)
2.161 in. (54.89 mm)
Without Optional Module
With Optional Module
Switching Device Comparison Chart

T-Stat Amperage at 77F (25C) Amperage at 158F (70C) Output device life at 10A 10A 10A Rated 100,000 at 158F (70C) 10A De-rate signicantly and add heat sink and air cooling Greater than 10 million cycles at 77F (25C) Solid State Relay 10A 10A Greater than 4.5 million cycles at 158F (70C) Watlow NO-ARC Relay
252
WATLOW
SERIES EHG SL10
Technical Information (Continued) EHG SL10 Software
With the addition of an optional communication module, the EHG SL10 can be managed, monitored and manipulated via software. Change set points, label devices, change tuning parameters, check health status and much more all with the click of a key.
Reduces System Complexity and Cost
Mounting Bracket
The EHG SL10 can be daisy-chained for gas line and other assemblies.
The EHG SL10 mounting enables the controller to be mounted in four angles.
WATLOW
253
SERIES EHG SL10
Technical Information (Continued) Optional Upgrade Modules
These upgrade modules are easy to install. There is no need to recongure, rewire or reorder the base unit. A technician is not needed for the installation, resulting in a seamless, cost-efcient system that can be upgraded.
Diagnostics Ability to Memory Change Field Control Temperature Adjustable Parameters Parameters Set Point Base Unit 3-Digit 7-Segment LED Display Illuminated
Diagnostic LEDs
User Interface Software
Modbus RTU Communication
RS 485
Optional Display Module
Optional Communication Module
Optional Display and Communication Module
Part Number
Modules
Silver Series touchscreen operator interface terminals provide a customizable user interface and log and graph data for Watlow controllers and other devices. A Silver Series operator interface terminal paired with Watlow controllers, is the perfect solution for industrial processes or machine control applications. See page 347.
265 EG2
Modules 001 = Base unit 007 = Display module 008 = Communications module 002 = Display and communications module Additional cables for wiring parallel heater circuits (daisy-chaining) in gas line and other assemblies 4800-0012 - Long cable 4800-0022 - Long terminating cable 4800-0011 - Short cable 4800-0021 - Short terminating cable
254
WATLOW
SERIES EHG
Many applications requiring a fixed temperature set point rely on a mechanical thermostat for thermal control. Thermostats have proven, however, to be inadequate for many applications due to long-term reliability issues, such as 100,000 cycle rating and poor temperature control. The SERIES EHG thermal solution includes a compact temperature control, thermocouple sensor and power switching device integrated into the heaters power cord. The SERIES EHG reduces system costs and lasts substantially longer than a conventional thermostat solution. The evolution of miniature microprocessor technology and Watlow switching technology fostered development of a small, versatile temperature control and thermocouple sensor that is integrated with Watlow silicone rubber heater products. This device senses the temperature via input from a thermocouple strategically placed on the heater mat. The microprocessor is programmed prior to shipment with an application specific set point. This results in quick delivery of a custom, integrated system. The small thermocouple mass provides superior response to changes in process temperature enabling higher watt density silicone rubber heater designs. These features offer an integrated custom set point temperature controller with superior life span, faster heat-up rates and improved accuracy. The SERIES EHG System has been tested to over four million cycles at rated amperage. Depending on the application, Watlows power switching design can last up to 40 times longer than a conventional thermostat.

Long operational life Improves system reliability Tight temperature control Ensures process accuracy Small sensor footprint Fits with almost any heater Responds quickly to temperature changes Controls high watt densities in low mass applications Reduced system cost A single EHG control can be configured with multiple heaters Pre-wired, in line control Simplifies installation Two wire power connection Durable housing with built-in strain relief Protects electronics Low risk of mechanical damage Manufactured with proven Watlow components Assures reliable system performance
WATLOW
255
SERIES EHG
Technical Information Specifications
Operational SERIES EHG silicone rubber heater UL recognized to 428F (220C) operating temperature Factory programmed xed set point
On-off control with 6F (3C) switching hysteresis Temperature band LED indicator ON between -68 and +68F (20 and +20C) of set point Electrical Voltage rating: 120 or 240VAC 30/+10%, 50/60Hz Silicone rubber heater watt densities up to 80 W/in2 (12.5 W/cm2) dependent on application temperature SERIES EHG system UL recognized to 10A max. Sensor Type K thermocouple Mechanical Control dimensions 3.75 in. (95 mm) long by 1.75 in. (45 mm) diameter Heater per silicone rubber heater specications Agencies Silicone rubber heater: UL recognized File #E52951 SERIES EHG control: TUV File DE 3-3068 to EN 61010-1:2001, UL File E43684 to UL 873 temperature indicating and regulating equipment Environmental Control operating temperature range 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Control storage temperature range -40 to 158F (40 to 70C) Contact your Watlow representative for custom congurations.
SERIES EHG Versus Thermostat (typical application) EHG versus Thermostat

90.00 85.00
80.00
75.00
70.00
65.00
60.00
55.00
50.00 0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00 50.00 Elapsed Time (min.)
60.00
70.00
80.00
90.00
Thermostat EHG
Dimensions
100%
3.75 in. (95 mm)
1.85 in. (47 mm)
Integrated SERIES EHG System Versus Integrated Thermostat System

Integrated EHG System
Life comparison at rated amperage 10A load Switch hysteresis Improved response time reduces overshoot on start-up Warranty Zero Cross Switching Tested to greater than 4,000,000 cycles with 6F (3C) 6F (3C) typical
Integrated Thermostat System

Rated 100,000 cycles
SERIES EHG Benet

Longer product life of SERIES EHG system and high application reliability Provides superior process control Responds to temperature changes faster than a thermostat Warranty can be extended due to longer life cycle Reduces the possibility of electrical mechanical interference (EMI)
15F (8C) 25F (14C) typical
2 years for material and workmanship SERIES EHG has zero cross switching
1 year on material and workmanship Random switching during sign wave cycle
256
WATLOW

Control/Limit Loops Mounting 152/192 DIN-rail Maximum Communication Output Protocols 15A Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU 75A Standard Bus, Modbus RTU 2A 2A Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard Bus N/A N/A Modbus RTU N/A Page 259
Product EZ-ZONE RM
Profiling
EZ-ZONE ST SERIES F4 Ramping SERIES F4 Process EZ-ZONE PM
1/1 2/0 2/0 2/1
DIN-rail 4 DIN front panel 4 DIN front panel

1 1 1
260 261 267 272
15A
EZ-ZONE PM Express SERIES CV SERIES CF SERIES EHG SL10 SERIES EHG
1/1 1/0 1/0 1/1 1/0
15A 8A 8A 10A 10A
273 274 Temperature and Process 277 280 281
DIN-rail, Front panel DIN-rail, Front panel In-line/ Sub panel In-line
WATLOW
257
258
WATLOW

EZ-ZONE RM

Multiple inputs; from 1 to 152 PID loops of control or monitor up to 256 analog inputs Mix and match I/O to fit any application; from 1 input with 2 outputs to 152 analog inputs with 152 outputs, or monitor up to as many as 256 analog inputs all in one system Reduces cost because only required loops are purchased Allows a common controller platform across many design applications as both loops and outputs can be ordered in single increments Advanced PID control algorithm Offers TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control to provide tighter control for demanding applications Enables auto-tune for fast, efficient start-up Communication capabilities Provides a range of protocol options including universal serial bus (USB) device port, Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS USB Port Provides data log retrieval SPLIT-RAIL control Enables modules mounted in separate high-voltage and low-voltage cabinets to function as an integrated system Minimizes the length and cost of wire runs and improves system reliability by locating inputs closer to sensors and outputs closer to loads
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE RM product section located on pages 213 through 230.
WATLOW 259

EZ-ZONE ST
Features and Benets

Back panel or DIN-rail mount Provides several mounting options Compact package Reduces panel size Touch-safe package Complies with IP2X increasing user safety 0.1 percent temperature accuracy Provides efficient and accurate temperature control Agency approvals: UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. Meets applications requiring agency approvals Three-year warranty Ensures Watlows reliability and product support Off-the-shelf designed system solution Improves system reliability and termination reduction Reduces installation cost Eliminates incompatibility headaches often encountered with using many different components and brands Profile capability Includes ramp and soak with four files and 40 total steps Ability to communicate with programmable logic controller (PLC), personal computer (PC) or operator interface terminal (OIT) Optional EIA 485 Modbus RTU RUI/communications gateway with optional EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP/TCP Modbus, DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP. Refer to page 353 for further information. Solid state relay output Allows faster cycling, more precise control, increased heater life and improves energy efficiency Ability to handle up to 75 amperes Uses either zero-cross or phase angle control modes for flexibility to control resistive loads such as nichrome, tungsten or quartz lamps Utilizes phase angle control mode to prevent load failure or blowing fuses for tungsten or quartz loads PID temperature control Allows single input/dual output Allows standard PID or adaptive TRU-TUNE+ tuning algorithms for demanding controllability requirements Optional temperature limit Increases safety in over- and under-temperature condition Optional definite purpose mechanical contactor Enables circuit safety shut down driven by limit control or PID alarm output signal
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE ST product section located on pages 231 through 237.
260 WATLOW

SERIES F4 Ramping
The SERIES F4 14 DIN industrial ramping controller meets the requirements of the most demanding ramp and soak processing applications. Easy to set up and operate, its programming features and proven performance capabilities are ideally suited for environmental chamber or furnace and oven applications. Single and dual channel versions are available. Competitively-priced, the SERIES F4 ramping controller features a four line, high-definition LCD interface display for quick and easy profile programming and controller configuration. Its 16-bit microprocessor ensures accuracy and delivers performance advantages you can count on from a Watlow controller. Up to 256 steps can be programmed into as many as 40 nameable profiles that can be programmed to wait for events or for up to three different process variables. A guaranteed soak feature allows a setting for how closely to control a process. Program the four digital event inputs to remotely start, pause or terminate any preprogrammed process recipes. Eight event outputs are segment programmable and three outputs can be assigned to a programmable compressor and boost heat/boost cool control. A real-time clock can start a profile at any time. Serial communication and dual alarm relays are included in the base unit. The SERIES F4 ramping controller is packaged with a NEMA 4X front face to withstand harsh environments and a 4 in. (102 mm) deep case with removable connectors for wiring convenience. It is manufactured by Watlow, ISO 9001 registered and protected by a three-year warranty.

Guided 256 step, 40 profile ramp and soak programmable memory Supports a wide range of processing applications High-definition, four line LCD controller interface display Simplifies setup and operation Menu customization Offers enhanced process monitoring High-performance, 16-bit microprocessor Precise process control Universal inputs Provides application versatility Expandable modular construction Field upgradable Enhanced environmental chamber control Supports humidity, compressor, boost heat/boost cool control Cascade control Provides precise two variable control Real-time clock with battery backup Offers operational flexibility
WATLOW
261

SERIES F4 Ramping
Set Point Ramp and Soak Programming
In response to customer needs, the Watlow SERIES F4 ramping controller has been enhanced with programming features that offer more capabilities with less programming complexity. A programming guide provides step-by-step instructions for building profiles, offering choices for step configuration. For better operator recognition, profiles and digital I/O used for events can be named using up to 10 characters. Five step types including ramp, soak, jump, auto start and end, offer complete programming flexibility. Ramp steps can be based on time or rate. Ramp and soak steps can be programmed to wait for up to four event inputs and three process variables. As many as eight event outputs are step selectable. To accommodate changes to thermal systems characteristics over the operating range, up to 10 sets of PID heat/cool parameters are step selectable. The auto start step can start a profile based on a chosen set date, day of the week or daily. A jump step enables movement within a profile or to another profile. The end step terminates a program with the control outputs programmed to specific process needs.
Temperature and Humidity Chamber Application
Serial Communication
EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial communication interfaces are included in the base unit of both the SERIES F4S (single channel) and the SERIES F4D (dual channel) controllers. The baud rate is selectable as either 9600 or 19200 Kbaud. The protocol is Modbus RTU.
Panel Cutout 3.622 x 3.622 in. (92 x 92 mm) 3.930 in. (99.82 mm)
4.254 in. (108.05 mm) 3.85 in. (97.79 mm)
3.930 in. (99.82 mm) 4.824 in. (108.81 mm)
Alarms
Two Form C electromechanical alarm relays are included in the base units. These alarms can be programmed as either process or deviation alarms. The alarms can be tied to up to three process variables.
Optional Retransmit
Optional retransmit capability is available to retransmit one or two variables. These variables include up to three process variables, control set points or percent load power. 262
Specifications
0.404 in. (10.26 mm)
Dimensions Width x height x depth 3.93 in. x 3.93 in. x 3.85 in. (99 mm x 99 mm x 97 mm) panel mount WATLOW

SERIES F4 Ramping
Specifications
Universal Analog Inputs 1 (2 and 3 Optional) Updates rates, IN1 = 20Hz, IN2 and IN3 = 10HZ Thermocouple Type J, K, T, N, E, C (W5), D (W3), PTII, R, S, B Input impedance 20M RTD 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100, 500 or 1000 JIS or DIN curves, 1.0 or 0.1 indication Process Input resolution 50,000 bits at full scale Range selectable: 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, 1-5VDC, 0-50mV, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Voltage input impedance 20K Current input impedance 100 Digital Inputs (4) Update rate = 10Hz Contact or dc voltage (36VDC max.) 10K input impedance Control Outputs (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B) Update rate = 20Hz Open Collector/Switched dc Internal load switching (nominal): Switched dc, 22 to 28VDC, limited @ 30mA External load switching (max.): Open collector 42VDC @ 0.5A Solid State Relay Zero switched, optically coupled, 0.5A @ 24VAC min., 253VAC max. Process Outputs (Optional Retransmit) Update rate = 1Hz User selectable 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, 1-5VDC @ 1K min., 0-20mA, 4-20mA @ 800 max. Resolution: dc ranges = 2.5mV nominal mA ranges = 5A nominal Calibration accuracy: dc ranges = 15mV mA ranges = 30A Temperature stability 100ppm/C Alarm Outputs Output update rate 1Hz Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A @ 30VDC or 240VAC max. Digital Outputs (8) Update rate = 10Hz Open collector output Off = 42VDC max. @ 10A On = 0.2VDC max. @ 50mA sink Internal supply: 5VDC, @ 80mA Communications EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial communications with Modbus RTU protocol Safety and Agency Approvals UL/C-UL 916 listed, File #E185611 Process Control Equipment CE EN 61010-1 EN 61326 IP65 and NEMA 4X Terminals Touch-safe, removable terminal blocks, accepts 12 to 22 gauge wire Power 100-240VAC, -15%, +10%; 50/60Hz, 5% 24-28VAC/VDC, -15%, +10% (order option) 39VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory (7 years for battery backed RAM) Sensor input isolation from input to input to output to communication circuitry is 500VAC Operating Environment 32 to 130F (0 to 55C) 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span 1C @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) ambient and rated line voltage 10% with the following exceptions: Type T: 0.12% of span for -328 to -58F (-200 to -50C) Types R and S: 0.15% of span for 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) Type B: 0.24% of span for 1598 to 3092F (870 to 1700C) Accuracy span: Less than or equal to operating ranges, 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient for thermocouples 0.05F/F (0.05C/C) rise in ambient for RTD sensors
WATLOW
263

SERIES F4 Ramping
Displays Process: 5 digit, 7 segment LED, red Control interface display: 4-row, 20-character high definition LCD green Sensor Operating Ranges Type J: 32 to 1500F or Type K: -328 to 2500F or Type T: -328 to 750F or Type N: 32 to 2372F or Type E: -328 to 1470F or Type C (W5): 32 to 4200F or Type D (W3): 32 to 4352F or Type Pt 2: 32 to 2543F or Type R: 32 to 3200F or Type S: 32 to 3200F or Type B: 32 to 3300F or RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F or RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166F or Process: -19,999 to 30,000 units Sensor Accuracy Ranges Input ranges Type J: 32 to 1382F or Type K: -328 to 2282F or Type T: -328 to 662F or Type N: 32 to 2282F or Type E: -328 to 1470F or Type C (W5): 32 to 4200F or Type D (W3): 32 to 4352F or Type Pt 2: 32 to 2540F or Type R: 32 to 2642F or Type S: 32 to 2642F or Type B: 1598 to 3092F or RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F or RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166F or Process: -19,999 to 30,000 units 0 -200 -200 0 -200 0 0 0 0 0 0 -200 -200 to to to to to to to to to to to to to 815C 1370C 400C 1300C 800C 2315C 2400C 1395C 1760C 1760C 1816C 800C 800C
0 -200 -200 0 -200 0 0 0 0 0 870 -200 -200
to to to to to to to to to to to to to
750C 1250C 350C 1250C 800C 2315C 2400C 1393C 1450C 1450C 1700C 800C 630C
Note: Specications subject to change without notice.
264
WATLOW

SERIES F4 Ramping
Ordering Information - 14 DIN Single Channel Ramping Controller
Part Number
Single Channel Ramping Power Supply Output 1A Output 1B Auxiliary Input Module Auxiliary Language Retransmit and RTD Options Module Display and Custom Options
F4
S= H= L = C= F = K= A= C= F = K=
A
0 = 6 = 0= 1= 2= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8=
Auxiliary Input Module None Dual universal inputs Auxiliary Retransmit Module None Single retransmit output 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Dual retransmit outputs 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Language and RTD Option English with 100 RTD German with 100 RTD French with 100 RTD Spanish with 100 RTD English with 500 and 1K RTD German with 500 and 1K RTD French with 500 and 1K RTD Spanish with 500 and 1K RTD
Single Channel Ramping Controller 1 universal analog input, 4-digital inputs, 8-digital outputs, 2 alarms, EIA-232/485 comms Power Supply 100-240VAC/VDC 24-28VAC/VDC Output 1A Open collector/switched dc Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Solid state Form A 0.5A relay Output 1B None Open collector/switched dc Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Solid state Form A 0.5A relay
Display and Custom Options RG = Standard display (Red/Green display only) XX = Custom options: software, setting parameters, overlay
WATLOW
265

SERIES F4 Ramping
Ordering Information - 14 DIN Dual Channel Ramping Controller
Part Number
Dual Channel Ramping Power Supply Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B Auxiliary Language Retransmit and RTD Options Module Display and Custom Options
F4
D= H= L = C= F = K= A= C= F = K= C= F = K=
Dual Channel Ramping Controller A= C= F = K= 0= 1= 2= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8=
Output 2B None Open collector/switched dc Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Solid state Form A 0.5A relay Auxiliary Retransmit Module None Single retransmit output 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Dual retransmit outputs 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Language and RTD Option English with 100 RTD German with 100 RTD French with 100 RTD Spanish with 100 RTD English with 500 and 1K RTD German with 500 and 1K RTD French with 500 and 1K RTD Spanish with 500 and 1K RTD
3 universal analog inputs, 4-digital inputs, 8-digital outputs, 2 alarms, EIA-232/485 comms Power Supply 100-240VAC/VDC 24-28VAC/VDC Output 1A Open collector/switched dc Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Solid state Form A 0.5A relay Output 1B None Open collector/switched dc Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Solid state Form A 0.5A relay Output 2A Open collector/switched dc Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Solid state Form A 0.5A relay
Display and Custom Options RG = Standard display (Red/Green display only) XX = Custom options: software, setting parameters, overlay
Operator Interface Terminals (OIT) SpecView
266
WATLOW

SERIES F4 Process
The SERIES F4 14 DIN temperature process controller offers performance features to meet a wide range of industrial processing needs. The F4 process controller is ideal for semiconductor manufacturing equipment, plastic processing and packaging equipment and industrial process control applications. This controller features a four line, high definition LCD interface display, in addition to an information key that enables easy set up and control operation, minimizing the chance for error. Its 16-bit microprocessor ensures accuracy and delivers performance advantages you can count on from a Watlow controller. Four digital inputs remotely modify controller operation or enable display of pre-defined operator messages. Advanced features include cascade, ratio, differential, duplex slide wire and retransmit options. Serial communication and dual alarm relays are included in the base unit. The SERIES F4 is packaged with a NEMA 4X front face to withstand harsh environments and a four-inch (101.6 mm) deep case with removable connectors for wiring convenience. It is manufactured by Watlow, ISO 9001 registered and protected by a three-year warranty.

Guided set-up Removes guess work from the set-up process Saves time by reducing programming errors High definition four-line LCD display Simplifies set up process and operations Quickly and easily identifies process, alarm and set point values Information I Key Displays essential elements from the user manual on board Customized menuing Quickly displays up to 16 parameters Allows users to create custom messaging and easily identify key events or alarms High performance 16-bit microprocessor Provides precise process control with 20Hz update rate on input 1. (10Hz on inputs 2 and 3) Calibration accuracy of 0.1 percent of span Universal input Embedded software provides application versatility Eliminates the need for dip switches Modbus communications ready Equipped to handle RS232 or EIA485 communications
WATLOW
267

SERIES F4 Process
General Purpose Control Operation
The SERIES F4 temperature process controller with a single channel PID controller supports either closed or open loop operation. The design utilizes the latest technology to meet complex processing needs while maintaining an easily understood operator interface. Full, non-abbreviated parameter choices are displayed using a four line, high-definition LCD interface display that is back lit for wide angle viewing. Firmware guides the operator through parameter choices for feature configuration. An information key (I) provides the operator with detailed help information regarding the parameter or feature being configured. The main page menu can be programmed to display output power through 16 control variables including: bar graphs, set points and operating ranges. Up to four programmable messages can be activated remotely to inform the operator that the process requires attention. Five sets of PID values can be auto-tuned to support varying system reactions over the complete operating range. Up to 10 offset points can programmed to compensate for differences between the actual process value and sensor readings caused by sensor placement.
Control Outputs
Heat/cool or reverse/direct action is supported. Time based outputs can be configured for variable burst fire or a cycle time can be selected. On-off boost heat or boost cool operation is also supported. Boost operation is enabled based on load power requirements
Alarms
Two alarms are included in the base unit and can be programmed as process, deviation or rate.
Serial Communications
Both EIA 232 and EIA 485 communications are included in the base unit. The SERIES F4 operates via the Modbus RTU protocol and responds to requests for information only when queried. Baud rate selections are 9600 or 19200.
Retransmit
Up to two optional programmable voltage or current signal retransmit outputs are supported. Retransmit sources include up to three process variables; set point and output percent power.
Control Inputs
Up to three universal analog inputs are configured through software to support thermocouples, RTDs and process (voltage/current) sensors. Auxiliary inputs 2 and 3 can function as a remote set point input, sources for retransmission or as the outer loop for cascade operation.
Digital Inputs
Four inputs are programmable and can remotely modify controller operation and display pre-programmed messages on the operations display.
268
WATLOW

SERIES F4 Process
Enhanced Control Operation
An enhanced operation option for the SERIES F4 process controller includes additional universal analog inputs (inputs 2 and 3) and enhanced firmware to support several features that utilize the two additional inputs. The enhanced control option can be configured to support cascade control, (see the application diagram below), differential control, ratio control and slide wire valve control. The enhanced control option can also alternate between control inputs, display up to three process variables and support remote set point operation. In this sample application, the SERIES F4 process controller uses the enhanced cascade control feature to heat lube oil to 51.6C (125F). Cascade control is a control strategy in which one control loop provides the set point for another loop. It allows the process or part temperature to be reached quickly while minimizing overshoot. Cascade is used to optimize thermal system performance with long lag times. Input 3 measures the lube oil temperature before it leaves the tank. Input 1 measures the heater temperature. The input 3 process value is compared to the set point which generates an internal set point used to control the heater.
Out er-loop Thermocouple Input3 Input1 Output1 Oil In Oil Out
Heater
Inner-loop Therm ocouple
Lube O il Tank
Specifications
Universal Analog Inputs 1 (2 and 3 optional) Update rates, IN1 = 20Hz, IN2 and IN3 = 10Hz Thermocouple Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, Pt 2, D (W3), B, R, S RTD 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100, 500, or 1K JIS or DIN curves, 1.0 or 0.1 indication Process Input resolution 50,000 bits at full scale Range selectable: 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, 1-5VDC, 0-50mV, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Voltage input impedance 20K Current input impedance 100 Digital Inputs (4) Update rate = 10Hz Contact or dc voltage; 36VDC max 10K input impedance Control Outputs (1A, 1B) Update rate = 20Hz
Open Collector/Switched dc Internal load switching (nominal): Switched dc, 22 to 28VDC, limited @ 30mA External load switching max.: Open collector 42VDC @ 0.5A Solid-state Relay Zero switched, optically coupled, 0.5A @ 24VAC min., 253VAC max. Electromechanical Relay Form C, 2A @ 250VAC or 30VDC max. Resistive or inductive load Without contact suppression Process Outputs (Optional Retransmit) Update rate = 1Hz User-selectable 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, 1-5VDC @ 1K min., 0-20mA, 4-20mA @ 800 max. Resolution: dc ranges = 2.5mV nominal mA ranges = 5A nominal Calibration accuracy: dc ranges = 15mV mA ranges = 30A Temperature stability 100ppm/C 269
WATLOW

SERIES F4 Process
Alarm Outputs Output update rate 1Hz Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A @ 30VDC or 240VAC max. Communications EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial communications with Modbus RTU protocol Safety and Agency Approvals UL/C-UL 916 listed, File # E185611 Process Control Equipment NEMA 4X and IP65 CE to EN 61010-1 and 61326 Terminals Touch-safe, removable terminal blocks, accepts 12 to 22-gauge wire Power 100-240VAC, -15%, +10%; 50/60Hz, 5% 24-28VAC/VDC, -15%, +10% (order option) 39VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory. Sensor input isolation from input to input to output to communication circuitry is 500VAC Operating Environment 32 to 149F (0 to 65C) 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span 1C @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) ambient, and rated line voltage 10% with the following exceptions: Type T: 0.12% of span for -328 to -58F (-200 to -50C) Types R and S: 0.15% of span for 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) Type B: 0.24% of span for 1598 to 3092F (870C to 1700C) Accuracy span: less than or equal to operating ranges, 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient for thermocouples 0.05F/F (0.05C/C) rise in ambient for RTD sensors Displays Process: 5 digit, 7 segment LED, red Control interface display: 4-row, 20-character high definition LCD green Sensor Operating Ranges Type J: 32 to 1500F or Type K: -328 to 2500F or Type T: -328 to 750F or Type N: 32 to 2372F or Type E: -328 to 1470F or Type C: 32 to 4200F or Type D: 32 to 4352F or Type Pt 2: 32 to 2543F or Type R: 32 to 3200F or Type S: 32 to 3200F or Type B: 32 to 3300F or RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F or RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166F or Process: -19,999 to 30,000 units Sensor Accuracy Ranges Input ranges Type J: 32 to 1382F or Type K: -328 to 2282F or Type T: -328 to 662F or Type N: 32 to 2282F or Type E: -328 to 1470F or Type C(W5): 32 to 4200F or Type D(W3): 32 to 4352F or Type Pt 2: 32 to 2540F or Type R: 32 to 2642F or Type S: 32 to 2642F or Type B: 1598 to 3092F or RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F or RTD (JIS): -328 to 1166F or Process: -19,999 to 30,000 units 0 -200 -200 0 -200 0 0 0 0 0 0 -200 -200 to to to to to to to to to to to to to 815C 1370C 400C 1300C 800C 2315C 2400C 1395C 1760C 1760C 1816C 800C 800C
0 -200 -200 0 -200 0 0 0 0 0 870 -200 -200
to to to to to to to to to to to to to
750C 1250C 350C 1250C 800C 2315C 2400C 1393C 1450C 1450C 1700C 800C 630C
270
WATLOW

SERIES F4 Process
Part Number
Temperature /Process Controller Power Supply Output 1A Output 1B Enhanced Control Operation Auxiliary Language Retransmit and RTD Options Module Display and Custom Options
F4
P= H= L = C= E = K= F = A= E = C= K= F =
Temperature/Process Controller
A
A= B= 0= 1= 2= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8=
Enhanced Control Operation Standard control operation Enhanced control operation, dual universal inputs, cascade, ratio, duplex, differential, slidewire Auxiliary Retransmit Module None Single retransmit output 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Dual retransmit outputs 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Language and RTD Option English with 100 RTD German with 100 RTD French with 100 RTD Spanish with 100 RTD English with 500 and 1K RTD German with 500 and 1K RTD French with 500 and 1K RTD Spanish with 500 and 1K RTD
Single channel temperature/process controller, two alarms, EIA 232/485 comms. four event inputs Power Supply 100-240VAC/VDC 24-28VAC/VDC Output 1A Open collector/switched dc Electromechanical relay, Form C 2A without contact suppression Solid state Form A 0.5A relay without contact suppression Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA Output 1B None Electromechanical relay, Form C 2A without contact suppression Open collector/switched dc Solid state Form A 0.5A relay without contact suppression Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Display and Custom Options RG = Red/Green display XX = Custom options: software, setting parameters, overlay
4.254 in. (108.05 mm)
Panel Cutout 3.622 in. x 3.622 in. (92 mm x 92 mm) 3.930 in. (99.82 mm)
3.850 in. (97.79 mm)
3.930 in. (99.82 mm) 4.824 in. (108.81 mm)
0.404 in. (10.26 mm)
Dimension Specifications Width x height x depth 3.93 in. x 3.93 in. x 3.85 in. panel mount (99 mm x 99 mm x 97 mm)
WATLOW
271

EZ-ZONE PM

Integrated PID and limit controller Reduces wiring time and termination complexity compared with connecting discrete products Decreases required panel space Lowers installation costs Increases user and equipment safety for over/under temperature conditions High amperage power control output Drives 15 ampere resistive loads directly Reduces component count Decreases cost of ownership Current monitoring Detects heater current flow and provides alarm indication of a failed output device or heater load Serial communication capabilities Provides a wide range of protocol choices including Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS DP and DeviceNet Supports network connectivity to a PC or PLC Dual-channel controller Provides two PID controllers in one space-saving package
Enhanced control options Easily handles complex process problems such as cascade, ratio, differential, square-root, motorized valve control without slidewire feedback, wet-bulb/ dry-bulb, compressor control and peltier loads Advanced PID control algorithm Offers TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control to provide tighter control for demanding applications Provides auto-tune for fast, efficient startup Configuration communications with software Includes Watlow standard bus communications and EZ-ZONE configurator software Saves time and improves reliability of controller setup Ten-point linearization curve Improves sensor accuracy
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE PM product section located on pages 238 through 246.
272 WATLOW

EZ-ZONE PM Express
The EZ-ZONE PM Express panel mount controller is an industry-leading PID controller that allows optimal performance utilizing simple control and menu functionality without complex features. It is ideal for basic applications and usage levels. The EZ-ZONE PM Express is the next generation controller to follow the legacy of Watlows SERIES 93, SERIES 935 AND SERIES SD controllers that offer easy-to-use features for many basic applications. The EZ-ZONE PM Express includes one universal input and an option for up to two outputs and is available in 1 32 and 116 DIN panel mount packages. It can be ordered as a PID process controller or as a dedicated over and under-temperature limit controller. The EZ-ZONE PM Express is a valuable addition to the EZ-ZONE PM controller family which also includes the EZ-ZONE PM integrated controller and the EZ-ZONE PM standard version.

Simplified menu Fits basic applications with a user-friendly interface supported by two menus and a streamlined list of parameters Eliminates complexity often experienced with more advanced controllers and unnecessary features Reduces training costs and user programming errors PID auto-tune Provides auto-tune for fast, efficient startup Standard bus communications Allows easy product configuration via PC communications protocol and free software Saves time, simplifies programming process and improves reliability of controller setup Factory Mutual (FM) approved over and under limit with auxiliary outputs Increases user and equipment safety for over and under-temperature conditions Agency approvals: UL listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. FM, SEMI F47-0200, Class 1, Div. 2 rating on selected models Assures prompt product acceptance Reduces end product documentation costs
Front panel removable Saves time and labor for replacements and troubleshooting P3T armor sealing system Complies with NEMA 4X, IP66 specifications Allows controller to be cleaned and washed Certified UL 50 independent to NEMA 4X specification Touch-safe package Increases installer and operator safety Complies with IP2X requirements Consistent Termination Labeling (CTL) connection system Simplifies switching between products Speeds up users system documentation Three-year warranty Demonstrates Watlows reliability and product support High-amperage power control output Drives 15 ampere resistive loads direct Reduces component count Saves panel space and simplifies wiring Reduces cost of ownership Class 1, Div. 2 Rated UL 1604 for use in hazardous locations Saves agency and component costs
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE PM Express product section located on pages 247 through 250.
WATLOW 273

SERIES CV
Watlows family of microprocessor-based temperature controllers offers an economical solution for applications that require simple, on/off control. Controllers are available in a broad range of packaging options, allowing selection of the best version for a specific application. They are available with an operator interface and can be ordered in a 18 DIN square panel mount or DIN-rail mount configuration. The SERIES CV temperature controller incorporates a microprocessor design that delivers the repeatability, accuracy and performance advantages you can count on from Watlows basic temperature controllers. The SERIES CV controller includes an operator interface for viewing and set point selection. A red, four-character, seven segment LED displays the set point to show process options. The set point selection is made with a continuous turn, rotary encoder. Operating range temperature values are user definable as specified in the product configuration part number. SERIES CV controllers are UL and C-UL listed and carry CSA and CE approvals. Watlows temperature controllers include industry-leading service and support and are protected by a three-year warranty.

Adjustable set points Offers control flexibility Four character LED display Improves set point selection accuracy Multiple mounting options Minimizes installation time Heat or cool operation Provides application flexibility Fahrenheit or Celsius operation with indication Offers application flexibility Agency approvals Meets certification requirements/compliance Microprocessor based technology Ensures accurate repeatable control
274
WATLOW

SERIES CV
Specifications
On-Off Controller Microprocessor based, on-off control mode Nominal switching hysteresis, typically 3F (1.7C) Input filter time: 1 second Operator Interface Four digit, seven segment LED displays, 0.28 in. (7 mm) high F or C indicator LED Load indicator LED Continuous turn, velocity sensitive rotary encoder for set point adjustment Front panel key push for set point or push for show process options Standard Conditions For Specifications Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz, 0 to 90%, RH, non-condensing, 15-minute warm-up Calibration ambient range: 77F (25C) 3C Sensor Input Thermocouple Grounded or ungrounded Type E, J, K or T thermocouple >10 M input impedance 250 nV input referenced error per 1 source resistance RTD 2-wire platinum, 100 DIN-curve (0.00385 curve) 125 A nominal RTD excitation current Input Accuracy Span Range Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: 32 to 1382F (0 to 750C) Type K: -328 to 2282F (-200 to 1250C) Type T: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Thermocouple Input Calibration accuracy: 1% of input accuracy span, 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient. Exception: Type T, 2.4% of input accuracy span for -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C) Temperature stability: 0.3 degree per degree change in ambient RTD Input Calibration accuracy 1% of input accuracy span 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient Temperature stability: 0.2 degree per degree change in ambient Allowable Operating Ranges Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: -346 to 1900F (-210 to 1038C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1370C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Output Types Switched dc (non-isolated) Supply voltage max.: 24VDC into an infinite load Supply voltage min.: 5VDC at 10mA Min. load impedance: 500 Electromechanical Relay, Form C Min. load current: 100mA 8A @ 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VAC max., inductive Use RC suppression for inductive loads Electrical life 100,000 cycles at rated current Agency Approvals UL 60730-1 Recognized Temperature Controller and Indicator on potted models UL 50 IP65 - tactile key models UL 197 Reviewed for Use in Cooking Appliances UL 873 ANSI Z21.23 Gas Appliance Thermostat Approval Temperature Control and Indicator CSA 22.2 No. 24 Terminals 0.25 in. (6.3 mm) quick connect, push on terminal or removable screw style terminal block Power 24VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 120VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 230 to 240VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 10VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Operating Environment 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Dimensions DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or chassis mount DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 1.38 in. x 0.30 in. (35 mm x 7.5 mm)
Style DIN-rail Square 18 DIN-panel Width 3.08 in. (78.1 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Height 4.42 in. (112.3 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Depth 3.57 in. (90.7 mm) Behind panel 2.04 in. (51.7 mm)
WATLOW
275

SERIES CV
On-off controller, rotary set point adjustment, four character, seven segment display
Part Number
Power Supply Package Sensor Type and Scale Control Type Low Set Point High Set Point Overlay/ Customs Options
CV
B= C= D= E = F = G= 1 = 2 = 5 = 6 = A= B= C= D= H= J = K= L = M= N= P= R= S= T =
1
Power Supply 120VAC, switched dc output 120VAC, 8A relay output 230 to 240VAC, switched dc output 230 to 240VAC, 8A relay output 24VAC, switched dc output 24VAC, 8A relay output Package Panel mount square 8 DIN - spade terminals Din-rail mount - spade terminals Panel mount square 18 DIN - screw terminals Din-rail mount - screw terminals NEMA 4X panel mount, tactile keys (spade terminals) DIN-rail mount, tactile keys (spade terminals) NEMA 4X panel mount, tactile keys (screw terminals) DIN-rail mount, tactile keys (screw terminals) Sensor Type and Scale T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900F) T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038C) T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500F) T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370F) T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750F) T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400F) RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472F) RTD Celsius (-200 to 800C) T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470F) T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800C)
H= C= Heat Cool
Control Type
Low Set Point Operating Range Value
Note: A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value. High Set Point Operating Range Value
Note: A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value. A= B= C= D= 1= 2= 3= 4= Overlay/Customs Options Standard with Watlow logo Push to show process with Watlow logo Push to adjust set point with Watlow logo Show process push to adjust set point with Watlow logo Standard without Watlow logo Push to show process without Watlow logo Push to adjust set point without Watlow logo Show process push to adjust set point without Watlow logo
276
WATLOW

SERIES CF
Watlows family of microprocessor-based temperature controllers offers an economical solution for applications that require simple, on-off control. Controllers are available in a broad range of packaging options, allowing selection of the best version for a specific application. They are available with or without an indicating display and can be ordered in a 18 DIN square panel mount, DIN-rail mount or open board design configuration. The SERIES CF temperature controller incorporates a microprocessor design that delivers the repeatability, accuracy and performance advantages you can count on from Watlows basic temperature controllers. Fixed set points are available and an indicating display is an option. Operating set point temperature values can be specified in the product configuration part number. SERIES CF controllers are UL and C-UL listed and carry CSA and CE approvals. Watlows temperature controllers include industry-leading service and support and are protected by a three-year warranty.

Fixed set points Provides tamper-proof operation Multiple mounting options Minimizes installation time Heat or cool operation Provides application flexibility Fahrenheit or Celsius operation with indication Offers application flexibility Agency approvals Meets certification requirements/compliance Microprocessor based technology Ensures accurate repeatable control
WATLOW
277

SERIES CF
Specifications
On-Off Controller Microprocessor based, on-off control mode Nominal switching hysteresis, typically 3F (1.7C) Input filter time: 1 second Operator Interface 4-digit, 7-segment LED displays, 0.28 in. (7 mm) high non-condensing, 15-minute warm-up F or C indicator LED Standard Conditions For Specifications Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz, 0 to 90%, RH, non-condensing, 15-minute warm-up Calibration ambient range: 77F (25C) 3C Sensor Input Thermocouple Grounded or ungrounded Type E, J, K or T thermocouple >10 M input impedance 250 nV input referenced error per 1 source resistance RTD 2-wire platinum, 100 DIN-curve (0.00385 curve) 125 A nominal RTD excitation current Input Accuracy Span Range Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: 32 to 1382F (0 to 750C) Type K: -328 to 2282F (-200 to 1250C) Type T: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Thermocouple Input Calibration accuracy: 1% of input accuracy span, 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient. Exception: Type T, 2.4% of input accuracy span for -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C) Temperature stability: 0.3 degree per degree change in ambient RTD Input Calibration accuracy 1% of input accuracy span 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient Temperature stability: 0.2 degree per degree change in ambient Allowable Operating Ranges Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: -346 to 1900F (-210 to 1038C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1370C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Output Types Switched dc (non-isolated) Supply voltage max.: 24VDC into an infinite load Supply voltage min.: 5VDC at 10mA Min. load impedance: 500 Electromechanical Relay, Form C Min. load current: 100mA 8A @ 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VAC max., inductive Use RC suppression for inductive loads Electrical life 100,000 cycles at rated current Agency Approvals UL 60730-1 Recognized Temperature Controller and Indicator on potted models UL 197 Reviewed for Use in Cooking Appliances UL 873 ANSI Z21.23 Gas Appliance Thermostat Approval Temperature Control and Indicator CSA 22.2 No. 24 Terminals 0.25 in. (6.3 mm) quick connect, push on terminal or removable screw style terminal block Power 24VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 120VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 230 to 240VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 10VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Operating Environment 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Dimensions DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or chassis mount DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 1.38 in. x 0.30 in. (35 mm x 7.5 mm)
Style Open Board Potted DIN-rail Square 18 DIN-panel Width 2.43 in. (61.7 mm) 2.76 in. (70.1 mm) 3.08 in. (78.1 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Height 2.43 in. (61.7 mm) 4.05 in. (102.9 mm) 4.42 in. (112.3 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Depth 1.78 in. (45.1 mm) 1.84 in. (46.6 mm) 3.57 in. (90.7 mm) Behind panel 2.04 in. (51.7 mm)
278
WATLOW

SERIES CF
On-off controller, fixed set point, no user interface
Part Number
Power Supply Package Sensor Type and Scale Control Type Fixed Set Point Temp. Value Overlay/ Customs Options
CF
B= C= D= E = F = G= 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = Power Supply 120VAC, switched dc output 120VAC, 8A relay output 230 to 240VAC, switched dc output 230 to 240VAC, 8A relay output 24VAC, switched dc output 24VAC, 8A relay output Package Panel mount square 18 DIN - spade terminals Din-rail mount - spade terminals Open board, non potted - spade terminals Potted case - spade terminals Panel mount square 18 DIN - screw terminals Din-rail mount - screw terminals Open board, non potted - screw terminals Sensor Type and Scale T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900F) T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038C) T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500F) T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370F) T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750F) T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400F) RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472F) RTD Celsius (-200 to 800C) T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470F) T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800C)
AAAA
H= C= Heat Cool Fixed Set Point Temperature Value Control Type
Note: A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value. A= 1= Overlay/Customs Options Standard with Watlow logo Standard without Watlow logo
H= J = K= L = M= N= P= R= S= T =
WATLOW
279

SERIES EHG SL10
The SERIES EHG SL10 integrated, multi-function controller is a key component to a powerful system that integrates a heater, an adjustable set point temperature controller, a high/low temperature alert, a power switching device and a high temperature safety limit. Its agency recognized controller/safety limit meets UL 1998 and CE 60730 requirements. An optional display/communications module can be easily added in the field to provide a digital display indication, an adjustment of set point, RS485 Modbus communications and other Human Machine Interface (HMI) features. As a scalable system, only what is needed can be purchased. The EHG SL10 controllers easy to install, compact design, inherent reliability and integrated limit functions offer unmatched value. It is designed for easy integration with Watlow heaters to simplify engineering, reduce component count for new equipment and decrease ownership cost. For original equipment manufacturers, (OEMs), CE, Semi-S2 compliance and UL recognition, the EHG controller reduces time and costs associated with global agency testing and validation.

Process controller and safety limit in one package Meets UL 1998 and CE 60730 requirements Eliminates the need for a thermal fuse on a heater Eliminates replacement of heater when fuse fails Optional display/communications module Allows easy upgrade on to base device Offers low cost field upgrade Provides easy, snap-on installation Accurate and flexible temperature process controller Replaces problematic bi-metal thermostats with accurate electronic temperature process controller Allows easy change of process parameters Ambient operating temperature range 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Increases reliability when mounting in harsh temperature environments or in close proximity to heaters
Integrated high/low temperature alert signal relay Provides dry contact output to activate external alarm or process function Signals control status with three integrated LEDs Allows a signal of up to two amperes 30VAC/VDC, Form A to alert if process temperature is out of range limits Health check diagnostics Monitors maximum heater process temperature, maximum ambient temperature and thermocouple operation Provides health check signal to inform operator that the process is working correctly Universal power supply Allows an input of 85 to 264VAC, 50/60Hz Provides safe control of up to 2400 watts with 10 amperes switching in both controller and safety limit Can be switched from on-off and PID algorithm Increases product life (on-off control is default) Offers selectable PID control algorithm for tighter temperature uniformity Universal 18 turn mounting bracket Allows mounting to most surfaces Provides flexible mountingeither horizontally or vertically
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full SERIES EHG SL10 product section located on pages 251 through 254.
280 WATLOW

SERIES EHG
Many applications requiring a fixed temperature set point rely on a mechanical thermostat for thermal control. Thermostats have proven, however, to be inadequate for many applications due to long-term reliability issues, such as 100,000 cycle rating and poor temperature control. The SERIES EHG thermal solution includes a compact temperature control, thermocouple sensor and power switching device integrated into the heaters power cord. The SERIES EHG reduces system costs and lasts substantially longer than a conventional thermostat solution. The evolution of miniature microprocessor technology and Watlow switching technology fostered development of a small, versatile temperature control and thermocouple sensor that is integrated with Watlow silicone rubber heater products. This device senses the temperature via input from a thermocouple strategically placed on the heater mat. The microprocessor is programmed prior to shipment with an application specific set point. This results in quick delivery of a custom, integrated system. The small thermocouple mass provides superior response to changes in process temperature enabling higher watt density silicone rubber heater designs. These features offer an integrated custom set point temperature controller with superior life span, faster heat-up rates and improved accuracy. The SERIES EHG System has been tested to over four million cycles at rated amperage. Depending on the application, Watlows power switching design can last up to 40 times longer than a conventional thermostat.

Long operational life Improves system reliability Tight temperature control Ensures process accuracy Small sensor footprint Fits with almost any heater Responds quickly to temperature changes Controls high watt densities in low mass applications Reduced system cost A single EHG control can be configured with multiple heaters Pre-wired, in line control Simplifies installation Two wire power connection Durable housing with built-in strain relief Protects electronics Low risk of mechanical damage Manufactured with proven Watlow components Assures reliable system performance
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full SERIES EHG product section located on pages 255 through 256.
WATLOW
281
282
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

Maximum Maximum Agency Limit Monitor Product Approvals Loops Channels Mounting EZ-ZONE RM 192 192 DIN-rail UL, CSA, High-Density CE, RoHS, Limit W.E.E.E., FM, SEMI F47-0200
Communication Protocols Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard Bus, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU Standard Bus
Page 285
256
DIN-rail
UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E., SEMI F47-0200
287
EZ-ZONE PM Limit
1 1
32, 116, 18, UL, CSA, 4 DIN CE, RoHS, front panel W.E.E.E., FM, SEMI F47-0200
289
32, 116 DIN UL, CSA, front panel CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E., FM, SEMI F47-0200 DIN-rail, Front panel DIN-rail, Front panel
295
SERIES LV
UL, CSA, CE, N/A ANSI Z21.23, RoHS, W.E.E.E., FM
299
UL, CSA, CE, N/A ANSI Z21.23, RoHS, W.E.E.E., FM Note: The specifications in the table above are best available values in each category. Not all combinations of these values are available in a single model number.
SERIES LF
302
Limits and Scanners 283
WATLOW
284
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Limit
The EZ-ZONE RM high-density limit module used in conjunction with the EZ-ZONE RM temperature control module and high-density control module offer agency approved over and under temperature limit function to ensure system safety. The EZ-ZONE RM high-density limit controls 4, 8, or 12 limit loops per module or up to 128 limit loops per system.

1 to 128 loop limit controller Eliminates compatability issues often encountered with using many different discrete components and brands Saves engineering time and labor costs while shortening project schedules Allows a common limit controller platform across many design applications Communications Allows standard bus communications Ability to utilize EIA 485, Modbus RTU options SPLIT-RAIL control Minimizes the length and cost of wire runs and improves system reliability by locating inputs closer to sensors and outputs closer to loads SENSOR GUARD Prevents unplanned process shutdowns and product loss by switching to a backup sensor if the primary sensor fails AUTO CLONE Saves time and reduces complexity by automatically configuring a new module with the same parameter settings as the replaced module
High-Density Limit Module Specifications (RML)

(Select an RML module for 4 to 12 safety limits.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all EZ-ZONE controllers Additional Communication Option EIA 485, Modbus RTU Calibration Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max. Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 2k source resistance RTD 2-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV 285
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Limit
High-Density Limit Module Specifications (RML) (Continued)
Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves built-in Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Input Update rate 10Hz Min. open resistance 10k Max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit 13mA Output Hardware 6 digital inputs/outputs: Switched dc, max. 20VDC @ 40mA, 12VDC @ 80mA Open collector, max. 32VDC @ 1.5A, max. 8A per 6 outputs combined Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty
High-Density Limit Module Ordering Information

Requires 24 to 28VAC/VDC power supply, includes communication port for conguration with EZ-ZONE congurator and PC Part Number
EZ-ZONE Rail Mount Limit Module Connector Style Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Future Options Enhanced Options Additional Options
RM
A= F = S= 5 = 6 = A= 5 = 6 = A= 5 = 6 = J = C=
Connector Style/Custom Product J = B= A= 1 =
A
Slot E
Right angle screw connector (standard) Front screw connector Custom Slot A 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with limit control loops 4 thermistor inputs with limit control loops Slot B None 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with limit control loops 4 thermistor inputs with limit control loops Slot D None 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) with limit control loops 4 thermistor inputs with limit control loops 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A 6 digital I/O*
4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A 1 digital input and 2 mechanical relays, 5A (1 Form A and 1 Form C) Enhanced Options Right angle screw connector (standard) Custom Additional Options
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only, for the entered part number XX = Custom * Reset limits via digital input, EZ key on RUI or communications commands
286
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

The EZ-ZONE RM high-density scanner module can be used in conjunction with any EZ-ZONE RM family module as a monitor or to provide additional logic function to a system. The scanner module can also be used as a stand alone product for multiple inputs of monitoring applications. The EZ-ZONE RM high-density scanner module provides 4, 8, 12 or 16 loops of monitoring per module or up to 256 monitoring loops per system.

4 to 256 monitoring loops Monitor onlythermocouple, RTD, process or thermistor inputs Data log via the EZ-ZONE RM control module Accept up to 12 digital inputs Activate up to 12 digital outputs Communications Allows standard bus communications Ability to utilize EIA 485, Modbus RTU options Add on Logic Adds up to 116 points of logic to your system
High-Density Scanner Module Specifications (RMS)

(Select an RMS module for 4 to 16 auxiliary analog inputs.) Line Voltage/Power Power consumption: 7 W, 14VA Any external power supply used should comply with a Class 2 or SELV rating Serial Communications Isolated communications All modules ship with standard bus protocol for configuration and communication with all EZ-ZONE controllers Additional Communication Option EIA 485, Modbus RTU Calibration Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C; 0.2 Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max.
Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors >20M input impedance Max. of 2k source resistance RTD 2-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable, 0-50mV Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves built-in Digital Input Update rate 10Hz DC voltage Max. input 36V at 3mA Min. high state 3V at 0.25mA Max. low state 2V Dry Contact Input Update rate 10Hz Min. open resistance 10k Max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit 13mA Output Hardware 6 digital inputs/outputs: Switched dc, max. 20VDC @ 40mA, 12VDC @ 80mA Open collector, max. 32VDC @ 1.5A, max. 8A per 6 outputs combined Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, requires a min. load of 20mA at 24V, 125VA pilot duty
WATLOW
287
Limits and Scanners

High-Density Scanner Module Ordering Information
Requires 24 to 28VAC/VDC power supply, includes communication port for conguration with EZ-ZONE congurator and PC Part Number
EZ-ZONE Rail Mount Slot A Slot B Slot D Slot E Future Options Enhanced Options Additional Options Scanner Connector Style Module
RM
A= F = S= R= P= A= R= P= A= R= P= J = C=
Connector Style/Custom Product A= R= P= J = C= B= A= 1 =
A
Slot E
Right angle screw connector (standard) Front screw connector Custom Slot A 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops 4 thermistor inputs without control loops Slot B None 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops 4 thermistor inputs without control loops Slot D None 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops 4 thermistor inputs without control loops 4 mechanical relay 5A, Form A 6 digital I/O
None 4 universal inputs (T/C, RTD 2-wire, 0-10VDC, 0-20mA) without control loops 4 4 6 1 thermistor inputs without control loops mechanical relay 5A, Form A digital I/O digital input and 2 mechanical relays, 4A Enhanced Options Standard Bus Standard Bus and Modbus RTU 485 (user-selectable) Additional Options
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard AB = Replacement connectors hardware only, for the entered part number XX = Custom
288
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM Limit
The EZ-ZONE PM panel mount limit controller from Watlow offers control options to reduce system complexity and the cost of thermal loop ownership. The EZ-ZONE PM limit controller provides high amperage power controller output and over/under limit control in one space saving, panel mount package. Because the EZ-ZONE PM limit controller is scalable the customer only pays for what is needed. This controller is available in 132, 116, 18 and 14 DIN panel mount packages.
Features and Benefits - Standard

Configuration communications with software Saves time and improves reliability of controller setup Factory Mutual (FM) approved over/under limit with auxiliary outputs Increases user and equipment safety for over/under temperature conditions Memory for saving and restoring parameter settings Reduces service calls and down time Agency approvals: UL listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E., FM, SEMI F47-0200 Ensures prompt product acceptance Reduces end product documentation costs Touch-safe package Increases installer/operator safety Complies with IP2X requirements Consistent termination labeling connection system Simplifies switching between products Speeds up users system documentation EZ-KEY Enables simple, one-touch operation of user defined, repetitive activities Programmable menu system Reduces setup time and increases operator efficiency Three-year warranty Ensures product support and protection
Features and Benefits - Optional

High amperage power control output Drives 5 amperes resistive loads direct Reduces component count Decreases ownership cost Serial communication capabilities Provides a wide range of protocol choices including Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS DP and DeviceNet Supports network connectivity to a PC or PLC
WATLOW
289
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM Limit
Specifications
Controller Agency approved safety-shutdown over/under limit User-programmable alarms Control sampling rates: input = 10Hz, outputs = 10Hz Isolated Serial Communications EIA 232/485, Modbus RTU EtherNet/IP/Modbus TCP DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP Wiring TerminationTouch-Safe Terminals Input, power and controller output terminals are touch safe, removable, 12 to 22 AWG Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors greater than 20M input impedance, 3A open sensor detection, 2k source resistance max. RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100 and 1000 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 0-20mA @ 100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k, 0-50mV at 20M, 0-1000 potentionmeter; scalable; inverse scaling Functional Operating Range Type J: -346 to 2192F (-210 to 1200C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1371C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) Type E: -454 to 1832F (-270 to 1000C) Type N: -454 to 2372F (-270 to 1300C) Type C: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type D: 32 to 4200F (0 to 2315C) Type F: 32 to 2449F (0 to 1343C) Type R: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type S: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) Type B: 32 to 3300F (0 to 1816C) RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Process: -1999 to 9999 units Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Types R, S, B; 0.2% Type T below -50C: 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max. Thermistor Input 0 to 40k, 0 to 20k, 0 to 10k, 0 to 5k 2.252k and 10k base at 77F (25C) Linearization curves built-in Digital Inputs (DC Voltage) Max. input: 36V at 3mA Logic: min. high state 3V at 0.25mA, max. low state 2V Digital Inputs (Dry Contact) Logic: min. open resistance 10k, max. closed resistance 50 Max. short circuit: 20mA 2 Digital I/O (ordered with power supply option) Update rate: 10Hz Input type: user-selectable, dc voltage or dry contact Output type: switched dc Output voltage: 24V Output 5: 24mA max. or drive one 3-pole DIN-A-MITE Output 6: 10mA max. Output Hardware Switched dc: 22 to 32VDC @ 30mA max. per single output and 40mA max. total per paired outputs (1 & 2, 3 & 4) Open collector: 30VDC max. @ 100mA max. SSR, Form A, 24 to 240VAC, 1A at 50F (10C) to 0.5A at 149F (65C) resistive load, 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression, 120/240VAC @ 20VA pilot duty Electromechanical relay, Form C, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., 5A resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, 120/240 @ 125VA or 24VAC @ 25VA pilot duty Electromechanical relay, Form C, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., 5A resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load, 120/240 @ 125VA or 24VAC @ 25VA pilot duty Universal process output: range selectable; 0 to 10VDC 15mV into a min. 1,000 load with 2.5mV nominal resolution; 0 to 20mA 30A into max. 800 load with 5A nominal resolution; temperature stability 100ppm/C Operator Interface Dual 4-digit, 7-segment LED displays Advance, RESET, up and down keys, plus 1 or 2 programmable EZ-KEY(s) depending on model size Typical display update rate: 1Hz
290
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM Limit
Line Voltage/Power High voltage option: 85 to 264VAC, 47 to 63Hz Low voltage option: 20 to 28VAC, +10/-15%; 50/60Hz, 5% or 12 to 40VDC Max. power consumption: 10VA Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Compliant with SEMI F47-0200, Figure R1-1 voltage sag requirements @ 24VAC or higher Environment Operating temperature: 0 to 149F (-18 to 65C) Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Relative humidity: 0 to 90%, non-condensing Agency Approvals cULus UL/EN/CSA C22.2 No 61010-1 Listed, File E185611 CSA C22.2 No. 24, File 158031 UL 50 4X indoor locations, NEMA 4X, IP66 front seal FM Class 3545 CE, RoHS by design, W.E.E.E. EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet ODVA Conformance Tested
EZ-ZONE PM 132 DIN
2.1 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. 15.82 mm 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
1.22 in. (30.86 mm)
0.5 in. (12.7 mm)
1.21 in. (30.73 mm)
4 in. (101.57 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 116 DIN

2.1 in. (53.34 mm) 0.62 in. (15.82 mm) 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
2.1 in. (53.34 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm) 1.2 in. (30.49 mm) 4 in. (101.57 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 18 DIN - Horizontal

0.62 in. (15.75 mm) 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
3.95 in. (100.33 mm)
2.1 in. (53.34 mm)
2.16 in. (53.86 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm) 1.21 in. (30.73 mm) 4 in. (101.6 mm)
WATLOW
291
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM Limit
Dimensional Drawings (Continued)
EZ-ZONE PM 18 DIN - Vertical
2.1 in. (53.34 mm) 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)
EZ-ZONE PM 14 DIN
3.95 in. (100.33 mm) 0.62 in. (15.75 mm) 0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
3.95 in. (100.33 mm)
3.95 in. (100.33 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm) 1.21 in. (30.73 mm) 3.97 in. (100.84 mm)
2.16 in. (54.86 mm)
0.4 in. (10.16 mm)
1.21 in. (30.73 mm)
4 in. (101.6 mm)
EZ-ZONE Comparison Chart Number of Digital Inputs/Outputs (DIO) Number of Outputs Maximum Power Output Standard Bus Communications Field Bus Communications
1
PM 32 DIN
0 to 2 1 to 4
PM 16 DIN
0 to 2 1 to 6
PM 8 DIN
0 to 2 1 to 6
PM 4 DIN
0 to 2 1 to 6
5A mechanical relay 5A mechanical relay 5A mechanical relay 5A mechanical relay Yes Modbus RTU 485 Yes Modbus RTU 232/485, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP Yes Modbus RTU 232/485, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP Yes Modbus RTU 232/485, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP
292
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM Limit
Limit Model Ordering Information
Universal sensor input, configuration communications Red green seven segment displays
Part Number
Package Size Primary Function Power Supply, Digital I/O Output 1&2 Hardware Additional Communication Options Custom Options
PM
3 6 8 9 4 L = M= D= 1 2 3 4 = = = = = = = = = 32 DIN 1 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical 1 8 DIN horizontal 1 4 DIN
1
Package Size
AAAA
Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 AJ = None CJ = Switched dc/open collector EJ = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Output 2 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A
Primary Function Limit controller with universal input Limit controller with thermistor input Custom firmware Power Supply, Digital I/O 100 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC plus 2 digital I/O points 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC plus 2 digital I/O points
Additional Communication Options, Standard Bus Always Included A = None 1= EIA 485 Modbus RTU Custom Options
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate
Typical Block Diagram

EZ-ZONE PM Limit Model
WATLOW
293
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM Limit
Enhanced Limit Model Ordering Information
Universal sensor input, configuration communications Red green seven segment displays
Part Number
Package Size Primary Function Power Supply, Digital I/O Output 1&2 Hardware Additional Communication Options Future Option Output 3&4 Hardware Future Option Custom Options
PM
6 8 9 4 L = M= D= 1 2 3 4 = = = = = = = = 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical 1 8 DIN horizontal 1 4 DIN
1
Package Size
A
(PM6 models only: If communications Options 2 thru 6 were ordered then Option AA must be ordered here) AA = AJ = AK = CA = CC = CJ = CK = EA = EC = EJ = EK = FA = FC = FJ = FK = KK = Output 3 None None None Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Switched dc/open collector Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Mechanical relay 5A, Form C Universal process Universal process Universal process Universal process SSR Form A, 0.5A Output 4 None Mechanical relay 5A, SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, SSR Form A, 0.5A None Switched dc Mechanical relay 5A, SSR Form A, 0.5A SSR Form A, 0.5A
Primary Function Limit controller with universal input Limit controller with thermistor input Custom firmware Power Supply, Digital I/O 100 to 240VAC 100 to 240VAC plus 2 digital I/O points 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC plus 2 digital I/O points Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 Output 2 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A
Form A
Form A
Form A
Form A
AJ = None CJ = Switched dc/open collector EJ = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C
Custom Options
Additional Communication Options, Standard Bus Always Included A = None 1= EIA 485 Modbus RTU 2= EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU 3= EtherNet/IP/Mobus TCP 5= DeviceNet 6= PROFIBUS DP
Firmware, Overlays, Parameter Settings AA = Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate
294
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

The EZ-ZONE PM Express panel mount limit controller from Watlow is an industry leading limit controller that allows for optimal performance utilizing simple over/under limit control and menu functionality without complex features. The EZ-ZONE PM Express limit controller is ideally suited for basic applications and usage levels. The EZ-ZONE PM Express limit controller is the next generation of controllers leveraging the strong legacy of Watlows SERIES 94, SERIES 945 and SERIES SD limit controllers where easy-to-use features are needed for basic applications. It includes one universal input and the option for up to two outputs and is available in 132 and 116 DIN panel mount packages. The EZ-ZONE PM Express limit is a great addition to the EZ-ZONE PM family which includes two other controller versions, the EZ-ZONE PM integrated controller and the EZ-ZONE PM temperature and process controller. This family provides an ideal platform to perform many applications. Front panel removable Saves time and labor for replacements and troubleshooting P3T armor sealing system Complies to NEMA 4X, IP66 Allows controller to be cleaned and washed Certified UL 50 independent to NEMA 4X specification Touch-safe package Increases installer and operator safety Complies with IP2X requirements Consistent Termination Labeling (CTL) connection system Simplifies switching between products Speeds up users system documentation Three-year warranty Ensures product support and protection High-amperage power control output Drives 5 ampere resistive loads direct Reduces component count Saves panel space and simplifies wiring Decreases ownership cost

Simplified menu Fits basic applications with a user-friendly interface supported by two menus and a streamlined list of parameters Eliminates user complexity often encountered when using more advanced limit controllers and their unnecessary features Reduces user training costs and programming errors Standard bus communications Allows easy product configuration via PC communications protocol and free software Saves time, simplifies the programming process and improves reliability of the controller setup Factory Mutual (FM) approved over and under limit with auxiliary outputs Increases user and equipment safety for over and under-temperature conditions Agency approvals: UL listed, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. FM, SEMI F47-0200 Ensures prompt product acceptance Reduces end-product documentation costs
WATLOW
295
Limits and Scanners

Specifications
Line Voltage/Power 85 to 264VAC, 47 to 63Hz 20 to 28VAC, +10/-15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 12 to 40VDC 10VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via non-volatile memory Compliant with SEMI F47-0200, Figure R1-1 voltage sag requirements @ 24VAC or higher Environment 0 to 149F (-18 to 65C) operating temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) storage temperature 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity: 0.1% of span, 1C @ the calibrated ambient temperature and rated line voltage Type S: 0.2% Type T: below -50C; 0.2% Calibration ambient temperature @ 77F 5F (25C 3C) Accuracy span: 1000F (540C) min. Temperature stability: 0.1F/F (0.1C/C) rise in ambient max. Agency Approvals UL/EN 61010 listed ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007 Class 1, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Temperature Code T4A UL 50, NEMA 4X, EN 60529 IP66 FM Class 3545 File 3029084 temperature limit switches CSA C22.2 No. 24 File 158031 RoHS, W.E.E.E. CSA 610110 CE Serial Communications Isolated communications Standard bus configuration protocol Wiring TerminationTouch-Safe Terminals Input, power and controller output terminals are touch safe, removable, 12 to 22 AWG Universal Input Thermocouple, grounded or ungrounded sensors, greater than 20M input impedance, 3A open sensor detection, 2k source resistance max. RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100 @ 32F (0C) calibration to DIN curve (0.00385//C) Process, 4-20mA @ 100, or 0-10VDC @ 20k input impedance; scalable Functional Operating Range Type J: -346 to 2192F (-210 to 1200C) Type K: -328 to 2500F (-200 to 1370C) Type T: -328 to 750F (-200 to 400C) Type N: -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C) Type S: -58 to 3214F (-50 to 1767C) RTD (DIN): -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Process: -1999 to 9999 units Output Hardware Switched dc = 22 to 32VDC @ 30mA Switched dc/open collector = 30VDC max. @ 100mA max. current sink Solid state relay (SSR), Form A, 0.5A @ 24VAC min., 264VAC max., opto-isolated, without contact suppression Electromechanical relay, Form C, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load Electromechanical relay, Form A, 5A, 24 to 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive load, 100,000 cycles at rated load NO-ARC relay, Form A, 15A, 24 to 240VAC, no VDC, resistive load, 2 million cycles at rated load Universal process, Output range selectable: 0 to 10VDC into a min. 1,000 load 4 to 20mA into max. 800 load Operator Interface Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED displays Typical display update rate 1Hz Advance, RESET, up and down keys plus an EZ-KEY (not available in 132 DIN)
296
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

EZ-ZONE PM EXPRESS Limit Model
EZ-ZONE PM 132 DIN
EZ-ZONE PM 116 DIN
WATLOW
297
Limits and Scanners

All models include: Universal sensor input, standard bus configuration communications Dual line red over green seven segment displays
Part Number
Package Size Primary Function Power Supply Output 1&2 Hardware Future Option Menu Type Additional Options
PM
3 6 8 9 4 L = 1 = 3 = = = = = =
1
L
Package Size 32 DIN 1 16 DIN 1 8 DIN vertical (future option) 1 8 DIN horizontal (future option) 1 4 DIN (future option) Primary Function Limit controller with universal input Power Supply, Digital I/O 100 to 240VAC 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC
AAAA
B
Output 1 and 2 Hardware Options Output 1 AJ = None CJ = Switched dc/open collector EJ = Mechanical relay 5A, Form C B= Output 2 Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A Mechanical relay 5A, Form A
Menu Type PM EXPRESS with English manual
Additional Options AA = Standard EZ-ZONE PM face plate AB EZ-ZONE logo, no Watlow name AC = No logo, no Watlow name
Replacement Parts/Accessories
PID Manuals 0600-0065-0000 0600-0065-0001 0600-0065-0002 0600-0065-0003 0600-0065-0004 0600-0065-0005 0600-0065-0006 0600-0065-0007 English Simplified Chinese Japanese Korean German French Italian Spanish Limit Manuals 0600-0066-0000 English
298
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

SERIES LV
Watlows family of microprocessor-based limit controllers provides an economical solution for applications requiring temperature limit control. Limits are available in a broad range of packaging options, allowing selection of the best version for an application. Limits are available with an operator interface and can be ordered in 18 DIN-square panel mount or DIN-rail mount design configurations. The SERIES LV limit family incorporates a microprocessor design platform. This design provides significant improvements in the performance, repeatability and accuracy offered by Watlows current line of analog limit controllers. The variable SERIES LV limit includes an operator interface for viewing and selecting the set point. A red, four-character seven segment LED displays the set point. Set point selection is made with a continuous turn rotary encoder. Operating range temperature values are customer defined in the product configuration part number. The limit controllers are factory mutual (FM) approved with special UL approval for the open board potted versions. Watlows limit controllers include industry leading service and support and are protected by a three-year warranty.

Adjustable set points Offers control flexibility Four character LED display Improves set point selection accuracy Multiple mounting options Minimizes installation time High or low limit with auto or manual reset Provides application flexibility Fahrenheit or Celsius operation with indication Offers application flexibility Sensor break protection Provides positive system shutdown Agency approvals Meets certification requirements/compliance Microprocessor based technology Ensures accurate, repeatable control
WATLOW
299
Limits and Scanners

SERIES LV
Specifications
Limit Controller Microprocessor-based limit controller Nominal switching hysteresis, typically 3F (1.7C) High or low limit, factory selectable Latching output requires manual reset upon over or under temperature condition Manual or automatic reset on power loss, factory selectable Internal front panel or external customer supplied momentary reset switch Input filter time: 1 second Operator Interface Four digit, seven segment LED displays, 0.28 in. (7 mm) high F or C indicator LED Alarm indicator LED Continuous turn, velocity sensitive rotary encoder for set point adjustment Front panel SET/RESET Standard Conditions For Specifications Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz, 0 to 90% RH non-condensing, 15-minute warm-up Calibration ambient range: 77F (25C) 3C Sensor Input Thermocouple Grounded or ungrounded Type E, J, K, T thermocouple >10 M input impedance 250 nV input referenced error per 1 source resistance RTD 2-wire platinum, 100 DIN-curve (0.00385 curve) 125A nominal RTD excitation current Input Accuracy Span Range Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: 32 to 1382F (0 to 750C) Type K: -328 to 2282F (-200 to 1250C) Type T: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Thermocouple Input Calibration accuracy: 1% of input accuracy span, 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient. Exception: Type T, 2.4% of input accuracy span for -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C) Temperature stability: 0.3 per degree change in ambient RTD Input Calibration accuracy 1% of input accuracy span 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient Temperature stability: 0.2 per degree change in ambient Allowable Operating Ranges Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: -346 to 1900F (-210 to 1038C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1370C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Electromechanical Relay, Form C Min. load current: 100mA 8A @ 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VAC max., inductive Use RC suppression for inductive loads Electrical life 100,000 cycles at rated current External Reset Switch Momentary, dry contact closure Agency Approvals SERIES LV (potted version only) UL 991 recognized temperature limit for cooking industry UL 60730-1 SERIES LV (including potted version) UL 873 recognized temperature regulator UL 197 reviewed for use in cooking appliances UL 991 UL 50 IP65 for tactile key models ANSI Z21.23 Gas appliance thermostat approval CSA C22.2#24 approved limit control FM Class 3545 temperature limit switches RoHS, WEEE Terminals 0.25 in. (6.3 mm) quick connect, push on terminal or removable screw terminals Power 24VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 120VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 230 to 240VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 10VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Operating Environment 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
300
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

SERIES LV
Dimensions DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or chassis mount DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 1.38 in. x 0.30 in. (35 mm x 7.5 mm)
Style DIN-rail Square 18 DIN-panel Width 3.08 in. (78.1 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Height 4.42 in. (112.3 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Depth 3.57 in. (90.7 mm) Behind panel 2.04 in. (51.7 mm)
Limit controller with 8A relay output, rotary set point adjustment, four character, seven segment display, reset switch
Part Number
Power Supply Package Sensor Type and Scale Limit Type Low Set Point High Set Point Overlay/ Custom Options
LV
C= E = G= 1 = 2 = 5 = 6 = A= B= C= D= H= J = K= L = M= N= P= R= S= T = 120VAC 230 to 240VAC 24VAC Package Panel mount square 18 DIN - spade terminals Din-rail mount - spade terminals Panel mount square 18 DIN - screw terminals Din-rail mount - screw terminals NEMA 4X panel mount, tactile keys (spade terminals) DIN-rail mount, tactile keys (spade terminals) NEMA 4X panel mount, tactile keys (screw terminals) DIN-rail mount, tactile keys (screw terminals) Sensor Type and Scale T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900F) T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038C) T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500F) T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370C) T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750F) T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400C) RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472F) RTD Celsius (-200 to 800C) T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470F) T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800C) Power Supply U= W= Y= Z= High limit manual reset High limit auto reset Low limit manual reset Low limit auto reset Low Set Point Operating Range Value Limit Type
Note: A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value. High Set Point Operating Range Value
Note: A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value. A= 1= Overlay/Custom Options Standard with Watlow logo Standard without Watlow logo
WATLOW
301
Limits and Scanners

SERIES LF
Watlows family of microprocessor-based limit controllers provide an economical solution for applications requiring temperature limit control. Limits are available in a broad range of packaging options, allowing selection of the best version for an individual application. Controllers are available without an operator interface and can be ordered in square 18 DIN-panel mount, DIN-rail mount or open board design configurations. The SERIES LF limit family incorporates a microprocessor design platform. This design provides significant improvements in the performance, repeatability and accuracy offered by Watlows current line of analog basic temperature controllers. The SERIES LF limit offers fixed set points and can be supplied with or without an operator interface. Operating set point temperature values are customer defined in the product configuration part number. The LF limit controllers are factory mutual (FM) approved with special UL approval for the open board potted versions. Watlows limit controllers include industry leading service and support and are protected by a three-year warranty.

Fixed set points Provides tamper-proof operation Multiple mounting options Minimizes installation time High or low limit with auto or manual reset Provides application flexibility Fahrenheit or Celsius operation with indication Offers application flexibility Sensor break protection Provides positive system shutdown Agency approvals Meets certification requirements/compliance Microprocessor based technology Ensures accurate, repeatable control
302
WATLOW
Limits and Scanners

SERIES LF
Specifications
Limit Controller Microprocessor based, limit controller Nominal switching hysteresis, typically 3F (1.7C) High or low limit, factory selectable Latching output requires manual reset upon over or under temperature condition Manual or automatic reset on power loss, factory selectable External customer supplied momentary reset switch Input filter time: 1 second Standard Conditions For Specifications Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz, 0 to 90% RH non-condensing, 15-minute warm-up Calibration ambient range: 77F (25C) 3C Sensor Input Thermocouple Grounded or ungrounded Type E, J, K, T thermocouple >10 M input impedance 250 nV input referenced error per 1 source resistance RTD 2-wire platinum, 100 DIN-curve (0.00385 curve) 125A nominal RTD excitation current Input Accuracy Span Range Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: 32 to 1382F (0 to 750C) Type K: -328 to 2282F (-200 to 1250C) Type T: -328 to 662F (-200 to 350C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) Thermocouple Input Calibration accuracy: 1% of input accuracy span, 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient. Exception: Type T, 2.4% of input accuracy span for -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C) Temperature stability: 0.3 per degree change in ambient RTD Input Calibration accuracy 1% of input accuracy span 1 at standard conditions and actual calibration ambient Temperature stability: 0.2 per degree change in ambient Allowable Operating Ranges Type E: -328 to 1470F (-200 to 800C) Type J: -346 to 1900F (-210 to 1038C) Type K: -454 to 2500F (-270 to 1370C) Type T: -454 to 750F (-270 to 400C) RTD (DIN) -328 to 1472F (-200 to 800C) WATLOW Output Types Electromechanical Relay, Form C Min. load current: 100mA 8A @ 240VAC or 30VDC max., resistive 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VAC max., inductive Use RC suppression for inductive loads Electrical life 100,000 cycles at rated current External Reset Switch Momentary, dry contact closure Agency Approvals SERIES LF (potted version only) UL 991 recognized temperature limit for cooking industry UL 60730-1 SERIES LF (including potted version) UL 873 recognized temperature regulator UL 197 reviewed for use in cooking appliances UL 991 ANSI Z21.23 gas appliance thermostat approval CSA C22.2#24 approved limit control FM Class 3545 temperature limit switches RoHS, WEEE Terminals 0.25 in. (6.3 mm) quick connect, push on terminal or removable screw terminals Power 24VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 120VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 230 to 240VAC +10%; -15%; 50/60Hz, 5% 10VA max. power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Operating Environment 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Dimensions DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or chassis mount DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 1.38 in. x 0.30 in. (35 mm x 7.5 mm)
Style Open Board Potted DIN-rail Square 18 DIN-panel Width 2.43 in. (61.7 mm) 2.76 in. (70.1 mm) 3.08 in. (78.1 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Height 2.43 in. (61.7 mm) 4.05 in. (102.9 mm) 4.42 in. (112.3 mm) 2.85 in. (72.4 mm) Depth 1.78 in. (45.1 mm) 1.84 in. (46.6 mm) 3.57 in. (90.7 mm) Behind panel 2.04 in. (51.7 mm)
303
Limits and Scanners

SERIES LF
Limit controller with 8A relay output, fixed set point
Part Number
Power Supply Package Sensor Type and Scale Limit Type Fixed Set Point Temp. Value Overlay/ Custom Options
LF
C= E = G= 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = 120VAC 230 to 240VAC 24VAC Package Panel mount square 1/8 DIN - spade terminals Din-rail mount - spade terminals Open, non potted - spade terminals Potted case - spade terminals Panel mount square 1/8 DIN - screw terminals Din-rail mount - screw terminals Open, non potted - screw terminals Sensor Type and Scale T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900F) T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038C) T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500F) T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370C) T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750F) T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400C) RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472F) RTD Celsius (-200 to 800C) T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470F) T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800C) Power Supply
AAAA
U= W= Y= Z= High limit manual reset High limit auto reset Low limit manual reset Low limit auto reset Fixed Set Point Temperature Value Limit Type
Note: A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value. A= 1= Overlay/Custom Options Standard with Watlow logo Standard without Watlow logo
H= J = K= L = M= N= P= R= S= T =
304
WATLOW

Product EZ-ZONE ST DIN-A-MITE A DIN-A-MITE B DIN-A-MITE C DIN-A-MITE D POWER SERIES QPAC E-SAFE II SERIES CZR Solid State Relays (SSR) Maximum Output Phase Output Firing Configurations Agency Approvals 75A Zero Cross, 1 UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, Phase Angle W.E.E.E. 25A 40A 80A 100A 250A 1000A 35A 42A 75A Zero Cross Zero Cross Zero Cross, Phase Angle Zero Cross Zero Cross, Phase Angle Zero Cross, Phase Angle Zero Cross Zero Cross Zero Cross 1 1 1 or 3 1 1 or 3 1 or 3 1, 2 or 3 1 1 UL, C-UL, CE, SCCR UL, C-UL, CE, SCCR UL, C-UL, CE, SCCR UL, C-UL, CE, SCCR UL, C-UL, CE, SCCR UL, C-UL, SCCR UL, C-UL, CE, W.E.E.E. UL , CSA, CE, SCCR
Page 307 308 311 314 320 323 328 333 336 339
UL, CSA, SCCR
WATLOW
305

Comparison Guide
Initial Cost 3 Year Cost a Control Life Heater Life EMI Generation Control Response Rate Options Comments
Electromechanical Relay and Contactor Low for low Highest Limited current electrical and mechanical Hybrid Power Switch Low Medium High
Shortest
Yes, coil and contacts
Poor
Slowest
None
To extend life the cycle time is normally extended to 30 seconds or more. Such as Watlow E-SAFE II and NO ARC relays. Mercury is not desirable. Minimum cycle time is two seconds. Position sensitive. Excellent control with one second cycle time. Requires heatsink. Excellent control with one second cycle time. Fastest variable time base unit. Required for tungsten elements, transformers, or for current limiting. Cannot be turned full on or off, inefficient.
Good
Minimal
Good
Fast
None
Mercury Displacement Relay (MDR) Low for Medium low to medium current Solid State Relay (SSR) Medium Medium High Good Yes, coil and contact Fair to good Medium to fast None
Minimal with burst fire Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) Solid State Contactor Medium Low Extended Extended Minimal SCR Burst Firing High Low
Extended
Extended
Good
Fast
None
Good
Fast
None
Extended
Longest
Minimal
Excellent
Fastest
None
SCR Phase-Angle Firing High Lowest Extended
Longest
High
Excellent
Fastest
Current limit
Saturable Core Reactor Highest Low

a
Extended
Longest
Minimal
Very good
Fast
Current limit
Includes heater replacement and lost production.
306
WATLOW

EZ-ZONE ST
Features and Benets

Back panel or DIN-rail mount Provides several mounting options Compact package Reduces panel size Touch-safe package Complies with IP2X increasing user safety 0.1 percent temperature accuracy Provides efficient and accurate temperature control Agency approvals: UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. Meets applications requiring agency approvals Three-year warranty Ensures Watlows reliability and product support Off-the-shelf designed system solution Improves system reliability and termination reduction Reduces installation cost Eliminates incompatibility headaches often encountered with using many different components and brands Profile capability Includes ramp and soak with four files and 40 total steps Ability to communicate with programmable logic controller (PLC), personal computer (PC) or operator interface terminal (OIT) Optional EIA 485 Modbus RTU RUI/communications gateway with optional EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP/TCP Modbus, DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP. Refer to page 353 for further information. Solid state relay output Allows faster cycling, more precise control, increased heater life and improves energy efficiency Ability to handle up to 75 amperes Uses either zero-cross or phase angle control modes for flexibility to control resistive loads such as nichrome, tungsten or quartz lamps Utilizes phase angle control mode to prevent load failure or blowing fuses for tungsten or quartz loads PID temperature control Allows single input/dual output Allows standard PID or adaptive TRU-TUNE+ tuning algorithms for demanding controllability requirements Optional temperature limit Increases safety in over- and under-temperature condition Optional definite purpose mechanical contactor Enables circuit safety shut down driven by limit control or PID alarm output signal
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE ST product section located on pages 231 through 237.
WATLOW 307

DIN-A-MITE A
The DIN-A-MITE A power controller is designed and manufactured with quality features expected from Watlow. DIN-A-MITE A capabilities include single-phase zero-cross switching up to 25 amperes at 600VAC (see rating curve). A unique integrated design removes the guesswork associated with selecting a proper heat sink and adequate terminations for the application. DIN-rail and back panel mounting is standard on this family of controllers. The DIN-A-MITE is also mercury free. Variable time base, 4-20mA process control or VAC/VDC input contactor versions are available. All configurations are model number dependent and factory selectable. This power controller includes 200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) tested up to 480VAC to prevent arch flash with required fusing.

200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) Prevents arc flash DIN-rail or standard panel mount Provides versatility, quickness and low-cost installation Compact size Reduces panel space and cost Touch-safe terminals Increases safety for installer/user Mercury free Environmentally safe Faster switching with solid state Saves energy and extends heater life UL 508 listed, C-UL and CE with filter Meets applications requiring agency approval Back-to-back SCR design Ensures a rugged design
308
WATLOW

DIN-A-MITE A
Specifications
Operator Interface Command signal input Input indicator light LED Amperage Single phase, see the output rating curve Max. I2t for fusing: 4000A2sec Latching current: 200mA Holding current: 100mA Power dissipation is 1.2 watts per ampere switched 200KA SCCR, Type 1 and 2 approved with the recommended fusing; see user manual Line Voltage 20 to 660VAC model number dependent; see ordering information Off-state leakage: 1mA at 77F (25C) max. 50/60Hz independent Control Mode-Zero Cross Input control signal Type C: VDC input contactor Input control signal Type K: VAC input contactor To increase service life on contactor input models, the cycle time should be less than three seconds Input control signal Type F: 4 to 20mA DC proportional variable time base control; 3 cycles on, 3 cycles off at 50% power Input Command Signal AC contactor 24VAC 10%, 120VAC +10/-25%, 240VAC +10/-25% @ 25mA max. per controlled leg DC Contactor 4.5 to 32VDC: max. current @ 4.5 VDC is 8mA Loop powered linear current 4 to 20mA DC: loop-powered, input Type F0 option only (requires current source with 6.2VDC available, no more than 3 DIN-A-MITE inputs can be connected in series) Agency Approvals CE with proper filter: 204/108/EC electromagnetic compatibility directive EN 61326-1: industrial immunity Class A emissions 2006/95/EC low voltage directive EN 50178 safety requirements Installation category III, pollution degree 2 UL 508 listed and C-UL File E73741 Input Terminals Compression: will accept 24 to 16 AWG (0.2 to 1.5 mm2 ) wire Line and Load Terminals Compression: will accept 18 to 8 AWG (0.8 to 8.4 mm2) wire Operating Environment Up to 176F (80C); see the output rating curve chart for specific applications 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Installation only tested to 3,000 meters Units are suitable for Pollution degree 2 Mounting Options include DIN-rail or standard back panel mounting The DIN-rail specification is: DIN EN 50022, 1.3 in. (35 mm) by 0.3 in. 7.5 mm Mount the cooling fins vertically Dimensions Height: 3.7 in. (95 mm) high x 1.8 in. (45 mm) wide x 3.9 in. (98 mm) deep Weight: 0.71 lb (0.32kg)
Specications are subject to change without notice.
Output Rating Curve

30
Current (Amperes) into a Resistive Load
DIN-A-MITE Style A Ratings at 100% On
25 20 15 10 5 0 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
Max. Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature (C)
WATLOW
309

DIN-A-MITE A
Part Number
Phase Cooling & Current Rating Line & Load Voltage Input Type User Manual Custom Options
D
1= 0=
0
Phase
0
0= 1= 2= 3= 00 = Standard parts User Manual English German Spanish French Custom Options
1-phase, 1 controlled leg Cooling and Current Rating Natural convection current rating 18A @ 50C (see derating curve for current rating at other temperatures) Line and Load Voltage
02 = 24 to 48VAC 24 = 100 to 240VAC 60 = 277 to 600VAC C0 = F0 = K1 = K2 = K3 = Input Type 4.5 to 32VDC contactor 4 to 20mA DC proportional 22 to 26VAC contactor 100 to 120VAC contactor 200 to 240VAC contactor
Recommended Semiconductor Fuse and Fuse Holder

Watlow 17-8025 17-5110 Cooper Bussmann FWC25A10F B24202 Ferraz Shawmut L330014 USM1I
Fuse Holder
310
WATLOW

DIN-A-MITE B
The DIN-A-MITE B power controller provides a low-cost, highly compact and versatile solid state option for controlling electric heat. The DIN-A-MITE B capabilities include single-phase and three-phase zero-cross switching up to 40 and 22 amperes, respectively at 600VAC (see rating curve). This controllers design includes proper heat sinking and terminations simplifying integration into applications. DIN-rail and back panel mounting is standard on this family of controllers. The DIN-A-MITE controller is also mercury free. Variable time base, 4-20mA process control or VAC/VDC input contactor versions are available. A shorted silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) alarm option is also available. All configurations are model number dependent and factory selectable. This power controller also includes 200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) tested up to 480VAC to prevent arch flash with required fusing.

200KA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) Prevents arc flash DIN-rail or standard panel mount Provides versatility, quickness and low-cost installation Compact size Reduces panel space and cost Touch-safe terminals Increases safety for installer and users Single and three-phase power Permits use in a variety of applications Mercury free Environmentally safe Faster switching with solid state Saves energy and extends heater life UL 508 listed, C-UL and CE with filter Meets applications requiring agency approval Back-to-back SCR design Ensures a rugged design Shorted output alarm (optional) Notifies the user in case of a shorted SCR
WATLOW
311

DIN-A-MITE B
Specifications
Operator Interface Command signal input and indication light Alarm output and indication light Amperage Rating See the output rating curve below Max. surge current for 16.6ms, 380A peak Max. I2t for fusing is 4,000A2s Latching current: 200mA min. Holding current: 100mA min. Off-state leakage 1mA at 77F (25C) max. Power dissipation = 1.2 watts per amperes per leg switched 200KA SCCR, Type 1 and 2 approved with the recommended fusing; see user manual Line Voltage 20 to 660VAC model number dependent; see ordering information Control Mode, Zero-Cross Input control signal Type C: VDC input contactor Input control signal Type K: VAC input contactor To increase service life on contactor input models the cycle time should be less than three seconds Input Control Signal Type F: 4 to 20mA DC proportional variable time base control Input Command Signal AC contactor 24VAC 10%, 120VAC +10/-25%, 240VAC +10/-25% @ 25mA max. per controlled leg DC Contactor 4.5 to 32VDC: max. current @ 4.5VDC is 6mA per leg. Add 2mA per LED used to the total current Loop powered linear current 4 to 20mA DC: loop-powered, input Type F0 option only (requires current source with 6.2VDC available, no more than three DIN-A-MITE inputs connected in series); 3 cycles on, 3 cycles off at 50% power Alarm Shorted SCR Alarm Option Alarm state when the input command signal off and a 10A or more load current is detected by the current transformer (two turns required for 5A and three turns for 2.5A) Alarm Output Energizes on alarm, non-latching Triac 24 to 240VAC, external supply with a current rating of 300mA @ 77F (25C), 200mA @ 122F (50C), 100mA @ 176F (80C) and a holding current of 200A with a latching current of 5mA typical 312 Agency Approvals CE with proper filter: 204/108/EC electromagnetic compatibility directive EN 61326-1: industrial immunity class A emissions 2006/95/EC low voltage directive EN 50178 safety requirements Installation category III, pollution degree 2 UL 508 listed and C-UL File E73741 Input Terminals Compression: will accept 24 to 16 AWG (0.2. to 1.5 mm2) wire Line and Load Terminals Compression: will accept 18 to 8 AWG (0.8 to 8.4 mm2) wire Operating Environment See the output rating curve 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to +85C) Insulation tested to 3,000 meters DIN-rail Mount DIN EN 50022, 1.3 in. (35 mm) by 0.3 in. (7.5 mm) Back Panel Mount Four mounting holes M3 to M4 (No. 6 to No. 8) fastener Dimensions Height: 3.7 in. (95 mm) high x 3.1 in. (80 mm) wide x 4.9 in. (124 mm) deep Weight: 1.5 lb (0.68kg)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Output Rating Curve

90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Current Rating Table

Phase Cooling Current at 122F (50C) 35A 25A 17A
DIN-A-MITE Style B Ratings at 100% On Natural Convection
1 2, 8 3, 9
3-ph ase
0 0 0
3-pha se, 3
gle Sin a Ph se
, 2 le g
leg
WATLOW

DIN-A-MITE B
Part Number
Phase Cooling & Current Rating Line & Load Voltage Input Control Signal Alarm User Manual Custom Options
D
1= 2= 3= 8= 9= 0=
B
Phase
0 = No alarm S = Shorted SCR alarm 0= 1= 2= 3= Alarm
1-phase, 1 controlled leg 3-phase, 2 controlled legs 3-phase, 3 controlled legs 2 independent zones (input control C or K) 3 independent zones (input control C or K) Cooling and Current Rating Natural convection standard DIN-rail or panel mount heat sink Line and Load Voltage
User Manual English German Spanish French Custom Options
02 = 24 to 48VAC 24 = 100 to 240VAC 60 = 277 to 600VAC C0 = F0 = K1 = K2 = K3 = Input Control Signal 4.5 to 32VDC contactor 4 to 20mA DC proportional 22 to 26VAC contactor 100 to 120VAC contactor 200 to 240VAC contactor
00 = Standard parts XX = Any letter or number, custom options, labeling, etc.
Recommended Semiconductor Fuse and Fuse Holder

Fuse Part Number
Fuse Rating 20A 25A 40A 50A Watlow 17-8020 17-8025 17-8040 17-8050 Cooper Bussmann FWC20A10F FWC25A10F FWC40A14F FWC50A14F Ferraz Shawmut K330013 L330014 A093909 B093910
Fuse Holder Part Number

Fuse Rating 20A 25A 40A 50A Watlow 17-5110 17-5110 17-5114 17-5114 Cooper Bussmann CHM1G CHM1G CH141G CH141G Ferraz Shawmut USM1I USM1I USM1I USM1I
WATLOW
313

DIN-A-MITE C
The DIN-A-MITE C silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) power controller provides a low cost, compact and versatile solid state option for controlling electric heat. This controller is designed and manufactured with the quality features expected from Watlow. DIN-rail and standard panel mounting plus a cabinet thru-wall mount version are available. Basic features include single-phase, three-phase/two leg, and three-phase/three leg, 24-600VAC operation. Current switching capabilities range from 30 to 80A depending on the model ordered. Variable time base, linear voltage and current process control or VAC/VDC input contactor versions are available. Single-phase, phase angle firing and current limiting are also available. All configurations are model number dependent and factory selectable. This power controller includes 200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) tested up to 480VAC to prevent arch flash with required fusing.

200KA SCCR Prevents arc flash DIN-rail and standard panel mount thru-wall mounting Provides versatility, quickness and low-cost installation Compact size Reduces panel space and cost Touch-safe terminals Increases safety for installer/user One and three-phase power Can be used in a variety of applications Open heater/shorted output alarm Notifies the user in case of an open heater or shorted output Mercury free Environmentally safe Faster switching with solid state Saves energy and extends heater life UL 508 listed, C-UL and CE with filter Meets applications requiring agency approval System solution component Provides single source thermal loop Back-to-back SCR design Ensures a rugged design
314
WATLOW

DIN-A-MITE C
Specifications
Operator Interface Command signal input and indication light Alarm output and indication light Current limit indication LED Amperage Rating See output rating curves on the next page Max. surge current for 16.6ms, 1,350A peak Max. I2t for fusing is 9100A2s Latching current: 200mA min. Holding current: 100mA min. Fan current: 0.14A for 24VDC; 0.12A for 120VAC; 0.06A for 240VAC Off-state leakage 1mA at 77F (25C) max. Power dissipation: 1 watt per amperes per leg switched 200KA SCCR, Type 1 and 2 approved with the recommended fusing; see user manual Line Voltage 24 to 48VAC units: 20.4VAC min. to 53VAC max. 100 to 240VAC units: 48VAC min. to 265VAC max. 277 to 600VAC units: 85VAC min. to 660VAC max. 100 to 120VAC, 200 to 208VAC, 230 to 240VAC, 277VAC, 400VAC, 480VAC, 600VAC, +10/-15%, 50 to 60Hz independent 5% (Input control signal Type L, P and S) Alarms (zero-cross models only) Shorted SCR Alarm Option Alarm state when the input command signal is off and a 10A or more load current is detected by the current transformer (two turns required for 5A and three turns for 2.5A) Open Heater Alarm Option (Input Control Signal Type S only) Alarm state when the input command signal is on and the load current detected by the current transformer is 20% less than customer adjusted set point Alarm Output Energizes on alarm, non-latching Triac 24 to 240VAC, external supply with a current rating of 300mA @ 77F (25C), 200mA @ 122F (50C), 100mA @ 176F (80C) and a holding current of 200A with a latching current of 5mA typical Agency Approvals CE with proper filter: 204/108/EC electromagnetic compatibility directive EN 61326-1: industrial immunity Class A emissions not suitable for Class B environments Phase angle and phase angle with current limit input control signal Types (P and L) are not CE approved for conducted or radiated emissions 2006/95/EC low voltage directive EN 50178 safety requirements installation category III, pollution degree 2 UL 50 Type 4X enclosure, Class 1, Div. 2 per ANSI/ISA 12.12.01. Thru-wall heat sink models T4A File 184390 UL 508 listed and C-UL File E73741 Shock and vibration tested to IEC 60068-2-32 Vibration tested to IEC 60068-2-6 Input Terminals Compression: will accept 24 to 16 AWG (0.2 to 1.5 mm2) wire Torque to 4.4 in. lb (0.5 Nm) max. with a 18 in. (3.5 mm) blade screwdriver Line and Load Terminals Compression: will accept 14 to 4 AWG (2 to 21 mm2) wire Torque to 24 in. lb (2.7 Nm) max. with a 14 in. (6.4 mm) blade screwdriver, or a type 1A, #2 Pozi driver Operating Environment See the output rating curve chart on next page 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to +85C) Insulation tested to 3,000 meters DIN-Rail Mount DIN EN 50022, 35 mm by 7.5 mm Back Panel Mount Four mounting holes No. 6 to No. 8 (M3 to M4) fastener Through-Wall Mount See page 317 for thru-wall panel cutout (Note: Mount cooling fins vertically.)
Additional Specifications for Contactors and Proportional Controllers

Control Mode, Zero-Cross Input control signal Type C: VDC input contactor Input control signal Type K: VAC input contactor To increase service life on contactor input models the cycle time should be less than three seconds Input control signal Type F: 4 to 20mA DC proportional variable time base control
WATLOW
315

DIN-A-MITE C
Input Command Signal AC contactor 24VAC 10%, 120VAC +10/-25%, 240VAC +10/-25% @ 25mA max. per controlled leg DC contactor 4.5 to 32VDC: max. current @ 4.5VDC is 6mA per leg, add 2mA per LED used to the total current Loop powered linear current 4 to 20mA DC: loop-powered, input Type F0 option only, no more than three inputs connected in series Options Manual control kit (1k potentiometer) 08-5362 Alarm option is not available on phase-angle input control signal Type P or L
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Output Rating Curves

DIN-A-MITE Style C Ratings at 100% On
90 85 80
Natural Convection
75 70 65
Additional Specifications for Phase Angle, Phase Angle Current Limit and Single Cycle Variable Time Base
Operation Burst firing (zero-cross) control, single-cycle variable time base, Type S single phase and 3-phase. Unit is not on for more than one full cycle under 50% power and not off for more than one full cycle above 50% power Phase-angle control, single-phase only Input Command Signal 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 5VDC, 1 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC Input impedance 250 for 4mA to 20mA, 5k for linear voltage input Output Voltage 100 to 120VAC, 200 to 208VAC, 230 to 240VAC, 277VAC, 400VAC, 480VAC and 600VAC, 10% Linearity (Input Control Signal Type S) 5% input to output power over 0 to 100% of span between calibration points Linearity (Phase Angle Input Control Type P and L) 5% input to output power, as referenced to a sinusoidal power curve, between calibration points Resolution Better than 0.1% of input span with respect to output change Soft Start (Phase Angle Input Control Signal Type P and L) Typically: 5 seconds soft start on power up Soft start on thermostat overtemperature Soft start on 12 cycle drop out detection 1 second soft start on set point change
Si
60
ng le
3-p
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 0
Ph
3-p ha se, 2 le g
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

has e, 3
as e
leg
80 75
70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Fan-Cooled
Sin gle
3ph as
3 g le e, 3ph as
Ph as e
le g
e, 2
Ambient Air Around Heatsink Fins ( C)

80 75 70 65 60 55 50
Recommended Max. Enclosure Temperature is 176F (80C) Thru-Wall Heat Sink
Si ng le
3Ph e, as
as Ph
3-P
45 40 35 30 25 0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
s ha e, 3l eg
g le
316
WATLOW
Front

DIN-A-MITE C
Style C Dimensions Without Cooling Fan
Front
1.51 in. (38 mm) 1.81 in. (46 mm) 2.11 in. (54 mm)
1 2 3
Front
Thru-Wall Style Ca
Front
4 in. (102 mm) Min. Clearance for Air Flow (Top and Bottom) 8 ea. M5-0.8 x 10 mm M5 Internal Tooth Lock Washers Included 4.81 in. (122 mm) Ground Lug (2-8 Gauge)
Allowance for No. 8 Fastener (M4)
Side
DIN-EN 50022 35 by 7.5 mm Rail (Clipping Distance = 1.366 to 1.390 in. [34.7 to 35.3 mm])
5.45 in. (138 mm) 3.42 in. (87 mm)

4 5 6
Panel Opening Outline
7 in. (178 mm)
1.89 in. (48 mm)
Allowance for No. 8 Fastener (M4)
Top 0.4 in. (10 mm) Min. Clearance for Air Flow (Both Sides)
Side
4 in. (102 mm) Clearance for Air Flow and Wire Bending Radius 5.74 in. (146 mm) 4 in. (102 mm) 5.59 in. (142 mm) 1.73 in. 2.26 in. (44 mm) (57 mm) 5.17 in. (131 mm) 3.10 in. (79 mm) Rail Release Tab (pull down)
Top
2.25 in. (57 mm) Outside (Any Gauge) 2.17 in. (55 mm) Inside (12 Gauge) Sheet Metal (12 GA) Front Panel is Touch-Safe, No Clearance is Required
5.89 in. (150 mm) 5 in. (127 mm)
4.50 in. (114 mm)
4 in. (102 mm) min. 4 in. (102 mm) Clearance for Air Flow and Wire Bending Radius Front Panel is Touch-Safe, No Clearance is Required
Panel Cutout Top

Typical Panel Opening Drill 0.228 in. (5.8 mm) (8) Heat Sink Outline 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) Reference 0.425 in. (10.8 mm) 1.625 in. (41.3 mm) 4.625 in. (117.5 mm)
Ground Wire Entry 3.25 in. (83 mm)
5.74 in. (146 mm)
Side
6.375 in. (161.9 mm)
5.850 in. (148.6 mm)
With Cooling Fan

Side
4 in. (102 mm) Clearance for Air Flow and Wire Bending Radius 5.74 in. (146 mm) 5.59 in. (142 mm) 1.73 in. (44 mm) 5.17 in. (131 mm) 3.10 in. (79 mm) 2.26 in. (57 mm) 5.89 in. (150 mm) 4 in. (102 mm)
0.338 in. (8.6 mm) Reference 0.275 in. (7.0 mm) 1.034 in. (26.3 mm) 3.103 in. (78.8 mm) 3.862 in. (98.1 mm) 4.137 in. (105.1 mm)
5 in. (127 mm)
7.64 in. (194 mm)
With the potential for high thru-wall heat sink temperatures, application may require a touch-safe shield.
Rail Release Tab (pull down) Front Panel is Touch-Safe, No Clearance is Required.
4 in. (102 mm) min.
4 in. (102 mm) Clearance for Air Flow and Wire Bending Radius
WATLOW
317

DIN-A-MITE C
Extended Heater and Power Controller Life with Variable Time Base
With variable time base control, the power controller automatically adjusts the time base and output power with respect to command signal. Accelerated life testing shows that variable time base control significantly reduces expansion and contraction of the heater element. This extends heater and power controller life while improving process temperature control. This saves money on heaters, downtime and maintenance.
Phase Angle
Models: DC1_ -_ _ [L, P] 0 - 0_ _ _
Loop Powered or Transformer Powered

Loop Powered By using a temperature controller 4-20mA process output signal as the power supply for the DIN-A-MITE input the cost of the power controller can be reduced. With zero cross (burst fired) the 4-20mA input signal simultaneously performs the tasks of providing a power supply and an input command signal. The DIN-A-MITE F0 input control signal is a loop powered option and will work as single- or three-phase. It works only with a 4-20mA input. Transformer Powered Some DIN-A-MITE models require an on-board power supply to power the internal electronics. Phase-angle options require the detection of zero cross of the ac sine wave and thus a transformer is also required. DIN-A-MITE input control signal types L, P and S are transformer powered and can be controlled manually (open loop) with a potentiometer input or in the auto mode (close loop) with a temperature controller using any of the 4-20mA, linear voltage (0-5,1-5 and 0-10VDC) input types.
Phase angle control (input control signal options L and P) is infinitely variable over the period of the ac sine wave. It provides a variable voltage and/or current output. These options include soft start and current limiting. The phase angle circuitry is transformer powered and accepts a linear voltage, current or potentionmeter input. This option is available only for single-phase switching.
Single Cycle Variable Time Base

Models: DC_ _-_ _ S_ -_ _ _ _ 25% Power Output
1 AC cycle on, 3 cycles off 50% Power Output
1 AC cycle on, 1 cycle off
Loop Powered 4-20mA Variable Time Base

Models: DC_ _-[02, 24, 60] [F0]-_ _ _ _ 20% Power Output
With single-cycle variable time base control, at 50 percent power, power is on one cycle and off one cycle. At 25 percent, it is on for one cycle and off for three. Under 50 percent, the unit is not on for more than one consecutive cycle. Over 50 percent, the unit is not off for more than one consecutive cycle. This model will work with a linear voltage input, a 4 to 20mA input or a potentiometer input.
Recommended Semiconductor Fuse for Applications Through 600VAC

Fuse Rating 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A Fuse Rating 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A Fuse Part Number Cooper Watlow Bussman 17-8040 FWP-40A14F 17-8050 FWP-50A14F 17-8063 FWP-63A22F 17-8080 FWP-80A22F 17-8100 FWP-100A22F Fuse Holder Part Number Watlow 17-5114 17-5114 17-5122 17-5122 17-5122 Ferraz Shawmut A093909 B093910 T094823 A094829 Y094827
3 AC cycles on, 12 cycles off 50% Power Output
3 AC cycles on, 3 cycles off 80% Power Output
12 AC cycles on, 3 cycles off
Ferraz Shawmut US141I US141I US221I US221I US221I
318
WATLOW

DIN-A-MITE C
Part Number
Phase Cooling & Current Rating/Leg Line & Load Voltage Input Control Signal Alarm User Manual Custom Options
D
1= 2= 3= 8= 9= 0= 1= 2= 3= T= 02 12 20 24 27 40 48 60 = = = = = = = =
C
Phase
C0 = F0 = K1 = K2 = K3 = L (0 to 5) = Input Control Signal 4.5 to 32VDC contactor 4 to 20mA DC proportional 22 to 26VAC contactor 100 to 120VAC contactor 200 to 240VAC contactor Phase angle with current limitinga (single phase only)
1-phase, 1 controlled leg 3-phase, 2 controlled legs 3-phase, 3 controlled legs (use with four wire wye) 2 independent zones (input Type C, K) 3 independent zones (input Type C, K) Cooling and Current Rating Per Leg* (see chart below) Natural convection standard DIN-rail or panel heat sink Fan cooled 120VAC standard DIN-rail or panel heat sink Fan cooled 240VAC standard DIN-rail or panel heat sink Fan cooled 24VDC standard DIN-rail or panel heat sink Natural convection through wall or cabinet heat sink (NEMA 4X) Line and Load Voltage 24 to 48VAC (control C, F, K) 100 to 120VAC (control L, P, S) 200 to 208VAC (control L, P, S) 100 to 240VAC (control C, F, K): 230 to 240VAC (control L, P, S) 277VAC (control L, P, S) 400VAC (control L, P, S) 480VAC (control L, P, S) 277 to 600VAC (control C, F, K): 600VAC (control L, P, S)
P (0 to 5) = Phase anglea (single-phase only) S (0 to 5) = Single cycle variable time base 0 = 4 to 20mA 1 = 12 to 20mA (for input control signal option S only 2 = 0 to 20mA 3 = 0 to 5VDC proportional 4 = 1 to 5VDC proportional 5 = 0 to 10VDC proportional
a
Not CE Approved for conducted or radiated emissions. Alarm No alarm Shorted SCR alarm (zero cross models only) Open-heater and shorted-SCR alarm (for input control signal option S) User Manual English German Spanish French
0= S= H= 0= 1= 2= 3=
Custom Options 00 = Standard part 1X = 1-second soft start (control option P, L) XX = Any letter or number, custom options, labeling, etc.
DIN-A-MITE C Current Rating Table

Phase 1 1 1 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, Cooling 0 T (1, 2, 3) 0 T (1, 2, 3) 0 T (1, 2, 3) Current at 122F (50C) 55A 60A 75A 40A 46A 65A 30A 35A 55A
8 8 8 9 9 9
WATLOW
319

DIN-A-MITE D
The DIN-A-MITE D silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) power controller provides an inexpensive, versatile product for controlling heat in an efficient package. This controller is designed and manufactured with the quality features expected from Watlow. The back panel mounting matches the footprint of the industry standard mercury displacement relay. There is no need to worry about mercury, the DIN-A-MITE controller is mercury free. The DIN-A-MITE Style D is capable of zero-cross switching up to 100 amperes single-phase, at 600VAC at 86F (30C), depending on the model selected. When combined the input of two or three controllers you can control three-phase. It is totally touch-safe and includes standard back panel mounting, on-board semiconductor fuses (accessible from the front) and a current transformer option for external load current monitoring. An optional shorted SCR detector feature is available on some models. This model is UL 508 listed and C-UL and CE certified. These agency approvals are ideal for those panel builders that require agency approvals on their panels and cabinets. Variable time base, 4-20mA process control, or VAC/VDC input contactor options are available. All configurations are model number dependent and factory selectable. This power controller also includes 200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) tested up to 480VAC to prevent arch flash with required fusing.

200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) Prevents arc flash Standard panel mount Provides same mount as industry standard 100A mercury displacement relay (MDR) Compact size Reduces panel space and cost Touch-safe terminals Increases safety for installer and user Mercury free Environmentally safe Faster switching with solid state Saves energy and extends heater life UL 508 listed, C-UL and CE with filter Meets applications requiring agency approval Back-to-back SCR design Ensures a rugged design On-board semiconductor fusing Provides quick access with no extra mounting necessary
320
WATLOW

DIN-A-MITE D
Specifications
Amperage See the output rating curve chart on the next page Max. surge current for 16.6ms, 1,800A peak Latching current: 500mA min. Holding current: 200mA min. Power dissipation is 1.4 watts per ampere switched including on-board fusing 200KA SCCR, Type 1 and 2 approved with the recommended fusing; see user manual Line Voltage 24 to 48VAC units: 20 min. to 53VAC max. 100 to 240VAC units: 48 min. to 265VAC max. 277 to 480VAC units: 85 min. to 528VAC max. 277 to 600VAC units: 85 min. to 660VAC max. 50/60Hz independent +/-5% Control Mode, Zero Cross Input control signal Type C: VDC input contactor Input control signal Type K: VAC input contactor To increase service life, the cycle time should be less than three seconds Input control signal Type F: 4 to 20mA DC variable time base control Input Command Signal AC contactor, 24VAC 10%, 120VAC +10/-25%, 240VAC +10/-25% @ 25mA max. per controlled leg DC Contactor, 4.5 to 32VDC: max. current @ 4.5VDC is 8mA per leg Loop powered linear current 4 to 20mA DC, input Type F0 option only, no more than three DIN-A-MITE inputs connected in series Shorted SCR Alarm Option Alarm state when the input command signal off and a 15A or more load current is detected by the current transformer Alarm Output Energizes on alarm, non-latching Triac 24 to 240VAC external supply with a current rating of 300mA @ 77F (25C) Current Sensing On-board current transformer (CT), typically 0.2VAC output signal per ampere sensed into 1000 load Agency Approvals CE with proper filter: 204/108/EC electromagnetic compatibility directive EN 61326-1: industrial immunity Class A emissions Not suitable for Class B emissions environment 2006/95/EC low voltage directive EN 50178 safety requirements UL 508-listed and C-UL File E73741 Input Terminals Compression: will accept 26 to 12 AWG (0.13 to 3.3 mm2) wire Line and Load Terminals Compression: will accept 6 to 2 AWG (13.3 to 33.6 mm2) wire Operating Environment Operating temperature range: 32 to 185F (0 to 85C) 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Vibration: 2 g, 10Hz to 150Hz, applied in any one of three axes Storage temperature: -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Insulation tested to 3,000 meters Installation category III, pollution degree 2 Mounting Back panel mounting; fits the same mounting pattern as a 100A, single-phase mercury displacement relay On-board semiconductor fusing Dimensions Height: 7.25 in. (185 mm) high x 2.5 in. (65 mm) wide x 9.4 in. (240 mm) deep Weight: 6.5 lb (2.95kg)
Output Rating Curve

DIN-A-MITE Style D Natural Convection Ratings at 100% On
85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105
Max. Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature (C )
Current (Amperes) Into a Resistive Load
WATLOW
321

DIN-A-MITE D
Part Number
Phase Cooling & Current Rating Line & Load Voltage Input Control Signal Current Sensing or Shorted SCR Alarm User Manual Custom Options
D
1=
0
Phase
Current Sensing or Shorted SCR Alarm 0 = No alarm 1 = Load current transformer S = Shorted SCR alarm 0= 1= 2= 3= User Manual English German Spanish French Custom Options
1-phase, 1 controlled leg
Cooling and Current Rating 0 = Natural convection current rating 80A @ 122F (50C) Note: See the output rating curve for the current rating at other temperatures 02= 24 = 48 = 60 = C0 = F0 = K1 = K2 = K3 = 24 to 48VAC 100 to 240VAC 277 to 480VAC 277 to 600VAC Input Control Signal 4.5 to 32VDC contactor 4 to 20mA DC proportional 22 to 26VAC contactor 100 to 120VAC contactor 200 to 240VAC contactor Line and Load Voltage
00 = Standard parts
Replacement Semiconductor Fuse

Watlow Part Number 0808-0096-0000 Cooper Bussmann Part Number 170N3437
322
WATLOW

POWER SERIES
Watlow has manufactured solid state power controllers for over forty years. Watlows POWER SERIES is a microprocessor-based product that features application flexibility unmatched by any other silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) power controller on the market today. Watlows POWER SERIES controllers include single and three-phase models from 65 to 250 amperes. Field configurable phase-angle or zero-cross firing improves application flexibility on site where needed. 50/60Hz independent operation allows utilization almost everywhere in the world without special calibration considerations. Serial communication via Modbus RTU allows setup and monitoring of load status from a computer station or control room. On-board semiconductor fusing improves reliability by protecting the SCRs from heater short circuits. Plus, on-board heater bakeout and control diagnostics can help eliminate initial start up problems. All these benefits are in a touch-safe package that can be quickly and easily mounted in a control cabinet. Watlows POWER SERIES controllers are UL listed and C-UL recognized, ensuring that they meet world safety and operational standards.

200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) Prevents arc flash Microprocessor-based technology Extremely versatile and field configurable Snap-fit on a pre-mounted plate Simplifies installation Models 65 through 250 amperes rating Handles a wide range of loads Adjustable soft start Provides application flexibility Heater and control diagnostics capability Monitors actual heater and controller performance Electrically touch-safe package Enhances safety for installer and users Serial communications with Modbus RTU protocol Provides computer control and/or monitoring Multizone capability Increases application flexibility and reduces panel space
WATLOW
323

POWER SERIES
Specifications
Power Bases Single-phase, (2 SCRs) 3-phase, 2-leg control, (4 SCRs) Resistive load only, zero-cross firing only 3-phase, 3-leg control, (6 SCRs) 3-phase, 3-leg control, (6 SCRs) for 4-wire wye loads Multizone, two and three single-phase zones Output Control Options Zero-cross control, fixed time base Time base one or four seconds with digital programmer Zero-cross control, variable time base Phase-angle control and phase-angle control with current limit (not for 3-phase, 2-leg models) Soft start factory default four seconds upon power-up, and adjustable from 0.0 to 120 seconds Soft start upon input signal change, output rate of change adjustable to limit max. rate of change from 0.1 to 100% per 0.1 second. Factory default 10% Current transformer included when required Line voltage compensated (variable time base and phase angle controllers only) Standby or non-operational mode Output Voltage and Current Rating 24 to 120VAC (+10%, -15%) 200 to 480VAC (+10%, -15%) 200 to 600VAC (+10%, -15%) 65 through 250A per pole, model dependent; see output amperage chart and rating curves Min. load 1A rms ac Max. leakage current 5mA 200KA SCCR, Type 2 approved with the recommended fusing; see user manual Alarms Single alarm relay Latching or non-latching Separate high and low values Alarm silencing (inhibit) on power up for alarm Alarm indication LEDs, shorted SCR, open heater, fuse Electromechanical relay, Form C contact, software configurable Min. load current 10mA @ 5VDC Rated resistive loads: 3A @ 250VAC or 30VDC max., inductive load rating 1.5A with a power factor 0.4 without contact suppression Heater Bakeout For single-phase (phase to neutral) and 3-phase 6 SCR models only (not for 3-phase, 2-leg models) Soft start with over current trip, runs until programmed bakeout time expires, then goes burst or phase-angle firing. Factory default of 24 hours Adjustable 0 - 9999 minutes with over current trip Internal current transformer included Command Signal Input Analog Field selectable linear voltage and current of low and high points within 0-20mA and 0-10VDC Manual control input through front panel Factory default 4-20mA input Voltage input impedance 11k nominal Current input impedance 100 nominal Digital On-board digital programmer/display and optional serial communications Retransmit Field selectable and scalable within 0-20mA, 800 max. or 0-10VDC, load, 1K min. load. The default is 4-20mA Resolution: mA ranges = 5A VDC = ranges 2.5mV nominal Calibration accuracy: mA ranges = 20A VDC ranges = 10mV nominal Temperature stability: 100ppm/C Digital Programmer/Display and Communications Capabilities Programming functions Adjust input and output control type, alarms and soft start, heater bakeout and current limit prompts Monitoring functions Display input and output values along with actual output current Data retention of digital programmer/display upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Serial Communications RS-232 for single drop control EIA-485 for single or multidrop control 32 units max. can be connected. With additional 485 repeater hardware, up to 247 units may be connected Isolated Modbus RTU protocol 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 baud rates
324
WATLOW

POWER SERIES
Controller Power Supply Universal line voltage input range 100 to 240VAC (+10%, -15%) at 55VA max. 50/60Hz 5% line frequency independent Controller line voltage for electronic power supply can be run on separate line voltage Natural Convection and Fan Cooled Models Cabinet venting may be required Power Dissipation (Watts) Approximately 1.25 watts/amperes per controlled leg Isolation Command signal to load and line/load to ground 2200VAC min. On-board semiconductor fuses provide SCR protection Mounting Mounts on a removable subplate Heat sink fins must be mounted in vertical orientation High Current Terminals Touch safe 38 in. (10 mm) Allen head compression terminals will accept #6 AWG to 350 MCM wire. Allen wrench adapter (included) for 38 in. (10 mm) socket, 6 point only Torque to 180 in.-lbs (20.3 Nm) Wire strip to 118 in. (30 mm) Requires 194F (90C) wire insulation rating on line and load terminals Controller Terminals Touch safe 18 in. (2.5 mm) blade screwdriver, accepts 12-22 AWG or 2 No. 22-18 AWG wires Torque to 8 in.-lbs (0.9 Nm) Wire strip to 0.24 in. (6 mm) Operating Environment 122F (50C) base rating 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) fan cooled 32 to 149F (0 to 65C) natural convection cooled 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Meets EN50178, Pollution degree 3 Storage Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Shipping Weight 23 lbs (10.3 kg) Agency Approvals UL 508 listed, File #E73741, Vol. 3, Sec. 2 C-UL listed to C22.2 NO. 14 CE 2004/08/EC (EN61326-1), Class A with filter, CE 2006/95/EC (EN50178)
Package Style C Dimensions

POWER SERIES Front View Power Series Front View
Power Series Front View 1 2 3
POWER SERIES Solid State Power Controller
14 in. 354 mm
POWER SERIES Solid State Power Controller
14 in. 354 mm
4 5 6 Power Series Top View
POWER SERIES Top View

Power Series Top View
7.9 in. 200 mm 7.9 in. 200 mm
7.5 in. 191 mm 7.5 in. 191 mm
Mounting Plate Dimensions

Release Tab
Mounting Holes (4) 0.27 in. (7 mm)
Key Slots 7 in. (178 mm)
4 in. (102 mm) 5.93 in. (151 mm)
1.53 in. (39 mm) 0.97 in. (25 mm)
WATLOW
325

POWER SERIES
POWER SERIES Features
Removable Mounting Plate POWER SERIES snaps on a pre-mounted, removable subplate. Terminal Cover electrically touch-safe package. Fuse Cover slides up and down for fuse maintenance and covers the high voltage components. Digital Programmer/Display for controller conguration, setup and monitoring features. Ground Lug built in, designed for easy ground connections.
I/O Port input, retransmit output, communications and alarms.
On-Board Fan is integrated into the package on forced air cooled models to eliminate separate power connection for fan. Allen Wrench used to torque terminals one to six and ground lug.
Single-Phase Configuration This configuration can be purchased with any or all the features available on the POWER SERIES, based on customer preference. It is intended for resistive heaters, but can also be used on transformer connected loads in the phase-angle firing mode. Three-Phase, Two-Leg Configuration This configuration is intended for zero-cross firing only into a stable resistive heater. Typically, a three-phase delta or ungrounded wye connected heater is used and only two of the three VAC line phases are switched. The third phase is a direct connection through a bussbar on board the POWER SERIES. Heater current monitoring and kVA options are available via the heater diagnostics option. Three-Phase, Three-Leg Configuration All POWER SERIES options are available with this configuration. It works well with phase angle firing into a three-phase, three-wire wye or delta connected heater. In this configuration, the more common applications are transformer connected loads with heaters requiring a soft start and/or current limiting. The three-phase, four-wire configuration is intended for zero cross firing into a three-phase grounded wye/star heater (This is a separate hardware option, model number dependent.)
Single-Phase, Multizone Configuration This configuration is available in two and three single-phase zones and all the features of a single-phase unit are available. (Note that there is only one alarm relay and all zones in the controller must use the same control method.) Heater Diagnostics Heater diagnostics may include some or all of the features that require heater current monitoring, depending on the model selected. Heater current monitoring is only available with heater diagnostics installed on the controller. The features dependent on heater current monitoring are heater bakeout, current limiting, heater kVA monitoring, retransmit and heater monitoring alarms such as open heater, heater out of tolerance, load balance and shorted SCR detection/error. Heater diagnostics must also be installed if you need phase angle control with current limit.
326
WATLOW

POWER SERIES
Part Number
Package Style Phase Heater Diagnostics Output Amperage Rating Output Voltage Rating Comm. Feedback/ Retransmit Custom Options
P
C= 1 2 3 4 8 9 = = = = = =
C
Package Style 65 to 250A Phase 1-phase 3-phase/2-leg control, (4 SCRs) 3-phase/3-leg control, (6 SCRs) 3-phase/4-wire, wye connected load 2 single-phase zones 3 single-phase zones
Communications 0 = None 1 = EIA/TIA-232/485 communications, opto-isolated, field selectable Feedback/Retransmit 0 = None 1 = Load current feedback (0-10V or 0-20mA scalable retransmit output) (Must have heater diagnostics selected) Custom Options 00 = None AA = No Watlow logo with agency approval marks XX = Custom, contact your Watlow representative for options
Heater Diagnostics 0 = None 1 = Heater diagnostics (required for any heater current monitoring or current limiting) Output Amperage Rating
See amperage chart below A = 24 to 120V B = 200 to 480V C = 200 to 600V Output Voltage Rating
Amperage Chart122F (50C)

Non-Fan Cooled Single-Phase Part Amperage N20 N25 N30 100A 140A 165A 2 Zone and 3-Phase, 2-Leg Part Amperage N20 N25 N30 80A 105A 120A 3 Zone and 3-Phase, 3-Leg Part Amperage N20 N25 N30 65A 85A 105A Fan Cooled Single-Phase Part Amperage F20 F25 F30 125A 200A 250A 2 Zone and 3-Phase, 2-Leg Part Amperage F20 F25 F30 120A 160A 185A 3 Zone and 3-Phase, 3-Leg Part Amperage F20 F25 F30 90A 140A 155A
Replacement Fuses for Power Series

Watlow Part No. 0808-0102-0100 0808-0102-0125 0808-0102-0160 0808-0102-0200 0808-0102-0250 0808-0102-0315 Description 100 125 160 200 250 315 amp amp amp amp amp amp @ @ @ @ @ @ 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC Ferraz Part No. L330037 M330038 N330039 P330040 Q330041 R330042 Bussmann Part No. 170M1317 170M1318 170M1319 170M1320 170M1321 170M1322
WATLOW
327

QPAC
The QPAC from Watlow is a modular silicon controlled rectier (SCR) power controller with plug-in features for exibility. Bases are rated from 150 to 1000 amperes in one-phase, three-phase, two leg and three-phase, three leg. A variety of transformers from 120 to 575VAC, along with 50/60Hz operation, enable the QPAC to operate in applications anywhere. Plug-in control cards set the QPACs SCR ring modes: solid state contactor, burst ring (zero cross) or phase-angle models and are available with a wide variety of options. High speed fuses are included to protect the SCR from short circuit currents. 200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) prevents arc ash.

200KA short circuit current rating (SCCR) Prevents arc flash Modular power controller Offers a variety of plug-in transformers and controller cards Available in 150 to 1000 ampere ratings Handles large or small loads Available in solid state contactor, burst firing (zero cross) or phase-angle fired mode Meets most application requirements Rugged design for 122F (50C) ambient operation Can be used in industrial applications with full rating of the power controller Semiconductor fuses and snubber protection included Protects the SCR from voltage or current surges or spikes Open heater or shorted SCR detector option Performs diagnostics UL 508 listed and C-UL up to 1000 amperes Meets applications requiring agency approvals
328
WATLOW

QPAC
Specifications
Modular controller base with plug-in card and transformer Plug-in control cards: Solid state contactor, ac or dc input Burst-fire controller, fixed or variable time base Phase-angle fire control Phase-angle control with soft start and current limiting Plug-in transformers (50/60Hz) 120, 208, 240, 380, 415, 480, 575VAC operation Power bases 1-phase (Q01), 1 pair of SCRs 3-phase (Q32), 2 leg control, 2 pair SCRs Resistive load only, burst firing only 3-phase (Q33), 3 pair hybrid SCRs/diodes Recommended for phase-angle only with balanced load Agency Approvals UL 508 and C-UL listed, 150 to 300A all configurations, File #E73741 UL 508 and C-UL listed, 400 to 1,000A on Q01 and Q32, up to 480VAC Control Card Input Options Solid state contactor, ac input (CA option) 120VAC @ 30mA min. AC signal input sources (i.e., triacs or mechanical relay outputs with noise suppression) require customer supplied resistors across the power controller ac command signal input terminals to prevent false firing 24VAC input, 200/10 W typical; 120VAC input, 1k/25 W typical; 240VAC input, two 1k/25 W in series typical Solid state contactor, dc input (CD option) On, 4-10VDC; off, 0.5VDC Built-in noise reduction network Burst-firing controller, fixed time base (BF option) Process input factory set @ 4-20mA DC Input impedance 250 (clip resistor for 5k impedance voltage input), or manual control input Time base 4 seconds (clip resistor for 1 sec) Burst-firing controller, variable time base (BV option) Process input factory set @ 4-20mA dc Input impedance 250 (clip resistor for 5k impedance voltage input), or manual control input. Requires an accessory bias and gain card to calibrate for 0-5VDC input. Phase-angle control (AF option) Process input factory set @ 4-20mA dc Input impedance 250 (clip resistor for 5k impedance voltage input), or manual control input Soft start approximately 6 seconds upon power-up, 1 second upon set point change Phase-angle control with current limit (AL option ) Process input factory set @ 4-20mA dc Input impedance 250 (clip resistor for 5k impedance voltage input), or manual control input Soft start approximately 10 seconds upon power-up, 1 to 2 seconds upon set point change Current transformer included Open Heater/Shorted SCR Detector Zero cross/burst fire models only Triac output 24 to 240VAC, 300mA @ 77F (25C), 125mA @ 176F (80C) Energizes on alarm Holding current 200A min. Latching current 5mA typical Outputs 120 through 575VAC 1, 2 or 3 leg 150 to 1000A per leg SCCR, 200KA with original equipment specified semiconductor fusing Fan cooled Line Voltage / Power 50/60Hz ac line frequency, Q32 and Q33 models are 50/60Hz calibration dependent Voltage: 10%, 120, 208, 240, 277, 380, 415, 480, 575VAC Line Voltage Compensation 10% in line, 2% in load in the 30 to 70% power region (AF, AL and BV) Power Dissipation (Watts) 1.5 W/A per controlled leg Isolation Command signal to load 1250VAC min. Linearity 2%, 30 to 70% power region (All units except CA and CD) Off-State Leakage Current 20mA @ 480VAC
WATLOW
329

QPAC
SCR Protection Semiconductor fuses provided dv/dt 200V/sec min. MOV1 and RC snubber network standard (Q32) 3rd leg fuse kit may be used, but not required, with 3-phase, 2 leg models Mounting Heat sink fins must be mounted in vertical orientation Operating Environment 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing 2,000 meters altitude max. Storage Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Options Manual control kit for process input cards (1k potentiometer) #08-5362 240VAC and 120VAC cooling fans
1
QPAC Output Ratings and Dimensions

Q01
Style Amps in. C C C E E 150 200 300 400-600 800-1K 13 13 13 27 27 Height (mm) (330) (330) (330) (685) (685) in. 6.9 6.9 6.9 17 17 Width (mm) (175) (175) (175) (430) (430) Depth in. 10.25 10.25 10.25 11.7 13.3 (mm) (260) (260) (260) (300) (340)
Q32
Style Amps in. C C C E E 150 200 300 400-600 800-1K 13 13 13 27 33 Height (mm) (330) (330) (330) (685) (840) in. 13.7 13.7 13.7 21 21 Width (mm) (350) (350) (350) (535) (535) Depth in. 10.25 10.25 10.25 11.7 13.3 (mm) (260) (260) (260) (300) (340)
MOV comes only on Q33 (3-phase, 3 leg).
QPAC Weight Chart Amps 150 200 300 400-600 800-1000 Q01
lb (kg) lb
Q33
Q33
lb (kg) Style Amps in. C C C E E 150 200 300 400-600 800-1K 13 13 13 33 33 Height (mm) (330) (330) (330) (840) (840) in. 20.7 20.7 20.7 27 27 Width (mm) (525) (525) (525) (685) (685) Depth in. 10.25 10.25 10.25 11.7 13.3 (mm) (260) (260) (260) (300) (340)
Q32
(kg)
15 (6.8) 15 (6.8) 15 (6.8) 44 (20.0) 49 (22.2)
36 36 36 85 120
(16.3) (16.3) (16.3) (38.5) (54.4)
50 50 50 100 135
(22.7) (22.7) (22.7) (45.4) (61.2)
Case Styles
Height
Height Depth Depth
Width
Width
Style C
Style E
330
WATLOW

QPAC
Applications Sketch Wiring Example
L1 L2 L3 Fuse Fuse Fuse L1 T1 L2
Plug-in Transformer
T2
L3
T3
Plug-in Control Card
Control Card
Transformer Fan Must Be Wired to 120VAC Fan Fan Fan
Power Base
Command Signal Q33-481-150-AFO
In heat treating applications, the QPAC offers modular flexibility. Different heater elements require different control firing modes: i.e., tungsten elements need phase-angle firing, while Nichrome elements use burst (zero cross) firing. Shipping the furnace to different countries could require different voltage sources (and thus transformers): i.e., United States 240 or 480 volt, Australia 415 volt; Europe 380 or 400 volt. By simply changing plug-in transformers, the OEM can ship anywhere in the world.
Accessories
Manual 150A 200A 300A 400A 500A 600A 800A 1,000A 5A Control Kit 08-5362 : 5A Current Transformer 16-0008 : 5A Current Transformer 16-0045 : 5A Current Transformer 16-0073 : 5A Current Transformer 0004-0286-0400 : 5A Current Transformer 0004-0286-0500 : 5A Current Transformer 0004-0286-0600 : 5A Current Transformer 0004-0286-0800 : 5A Current Transformer 0004-0288-1000 : 20mA Interstage Transformer 16-0176
WATLOW
331

QPAC
Part Number
Operating/ Output Voltage Cooling Fan Voltage Output Current (Amps) Input Control Card Open Heater/ Shorted SCR Detector
Phase
Phase
CA= CD= BF = BV = Input Control Card Solid state ac input (08-5285) contactor Solid state dc input (08-5286) contactor Burst firing, zero cross, fixed time base (08-5289) 4-20mA dc Burst firing, zero cross, variable time base (08-5342) 4-20mA dc
01 = 1-phase 32 = 3-phase, 2-leg (optional 3rd leg fuse kit is extra) 33 = 3-phase, 3-leg 12 = 20 = 24 = 27 = 38 = 41 = 48 = 57 = Operating and Output Voltage 120VAC 208VAC 240VAC 277VAC 380VAC 415VAC 480VAC 575VAC
AF = Phase-angle not available on Q32 (08-5288) 4-20mA dc AL = Phase-angle with current limit (08-5411) 4-20mA, not available on Q32 Note: AL option includes one current transformer. Add second CT for 3-phase, 3-leg Open Heater/Shorted SCR Detector 0 = None 1 = 1-phase operation 2 = 3-phase operation Notes: The open heater/shorted SCR detector is for burst re operation only. Includes one current transformer for 1-phase and two current transformers for 3-phase.
Cooling Fan Voltage 1 = 120VAC required on all 3-phase models 2 = 240VAC required on all 3-phase models Notes: Customer to supply wiring and hook-up. All cooling fans rated at 20 W each, must be wired by customer. 150= 200= 300= 400= 500= 600= 800= 01k = 150A 200A 300A 400A 500A 600A 800A 1000A Output Current (Amps)
332
WATLOW

E-SAFE II
The E-SAFE II hybrid power switch provides reliable and accurate power switching up to 35 amperes at 158F (70C). This mercury-free product is specifically designed to operate in the higher ambient temperatures of foodservice applications. Utilization of mercury relays is being eliminated due to many regulations affecting its use in the United States and around the world to replace replace mercury-relay switches. The E-SAFE II is the best performing product at the most economical price. Because of the product's unique design, there is no need to purchase costly heat sinks used with traditional solid state relays (SSRs). In addition, since this is a three-phase device, there is no need to wire multiple command signals. With a switching life of millions of cycles and an ambient rating of 158F (70C), with no heat sink required, this product is superior to typical SSRs. The E-SAFE II hybrid power switch provides foodservice operators with longer contact life and higher performance than typical mechanical contactors used in equipment. By using Watlows patent NO-ARC technology, the E-SAFE II can switch millions of cycles to increase the life of the product with reduced noise and increased temperature accuracy. E-SAFE II's inherent ability to operate at fast cycle times make it an ideal complimentary product for a time, proportional, integral derivative (PID) controller. E-SAFE II is mercury free, RoHS compliant by design, CE approved and C-UL/UL recognized. The reliability of the product is protected by a two-year warranty.

Mercury free Improves safety by eliminating risk of toxic metals in proximity to food Adheres to federal and state regulations phasing out and banning mercury High ambient temperature rating of 158F (70C) Specifically designed to operate in the higher ambient temperatures of foodservice applications NO-ARC hybrid power switch technology Combines the current carrying capacity of mechanical contacts with the longevity of solid state technology Allows faster cycling times than mechanical contactors Delivers more precise temperature control, saves energy, extends heater life and decreases total cost of ownership Compact and touch-safe package Fits in shallow foodservice cabinets Allows for horizontal or vertical mounting installations Increases safety for installer/operator Uses Ultem enclosure material with an horizontal burn rating (HB) rating of 338F (170C) and a UL flame retardant rating of 94 5VA RoHS compliant by design Specifically designed to meet Asian and European requirements LED indicator light Indicates command signal presence from controller Assists in trouble shooting Agency approvals UL recognition, C-UL and CE WEEE compliant
WATLOW
333

E-SAFE II
Specifications
Output voltage 200/240VAC +10/-15%, 50/60Hz, 100/120VAC +10/-15%, 50/60Hz Output amperage Up to 35A single, dual and three-phase Operating environment 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) operating temperature 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Operational life: four million switching cycles Installation category III, pollution degree 2 Control mode NO-ARC hybrid contactor Input command signal 3 to 32VDC, 24VAC +20/-20%, off state 2.7VDC 100 to 240VAC +10/-15%, (85 to 264VAC) Note: On the 100 to 240VAC input models, do not use a RC snubber on the E-SAFE II relay input or the temperature control command signal output LED indicator light Built in LED assists in trouble shooting; LED "off" indicates relay(s) are open, LED "on" indicates relay(s) are closed. Input command signal terminals 14 in. fast on appliance Line and load terminals No. 10 screw will accept ring or spade, 1 4 in. (6.35 mm) x 10-32 Mounting Back panel mount, horizontal or vertical mounting options
0.25 in. (6.35 mm)
3.82 in. (97.03 mm) 3.25 in. (82.55 mm)
0.586 in. (14.88 mm)
1.910 in. (48.51 mm) 5.54 in. (140.72 mm)
1.85 in. (46.99 mm) 0.94 in. (23.88 mm)
334
WATLOW

E-SAFE II
Product Rating Curve
70 65 60 Ambient Temperature C
6 AWG 90C Wire
10
40 35 30 25 5
AW G
45
90
50
8 AWG 90C Wire
W ire
55
These ratings apply to 3-phase units with cycle times of 30 seconds or more. Consult the factory for 1- and 2-phase unit ratings.
UL Conditions of Acceptability Applications must be tested as described below for specific wire insulation or specific wire gauge sizes. Tests shall be performed in the end application under worst case operating conditions. Test Procedure A. Monitor temperatures of terminals, using thermocouples between the ring terminal and connectors L1, L2 or L3. The temperature must not exceed 203F (95C). B. Monitor temperatures of wire insulation, using a thermocouple located three inches from the connector. The temperature must not exceed the insulation rating of the wire. *30A is maximum rating when operating above 240VAC. Warning: Thermocouples attached to terminals will be at load voltage potential, measurements need to be taken with isolated equipment or isolate the sensor from terminal with suitable insulation.
10
15 20 25 Amperage
30* 35
Part Number
Number of Poles Load Voltage Command Signal Voltage Future Option Future Option Custom Options
ES2
1= 2= 3=
Number of Poles
1 pole 2 poles controlled 3 poles controlled Load Voltage
1 = 100 to 120VAC 2 = 200 to 240VAC 3 = 230/277VAC (400/480VAC with wye/star, neutral connected to center required) Command Signal Voltage
LV = Low voltage 3 to 24VDC or 24VAC HV = High voltage 100 to 240VAC +10/-15% (85 to 264VAC) Custom Options
000= Standard product Any three letters or numbers = cosmetic options
WATLOW
335

SERIES CZR
The SERIES CZR solid state relay provides a low-cost, highly-compact and versatile solid state option for controlling electric heat. With DIN-rail and back panel mounting standard on every controller, the CZR allows for simple and quick installation. The extensive capabilities of the SERIES CZR include single-phase, 18 to 42 ampere zero-cross switching up to 600VAC (see output rating curve). Its unique integrated design removes the guesswork associated with selecting a proper heat sink and precise terminations for the application. This controller holds many agency certifications and is ideal for applications that require UL, CSA and CE approvals. The SERIES CZR is available in VAC/VDC input contactor versions and all configurations are model number dependent and factory selectable. The SERIES CZR is protected by a two-year warranty.

DIN-rail or standard panel mount Versatile, quick and low-cost installation Compact size Reduces panel space and cost Touch-safe terminals Increases installer and operator safety Mercury free Environmentally safe Faster switching with solid state Saves energy and extends heater life UL 508 recognized, CSA LR700195 certified and CE 60950 Applications requiring agency approval Back-to-back SCR design Offers rugged design for different application environments
336
WATLOW

SERIES CZR
Specifications
Control Mode Zero-cross fired contactor output Operator Interface Command signal input Input signal indication LED Input Command Signal Input Type DC1 Turn on voltage 4VDC max., turn off voltage 1VDC min. Input current: dc typically 10mA @ 4VDC,13mA @ 32VDC Input Type AC1 90 to 140Vrms, must turn on at 90VAC, must turn off at 10VAC Input current: 15mA typical @ 120VAC Output Voltage 24V; 24VAC min. to 280VAC max. 480V; 48VAC min. to 530VAC max. 600V; 48VAC min. to 660VAC max. Off state leakage 1mA at 77F (25C) max. for 600VAC models; 10mA at 77F (25C) max. for 24 through 480VAC models Holding current: 250mA max. Output Amperage See output rating curve. Ratings are into a resistive heater load. Output Amperage Rating
Model Max. Surge Current 16.6 mSec Max. I2t Fusing 18 625 1620 24 250 260 34 625 1620 42 1000 4150
Output Terminals Compression type For 18A models: Max. wire size 3.0 mm (10 AWG), torque to 0.6Nm (5.3 in. lbs) For 24 to 42A models: Max. wire size 16.0 mm (6 AWG stranded) torque to 1.5-1.7Nm (13-15 in. lbs) Operating Environment Up to 176F (80C). See output rating curves for applications 0 to 90% RH (relative humidity), non-condensing Insulation tested to 3,000 meters Units are suitable for pollution degree 2 Cycle time should be less than 3 seconds Mounting Options include DIN-rail or standard back panel mounting. The DIN-rail specification: DIN EN 50022, 1.38 in. x 0.30 in. (35 mm x 7.5 mm) Min. clipping distance: 1.37 in. (34.8 mm) Max. clipping distance: 1.39 in. (35.3 mm) Mount cooling fins vertical Weight/Dimensions 9.2 oz (260g) 24 to 42A models: 3.95 in. (100 mm) high x 1.75 in. (45 mm) wide x 4.3 in. (109 mm) deep 18A models: 3.95 in. (100 mm) high x 0.89 in. (22.6 mm) wide x 3.9 in. (99 mm) deep
Agency Approvals Class II construction UL 508 recognition, File #E73741 and CSA File LR 700195 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive
WATLOW
337

SERIES CZR
Part Number
Control Mode Output Amperage Output Voltage Input Type (Contactor
C
Z=
Control Mode Zero cross Output Amperage
18 = 18A 24 = 24A 34 = 34A 42 = 42A 24 48 60 = 24 to 280VAC = 48 to 530VAC = 60 to 660VAC
Output Voltage
Input Type (Contactor)
DC1= 4 to 32VDC AC1= 90 to 140VAC Note: Do not use the AC1 input type with temperature controller outputs that include an AC snubber lter. This could cause the SERIES CZR to stay full on.
Output Rating Curve

Maximum Ambient Temperature F 70 50 68 86 104 122 140 158 176
60
50
Current (Amps)
40
30 CZ42 20 CZ34 CZ24 CZ18
10
0 10 40 50 70 30 60 20 Maximum Ambient Temperature C 80
338
WATLOW

Solid State Relays
Watlow solid state relays (SSR) offer many of the advantages of solid state power controllers, but at a lower cost. Watlows extensive knowledge in power controller design led to the development of a special fast cycle input card that enables a SSR to operate from a standard 4-20mA instrumentation command signal. Test results show that a zero-cross SSR in combination with the fast cycle card promotes better temperature control and longer heater life than slow cycle relays. Through a time proportional cycle rate of 110 of a second, heater life will be extended. Both low and high voltage models are available from 24 to 660VAC. All ac output models include back-to-back silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) for a more rugged design than the traditional triac-based SSR. The internal design allows it to tolerate high currents and harsh electrical environments of heavy industry. Watlow also offers a switched VDC model for dc heating applications. Watlow provides all of the components necessary for trouble-free operation. This includes two standard convenience items: a thermal foil to ensure proper thermal transfer from the relay to the heat sink and belleville washers to ensure that the relay is mounted with sufficient pressure to enable good heat transfer. Matched semiconductor fuses and heat sinks are available to complete the power switching package.

Fast cycle card Increases heater life Optimizes temperature control Allows for higher watt density heaters Zero cross firing Results in minimal electrical noise Back-to-back SCR design Withstands harsh or hostile industrial environments UL recognized File #E151484 and #E73741 CSA certified up to 600VAC, File #LR700195 VDE 60950 License #40021401, File #1995500 up to 480VAC, CE Meets applications requiring agency approval
WATLOW
339

Solid State Relays
Specifications
Specifications Standard To All SSRs:
Dielectric Strength (Volts) Input, DC Control Voltage range Input current Turn on voltage (max.) Turn off voltage (min.) Input, AC Control Voltage range Input current Turn on voltage (max.) Turn off voltage (min.) AC Output (Max.) Forward voltage drop Min. holding current (mA) Turn on-off time (ms) Frequency range 4000 RMS
Ambient Temperature*
Temperature Operating Curve

85 80 75 70 65 60
75
SS
/5
3-32VDC 4mA (max.) @ 5VDC 3VDC 1VDC 90-280VAC 2mA (max.) @ 120VAC 90VAC 10VAC 1.5VAC and 2.1VDC 50mA up to 10ms (max.) 47 to 63Hz
5A
He
at
Si
nk
75A SSR w/Fan Cooled Heat Sink
10A SSR w/18A Heat Sink
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
Load Current (Amperes)
*Ambient temperature measured inside enclosure 3 inches left or right of the heat sink.
120/240VAC
Model Number Current output Nominal voltage One cycle surge current Max. I2t for fusing Thermal resistance Base plate temperature Output (Max.) Voltage range Over voltage rating Off state leakage SSR-240-10A-DC1 10A 120/240VAC 120A 60A2 seconds 1.48 C/W -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-25A-DC1 25A 120/240VAC 250A 260A2 seconds 1.05 C/W -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-50A-DC1 50A 120/240VAC 625A 1,620A2 seconds 0.63 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-10A-AC1 10A 120/240VAC 120A 60A2 seconds 1.48 C/W -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-25A-AC1 25A 120/240VAC 250A 260A2 seconds 1.05 C/W -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-50A-AC1 50A 120/240VAC 625A 1,620A2 seconds 0.31 C/W -13 to 185F (-13 to 85C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA
120/240VAC
Model Number Current output Nominal voltage One cycle surge current Max. I2t for fusing Thermal resistance Base plate temperature Output (Max.) Voltage range Over voltage rating Off state leakage SSR-240-75A-DC1 75A 120/240VAC 1000A 6,000A2 seconds 0.31 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-75A-AC1 75A 120/240VAC 1000A 6,000A2 seconds 0.31 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA
Random Fired Models

SSR-480-50A-RND 50A 480VAC 625A 1,620A2 seconds 0.63 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 80-530VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-480-75A-RND 75A 480VAC 1000A 6,000A2 seconds 0.31 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 80-530VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-240-10A-RND 10A 120/240VAC 120A 60A2 seconds 1.48 C/W -40 to 167F (-40 to 75C) 48-280VAC 600V (peak) 10mA
100VDC
SSR-100-20A-DC1 20A 100VDC 42A (10ms) N/A 1.06 C/W -22 to 176F (-30 to 80C) 0-100VDC N/A 0.3mA DC
480 and 600VAC

Model Number 480VAC Model Number 600VAC Current output Nominal voltage One cycle surge current Max. I2t for fusing Thermal resistance Base plate temperature Output (Max.) Voltage range (480V model) Voltage range (600V model) Over voltage rating Off state leakage SSR-480-25A-DC1 SSR-600-25A-DC1 25A 480VAC 250A 260A2 seconds 1.02 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-530VAC 48-660VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-480-50A-DC1 SSR-600-50A-DC1 50A 480VAC 625A 1,620A2 seconds 0.63 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-530VAC 48-660VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-480-75A-DC1 SSR-600-75A-DC1 75A 480VAC 1000A 6,000A2 seconds 0.31 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-530VAC 48-660VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-480-25A-AC1 SSR-600-25A-AC1 25A 480VAC 250A 260A2 seconds 1.02 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-530VAC 48-660VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-480-50A-AC1 SSR-600-50A-AC1 50A 480VAC 625A 1,620A2 seconds 0.63 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-530VAC 48-660VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA SSR-480-75A-AC1 SSR-600-75A-AC1 75A 480VAC 1000A 6,000A2 seconds 0.31 C/W -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) 48-530VAC 48-660VAC 1200V (peak) 10mA
340
WATLOW

Solid State Relays
Heater Life
Watlow has extensively tested electric heating elements with a variety of power switching devices. Results prove that the life of an electric element dramatically increases when the on-off cycle time that is used to time-proportion the heater is kept at less than one second. This reduces the thermal expansion and contraction of the element and improves heater life as much as 20 times. This very fast cycle time controls temperature much more accurately and allows the use of higher watt density heating elements. cases where uncontrolled full power can cause damage, it is recommended that a high limit temperature controller and contactor be used for protection.
Wiring Diagrams
Single-Phase Fast Cycle Input Card
Temp Control Input Card 4-20 mA DC Output
+
Fast Cycle Card

In order to obtain the very rapid cycling time required for longer heater life, accurate temperature control and higher watt densities, Watlow has developed a loop-powered firing card for SSRs. This card operates from a standard instrumentation signal of 4 to 20mA and controls solid state relays with a time proportional cycle rate of less than one second (4VAC cycles on and 4VAC cycles off at 50 percent power).
DC SSR Fuse L1 L2
Heater
Shorted SSR Alarm The most prevalent concern when using solid state relays is the possibility of a relay failing in a shorted condition. With this in mind, Watlow has designed a cost effective shorted SSR alarm. The device monitors the output (current through the heater) and activates a triac (alarm) if there is no command signal from the temperature controller. The triac can be wired to a bell, or to a normally closed latching relay to remove power to the heater.
Single-Phase Shorted SSR Detector
Thermocouple
L1
Thermal Transfer
A thermal foil is provided with each solid state relay for mounting on the base of the relay to improve heat transfer. In addition, two belleville washers are supplied to provide the proper pressure for this transfer of heat. Use two #8-32 screws 0.625 in. (16 mm) long to secure the relay to the heat sink.
Replacing Contactors or Mercury Displacement Relays (MDRs)

Improvements in heater life and control accuracy can be achieved with SSRs operated with rapid cycle times as compared to slower operating electromechanical relays or even MDRs. When replacing these types of relays with the SSR, it is important to consider two aspects: 1. Heat Solid state devices require a small voltage to turn on, which is consumed as heat (approx. 1.5 volts x amps = watts). This heat must be removed from the device and is usually accomplished by mounting the relay on heat sinks. 2. Failure Mode Solid state devices should last for many years when properly protected with voltage snubbers, mounted on appropriate heat sinks and when fused with semiconductor fuses against the high currents caused by electrical shorts. Watlows SSRs include an internal voltage snubber. However, if the unit fails, the most probable condition will be a short. Mechanical relays also have a good probability of failing short. In all WATLOW
Heater Mounted Current Transformer

Solid State Relay D.C. +
L2
Shorted SSR Detector
Temp Control Open Collector
Contactor
0 and 5VDC on-off Relay
Note: Semiconductor power switching devices are not legal for over-temperature limit or safety devices. For limit and safety devices you must have a positive mechanical break of all electrically hot legs simultaneously. 341

Solid State Relays
Part Number
Voltage Current Control Voltage
SSR
Voltage 100 = 0 to 100VDC (20A model only) 240 = 24 to 240VAC 480 = 24 to 530VAC 600 = 48 to 660VAC 10 = 20 = 25 = 40 = 50 = 75 = Current 10A 20A (100VDC model only) 25A 40A 50A 75A
Control Voltage DC1 = 3 to 32VDC (see specications) AC1 = 90 to 280VAC RND = 3 to 32VDC, 10, 50 and 75A models only Note: Relay will also include thermal foil, two belleville washers and #8-32 screws for mounting to a heat sink. Heat Sinks (sold separately) Z100-0815-000A = 18A or 2.2C/watt Z100-0815-000B = 35A or 1.1C/watt Z100-0815-000C = 55A or 0.6C/watt Z100-0815-12FC = 75A or 0.16C/watt (120VAC fan) Z100-0815-24FC = 75A or 0.16C/watt (240VAC fan) Fast Cycle Input Card and Shorted SSR Alarm Card For direct mounting on zero cross DC input solid state relay. RPC-5399-42-000 = Fast cycle input card, 4-20mA input RPC-5386-0000 = Shorted SSR alarm card Sub Cycle Fuses - I2t (sold separately) Recommended and available with holders
342
WATLOW

Solid State Relays
Heat Sink
E
Solid State Relay

0.19 in. (4.8 mm) 1.75 in. (44.5 mm) 1.1 in. (28 mm) 0.3 in. (8 mm) 8-32 Thread
1.88 in. (47.8 mm) C
1.875 in. (47.63 mm)
1.7 in. (43 mm)
2.25 in. (57.2 mm)
A B
Drilled and Tapped 8-32
0.172 in. (4.37 mm) Dia. 2 Places 0.12 in. (3 mm)
0.53 in. (13.5 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)
6-32 Thread Case Temp. Ref. Point 0.77 in. (23 mm) (19.6 mm)
0.9 in.
1.88 in. (47.8 mm) C
Drilled and Tapped 8-32
Heat Sink Dimensions

A in. (mm) N/A 1.91 (48.5) 1.89 (48.0) 1.89 (48.0) B in. 1.8 3.2 3.2 3.2 (mm) (46) (81) (81) (81) Dimensions C D in. (mm) in. (mm) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 5.45 (138.4) 5.45 (138.4) 3.70 (94.0) 3.70 (94.0) 5.89 (149.6) 7.16 (181.9) E in. (mm) in. 1.9 2.9 3.6 3.6 N/A 1.81 (46) 1.81 (46) 1.81 (46) F (mm) (48) (74) (91) (91)
Part Number Z100-0815-000A Z100-0815-000B Z100-0815-000C Z100-0815-XXFC* * Fan cooled
Descriptor 18A 35A 55A 75A
WATLOW
343
344
WATLOW
Operator Interfaces
Product Silver Series Communication Description Display Height Protocols Rugged, touchscreen Ethernet, 4.3, 7 or 10.2 in. operator interface terminal Modbus RTU, (109, 178 or 259 mm) Modbus TCP diagonal Remote user interface and Standard Bus, communications device Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS DP Upper: 0.40 in. (10 mm) Lower: 0.24 in. (6 mm) Page 347
EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway
353
Note: The specifications in the table above are best available values in each category. Not all combinations of these values are available in a single model number. Operator Interfaces
WATLOW
345
346
WATLOW
Operator Interfaces
Silver Series
The Silver Series is a rugged, touchscreen operator interface terminal (OIT) available in three models (4.3, 7 and 10.2 inch diagonal display sizes). It supports a full set of features including serial and Ethernet communications with multiple controllers, universal serial bus (USB), secure digital (SD) card, data logging, flexible password security and multiple languages. The small bezel size and nominal 2-inch depth make mounting in tight spots easy. The Silver Series programming software, EasyBuilder5000, features a large variety of built-in screen objects that makes it easy to use and very powerful. When creating screens, the user can call upon extensive graphics libraries, import custom graphics and add numeric displays, entry fields, analog meters, bar graphs and trend graphs with just a few mouse clicks. Screen objects are highly customizable, and the user can create libraries of their own objects for repeat use. The online simulator, Ethernet and USB support make testing and downloading fast. EasyBuilder5000 is part of the EZware-5000 software suite and is available as a FREE download on www.watlow.com and on the CD-ROM found in the accessories list. The Silver Series OIT paired with Watlow controllers is the perfect solution for your industrial process or machine control application.

Bright, 65,536 color, graphic, touchscreen, thin film transistor (TFT) display Maximizes display space in the OIT footprint Allows application specific interface design Allows viewing from a distance and at an angle Highlights important process information with color and animation Built-in Ethernet1, serial, USB and SD Card1 ports Allows options for connecting to controllers Provides options for downloading projects Expands memory for additional recipe and data log storage Supports the use of external keyboard, mouse and printers Supports monitoring from a personal computer (PC) with free virtual network computing (VNC) client software Supports dozens of serial and Ethernet protocols and up to four simultaneously Connects to a wide range of industrial controllers and devices Integrates a variety of devices to simplify complex operation tasks WATLOW
Data logging, display and trending Helps operators monitor processes Reduces labor and increases accuracy by automating time-stamped data collection Stores captured data for future retrieval in multiple files Saves time by exporting data to Excel-compatible comma separated value (CSV) files Improves process understanding by allowing live and historical data to be viewed on the OIT Alarm and event monitoring and recording Reduces downtime by helping troubleshoot equipment and processes Simplifies troubleshooting by recording time and date- stamped alarm and event history Organizes and prioritizes alarms and events in up to 255 categories and 4 priority levels Recipe management Reduces errors by automating process setting changes Offline/Online simulation Speeds up development by making it faster and easier to test projects Allows faster creation of fine-tuned interfaces by speeding up iterations Time or trigger-based data exchange Simplifies integration by allowing the OIT to copy data from one controller or OIT to another Internal, piezoelectric buzzer Provides audible alarms and key chirp Two year warranty Provides product support and protection
1
Not available in 4.3 inch version
347
Operator Interfaces
Silver Series
Features and Benefits (Continued)
Audio output to third-party, amplified speakers1 Alerts operators with sound even in noisy environments Screen object password security with programmable hierarchy and multiple users Prevents errors and tampering, allowing only authorized users to access restricted screen items Allows flexible hierarchies, allowing the developer to assign each screen object to any six groups and grant each user access to any combination of groups Provides password protection for upload, download and access to local setup Supports up to twelve users Screen object invisibility and/or interlock control Prevents errors by guiding operators Powerful, easy-to-use EasyBuilder5000, programming software Requires a small investment in time to create a useful interface Provides advanced interface features such as animation and pop-up windows Reduces development time by providing extensive graphical libraries and facilitating reuse with user-created libraries Simplifies development allowing import of common graphic formats: bitmaps, JPGs and animated GIFs User-programmable macros with math functions and support for floating point Extends functionality Automates processes TrueType fonts with Unicode (international) characters and language switching feature Improves screen readability, allowing formatting for bold, italics, underline, scrolling and blinking to direct operators eyes Prevents errors by communicating with users in their native languages Reduces development and support by allowing inclusion of up to eight user-selectable languages in a project NEMA 4, CE, RoHS, UL Allows use in harsh industrial environments Assures prompt product acceptance
1
Integrate multiple devices to simplify operation of complex systems
Include the types of displays users understand such as gauges, sliders and bar graphs to make screens intuitive
Log and graph process data for quality records and better process control
Create screens that guide work ow
348
WATLOW
Operator Interfaces
Silver Series
Dimension and Connection Diagrams
Part Number TS00-0043-0000
WATLOW
349
Operator Interfaces
Silver Series
Specications
Feature Processor Type Memory Ethernet Port Serial Ports USB Host (Type A) Version 1.1 USB Client (Type B) Version 2.0 SD Card Slot Real Time Clock Audible Alarm and Key Chirp Audio Output Display Size (W x H) Display Type Resolution (Pixels) Colors LED Backlight Brightness Contrast Ratio Viewing Angle Backlight Longevity Touchscreen Type Touchscreen Resolution Touchscreen Light Transmission Touchscreen Lifespan Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Operating Shock Resistance Environmental Ratings Agency Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Cutout (W x H) Dimensions Overall (W x H x D) Weight Input Power: Voltage Input Power: Current 250mA max. Panel 4.69 x 3.66 in. (119 x 93 mm) 5.04 x 4.02 x 2.00 in. (128 x 102 x 51 mm) 0.7 lbs (0.3 kg) 32 to 113F (0 to 45C) -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) 10 to 80% @ 40C (non-condensing) Top, bottom, right, left: 80 50,000 hours 450 cd/m2 500:1 Top: 40, bottom, right, left: 60 30,000 hours 4-wire analog resistive Continuous Greater than 80% 1,000,000 activations min. 14 to 113F (-10 to 45C) 32 to 113F (0 to 45C) -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) 10 to 90% (non-condensing) 10 to 25 Hz (X, Y, Z direction 2G, 30 min.) IP65, NEMA 4, NEMA 4X (indoor only) CE, RoHS, UL, EMI FCC Class A Plastic molded Panel/VESA 75 compatible 7.55 x 5.43 in. (192 x 138 mm) 7.88 x 5.76 x 2.11 in. (200 x 146 x 54 mm) 1.8 lbs (0.85 kg) 24VDC 250mA max. 300mA max. 10.20 x 7.91 in. (259 x 201 mm) 10.67 x 8.38 x 2.20 in. (271 x 213 x 56 mm) 3.4 lbs (1.6 kg) 480 x 272 65,536 (16-bit) min. 300 cd/m2 300:1 Top: 55, bottom, right, left: 65 50,000 hours None 3.74 x 2.12 in. (95 x 54 mm) 6.1 x 3.4 in. (154 x 87 mm) TFT LCD 800 x 480 None None Piezoelctric buzzer Line out 8.75 x 5.25 in. (222 x 133 mm) None COM1: RS-232 or RS-485 (2-wire or 4-wire) COM3: RS-485 (2-wire) None TS00-0043-0000 Part Number TS00-0070-0000 400 MHz, 32-bit, RISC, fanless 128MB Flash, 64MB DRAM 10/100 Base-T (RJ45) COM1: RS-232 or RS-485 (2-wire or 4-wire) COM2: RS-232 COM3: RS-232 or RS-485 (2-wire) 1 each 1 each 1 each Built-in 2 each TS00-0100-0000
EZware-5000 Software System Requirements

Compatible Operating Systems: Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows XP
350
WATLOW
Operator Interfaces
Silver Series
EZware-5000 Software Suite
The EZware-5000 software suite includes EasyConverter, EasyBuilder5000, Project Manager and Recipe/Extended Memory Editor programs.
The Recipe/Extended Memory Editor congures memory les for use with Silver Series OITs and allows ofine creation of recipes.
Project Manager uploads and downloads projects to and from the Silver Series OIT, opens compiled projects in simulation and launches the other EZware-5000 programs.
EasyConverter converts log les saved by the Silver Series OIT to le formats used by popular Windows software such as Microsoft Excel.
EasyBuilder5000 provides a graphical screen designing environment with point-and-click access to features and drag-and-drop ease.
WATLOW
351
Operator Interfaces
Silver Series
Connectivity
RS-232
or or
Silver Series OIT connects via
to one Watlow EZ-ZONE product equipped with Modbus RTU or one third-party product via a supported protocol.
RS-485
to one or more Watlow EZ-ZONE products equipped with Modbus RTU or one or more third-party products via a supported protocol.
Ethernet
Switch to Watlow EZ-ZONE products equipped with Modbus TCP and third-party products via supported protocols.
to VNC client software for remote monitoring with a personal computer.
Part Number TS00-0043-0000 TS00-0070-0000 TS00-0100-0000 Description 4.3 in. (480 x 272 pixels) 65,536 (16-bit) color TFT LCD and an analog-resistive touchscreen 7 in. (800 x 480 pixels) 65,536 (16-bit) color TFT LCD and an analog-resistive touchscreen 10.2 in. (800 x 480 pixels) 65,536 (16-bit) color TFT LCD and an analog-resistive touchscreen
Accessories
Part Number 0601-0001-0000 0830-0750-0000 0847-0299-0000 0219-0388-0000 0219-0374-0000 0219-0375-0000 0219-0376-0000 0219-0377-0000 0219-0378-0000 0219-0379-0000 0219-0382-0000 0830-0782-0000 0830-0753-0000 0830-0754-0000 Description Controller Support Tools CD-ROM with programming software and product manuals Power supply, Input: 85-264VAC, Output: 24VDC, 1.1A, 25W (not Class 2) Class 2 power supply, Input: 90-264VAC, Output: 24VDC, 1.3A, 31W TS00-0043-0000 communication cable, 5-foot, COM1 (RS-485, 2-wire) to bare wires for Watlow EZ-ZONE controller screw terminals TS00-0070-0000 or TS00-0100-0000 communication cable, 5-foot, COM1 (RS-485, 2-wire) to bare wires for Watlow EZ-ZONE controller screw terminals Splitter adapter for connecting to both COM1 (RS-232) and COM2 (RS-232) Splitter adapter for connecting to both COM1 (RS-485, 2-wire) and COM3 (RS-485, 2-wire) Splitter adapter for connecting to both COM1 (RS-485, 4-wire) and COM3 (RS-485, 2-wire) Splitter adapter for connecting to both COM1 (RS-485, 4-wire) and COM3 (RS-232) Splitter adapter for connecting to both COM1 (RS-485, 2-wire) and COM3 (RS-232) 5-foot USB cable for downloading projects from a PC to the OIT Package of 5 ea. protective screen covers for the TS00-0043-0000 Package of 5 ea. protective screen covers for the TS00-0070-0000 Package of 3 ea. protective screen covers for the TS00-0100-0000
352
WATLOW
Operator Interfaces
The EZ-ZONE Remote User Interface (RUI and communications gateway) can be utilized as a communication gateway device to save cost, space and wiring when digital communications is being used with two or more EZ-ZONE controllers. The EZ-ZONE RUI can also serve as a display for showing all parameter values for up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers, again saving cost, space and wiring expenses.
Indicator Features and BenefitsRemote User Interface (RUI)

Single user interface device or location to access multiple controllers Easy accessibility to all controllers and all parameters from a central location by using one RUI display Reduces component material costs by using a single RUI to display multiple control zones Eliminates cost and complexity from bringing all controller related input and output wiring to the front panel Flexible use of a display interface Can be used when needed during normal machine production, for OEM prototype design purposes or for remote troubleshooting scenarios Ability to use more than one RUI indicator to display additional data including temperature and current (ammeter) to improve user system interface
Additional Features
EZ-ZONE P3T Armor Sealing System Complies with NEMA 4X, IP65 RUI Offers water and dust resistance, can be cleaned and washed down EZ-KEY (RUI) Programmable EZ-Key is a functional key programmable by the user to perform simple one-touch operation of repetitive user activities Compact package Reduces required panel size for 116 DIN Utilizes less depth behind panel allowing for mounting in tight spaces Touch-safe package Complies with IP2X which increases safety for user Agency approvals: UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. Meets applications requiring agency approvals Three-year warranty Provides product support and protection
Communications Gateway Features and Benefits

A single RUI and gateway provides field bus access for up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers Lowers solution cost when field bus communications is required for multiple loops Expand communication protocols to all EZ-ZONE controllers Ability to utilize multiple communication protocols for different user preferences. Flex between different communication protocols while still maintaining a reduced level of inventory Delivers multiple communication protocol options Ability to connect EZ-ZONE controllers to communication networks utilizing Modbus RTU DeviceNet EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP
WATLOW
353
Operator Interfaces
Specifications
Line Voltage/Power Universal high voltage 100 to 240VAC, +10%/-15%; (85-264VAC), 50/60Hz, 5% Low voltage 20 to 28VAC or 25 to 40VDC, 50/60Hz, 5% for RUI only in short case version Low voltage 20 to 28VAC or 12 to 40VDC, 50/60Hz, 5% for RUI and Gateway in long case version Data retention upon failure via nonvolatile memory Environment 0 to 149F (-18 to 70C) operating temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) storage temperature 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Agency Approvals UL, CSA, CE, IP65/NEMA 4X indoor use, RoHS, W.E.E.E. SEMI F47-0200 when powered at 24V or greater Wiring TerminationTouch Save Terminals Terminals touch safe, removable, 12 to 22 AWG DIN Sizes 116 DIN Display Update Rate 1HZ Operator Interface Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED displays Forward, backward, up and down keys plus a customer-programmable function key - EZ key Communication Options Standard bus - ships with all EZ-ZONE products EIA 235/485, Modbus RTU EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, 10 BASE-T/ 100 BASE-TX DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP
RUI (EZKB) Utilized as a Communication Gateway Device

OIT PLC PC
The RUI (EZKB) can be used as a communication gateway to connect any EZ-ZONE controller with standard bus to other system components using different communication protocols such as EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU, EtherNet IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP.
EIA 232/485 Modbus RTU EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP
RUI (EZKB)
Watlow Standard Bus Free communication protocol in all EZ-ZONE controllers
Up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers
354
WATLOW
Operator Interfaces
Remote User Interface (RUI) Dimensional Drawings
Front View
2.05 in. (52.07 mm)
AccessoryDIN-Rail Mounting Bracket

Part Number: 0822-0586-P002
Front View
B A
2.05 in. (52.07 mm) D C
Short Case Version

0.66 in. (16.79 mm)
Dim. A 0.886 in. (23 mm)

2.28 in. (57.94 mm)
Dim. B 1.772 in. (45 mm)
Dim. C 0.886 in. (23 mm)
Dim. D 1.772 in. (45 mm)
Rear View
2.50 in. (64 mm)
2.10 in. (53.34 mm)
4.40 in. (112 mm)
3.95 in. (100 mm)

0.06 in. (1.52 mm)
Long Case Version

0.62 in. 15.82 mm 0.06 in. 1.52 mm
5.06 in. (129 mm)
0.40 in. 10.16 mm 1.20 in. 30.49 mm 4.00 in. 101.57 mm
WATLOW
355
Operator Interfaces
Part Number
Remote User Interface
Power Supply Voltage for RUI
Comm. Gateway Options
Custom RUI
Future Options
EZK
B= L = H= Basic 116 DIN
Remote User Interface (RUI)
AAAA
Power Supply Voltage for RUI Low voltage 24-28VAC/VDC Universal high voltage 100-240VAC/VDC Communication Gateway Options* (Standard Bus Always Included)
A = None 2 = EIA232/485 Modbus RTU 3 = EtherNet/IP/Modbus TCP 5 = DeviceNet 6 = PROFIBUS DP * Options 2 through 6 require the long case dimensions Custom RUI
AA = None XX = Custom options, contact factory
356
WATLOW
Indicators
Product EZ-ZONE PM Mounting 32, 16, 8, 4 DIN front panel
1 1 1
Display Height Upper/Left: 0.30 to 0.80 in. (8 to 20 mm) Lower/Right: 0.22 to 0.50 in. (6 to 13 mm) Upper: 0.40 in. (10 mm) Lower: 0.24 in. (6 mm)
Page 359
16 DIN front panel
360
Indicators
WATLOW
357
358
WATLOW
Indicators
EZ-ZONE PM

Integrated PID and limit controller Reduces wiring time and termination complexity compared with connecting discrete products Decreases required panel space Lowers installation costs Increases user and equipment safety for over/under temperature conditions High amperage power control output Drives 15 ampere resistive loads directly Reduces component count Decreases cost of ownership Current monitoring Detects heater current flow and provides alarm indication of a failed output device or heater load Serial communication capabilities Provides a wide range of protocol choices including Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS DP and DeviceNet Supports network connectivity to a PC or PLC Dual-channel controller Provides two PID controllers in one space-saving package
Enhanced control options Easily handles complex process problems such as cascade, ratio, differential, square-root, motorized valve control without slidewire feedback, wet-bulb/ dry-bulb, compressor control and peltier loads Advanced PID control algorithm Offers TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control to provide tighter control for demanding applications Provides auto-tune for fast, efficient startup Configuration communications with software Includes Watlow standard bus communications and EZ-ZONE configurator software Saves time and improves reliability of controller setup
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE PM product section located on pages 238 through 246.
WATLOW 359
Indicators

Delivers multiple communication protocol options Ability to connect EZ-ZONE controllers to communication networks utilizing Modbus RTU DeviceNet EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP
Additional Features
EZ-ZONE P3T Armor Sealing System Complies with NEMA 4X, IP65 RUI Offers water and dust resistance, can be cleaned and washed down EZ-KEY (RUI) Programmable EZ-Key is a functional key programmable by the user to perform simple one-touch operation of repetitive user activities Compact package Reduces required panel size for 116 DIN Utilizes less depth behind panel allowing for mounting in tight spaces Touch-safe package Complies with IP2X which increases safety for user Agency approvals: UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. Meets applications requiring agency approvals

A single RUI and gateway provides field bus access for up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers Lowers solution cost when field bus communications is required for multiple loops Expand communication protocols to all EZ-ZONE controllers Ability to utilize multiple communication protocols for different user preferences. Flex between different communication protocols while still maintaining a reduced level of inventory
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway product section located on pages 353 through 356.
360 WATLOW
Data Loggers
Product EZ-ZONE RM System with Access Module SpecView HMI Software Description Multi-loop controller with data logging ability Supported Controllers EZ-ZONE RM Operating Requirements None Page 363
Human machine interface See catalog for Watlow controllers page 366
Silver Series
Rugged, touchscreen EZ-ZONE and operator interface terminal many others
Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit, Vista 32-bit and 64-bit, XP (home and professional), 2000, NT 4.0, ME, 98, 95 EZware-5000: Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit, Vista 32-bit and 64-bit, XP
364
369
Data Loggers
WATLOW
361
362
WATLOW
Data Loggers
EZ-ZONE RM System with Access Module

Multiple inputs; from 1 to 152 PID loops of control or monitor up to 256 analog inputs Mix and match I/O to fit any application; from 1 input with 2 outputs to 152 analog inputs with 152 outputs, or monitor up to as many as 256 analog inputs all in one system Reduces cost because only required loops are purchased Allows a common controller platform across many design applications as both loops and outputs can be ordered in single increments Advanced PID control algorithm Offers TRU-TUNE+ adaptive control to provide tighter control for demanding applications Enables auto-tune for fast, efficient start-up Communication capabilities Provides a range of protocol options including universal serial bus (USB) device port, Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS USB Port Provides data log retrieval SPLIT-RAIL control Enables modules mounted in separate high-voltage and low-voltage cabinets to function as an integrated system Minimizes the length and cost of wire runs and improves system reliability by locating inputs closer to sensors and outputs closer to loads
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE RM product section located on pages 213 through 230.
WATLOW 363
Data Loggers
SpecView HMI Software
SpecView software from Watlow is a cost-effective, easy-to-use Human Machine Interface (HMI) to Watlow controllers, including EZ-ZONE integrated controllers and third-party products. Watlows single point of support for hardware, software and application needs ensures knowledgeable and expedient response to questions or concerns. SpecView from Watlow is commercially accepted and price competitive compared to third-party options. Throughout its history, field-proven features and functions have been added based on customer suggestions. SpecViews built-in support and auto-detect for Watlow controllers is an advantage compared to tag-based systems. Since there is no need to learn intricate details about communication protocols to configure software, setup is quick and simple. Process adjustments and machine troubleshooting are easily accomplished using graphed data on trend charts. SpecView from Watlow is designed for industrial needs, including built-in compatibility with bar code readers and touch screens. Customizing displays for specific applications reduces process errors. Flexible features include data logging, a historical replay option, easy-to-use recipes and remote access options. To try before purchase, SpecView from Watlow is available to download and run in the time-limited demo mode.

Watlow EZ-ZONE Standard Bus communications protocol Communicates with any EZ-ZONE product without requiring purchase of a communications option Built-in support and auto-detect for controllers Saves set-up time Eliminates the need to learn communications protocols Integrates devices from multiple vendors Flexible data logging and report generator Helps users comply with regulatory requirements including AMS 2750D NADCAP Reduces labor and increases accuracy by automating data collection for chosen parameters Adds data acquisition to existing processes Saves time by exporting data to Excel-compatible spreadsheet files Allows data to be grouped in user-defined batches Incorporates measurements, operator comments and other information into report formats Records operator actions
Easy-to-build, customizable screens Allows simple custom screen editing Simplifies monitoring and adjusting controller parameters Reduces errors by making displays application-specific Decreases training time Integrates sophisticated third-party elements with an ActiveX container option Automates many tasks with user-defined buttons Calls attention to specific parameter values with user-set color dynamics Allows touch screen compatibility Provides bar graphs for at-a-glance monitoring Limits access with passwords, if desired Alarm manager Simplifies understanding alarms with customizable, plain-text messages Aids in troubleshooting by time stamping and logging alarms Easy-to-use recipe manager Saves a snapshot of current parameter settings Reproduces previous machine setups exactly Reviews and edits complex programmer profiles Eliminates operator error in setting machine parameters Remote access option Allows multiple operator stations with identical interfaces for convenient access Provides multiple password-protection levels Improves access over LAN, modem or internet Reduces maintenance and repair downtime Increases utilization
364
WATLOW
Data Loggers
System Requirements
Compatible Operating Systems: Windows Vista (all versions) Windows Server 2003 Windows XP (Home and Professional) Windows 2000 (Workstation and Professional) Windows NT 4.0 Windows ME Windows 98 Windows 95 (help not supported) Minimum System: Pentium processor or equivalent Celeron or AMD 64MB RAM (128MB or more recommended) 30MB hard disk space to install SpecView from Watlow Additional disk space for data logging Instrument connection: RS232/RS485/RS422/ Ethernet/OPC USB port for the key Ideal System: Pentium 4 (or Celeron or AMD equivalent) 2.0Ghz 256MB RAM 80GB hard disk
How to Choose the Correct SpecView from Watlow Options

Order this option....
Mini Version
If you want to....

Operate a system with data from one or two simple instruments. This option includes historical replay and allows up to two instruments. Note that in some cases, devices such as proling and multi-loop controllers are represented by more than one instrument and the mini version may not be appropriate. Freedom to expand congurations beyond the two instrument limit of the mini version. Communicate with instruments on only one serial communications port or via Ethernet only. Communicate with instruments on more than one serial communications port and via Ethernet. Replay logged screen data on screens in trends, bar graphs and numeric elds. Without this option, replay is limited to the last four hours of data. Congure SpecView from Watlow to respond automatically to events such as specic parameter values with actions such as print the screen, or start logging or download a recipe. Events can also be time or calendar based. Without the strategy controller option there is a two event limit. Integrate SpecView from Watlow with other Windows programs. Connect SpecView from Watlow to instruments via an OPC server. Integrate third-party or customer-written ActiveX controls into SpecView from Watlow. Monitor instruments from multiple computers simultaneously. Order the number of remote users corresponding to the maximum number of additional computers needed to connect simultaneously. Use the computer to manage proles: program proles in the computer, save proles on the computer, or download proles that are saved on the computer to the SERIES F4. Connect to Allen-Bradley PLCs (process logic controllers) that support the DF1 protocol.
Standard Version Single Port Multiple Port Historical Replay Strategy Controller
DDE OPC Client ActiveX Container Remote Users
SERIES F4 Programmer Driver Allen-Bradley DF1 Driver
WATLOW
365
Data Loggers
Supported Controllers and Protocols
Controllers Communication Protocol Controller EZ-ZONE PM EZ-ZONE RM EZ-ZONE ST SERIES F4 Ramping SERIES 96, 97, SD POWER SERIES MICRODIN SERIES 986, 987, 988, 989 CLS200 (standard rmware) MLS300 (standard rmware)
Standard Bus
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Modbus RTU
1
Modbus TCP
1
Standard Bus via Modbus TCP or Modbus RTU EZ-ZONE RUI Gateway
1
N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
1
1 Modbus support was designed for EZ-ZONE PM firmware versions 4.0 and earlier and EZ-ZONE ST firmware versions 2.0 and earlier.
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Features introduced in later versions are not included.
Track and report batch-specic processing data.
Make screens with most often used parameters. Enable recipe management to reduce operator errors when setting values.
Create application-specic screens that depict process data so users can relate.
Graph and log process data. Replay data that may have been missed while a user was away. For playback of data older than four hours, get the historical replay option.
366
WATLOW
Data Loggers
Ordering Information - Standard
Part Number
Version Ports Historical Replay & Strategy Cont. DDE and OPC ActiveX Container Remote Users Special Watlow Drivers Third Party Drivers
SV
S=
S
Version
0= A=
None ActiveX container
00
ActiveX Container
Standard Ports
S = Single M = Multiple 0 H S B 0 D C B = = = = None DDE OPC client Both = = = =
Remote Users
Historical Replay and Strategy Controller None Historical replay Strategy controller Both DDE and OPC
00 = None XX = Number of simultaneous remote users (01 to 99) 0= 1= Special Watlow Drivers None SERIES F4 programmer
Third Party Drivers 0 = None 1 = Allen-Bradley DF1 (AB) Note: Special drivers for other third-party products (Honeywell, Eurotherm, Yokogawa and Marathon) are available directly from SpecView.
Ordering Information - Mini

Part Number
SV
0= A=
None ActiveX container
00
ActiveX Container
Version M = Mini (limited to two instrument views) Note: The mini version is limited to two instrument views and may not be appropriate for use with some devices such as proling and multi-loop controllers where a single device appears as multiple instruments in SpecView. S = Single M = Multiple Ports
Remote Users
00 = None XX = Number of simultaneous remote users (01 to 99) 0= 1= Special Watlow Drivers None SERIES F4 programmer
Historical Replay and Strategy Controller
H = Historical replay B = Historical replay and strategy controller 0 D C B = = = = None DDE OPC client Both DDE and OPC
Third Party Drivers 0 = None 1 = Allen-Bradley DF1 (AB) Note: Special drivers for other third-party products (Honeywell, Eurotherm, Yokogawa and Marathon) are available directly from SpecView.
WATLOW
367
Data Loggers
Ordering Information - Upgrade
Part Number
SV
U= N= Version No version change; upgrade options only Upgrade mini to standard Ports
0= A=
No upgrade ActiveX container
00
ActiveX Container
0 = No upgrade M = Multiple 0 H S B 0 D C B = = = = No upgrade DDE OPC client Both = = = =
Remote Users
00 = No upgrade XX = Number of simultaneous remote users (01 to 99) 0= 1= Special Watlow Drivers No upgrade SERIES F4 programmer
Historical Replay and Strategy Controller No upgrade Historical replay (already included with SpecView Mini) Strategy controller Both (do not order this option with SpecView Mini) DDE and OPC
Third Party Drivers 0 = No upgrade 1 = Allen-Bradley DF1 (AB) Note: Special drivers for other third-party products (Honeywell, Eurotherm, Yokogawa and Marathon) are available directly from SpecView.
Note: Your upgrade order must be accompanied by the Step 1 code from the Upgrade screen in SpecView from Watlow. Use the upgrade order form available at www.watlow.com or upon request from Watlow or your authorized distributor.
368
WATLOW
Data Loggers
Silver Series
The Silver Series is a rugged, touchscreen operator interface terminal (OIT) available in three models (4.3, 7 and 10.2 inch diagonal display sizes). It supports a full set of features including serial and Ethernet communications with multiple controllers, universal serial bus (USB), secure digital (SD) card, data logging, flexible password security and multiple languages. The small bezel size and nominal 2-inch depth make mounting in tight spots easy. The Silver Series programming software, EasyBuilder5000, features a large variety of built-in screen objects that makes it easy to use and very powerful. When creating screens, the user can call upon extensive graphics libraries, import custom graphics and add numeric displays, entry fields, analog meters, bar graphs and trend graphs with just a few mouse clicks. Screen objects are highly customizable, and the user can create libraries of their own objects for repeat use. The online simulator, Ethernet and USB support make testing and downloading fast. EasyBuilder5000 is part of the EZware-5000 software suite and is available as a FREE download on www.watlow.com and on the CD-ROM found in the accessories list. The Silver Series OIT paired with Watlow controllers is the perfect solution for your industrial process or machine control application.

Bright, 65,536 color, graphic, touchscreen, thin film transistor (TFT) display Maximizes display space in the OIT footprint Allows application specific interface design Allows viewing from a distance and at an angle Highlights important process information with color and animation Built-in Ethernet1, serial, USB and SD Card1 ports Allows options for connecting to controllers Provides options for downloading projects Expands memory for additional recipe and data log storage Supports the use of external keyboard, mouse and printers
Supports monitoring from a personal computer (PC) with free virtual network computing (VNC) client software Supports dozens of serial and Ethernet protocols and up to four simultaneously Connects to a wide range of industrial controllers and devices Integrates a variety of devices to simplify complex operation tasks Data logging, display and trending Helps operators monitor processes Reduces labor and increases accuracy by automating time-stamped data collection Stores captured data for future retrieval in multiple files Saves time by exporting data to Excel-compatible comma separated value (CSV) files Improves process understanding by allowing live and historical data to be viewed on the OIT Alarm and event monitoring and recording Reduces downtime by helping troubleshoot equipment and processes Simplifies troubleshooting by recording time and date- stamped alarm and event history Organizes and prioritizes alarms and events in up to 255 categories and 4 priority levels
1
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full SILVER SERIES OIT product section located on pages 347 through 352.
WATLOW 369
370
WATLOW
Software
Product EZware-5000 Description Software for configuring Silver Series OITs Software for configuring EZ-ZONE products Software for creating PROFIBUS GSD files for EZ-ZONE products Virtual instruments (VIs)/driver to interface LabVIEW with EZ-ZONE products via Standard Bus Human machine interface for Watlow controllers Supported Operating Controllers Requirements Silver Series OITs Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit, Vista 32-bit and 64-bit, XP EZ-ZONE Windows XP Professional controllers EZ-ZONE controllers EZ-ZONE controllers Windows XP Professional Page 373 Software
EZ-ZONE Configurator EZ-ZONE GSD Editor EZ-ZONE LabVIEW Driver SpecView HMI Software
375 377
LabVIEW versions 8.6 and later
378
See catalog page 366
Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit, Vista 32-bit and 64-bit, XP (home and professional), 2000, NT 4.0, ME, 98, 95 Windows XP Professional
379
EHG SL10 Software
Software for configuring EHG SL10 and monitoring EGH SL10 controller
380
WATLOW
371
372
WATLOW
Software
EZware-5000
The EZware-5000 software suite creates, edits and manages projects for Silver Series operator interface terminals (OIT). The suite includes EasyConverter, EasyBuilder5000, Project Manager and Recipe/Extended Memory Editor programs. The Silver Series programming software, EasyBuilder5000, features a large variety of built-in screen objects that makes it easy to use and very powerful. When creating screens, the user can call upon extensive graphics libraries, import custom graphics and add numeric displays, entry fields, analog meters, bar graphs and trend graphs with just a few mouse clicks. Screen objects are highly customizable, and the user can create libraries of their own objects for repeat use. The online simulator, Ethernet and universal serial bus (USB) support make testing and downloading fast. To obtain a free download of the EZware-5000 software suite, go to www.watlow.com or call 1-800-WATLOW2 and request the free Controller Support Tools CD-ROM (part number 0601-0001-0000.)

Powerful, easy-to-use EasyBuilder5000, screen development program Creates and modifies screens for Silver Series OITs Provides access to features for use on Silver Series screens Enables configuration of drivers for communications between Silver Series OITs and Watlow EZ-ZONE controllers and other automation devices Creates a useful interface with only a small time investment Provides advanced interface features such as animation and pop-up windows Offline and online simulation Speeds up development by making it faster and easier to test projects Allows faster creation of fine-tuned interfaces by speeding up iterations Upload and download password protection Prevents users from altering projects Protects projects in OITs from accidental overwrite Extensive graphical libraries and user-created libraries Reduces development time and facilitates reuse Simplifies development by allowing import of common graphic formats: bitmaps, JPEGs and animated GIFs Project Manager Simplifies managing projects for multiple applications
Project compress/uncompress Archives all necessary files in one compressed file Allows a single file to be saved or delivered as the project source User-programmable macros with math functions and support for floating point Extends functionality Automates processes TrueType fonts with Unicode (international) characters and language switching feature Makes screen content easy to read by allowing formatting such as bold, italics, underline, scrolling and blinking Prevents errors by communicating with users in their native languages Reduces development and support by allowing inclusion of up to eight user-selectable languages in a project Tag Library and address find and replace function Simplifies project reuse with similar but not identical controllers Label Library Speeds up screen development by eliminating the need to enter the same text multiple times Enables on-the-fly language changes for up to eight languages per project. Library import and export functions Reduces errors and speeds up development by eliminating tedious data entry when multiple projects interface with the same devices Layers, grid, alignment, nudge, space-even and make-same-size tools Speeds up creation of smart looking screens by automatically placing objects aligned on the screen Gives user precise control over object placement
WATLOW
373
Software
EZware-5000
Software Suite
The EZware-5000 software suite includes EasyConverter, EasyBuilder5000, Project Manager and Recipe/Extended Memory Editor programs.
EasyBuilder5000 provides a graphical screen designing environment with point-and-click access to features and drag-and-drop ease.
EasyConverter converts log les saved by the Silver Series OIT to le formats used by popular Window software such as Microsoft Excel.
Project Manager uploads and downloads projects to and from the Silver Series OIT, opens compiled projects in simulation and launches the other EZware-5000 programs.
Compatability
EZware-5000 software can be used to configure Silver Series operator interface terminals as interfaces for Watlow EZ-ZONE controllers and other automation devices
System Requirements
The Recipe/Extended Memory Editor congures memory les for use with Silver Series OITs and allows ofine creation of recipes.
Operating System Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows XP WATLOW
374
Software
EZ-ZONE Configurator
EZ-ZONE Configurator software allows Watlow EZ-ZONE products to be configured in one simple process. Its interface is flexible and easier to read than the basic remote user interface (RUI). It operates without requiring purchase of communications options as it uses the standard bus communications protocol that is included with all EZ-ZONE products. The EZ-ZONE Configurator software is available as a free download at www.watlow.com.

Communicates with EZ-ZONE products via standard bus protocol Works regardless of which communications option is purchased or even when no communication option is purchased Detects EZ-ZONE devices and reads up configuration Allows easy access to any setting Presents pages and menus as they are in the controllers display, RUI and manuals Enables the user to easily locate what they are looking for Wizard-style editor with menu explorer Allows for easy examination of each menu Enables the user to skip directly to the parameters they want to work with On-screen parameter help Reduces configuration errors Helps the user take full advantage of available features Copies parameter settings Decreases configuration time especially for multi-loop controllers Saves configuration files on the computer with all the information required to set up a controller Preserves settings to archive and recover or simplify setting up of another EZ-ZONE product Enables set up files to be e-mailed or accessed by users on a network or via the internet
View or modify configuration files saved during on-line editing sessions Allows users to get a headstart on setting up EZ-ZONE products Aids in supporting remote users Downloads saved configuration files Simplifies setting up EZ-ZONE products Flexible and smart compatibility checking Ensures configuration files are only loaded in to devices with compatible hardware
WATLOW
375
Software
EZ-ZONE Configurator
Technical Data Illustrated Features
Menu explorer allows users to skip directly to desired parameter or browse each setting.
Detects EZ-ZONE devices connected to the computers communications ports.
Saves complete sets of parameter settings for backup, archiving or conguring other devices with the same settings.
Compatability
EZ-ZONE Configurator software can be used to configure EZ-ZONE products when run on a computer connected to the EZ-ZONE products standard bus port (EIA 485 also known as RS-485). For most computers a 485 converter is required.
Copy feature speeds up conguration.
System Requirements
Minimum Requirements 485 Communications Port: USB port and USB-to-485 converter, or serial COM port (232) and 232-to-485 converter Microprocessor: Pentium IV or equivalent Memory: 128 MB RAM (256 MB recommended) Disk Space: 140 MB (100 MB if Microsoft.NET Framework is already installed.) Video: 800 x 600 (1024 x 768 or higher recommended) Operating System Requirements Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2 Also Supported Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3
Conrms that parameter downloads were successful and reports exceptions.
376
WATLOW
Software
EZ-ZONE GSD Editor
The EZ-ZONE GSD Editor software allows users to create custom general station description (GSD) files for configuring communications between EZ-ZONE products and other automation equipment supporting the PROFIBUS DP communications protocol. To obtain a free download of the EZ-ZONE GSD Editor software, go to www.watlow.com or call 1-800-WATLOW2 and request the free Controller Support Tools CD-ROM (part number 0601-0001-0000.)

Creates and edits GSD files Enables configuration of DP-V0 (cyclic) communication between EZ-ZONE devices and a PROFIBUS DP master such as a programmable logic controller (PLC) Allows users to select just the values they need Optimizes PLC memory use by allowing cyclical messages to be configured with desired data only Speeds up network by eliminating the transmission of unnecessary data as with fixed, vendor-supplied GSD files Supports EZ-ZONE PM, RM Access Modules and RUI Gateways Makes it easy for PROFIBUS DP users to use EZ-ZONE products in their applications Presents all the parameters found in supported EZ-ZONE devices menus Maximizes flexibility in the design of applications
Compatibility
EZ-ZONE GSD Editor software can be used to create and edit GSD files for EZ-ZONE PM controllers with the PROFIBUS DP field communications option and EZ-ZONE ST and PM controllers and RM control systems when connected to an EZ-ZONE RM Access module or EZ-ZONE RUI Gateway with the PROFIBUS DP option.
System Requirements
System Requirements: Microprocessor: Pentium IV or equivalent Memory: 128 MB RAM (256 MB recommended) Disk Space: 140 MB (100 MB if Microsoft.NET Framework is already installed.) Video: 1024 x 768 or higher Microsoft-compatible pointing device (mouse or trackball) Operating System Recommended: Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2
WATLOW
377
Software
EZ-ZONE LabVIEW Driver
This instrument driver for National Instruments LabVIEW software communicates with Watlows EZ-ZONE products via the standard bus communications protocol that is included with all EZ-ZONE products. The LabVIEW instrument driver software package, created with LabVIEW, simplifies development of applications such as test software. These instrument drivers include software functions called LabVIEW Virtual Instruments (VIs) that are used with LabVIEW to communicate with Watlow products such as the EZ-ZONE PM. The EZ-ZONE LabVIEW instrument driver software is available as a free download from www.watlow.com.

Supports access to all EZ-ZONE parameters Makes it easy for LabVIEW users to use EZ-ZONE products with their programs Compatible with any EZ-ZONE product configured to commuicate via standard bus Reduces cost by eliminating the need to purchase optional communications protocols Features Initialize, Read, Write and Close Vls Speeds development of LabVIEW applications Includes a working example with detailed instructions Shortens the learning curve associated with applying a new instrument
Compatibility
The Watlow EZ-ZONE instrument driver is supported by LabVIEW versions 8.6 and later.
378
WATLOW
Software
SpecView software from Watlow is a cost-effective, easy-to-use Human Machine Interface (HMI) to Watlow controllers, including EZ-ZONE integrated controllers and third-party products. Watlows single point of support for hardware, software and application needs ensures knowledgeable and expedient response to questions or concerns. SpecView from Watlow is commercially accepted and price competitive compared to third-party options. Throughout its history, field-proven features and functions have been added based on customer suggestions. SpecViews built-in support and auto-detect for Watlow controllers is an advantage compared to tag-based systems. Since there is no need to learn intricate details about communication protocols to configure software, setup is quick and simple. Process adjustments and machine troubleshooting are easily accomplished using graphed data on trend charts. SpecView from Watlow is designed for industrial needs, including built-in compatibility with bar code readers and touch screens. Customizing displays for specific applications reduces process errors. Flexible features include data logging, a historical replay option, easy-to-use recipes and remote access options. To try before purchase, SpecView from Watlow is available to download and run in the time-limited demo mode at www.watlow.com.

Watlow EZ-ZONE Standard Bus communications protocol Communicates with any EZ-ZONE product without requiring purchase of a communications option Built-in support and auto-detect for controllers Saves set-up time Eliminates the need to learn communications protocols Integrates devices from multiple vendors
Flexible data logging and report generator Helps users comply with regulatory requirements including AMS 2750D NADCAP Reduces labor and increases accuracy by automating data collection for chosen parameters Adds data acquisition to existing processes Saves time by exporting data to Excel-compatible spreadsheet files Allows data to be grouped in user-defined batches Incorporates measurements, operator comments and other information into report formats Records operator actions Easy-to-build, customizable screens Allows simple custom screen editing Simplifies monitoring and adjusting controller parameters Reduces errors by making displays application-specific Decreases training time Integrates sophisticated third-party elements with an ActiveX container option Automates many tasks with user-defined buttons Calls attention to specific parameter values with user-set color dynamics Allows touch screen compatibility Provides bar graphs for at-a-glance monitoring Limits access with passwords, if desired
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full SpecView HMI Software product section located on pages 364 through 368.
WATLOW 379
Software
EHG SL10 Software
The EHG SL10 software allows the user to configure, monitor, log and chart data from Watlow's EHG SL10 integrated multi-function controllers. It provides an easy-to-use and centralized interface for multiple EGH SL10 controllers. This software gives the user the ability to change set points, label devices and much more all with the click of a key. To obtain a free download of the EHG SL10 software, go to www.watlow.com or call 1-800-WATLOW2 and request the free Controller Support Tools CD-ROM (part number 0601-0001-0000.)

Automatic network detection and configuration Simplifies configuring multi-device networks by setting unique addresses in each device as they are added to the network Scans for new controllers added to the network Manual network configuration Connects to and monitors existing controller networks User definable device names Speeds up troubleshooting by allowing users to set names for networked controllers that correlate them with heater locations Monitor mode Displays temperature, and color coded alarms and warnings for all networked controllers Centralizes monitor function and eliminates time spent checking alarm states at the heater Network state indicator Simplifies and reduces errors when controlling many points Shows at a glance if any controller has a warning or alarm condition Charting Improves system operation by allowing engineers and operators to see zone temperature trends in real time Data logging Saves time and effort by eliminating the need to manually record temperatures Simplifies troubleshooting by providing a record of zone temperatures Configure mode Simplifies and speeds up changing set points and other control parameters
Password protected setup Prevents unauthorized changes to alarm set points, tuning and control settings Recipe manager Speeds up commissioning new devices by allowing saved recipes to be downloaded to multiple controllers Reduces data entry errors by saving known good settings Ping function blinks indicator on selected controller Reduces errors by allowing technicians to confirm device identities
Compatibility
EHG SL10 software can be used to configure EHG SL10 controllers when run on a computer connected to the controllers via an EIA 485 (also known as RS-485) network. For most computers a 485 converter is required.
System Requirements
Operating System Windows XP Professional
380
WATLOW
Accessories
Product EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway
Description Remote user interface and communications device Devices that bridge between serial networks Disconnect power from loads to protect people and property in case of a failure Detect and measure load currents
Page 383 384 386 387 388
Serial Converters Fuses and Fuse Holders Current Transformers
Panel Mount Adapter Plates Provide convenient, cost saving way to replace large old controllers with new, modern smaller models in existing control panels Arc Suppression and Protect controller outputs and reduce noise emissions EMI Filters Power Supplies Increase contact reliability and significantly reduce maintenance costs
388 389
Accessories
WATLOW
381
382
WATLOW
Accessories

Delivers multiple communication protocol options Ability to connect EZ-ZONE controllers to communication networks utilizing Modbus RTU DeviceNet EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP
Additional Features
EZ-ZONE P3T Armor Sealing System Complies with NEMA 4X, IP65 RUI Offers water and dust resistance, can be cleaned and washed down EZ-KEY (RUI) Programmable EZ-Key is a functional key programmable by the user to perform simple one-touch operation of repetitive user activities Compact package Reduces required panel size for 116 DIN Utilizes less depth behind panel allowing for mounting in tight spaces Touch-safe package Complies with IP2X which increases safety for user Agency approvals: UL, CSA, CE, RoHS, W.E.E.E. Meets applications requiring agency approvals

A single RUI and gateway provides field bus access for up to 16 EZ-ZONE controllers Lowers solution cost when field bus communications is required for multiple loops Expand communication protocols to all EZ-ZONE controllers Ability to utilize multiple communication protocols for different user preferences. Flex between different communication protocols while still maintaining a reduced level of inventory
For detailed product and ordering information, see the full EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway product section located on pages 353 through 356.
WATLOW 383
Accessories
Serial Converters
Laptop and personal computers include a variety of features including serial communications COM ports and Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports that allow them to communicate with other devices such as printers and digital cameras. Industrial and commercial devices such as process and temperature controllers often have EIA 485 communications interfaces (also known as RS-485) which cannot be directly connected to a typical computer. Watlow offers a series of serial converters that provide a simple and reliable solution to connecting these devices to computers. These compact serial converters offer several features that make them ideal for use in applications in which Watlow controllers communicate with a computer via Modbus RTU or EZ-ZONE standard bus.
0847-0326-0000 USB to 485, USB to Screw Terminals

Adapts existing computer port to EIA 485 Supports using computer software with industrial products Eliminates the need to add a serial communications card to the computer USB connection to computer (0847-0326-0000) Adds a communications port to a computer with USB Automatically congures on Windows 7, Vista, XP, ME, 2000 and 98 Eliminates need for external power supply Includes cable Screw terminals Connects to standard 485 network wiring with no need for additional components Optical isolation (0830-0473-0005) Prevents ground loops that can disrupt or damage instruments that are not isolated
0830-0473-0001 232 to 485, DB9 Female to Screw Terminals
0830-0473-0005 232 to 485, Isolated, DB9 Female to Screw Terminals
384
WATLOW
Accessories
Serial Converters
Specifications
Specication Connection to computer Computer interface Connection to serial network Serial network Communication speed Echo jumper Optical isolation: data-to-ground and computer-to-network Port powered Cable length External power supply Agency Supported operating systems Dimensions Recommended applications 0847-0326-0000 USB type A USB 1.0, 1.1 and 2.0 Removable terminal block Half duplex 485 (2-wire) 300 to 921K baud No None Yes 39 in. (1 m) Not needed CE, RoHS Windows 7, Vista, XP, ME, 2000 and 98 2.53 x 1.25 x 0.64 in. (64 x 32 x 16 mm) 0830-0473-0001 DB-9, female Serial COM (232) Terminal block Half duplex 485 (2-wire) 300 to 115.2K baud No None Yes, when computers handshake lines are powered No cable Required for computers without powered handshake lines CE, RoHS No software required 3.50 x 1.34 x 0.67 in. (89 x 34 x 17 mm) 0830-0473-0005 DB-9, female Serial COM (232) Terminal block Full duplex (4-wire) or half duplex 485 (2-wire)1 300 to 115.2K baud Yes 1500V RMS 1 minute 232 side requires power from computers handshake lines No cable Required for 485 side CE, RoHS No software required 3.20 x 2.10 x 0.64 in. (81 x 53 x 16 mm) Computer with a DB-9 male 232 serial port, communicating via Modbus RTU or EZ-ZONE standard bus
Computer with a USB port, Computer with a DB-9 male 232 communicating via Modbus RTU or serial port, communicating via EZ-ZONE standard bus Modbus RTU or EZ-ZONE standard bus
Half duplex operation (2-wire) requires connection of -Tx and -Rx and +Tx and +Rx in external cable.
Converters 0847-0326-0000 0830-0473-0001* 0830-0473-0005* Accessories 0830-0473-0003 0830-0473-0002 0830-0473-0004
Description USB to 485, USB to screw terminals 232 to 485, DB9 female to screw terminals 232 to 485, isolated, DB9 female to screw terminals Description 6-foot serial communications cable, DB9 male to DB9 female Power supply (110-120VAC input, 12VDC output) Power supply (210-240VAC input, 12VDC output)
*The isolated 232 to 485 converter and any 232 to 485 converter used with a computer (particularly a laptop) that does not provide power to the converter, requires a power supply.
WATLOW
385
Accessories
Fuses and Fuse Holders
For protection of solid state power controllers, such as Watlow's DIN-A-MITE, a semiconductor fuse is recommended to protect the power controller and ensure long life. To safeguard power controllers, Watlow offers DIN-rail mount fuse holders and semiconductor fuses in various sizes to accommodate the entire DIN-A-MITE SCR power controller family and solid state relay products. These fuse holders feature lockout/tagout and open fuse indication.
Amp Rating 12 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
I2T (A2Sec) 120 260 390 150 980 1800 2700 5100 10,000
Fuse Part Number 17-8012 17-8020 17-8025 17-8030 17-8040 17-8050 17-8063 17-8080 17-8100
Dim. A mm 10 10 10 14 14 14 22 22 22
Dim. B mm 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 58.0 58.0 58.0
Weight gm 9.2 9.2 9.2 21.0 21.0 21.0 53.1 53.4 53.4
Fuse Holder Part Weight Number gm 17-5110 53.8 17-5110 53.8 17-5110 53.8 17-5114 119.4 17-5114 119.4 17-5114 119.4 17-5122 229.4 17-5122 229.4 17-5122 229.4
Note: All fuses should be rated at 125 percent of connected load or the next standard fuse size above 125 percent. Due to special cases such as cooler ambient or lower amperage loads, the connected load should be the determining factor. The semiconductor fuse I2t rating must not exceed the SCR I2t rating. These fuses are classied as supplemental protection for semiconductor devices. They are not approved for branch circuit protection.
Fuse and Fuse Holders
3.07 in. (78 mm)
2.32 in. (59 mm)
0.69 in. (17.5 mm)
3.71 in. (94.2 mm) 3.01 in. (76.5 mm)
1.04 in. (26.4 mm)
ULTRASAFE
TM
1.77 in. (45 mm)
L O C K
Fuse
4.06 in. (103.1 mm) 3.01 in. (76.5 mm) 1.38 in. (35.1 mm)
1.67 in. (42.4 mm) 0.49 in. (12.4 mm)
0.10 in. (2.5 mm)

0.15 in. (3.8 mm)
10 mm Holder 17-5110
ULTRASAFE
TM
1.77 in. (45 mm)
L O C K
4.88 in. (124 mm)
0.15 in. (3.8 mm)
386
WATLOW
4.21 in. (106.9 mm)
1.77 in. (45 mm)
0.20 in. (5.1 mm)
3.07 in. (78 mm)
ULTRASAFE TM
Accessories
Current Transformers
A current transformer (CT) provides a signal that is proportional to and isolated from the load that passes through it. The signal from the CT can be measured by a temperature or power controller. The value from that measurement may be used to trigger an alarm, detect an open heater or a shorted SSR, or to indicate the current. Choose the model that provides a measureable output for the planned load current. To order, simply identify the desired part number. Contact your Watlow representative for availability.
Part No. Current Transformer 16-0230 16-0231 16-0232 16-0233 16-0246a 16-0008b 16-0044 16-0072 16-0008 16-0045 16-0073 0004-0286-0400 0004-0286-0500 0004-0286-0600 0004-0286-0800 0004-0286-1000 Interstage Transformer 16-0176 Current Ratio (See 16-0246) (See 16-0246) (See 16-0246) (See 16-0246) 50 amp: 50mA 75 amp: 5 amp 100 amp: 5 amp 125 amp: 5 amp 150 amp: 5 amp 200 amp: 5 amp 300 amp: 5 amp 400 amp: 5 amp 500 amp: 5 amp 600 amp: 5 amp 800 amp: 5 amp 1000 amp: 5 amp 5 amp: 20mA
Note: An interstage transformer (part no. 16-0176) is required with any current transformer rated 75 amps or above. a Supercedes part numbers 16-0230,16-0231, 16-0232, 16-0233. b Use 2-wire passes through the current transformer 16-0008 for 75 amp applications.
WATLOW
387
Accessories
Panel Mount Adapter Plates
Panel mount adapter plates provide a convenient, cost saving solution to modify existing control panels. Available in a variety of DIN sizes, adapter plates make changing out old, larger size temperature controllers with more sophisticated, compact controllers easy. Simply complete the build-a-part with the specifications you require.
Part Number
Adapter Plate & Cong. Finish
0216

P00
Adapter Plate Size and Conguration
920 = 12 DIN to 14 DIN 865 = 14 DIN to 18 DIN 866 = 14 DIN to 116 DIN 895 = 14 DIN to 132 DIN 867 = 18 DIN to 116 DIN 897* = Vertical 18 DIN to horizontal 132 DIN 899* = Horizontal 18 DIN to horizontal 132 DIN 900 = 116 DIN to 132 DIN * Available in black anodized only 2= 3= Finish Black anodize Stainless steel
Arc Suppression and EMI Filters

Noise Suppression Devices These devices protect controller outputs from damage that can be caused by voltage spikes from inductive loads.
Part No. 0802-0273-0000 0802-0266-0000 0804-0147-0000 Description MOV, 150VAC, 20 joule MOV, 275VAC, 15 joule Quencharc (250VAC max.)
A CE Filters for DIN-A -M I TE Products These filters are required for DIN-A-MITE power controllers to conform with CE conducted emissions standards.
Part No. 14-0019 14-0020 Description Single-phase, parallel connected filter Three-phase, parallel connected filter Stocked Yes Yes
388
WATLOW
Accessories
Power Supplies
Watlows series of Class 2, low-profile DIN rail-mount power supplies, only 2.2 inches deep, are ideal for shallow enclosure installations commonly used in building automation and security applications. The DSP series supplies are available with nominal outputs from 20 to 28 volts and power levels ranging from 31 to 91 watts in three package sizes. Load regulation is less than 1 percent from no load to full load, with ripple and noise below 50 millivolts. To compensate for cable voltage drops, output voltage can be adjusted from the front panel and colored LED indicators immediately confirm the output status.

Low 2.2 Inch Profile Fits into wall mounted cabinets Wide Range AC Enables global use with no input selector switches Convection cooled Eliminates the need for a system fan Class II Double Insulation Offers impeccable protection DIN-rail or Chassis Mount Adapts easily to different mounting configurations Adjustable Voltage Output Fine tune output voltage from 24 to 28VDC
WATLOW
389
Accessories
Power Supplies
Items/Model Number Watlow Part Number AC Input Voltage Range Input Frequency DC Input Voltage Range Inrush current (115/230VAC) Power Factor and Flicker Output Voltage Voltage Adjust Current Power Typical Efficiency Hold Up Time (115VAC) UL 1310 Class 2 Output Voltage Accuracy Line Regulation Load Regulation Ripple and Noise (20MHz BW) mV Overcurrent Protection (Type) Overvoltage Protection (Volts) Hold Up Time (115VAC input) LED Indicators Operating Temperature Temperature Coefficient Operating Humidity Cooling Withstand Voltage Isolation Resistance Vibration (Operating) DSP30 0847-0299-0000 90-264VAC, Class II double insulated (no ground connection required) 47-63Hz 120-370VDC 25/50A Meets EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 24V 24-28V 1.30A 31.2 W 83% 25ms Yes 1% of Nominal 1% 1% 50mV 110-160%, fold Forward under short circuit (DSP100-24/C2 102-108) 120-145% See model selector Green LED = On, Red LED = DC output low -25 to +71C (derate linearly 2.5%/C from 55 to 71C) 0.02%/C 20 95% RH (non condensing Convection Input to Output 3kVAC for 1 min. Same Same Same 30/60A Same Same Same 2.50A 60.0 W 86% 12ms Yes Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same DSP60 0847-0300-0000 Same Same Same 30/60A Same Same Same 4.20A 100.8 W 85% 10ms Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same DSP100 0847-0301-0000
>100M at 25C & 70% RH, output to Ground Same 500VDC IEC 60068-2-6 (Mounting by rail: Same random wave, 10-500 Hz, 2G, ea. along X, Y, Z axes 10 min/cycle, 60 min.) IEC 60068-2-27 (Half sine wave, 4G, 22ms, 3 axes, 6 faces, 3 times for each face UL1310 Class 2, UL60950-1, EN60950-1, CE EN61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8 and -11 DSP10: EN55022 Class B; DSP30-100: EN55022 Class A 200 2.09 x 3.58 x 2.19 Plastic 2 Same Same Same Same 250 2.8 x 3.58 x 2.19 Same Same
Shock (Operating) Safety Agency Approvals Immunity Conducted and Radiated EMI Weight (Typ) g Size (W x H x D) in. Case Material Warranty Years
Same Same Same Same 320 3.54 x 3.58 x 2.19 Same Same
390
WATLOW
DSP30
DSP30
Accessories
L N 6
3.583 in. 91 mm
DC LO DC OK
Power Supplies
DSP30
2.087 in. 53 mm 1 2 3 4 0.559 in. 1 2 3 4 (14.2 mm) +
2.795 in. 71 mm 0.384 in. (9.75 mm) vout ADJ.
+--
1.697 in. 43.1 mm

DC LO DC OK
++ - 1.929 in. 49 mm
3.583 in. 91 mm
3.583 in. 91 mm
DC LO DC OK
DSP60
DSP60
DS
2.189 in. 55.6 mm
1.264 in. 32.1 mm
DSP30 3.583 in. 91 mmL

5 N 6
L 5
N 6
DSP60
2.795 in. 71 mm 0.559 1 2 3 4 in. 14.2 mm
3.539 in. 89.9 mm 0.384 in. 9.75 mm vout ADJ. 1.697 in. 43.1 mm
0.559 in. (14.2 mm)
1 2 3 4 0.384 in. (9.75 + + - - mm) ADJ. vout
++ - -
1.697 in. 43.1 mm

DC LO DC OK
3.583 in. 91 mm
3.583 in. 91 mm
DSP100
DC LO DC OK DSP100
1.929 in. 49 mm
1.929 in. 49 mm
1.264 in. 32.1 mm
2.189 in. 55.6 mm
DSP60
1.264 in. 32.1 mm
2.189 in. 55.6 mm
3.583 in. 91 mm
L 5 5 N 6
3.583 in. 91 mm
L 5
N 6
DSP100
3.539 in. 89.9 mm 1 2 3 4 0.559 in. 14.20 mm 0.384 in. 9.75 mm 1.697 in. 43.1 mm
1.929 in. 49 mm
++ - 0.559 in. 14.2 mm
3.583 in. 91 mm
vout ADJ. 0.384 in. 9.75 mm 1.697 in. 43.1 mm DC LO DC OK
1.264 in. 32.1 mm
2.236 in. 56.8 mm
1.929 in. 49 mm
DSP100
1.264 in. 32.1 mm
3.583 in. 91.00 mm
2.189 in. 55.6 mm
N 6
3.583 5 in. 91 mm
WATLOW
0.559 in. 14.20 mm 0.384 in. 9.75 mm
391
392
WATLOW
Control Panels
Product Control Panels Supported Description Controllers Control panels designed EZ-ZONE to link with Watlow controllers immersion and circulation heaters Operating Environment 32 to 95F (0 to 35C) Page 395
Control Panels
WATLOW
393
394
WATLOW
Control Panels
Proper controller schematic and panel design goes a long way toward ensuring the trouble-free operation of a process system. Watlow has supplied UL 508 control panels for a variety of process control applications. Watlow offers control panels that are shipped within ten working days of order placement. These panels can drive up to 480VAC, three-phase, 120kW heating systems and are Type 4 rated enclosures that carry the mark. Component installation and wiring conform to applicable NEC and/or CEC standards.
Amperage Up to 144 amperes Voltage 120/240VAC single phase 208/240/480VAC 3 phase Operating Environment 32 to 95F (0 to 35C)

Main Disconnect Switch Utilizes a rotary handle with interlocking door Helps assure maximum operator safety Safety Contactor Enables the definite purpose break of power Prevents abnormal condition failure utilizing an over temperature shutdown Enclosure Built with Type 4 steel enclosures with gray paint Designed with rugged construction suitable for industrial and commercial locations Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation in non-hazardous locations Branch Circuit Fusing Assures compliance with NEC and CEC electrical codes Increases SCCR rating Reduces risk of over-current related failures and hazards SCCR Rating Assures compliance with Article 409 of the NEC and UL 508A
UL 508A Agency Certification assures compliance with appropriate United States and Canadian codes Assures prompt product acceptance Reduces end product documentation costs Customer Field Connections Dedicated terminals for supply, load and control interlock for fast and easy customer connection Dedicated terminals for sensor connection with matched alloys where applicable
WATLOW
395
Control Panels
Supported Controllers and Devices
Watlow EZ-ZONE Integrated Controllers Comes with three-year warranty assuring Control Confidence Allows integrated PID and limit control Decreases required panel space Enables use of laptop for programming setup Increases user and equipment safety for over and under temperature conditions Reduces the component count Utilizes TRU-TUNE adaptive control Watlow DIN-A-MITE Power Controllers One and three phase power permits use in a variety of applications Faster switching with solid state components. Better control saves energy and extends heater life. Back to back SCR design for increased durability 3 year warranty assures Control Confidence Accurate and tight set point control Pilot Devices High limit pilot light assures quick indication of limit condition Three position illuminated ON-OFF-SETUP selector switch assures rapid and accurate operator interface Documentation Complete wiring schematic and outline drawing Factory acceptance test I O & M manual Supports Communication through EZ-ZONE or SpecView Using USB Cable and USB to Serial Device Standard external bus connection allows easy connection to laptop for programming SpecView is a free downloadable programming software
Specifications
Voltage 120/240 single phase 208/240/480 three phase 120 control circuit Amperage 144 amps max 48 amps per branch circuit max. 3 branch circuits max. Interrupt Rating 50,000 SCCR min. Sensor Input ANSI Type J or K Environmental Storage Temperature: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Relative Humidity: 10% to 90% (non-condensing) Ratings: Type 4 Agency: UL 508A Mechanical Conduit entry: designed for bottom entry of supply, load and control Enclosure wall: blank for customer installations of conduit Dimensions: see part number chart on following page
Dimensional Drawing
C Depth 2 5/16 in. External Heat Sinks
SET UP CONTROL POWER OFF ON HIGH LIMIT
B Width
RED
PROCESS AND LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

WATLOW EZ-ZONE
TM
PRESS EZ BUTTON TO RESET LIMIT
A Height
Hazardous Voltage Enclosed Voltage or current hazard sufcent to cause shock, burn, or death. Disconnect before servicing.
Hannibal, Missouri 63401 USA Phone: 573-221-2816 Fax: 573-221-3723 Internet: www.watlow.com
WATLOW HANNIBAL 79.7 KW 480 VAC 3 PH 60 Hz 96 AMPS SCCR: 100 kA rms symmetrical @ 480 VAC MAXIMUM DRAWING SERIES: RFQ2CKT WATLOW P/N: RFQ2CKT ENCLOSURE: TYPE 4
Heater Load, T/C & Control Entry
Supply Power Entry
396
WATLOW
Control Panels
Standard Control Panels
Part Number
Control Panel Process and/or Opt. Process Part & Hi-Limit Hi-Limit Number Sensor Control
CP
Control Panel
CP = DIN-A-MITE C power controller Process and/or Hi-Limit Control EZPR = EZ-ZONE PM process controller only EZPL = EZ-ZONE PM Process and hi-limit controller J= K= Optional Process and Hi-Limit Sensors Type J Input Type K Input
Catalog part numbers include the following features: Type 4 enclosure (carbon steel with gray paint) Control transformer Fused disconnect switch Control and load fusing (feed and branch circuit) Three position lighted selector switch (on, off, control power only) Pilot light (EZPL models only) High limit Through-wall bus communications input (standard bus with 485) Load power, remote interlock and sensor terminal blocks
Part Number See chart below for Part number
Part Number Chart (Choose part number for Ordering Information 8, 9, 10 and 11 above.)
Nominal Volts 208 208 208 240 240 240 480 480 480 208 208 208 240 240 240 480 480 480 120 240 240 240 120 240 240 240 Max. Heater KW 8.6 17.3 25.9 10.0 19.9 29.9 19.9 39.9 59.8 17.3 34.5 51.8 19.9 39.9 59.8 39.9 79.7 119.6 2.9 5.8 11.5 17.3 5.8 11.5 23.0 34.6 Branch* Circuit Max. Amps 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 24 24 24 24 48 48 48 48 A x B x C ** Enclosure Size in. 16 x 16 x 8 36 x 24 x 8 36 x 30 x 8 16 x 16 x 8 36 x 24 x 8 36 x 30 x 8 16 x 16 x 8 36 x 24 x 8 36 x 30 x 8 24 x 20 x 8 36 x 36 x 8 42 x 36 x 12 24 x 20 x 8 36 x 36 x 8 42 x 36 x 12 24 x 20 x 8 36 x 36 x 8 42 x 36 x 12 16 x 16 x 8 16 x 16 x 8 36 x 24 x 8 36 x 30 x 8 24 x 20 x 8 24 x 20 x 8 36 x 24 x 8 42 x 36 x 12 Est. Shipping Weight (lbs) 110 220 290 110 220 290 110 220 290 160 330 400 160 330 400 160 330 400 110 110 220 290 160 160 230 400 Part Number 2312 2322 2332 3312 3322 3332 4312 4322 4332 2314 2324 2334 3314 3324 3334 4314 4324 4334 1112 3112 3122 3132 1114 3114 3124 3134
Phase 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Circuits 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3
* 24 amp circuits fused at 30 amps 48 amp circuits fused at 60 amps Installation must comply to local electrical codes ** Add 2516 inch to C dimension for external heat sink. WATLOW 397
398
WATLOW
Custom Designs
Custom Controller Capabilities and Design Services
Watlow has more than 85 years experience translating customers concepts into finished original equipment manufacturer (OEM) products, offering a wide range of custom controller capabilities including design and development expertise. Watlow has created a common component platform that serves as an almost complete OEM solution. Frequently used common components can be mixed and matched to meet a broad range of industrial application needs. Solutions can be developed for multiple inputs and outputs, simple displays, graphical user interfaces, touch screens and communication with EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet, Modbus or PROFIBUS DP. Services include mechanical, electronic and software design, new product introduction, material procurement, application engineering, prototyping, printed circuit board layout and test development, in-circuit, functional and final system testing and supply chain management and repair.
Project Research
If information is needed before a project can move forward, Watlow stands ready to deliver comprehensive market research services using a process to mine data from a variety of sources including environment of the customer (EOC) and voice of the customer (VOC).
User Interface
User interfaces include seven-segment displays, LED, LCD, graphical and touch screen operator interface terminals (OIT) with associated product software.
Complimentary Products
Heaters, sensors and turn key product systems are available within Watlows product offering.
Design Engineering Services

Watlows design engineering team offers expert digital control design services including C, C++, C sharp, EtherNet/IP (OVDA compliant) DeviceNet (OVDA compliant), PROFIBUS DP Modbus, NAFEM Data and LonWorks. Watlow designs meet UL, CSA, FM, CE, FCC and NSF standards and hazardous location Class I Div II and are RoHS compliant. Additional engineering services include: Design reviews Finite element analysis Thermal analysis Multi-layer PCB layout Software diagnostics support
Customer Engagement
Watlow enters into custom controller projects as a development partner and is dedicated to delivering successful outcomes to customers. To ensure success, each project is supported by key processes as part of Watlows process playbook
Intellectual Property and Discovery

Recognizing the need to protect privacy of information, confidentiality agreements are signed to safeguard all parties intellectual property before project work begins.
Versatile Platform
Using a platform integrating common components that can be re-used and adapted is an efficient and cost effective solution that fits many application needs. Common components include a multiple inputs and outputs power supply, a user interface and communications options.
Agency Approvals
Watlow is knowledgeable and experienced in implementing many agency directives and a unique client test data program, working with an onsite agency coordinator for the following directives: UL FCC CSA NSF FM Hazardous Location (Class 1, Div. II) CE RoHS compliant by design
Product Specification Needs

Watlow marketing and engineering teams work collaboratively with customers to develop complete product specifications to meet exact needs that include functional requirements, new features and product packaging, to name a few. These specifications serve as a road map to ensure that all product requirements are met.
WATLOW
399
400
WATLOW
Part Number Index

How To Use This Index
This easy-to-use cross reference contains the alpha or numeric prefixes for all Watlow product part numbers contained in this catalog. The spaces (_) shown in some of the following prefixes indicate additional characters. Part Number 0004-0286_ 0216_ 0219-037_ 0219-0382_ 0219-0388_ 0600_ 0601_ Description Current Transformers Panel Mount Adapter Plates Silver Series Splitter Adapter and Communication Cables Silver Series USB Cables Silver Series Communication Cables User Manuals Support Tools CD-ROMs Page Number 331, 387 388 352 352 352 230, 250, 298 230, 352, 373, 377, 380 388 388 388 388 322 327 385 385 385 385 385 352 352 230, 352, 390 230, 390 385 331 133 43 132 131 131 43 44 77, 78 388 79 79 79 77, 78 78 77 401
080_ 0802-0266_ 0802-0273_ 0804-0147_ 0808-0096_ 0808-0102_ 0830-0473-0001 0830-0473-0002 0830-0473-0003 0830-0473-0004 0830-0473-0005 0830-07_ 0830-0750_ 0847-0299_ 0847-030_ 0847-0326_ 08-532_ 104_ 10D_ 110_ 114_ 115_ 11D_ 12D_ 14_ 14-00_ 1409_ 1414_ 1415_ 1440_ 1449_ 15_
Noise Suppression Devices MOV, 275VAC, 15 Joule MOV, 150VAC, 20 Joule Quencher (250VAC max.) DIN-A-MITE D - Replacement Semiconductor Fuses POWER SERIES Replacement Fuses Serial Convertor EIA232 to EIA485 Non-isolated, DB9 to Screw Terminals Serial Convertor Power Supply (110VDC to 120VAC input to 12VDC output) Serial Convertor 6-foot Communications Cables Serial Convertor Power Supply (210 to 240VAC input to 12VDC output) Serial Convertor EIA232 to EIA485 Isolated, DB9 to Screw Terminals Silver Series Protective Screen Covers Silver Series Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Serial Convertor USB to EIA485 with Screw Terminals QPAC - Manual Control Kit Hexoloy SA(R) Tubes Adjustable Spring Thermocouple, 6 in. Spring Coated Protection Tubes Ceramic Alumina Protection Tubes Ceramic Mullite Protection Tubes Adjustable Spring Thermocouple, 12 in. Spring Adjustable Armor Thermocouple Base Metal Thermocouple, Type K DIN-A-MITE CE Filters Base Metal Standard Thermocouple with Protection, Base Metal Standard Thermocouple with Protection, 90 Angle Type Base Metal Standard Thermocouple with Protection, 90 Angle Type Base Metal Thermocouple, Angle Type with Two-Hole Insulators Base Metal Thermocouple, Immersion Tips Base Metal Thermocouple, Type J
WATLOW
Part Number Index

Page Number 387 43 310, 313, 318, 386 43 45 45 81 81 82 45 46 46 47 254 48 48 48 49 203 204 204 49 204 49 204 141 204 141 143 146 50 51 51 122 52 52 141 53 54 55 56 57 58
Part Number 16_ 16D_ 17-5_ 17-8_ 17D_ 20_ 21_ 2110_ 2114_ 214_ 22_ 23_ 24_ 25_ 265_ 30_ 31_ 32_ 40_ 401_ 402_ 404_ 41_ 418_ 42_ 425_ 4201_ 43_ 505_ 5750_ 59_ 60_ 61_ 62_ 6556_ 65D_ 65E_ 709_ 70X_ 71_ 72_ 73_ 74_ 75_
Description Current Transformers Adjustable Spring Thermocouple, 12 in. Spring Fuse Holders Fuses Adjustable Spring Thermocouple, 12 in. Spring Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, Straight Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, 90 Bend Noble Metal Bare Thermocouples Noble Metal Thermocouples with Aluymina Insulator Noble Metal Thermocouple Assemblies Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, 90 Bend Rigid Sheath with Threaded Fitting Thermocouple, 18 in. Rigid Sheath with Threaded Fitting Thermocouple, 316 in. Flange Thermocouples SERIES EHG SL10 Controllers 7 18 in. Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, Straight 7 18 in. Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, 45 Bend 7 18 in. Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, 90 Bend Large Diameter Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, Straight XACTPAK Cable, Alloy 600 XACTPAK Cable, 304 SS XACTPAK Cable, 316 SS Large Diameter Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, Straight XACTPAK Mineral Insulated Cable, Hastelloy X Large Diameter Rigid Sheath Thermocouple, Straight XACTPAK Mineral Insulated Cable, Inconel 625 Barrier Type Terminal Strip XACTPAK Mineral Insulated Cable, Haynes 230 Terminal Blocks SERIES 5750 Transmitters SERIES 5900 Transmitters Flexible Extensions Thermocouples SERIES 61 Insulated Wire Thermocouples SERIES 62 Insulated Wire Thermocouples Adjustable Spring-Loaded Hex Fitting PFA Encapsulated Thermocouple, 316 in. Diameter PFA Encapsulated Thermocouple, 14 in. Diameter Standard Thermocouple Connection Heads Ring Terminal Thermocouples Nozzle Thermocouples Pipe Clamp Thermocouples Grommet Thermocouples Brass Shim Thermocouples Stainless Steel Shim Thermocouples
402
WATLOW
Part Number Index

Page Number 137 124 137 137 136 65 66, 67 68 69 70 71 72 95 279 276 338 310 313 319 322 163 165 171 173 175 177 179 181 185 187 335 356 266 271 265 86 116 87 163 165 166 167 171
Part Number 807_ 90_ 91_ 92_ 943_ AB_ AC_ AF_ AQ_ AR_ AS_ AT_ AW_ CF_ CV_ CZ_ DA_ DB_ DC_ DD_ E_ _ _304 E_ _ _305 E_ _ _502 E_ _ _506 E_ _ _507 E_ _ _508 E_ _ _509 E_ _ _510 E_ _ _512 E_ _ _516 ES2_ EZK_ F4D_ F4P_ F4S_ HC_ HD_ HF_ J_ _ _304 J_ _ _305 J_ _ _314 J_ _ _321 J_ _ _502
Description Three-Pole Connectors, Cable Clamp Pipe Clamp with Bayonet Adapter Fittings High-Temperature Connector, Ceramic High-Temperature Connector, Adapter for Plug or Jack Weather Resistant Boots Cut and Stripped Thermocouples Plug or Jack Termination Thermocouples Metal Transitions with Spring Strain Relief Thermocouples Miniature Transitions Thermocouples Connection Heads Thermocouples Wafer Head Thermocouples For Use with Thermowells Thermocouples Multipoint Sensor Thermocouples SERIES CF Controllers SERIES CV Controllers SERIES CZR Power Switching Devices DIN-A-MITE A Power Switching Devices DIN-A-MITE B Power Switching Devices DIN-A-MITE C Power Switching Devices DIN-A-MITE D Power Switching Devices Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304, Type E Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305, Type E PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502, Type E Small Gauge FEP Insulated SERIES 506, Type E FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507, Type E TFE Insulated SERIES 508, Type E FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509, Type E PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510, Type E Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512, Type E PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516, Type E E-SAFE II Power Switching Devices EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway SERIES F4 Dual Channel Ramping Controllers SERIES F4 Process Controllers SERIES F4 Single Channel Ramping Controllers Exotic Metal Sheath Thermocouple, Plug or Jack Termination ENVIROSEAL HD Sensor Exotic Metal Sheath Thermocouple, Metal Transitions Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304, Type J Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305, Type J High-Temperature Fiberglass Twisted Thermocouple Wire SERIES 314, Type J High-Temperature Braided Fiberglass Thermocouple Wire, SERIES 321, Type J PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502, Type J
WATLOW
403
Part Number Index

Part Number J_ _ _505 J_ _ _506 J_ _ _507 J_ _ _508 J_ _ _509 J_ _ _510 J_ _ _511 J_ _ _512 J_ _ _516 K_ _ _301 K_ _ _304 K_ _ _305 K_ _ _314 K_ _ _321 K_ _ _350 K_ _ _355 K_ _ _365 K_ _ _502 K_ _ _505 K_ _ _506 K_ _ _507 K_ _ _508 K_ _ _509 K_ _ _510 K_ _ _511 K_ _ _512 K_ _ _516 LF_ LV_ M_ MB_ MCC_ MCF_ MCM_ MCN_ N_ _ _301 N_ _ _304 N_ _ _305 N_ _ _321 N_ _ _350 N_ _ _355 N_ _ _365 N_ _ _502 Description PVC Insulated "RIPCORD" SERIES 505, Type J Small Gauge FEP Insulated SERIES 506, Type J FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507, Type J TFE Insulated SERIES 508, Type J FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509, Type J PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510, Type J Polyimide Insulated and Twisted SERIES 511, Type J Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512, Type J PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516, Type J High Temperature Vitreous Silica Braided Thermocouple Wire SERIES 301, Type K Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304, Type K Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305, Type K High-Temperature Fiberglass Twisted Thermocouple Wire SERIES 314, Type K High-Temperature Braided Fiberglass Thermocouple Wire, SERIES 321, Type K High-Temperature Ceramic Fiber Thermocouple Wire SERIES 350, Type K High-Temperature Ceramic Fiber Thermocouple Wire SERIES 355, Type K High Temperature Vitreous Silica Braided Thermocouple Wire SERIES 365, Type K PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502, Type K PVC Insulated "RIPCORD" SERIES 505, Type K Small Gauge FEP Insulated SERIES 506, Type K FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507, Type K TFE Insulated SERIES 508, Type K FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509, Type K PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510, Type K Polyimide Insulated and Twisted SERIES 511, Type K Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512, Type K PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516, Type K SERIES LF Limit Controllers SERIES LV Limit Controllers Melt Bolt Thermocouples Crimp/Brass Style Connectors MICROCOIL Thermocouple, Copper Tip Miniature Thermocouple Connector, Female Miniature Thermocouple Connector, Male MICROCOIL Thermocouple, Aluminum Nitride High Temperature Vitreous Silica Braided Thermocouple Wire SERIES 301, Type N Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304, Type N Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305, Type N High-Temperature Braided Fiberglass Thermocouple Wire, SERIES 321, Type N High-Temperature Ceramic Fiber Thermocouple Wire SERIES 350, Type N High-Temperature Ceramic Fiber Thermocouple Wire SERIES 355, Type N High Temperature Vitreous Silica Braided Thermocouple Wire SERIES 365, Type N PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502, Type N Page Number 172 173 175 177 179 181 183 185 187 161 163 165 166 167 169 169 161 171 172 173 175 177 179 181 183 185 187 304 301 60 139 89 139 139 89 161 163 165 167 169 169 161 171
404
WATLOW
Part Number Index

Part Number N_ _ _506 N_ _ _507 N_ _ _508 N_ _ _509 N_ _ _510 N_ _ _512 N_ _ _516 OK_ PC_ PCN_ PDN_ PEN_ PM PM_ _ _ _ _-AAAAB_ PM3_ PM4_ PM6_ PM8_ PM9_ PT_ Q_ RB_ RC_ RF_ RMA_ RMC_ RME_ RMH_ RML_ RMS_ RPC_ RR_ RT_ RT_ _ _ _701 RT_ _ _ _704 RT_ _ _ _705 RT_ _ _ _707 RT2_ RT3_ RT-30_ Description Small Gauge FEP Insulated SERIES 506, Type N FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507, Type N TFE Insulated SERIES 508, Type N FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509, Type N PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510, Type N Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512, Type N PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516, Type N Polyimide Bracket Style Thermocouples POWER SERIES Power Switching Devices Pipe Thermowells, 12 in. Pipe Thermowells, 34 in. Pipe Thermowells, 1 in. EZ-ZONE PM Controllers EZ-ZONE PM Express Controllers EZ-ZONE PM 132 DIN Controllers EZ-ZONE 14 DIN Controllers EZ-ZONE PM 116 DIN Controllers EZ-ZONE 18 DIN Vertical Controllers EZ-ZONE 18 DIN Horizontal Controllers PT Polypropylene Head and Connector Blocks QPAC Switching Devices Standard Industrial Insulated Leads RTDs Plug or Jack Termination RTDs Metal Transitions RTDs EZ-ZONE RM Access Modules EZ-ZONE RM Control Modules EZ-ZONE RM Expansion Modules EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Control Modules EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Limit Modules EZ-ZONE High-Density Scanner Modules Solid State Relays Fast Cycle Input Card and Shorted SSR Alarm Cards Head Connection/Optional Transmitter RTDs For Use with Thermowells RTDs RTD Lead Wire SERIES 701, PVC RTD Lead Wire SERIES 704, FEP RTD Lead Wire SERIES 705 Fiberglass RTD Lead Wire SERIES 707, PFA RTD Lead Wire, Type 2 RTD Lead Wire, Type 3 PT Polypropylene Head and Connector Blocks Page Number 173 175 177 179 181 185 187 59 327 129 129 129 243 247, 295 238, 289 238, 289 238, 289 238, 289 238, 289 142 332 102 103 104 229 218 225 221 286 288 342 105 106 188 188 188 190 190 190 142
WATLOW
405
Part Number Index

Part Number RT4_ S_ S_ _ _304 S_ _ _305 S_ _ _502 S_ _ _506 S_ _ _507 S_ _ _508 S_ _ _509 S_ _ _510 S_ _ _516 SAB_ SAC_ SC_ SK_ SKP_ SSR_ ST_ SV(U or N)_ SV_ SVM_ SVS_ T_ _ _304 T_ _ _305 T_ _ _502 T_ _ _505 T_ _ _506 T_ _ _507 T_ _ _508 T_ _ _509 T_ _ _510 T_ _ _511 T_ _ _512 T_ _ _516 TB_ TBD_ TFD_ TH-185_ TH-2745_ TH-2747_ TH-2748_ TH-2760_ Description RTD Lead Wire, Type 4 Specialty RTD or Thermistors Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304, Type S Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305, Type S PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502, Type S Small Gauge FEP Insulated SERIES 506, Type S FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507, Type S TFE Insulated SERIES 508, Type S FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509, Type S PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510, Type S PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516, Type S Crimp/Brass Style Connectors Cable Clamp Style Connectors S SERIES Connectors Quick-Attache Thermocouple Connectors Single Panel Mount Hardware Connectors Solid State Relay Power Switching Devices EZ-ZONE ST Controllers SpecView HMI Software Upgrade SpecView HMI Software SpecView Mini HMI Software SpecView Standard HMI Software Standard Fiberglass Braided Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 304, Type T Fiberglass Wrapped Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 305, Type T PVC Insulated Extension Wire SERIES 502, Type T PVC Insulated "RIPCORD" SERIES 505, Type T Small Gauge FEP Insulated SERIES 506, Type T FEP Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 507, Type T TFE Insulated SERIES 508, Type T FEP Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 509, Type T PVC Insulated and Shielded Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 510, Type T Polyimide Insulated and Twisted SERIES 511, Type T Polyimide Insulated SERIES 512, Type T PFA Insulated Thermocouple and Extension Wire SERIES 516, Type T Standard Industrial Thermistors Bimetallic Thermometer Wells-Threaded Thermowells Bimetallic Thermometer Well-Flanges Thermowells Brass Compression Fitting, Non-Adjustable Stainless Steel Compression Fitting, Non-Adjustable Stainless Steel Adjustable Compression Fitting, 114 in. Stainless Steel Adjustable Compression Fitting, 2716 in. Fixed Bayonet Fittings Page Number 188 108, 114 163 165 171 173 175 177 179 181 187 135 135 135 136 140 342 236 368 367 367 367 163 165 171 172 173 175 177 179 181 183 185 187 113 128 128 121 121 122 122 123
406
WATLOW
Part Number Index

Part Number TH-2762_ TH-279_ TH-280_ TH-295_ TH-298_ TH-3_ TR_ TS_ TST_ TST_ TT_ TV_ TWT_ XP_ Z100-0815-_ Description Adjustable Bayonet Compression Fittings Stainless Steel Adjustable Compression Fitting Replacement Sealant Gland, 114 in. Stainless Steel Adjustable Compression Fitting, Replacement Sealant Gland 2716 in. Bayonet Adapter Fitting, 18 NPT Thread Bayonet Adapter Fitting, 38-24 SAE Thread Three-Pole Connectors Radio Frequency Thermocouples Silver Series Operator Interface True Surface Thermocouples Socket Weld Thermowells Threaded Type Thermowells Van Stone Thermowells Weld-In Thermowells Explosion Proof Thermocouple Connection Heads Solid State Relays Heat Sinks Page Number 123 122 122 123 123 137 91 352 93 128 126 128 128 142 343
WATLOW
407
408
WATLOW
Product Category Index

Page Number 381 119 388 76 274, 277, 299, 302 Connection Heads and Blocks 141 Connectors 134 Contact Suppression 209 Control Panels 395 Current Transformers 387 Custom Designs - Controllers 399 Data Loggers 361 DIN-A-MITE A 308 DIN-A-MITE B 311 DIN-A-MITE C 314 DIN-A-MITE D 320 EHG Controllers 255 EHG SL10 Controllers 251 EHG SL10 Software 380 EMI Filters 388 ENVIROSEAL HD Sensor 116 E-SAFE II Power Switching Devices 333 EXACTSENSE Thermocouple 73 Exotic Metal Sheath Thermocouple 83 Extension Wire 151 EZware-5000 Software 373 EZ-ZONE Configurator 375 EZ-ZONE GSD Editor 377 EZ-ZONE LabVIEW Driver 378 EZ-ZONE PM Controllers 238 EZ-ZONE PM Express Controllers 247 EZ-ZONE PM Express Limit 295 EZ-ZONE PM Integrated PID Controllers 238 EZ-ZONE PM Limit 289 EZ-ZONE PM PID Controllers 238 EZ-ZONE RM Controllers 213 EZ-ZONE RM Access Modules 228 EZ-ZONE RM Control Modules 216 EZ-ZONE RM Expansion Modules 224 EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Control Modules 220 EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Limit Modules 222 EZ-ZONE RM High-Density Scanner Modules 226 EZ-ZONE RUI and Gateway 353 EZ-ZONE ST Controllers 231 Fittings 63, 99, 111 Product Category Accessories - Controllers Accessories - Sensors Arc Suppression Base Metal Thermocouples Basic and Limit Controllers Product Category Fuses and Fuse Holders General Applications Tube and Wire High Temperature Thermocouples Indicators Integrated Multi-Function Controllers Limits MICROCOIL Thermocouples Mineral Insulated (MI) Thermocouples Mineral Insulated Cable Multipoint Thermocouples Noble Metal Thermocouples Operator Interface Terminals Panel Mount Adapter Plates Power Controllers POWER SERIES Power Switching Devices Power Supplies Power Switching Devices Protection Tubes QPAC Power Switching Devices Radio Frequency Thermocouples Remote User Interface (RUI) Resistance Temperature Sensors RTDs RTD Lead Wire RUIs S SERIES Connectors Scanners Serial Converters SERIES 5750 Transmitters SERIES 5900 Transmitters SERIES CF Controllers SERIES CV Controllers SERIES CZR Power Switching Devices SERIES EHG Controllers SERIES EHG SL10 Controllers SERIES EHG SL10 Software SERIES F4 Process Controllers SERIES F4 Ramping Controllers SERIES LF Limits SERIES LV Limits SERV-RITE Wire Silver Series Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) Software Solid State Relays (SSR) SpecView HMI Software Page Number 386 41 80 357 211 283 88 61 191 94 81 345 388 305 323 389 305 130 328 90 353 97 98 188 353 135 283 384 143 146 277 274 336 255 251 380 267 261 302 299 151 347 371 339 379
WATLOW
409
Product Category Index

Product Category Temperature and Process Controllers Thermistors Thermocouples Thermocouple and Extension Wire Thermowells Transmitters True Surface Thermocouple (TST) XACTPAK Cable Page Number 257 109 33 153 125 143 92 193
410
WATLOW

Quantity and Weights: Products purchased and sold hereunder shall be those for which Buyer submits an Order which is accepted by Watlow. Watlows quantities shall govern unless proved to be in error. On Orders for Products carried in stock, Watlow will deliver the ordered quantity specified. However, in the manufacture of Products it is agreed that Watlow will be allowed production losses. Watlow shall have the right to manufacture, deliver and invoice for partial deliveries of Products as stated below: Quantity Ordered Delivery Variation 1-4 No variation 5-24 1 unit 25-74 2 units 75-99 3 units 100+ 3 percent SERV-RITE Insulated Wire and Cable 10 percent 10 percent XACTPAK Sheathed Wire Note: Watlow will deliver exact quantities on Products with a net price of $100.00 or more. If Buyer expressly requests no variation in delivered quantity of Products with a total net price under $100.00, a ten percent (10%) surcharge will be added to the net billing on the invoice for such Order. Delivery: F.O.B. Watlows Plant. Risk of loss shall pass to Buyer on delivery at the F.O.B. point. Watlow shall prepay freight, assure the shipment and select the means of transportation unless Buyer provides specific written instructions otherwise with Buyers order. Watlow shall not be bound to tender delivery of any quantities for which Buyer has not given shipping instructions. Watlow shall be entitled to designate from time to time the locations from which Buyer may receive or pick up Products. Payment Terms: Terms are net 30 days from date of invoice with approved credit. Prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. All quotations are valid for 30 days unless otherwise stated. Restocking Charges: Stock heaters, controls, sensors and accessories which have not been used or modified may be returned to the relevant Watlow Plant for a twenty percent (20%) restocking charge. For Watlows Hannibal Plant Products only, modified-stock Products may be returned if not permanently modified, for a minimum thirty percent (30%) restocking charge. All stock and modified-stock Products require Watlows prior authorization to be returned and must be returned within one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of delivery. Controls may not be returned if the packaging seal is broken. Non-stock (custom) heaters, controls, sensors and accessories are not returnable. Price Revision: Prices are subject to change without advance notice. If Watlow desires to revise the discounts, prices, points of delivery, service allowances or terms of payment but is restricted to any extent against so doing by reason of any governmental request, law, regulation, order or action, or if the discounts, prices, points of delivery, service allowances or terms of payment then in effect are altered by reason of governmental request, law, regulation, order or action, Watlow shall have the right (i) to terminate this Order by notice to Buyer, (ii) to suspend deliveries for the duration of such restriction or alteration or (iii) to have applied to this Order (as of the effective date of such restriction or alteration) any discounts, prices, points of delivery, service allowances or terms of payment governmentally acceptable. Any delivery suspended under this Section may be canceled without liability. Return Policy: Prior approval must be obtained from the relevant Watlow Plant to return any Product. Watlow will assign a return authorization number and record the reason for the return. Watlow will examine returned Product to determine the actual cause, if any, leading to Buyers return. If Product has a manufacturing defect, Watlow, in its sole discretion, may issue a credit for the returned Product or repair or replace with like Product. If returned Product is not subject to Watlows warranty, Buyer will be notified of the estimated cost of repair, if possible. Thereafter, Buyer must advise Watlow whether or not Buyer chooses to have Product repaired at Buyers expense. Order Changes: Buyer must notify Watlow in writing of requested changes in the quantity, drawings, designs or specifications for Products which are ordered but not yet in the process of manufacture. After receipt of such notice, Watlow will inform Buyer of any adjustments to be made in price, delivery schedules, etc. resulting from Buyers requested changes prior to incorporating requested changes into manufactured Products. Control Products require written notice of requested changes not less than sixty (60) days prior to last scheduled shipping date. Freight and Taxes: Prices do not include prepaid freight, federal, state or local taxes. Any increase in freight rates paid by Watlow on deliveries covered by this Order and hereafter becoming effective and any tax or governmental charge or increase in same (excluding any franchise or income tax or other tax or charge based on income) (i) increasing the cost to Watlow of producing, selling or delivering Products or of procuring Products used therein or, (ii) payable by Watlow because of the production, sale or delivery of Products, such as Sales Tax, Use Tax, Retailers Occupational Tax, Gross Receipts Tax, Value Added Tax, and Ways Fees may, at Watlows option, be added to the prices herein specified and be added to invoices. Engineering Charge: On complex Products, systems or control software modifications, an engineering charge shall be applied or included in the price of Prototypes. This charge is not subject to discounts. Tooling: All tooling and fixtures are the property of Watlow. Watlow will accept Buyers special tooling if sent freight prepaid. Watlow will maintain this tooling, exercising reasonable care, in order to produce Buyers Products. Permanent molds for aluminum cast-in and Polymer Products shall be the property and responsibility of Buyer. Cancellation Charges: There will be no cancellation charge for non-modified stock Products. Non-stock and modified-stock Products may be subject to a cancellation charge to be determined by Watlow depending upon the portion of Product completed at the time of such cancellation.
WATLOW
411

Excuse of Performance: (A) Deliveries may be suspended by either party in the event of: Act of God, war, riot, fire, explosion, accident, flood, sabotage; lack of adequate fuel, power, raw materials, labor, containers or transportation facilities; compliance with Governmental Requirements (as hereinafter defined); breakage or failure of machinery or apparatus; national defense requirements or any other event, whether or not of the class or kind enumerated herein, beyond the reasonable control of such party; or in the event of labor trouble, strike, lockout or injunction (provided that neither party shall be required to settle a labor dispute against its own best judgment); which event makes impracticable the manufacture, transportation, sale, purchase, acceptance, use or resale of Products or a material upon which the manufacture of Products is dependent. (B) If Watlow determines that its ability to supply the total demand for Products, or obtain any or a sufficient quantity of any material used directly or indirectly in the manufacture of Products, is hindered, limited or made impracticable, Watlow may allocate its available supply of Products or such material (without obligation to acquire other supplies of any such Products or material) among itself and its purchasers on such basis as Watlow determines to be equitable without liability for any failure of performance which may result therefrom. (C) Deliveries suspended or not made by reason of this Section shall be canceled without liability, but this agreement and/or Order shall otherwise remain unaffected. Prototypes: If Buyer orders and/or Watlow delivers a Product designated as a Prototype, no guarantees, warranties or representations as to fitness for a particular purpose or merchantability are made with respect to such Prototype. Buyer shall have the duty and sole responsibility to test a Prototype prior to acceptance and/or incorporation into end-use applications. Further, a production Product based on a Prototype design may differ in assembly methods and materials from the Prototype. Buyer, therefore, shall have the duty and sole responsibility for testing and acceptance of production Products which are based on Prototype designs. Warranty and Limitation of Liability: Watlow warrants its Products against defects in material and workmanship for at least one (1) year (three (3) years on some controls) from the date of delivery, provided such Product is properly applied, used and maintained. Refer to the express written warranty time period for each individual Product or contact the relevant Watlow plant for such warranty time period information. Watlow does not warrant any Product against damage from corrosion, contamination, misapplication, improper specification or wear and tear and operational conditions beyond Watlows control. The terms of this Warranty are the exclusive terms available to Buyer and to any other person or entity to whom Products are transferred during the period of this Warranty. No person has authority to bind Watlow to a representation or warranty other than this express Warranty. Watlow shall not be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the use of Products whether a claim for such damages is based upon warranty, contract, negligence or other cause of action. Should any Product fail while subject to this Warranty, such Product shall be repaired or a substitute Product shall be provided, at Watlows option, at no charge to Buyer or to any other person or entity to whom Product is transferred during the period of this Warranty. Watlow must be notified of the alleged failure of Product within thirty (30) days of such event and advanced authorization for repair or replacement must be obtained in writing from Watlow. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, AND ALL OTHER SUCH WARRANTIES ARE SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED. THE CORRECTION OF ANY DEFECT IN OR FAILURE OF PRODUCTS BY REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT TO THE EXTENT SET FORTH ABOVE, SHALL BE WATLOWS LIMIT OF LIABILITY AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY AND ALL LOSSES, DELAYS OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL WATLOW BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. WATLOW SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, AND BUYER AND ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY TO WHOM PRODUCTS ARE TRANSFERRED DURING THE PERIOD OF THIS WARRANTY ASSUMES RESPONSIBILITY FOR, ALL PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE RESULTING FROM OR RELATED TO THE HANDLING, POSSESSION OR USE OF PRODUCTS AND PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED AND SOLD BY WATLOW HEREUNDER. Miscellaneous: THE VALIDITY, INTERPRETATION AND PERFORMANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT AND/OR ORDER AND ANY DISPUTE CONNECTED HEREWITH SHALL BE GOVERNED AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MISSOURI. These Terms and Conditions constitute the full understanding of the parties, a complete allocation of risks between them and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms and conditions of their agreement and/or Order relating to the subject matter herein. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, no conditions, usage of trade, course of dealing or performance, understanding or agreement and/or Order purporting to modify, vary, explain or supplement the terms or conditions of this agreement and/or Order shall be binding unless hereafter made in writing and signed by the party to be bound, and no modification shall be effected by the acknowledgment or acceptance of any purchase order or shipping instruction forms containing terms or conditions at variance with or in addition to those set forth herein. No waiver by either party with respect to any breach or default or of any right or remedy and no course of dealing or performance shall be deemed to constitute a continuing waiver of any other breach or default or of any other right or remedy, unless such waiver be expressed in writing signed by the party to be bound. If any term, condition or provision of this agreement and/or Order or the application thereof is judicially or otherwise determined to be invalid or unenforceable, or if the parties mutually agree in writing to any revision of this agreement and/or Order, the remainder of this agreement and/or Order and the application thereof shall not be affected, and this agreement and/or Order shall otherwise remain in full force and effect.
082206
412
WATLOW
Notes
WATLOW
413
Notes
414
WATLOW
Notes
WATLOW
415
Notes
416
WATLOW

Sensor Esy Control Adores

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Sensor Esy Control Adores

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Table of Contents

Think Safety ........................................................18 Tolerances ...........................................................20 Lab Services .......................................................23

Temperature and Process ...........................257 EZ-ZONE RM ..........................................................259

Resistance Temperature Sensors .............97

Limits and Scanners .....................................283

Mineral Insulated Cable ...............................191

Terms and Conditions of Sale

Data Loggers ....................................................361

Control Panels .................................................393

Custom Designs..............................................399 Custom Designs ......................................................399

Product Selection Guide

Rigid Sheath with Threaded Fitting

Large Diameter Rigid Sheath

Product Selection Guide

Stainless Steel Shim

Low Profile Polyimide Peel and Stick

Product Selection Guide

Mini Plug or Jack Termination

Standard Plug or Jack Termination

Metal Transitions with Spring Strain Relief

For Use With Thermowells

Product Selection Guide

Base Metal Standard Thermocouple with Protection

Noble Metal Thermocouple Assemblies

Exotic Metal Sheath Plug or Jack Termination

Exotic Metal Sheath Metal Transitions

Product Selection Guide

Product Selection Guide

See page 0

Plug or Jack Termination

See page 03

See page 04

Connection Head/Optional Transmitter

See page 05

For Use With Thermowells

See page 06

See page 07

Product Selection Guide

See page 07

Cartridge with Flange

See page 07

See page 07

Open Air with Flange

See page 07

See page 07

Product Selection Guide

See page 3

Adjustable Spring Style

See page 4

Adjustable Armor Style

See page 4

Cartridge with Flange

See page 4

See page 4

Open Air with Flange

See page 4

See page 4

See page 7

Product Selection Guide

Over/Under Limit, Alarms

Profile - Ramping Controller

347 364 375

Product Selection Guide